Siprotec 4 Catalog en

Protection, control, measurement, and automation functions
SIPROTEC 4 – Devices
Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8 / 8.1
siemens.com/siprotec
Overview of Siemens Protection Catalogs
Documentation
Selection guide SIPROTEC

SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 4 Accessories Reyrolle
for SIPROTEC and Compact
Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalogs
Reyrolle Catalog
Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals
Overview of the Documentation
SIPROTEC 4 Catalog: Accessories Catalog:

This catalog describes the features of the device series This catalog describes the accesories for protection, power
SIPROTEC 4. quality and substation automation devices.
Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle: Reyrolle Catalogs:

The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of The Reyrolle catalogs describes the features such as scope of
the Siemens protection devices, and a device selection table. functions, hardware and application.
SIPROTEC Compact Catalog: Manuals:

The SIPROTEC Compact catalog describes the features of the The manuals describe, among others, the operation, installati-
SIPROTEC Compact series and presents the available devices on, the technical data, of the devices.
and their application possibilities.
SIPROTEC 5 Catalogs:
The catalog describes the features of the SIPROTEC 5 system
and device-specific features such as scope of functions, hard-
ware and application.
Contents
SIPROTEC 4 1. Product Selection
1/1 to 1/6 1
2. Overview / Applications
Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8 / 8.1
2/1 to 2/48 2
Updates Ed8.1:
• Cancellation due to phase out
3. Operating Programs
3
6MD61, 6MD63, 7SJ63 and 7UM61
• Cancellation SIPROTEC 4 Tutorial 3/1 to 3/8
• SIPROTEC 7SJ66 small updates
Invalid: Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8 and No. 7 4. Communication
4/1 to 4/12 4
5. Overcurrent Protection
5/1 to 5/114 5
6. Distance Protection
6/1 to 6/70 6
7. Line Differential Protection
7/1 to 7/56 7
8. Transformer Differential Protection
8/1 to 8/38 8
9. Busbar Differential Protection
9/1 to 9/18 9
10. Relays for Various Protection Applications
10/1 to 10/18 10
11. Generator Protection
11/1 to 11/72 11
12. Substation Automation
12/1 to 12/22 12
13. Appendix
13/1 to 13/22 13
The products and systems described in this catalog
are manufactured and sold according to a certified
management system (acc. to ISO 9001, ISO 14001
and BS OHSAS 18001).
Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8.1 1

Product Index
Type Description Page
DIGSI 4 Operating software for SIPROTEC 4 und Compact 3/3
IEC 61850 System Configurator Operating software for all IEC 61850 devices 3/5
2
SIGRA 4 Evaluation software for fault records 3/7
6MD66 High-voltage bay control unit 12/3
7SA522 Distance protection relay for transmission lines 6/39
7SA6 Distance protection relay for all voltage levels 6/3
7SD52/53 Multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay 7/25
7SD61 Differential protection relay for 2 line ends 7/3
7SJ61 Multifunction protection relay 5/3
7SJ62 Multifunction protection relay 5/25
7SJ64 Multifunction protection relay with synchronization 5/53
7SJ66 Multifunction protection relay with local control 5/87
7SS52 Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection 9/3
7UM62 Multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay 11/3
7UT6 Differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars 8/3
7VE6 Multifunction paralleling device 11/33
7VK61 Breaker management relay 10/3
7VU683 High Speed Busbar Transfer 11/53
2 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8.1

Function overview
Page
1
Relay Functions 1/2
Function overview
SIPROTEC 4 devices series
Device application Distance Line
1
protection differential
protection
7SD610
7SA522
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
7SD5
Type
ANSI Functions Abbr.
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole
3
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole
14 Locked rotor protection I> + V< – – – – – –
21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠(V,I) –
24 Overexcitation protection V/f – – – – – –
4 25
27
Synchrocheck, synchronizing function
Undervoltage protection
Sync
V<
–
27TN/59TN Stator ground fault 3rd harmonics V0<,>(3.Harm.) – – – – – –

Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection Q>/V< – –
5 32
37
Directional power supervision
Undercurrent, underpower
P<>, Q<>
I<, P< – –
38 Temperature supervision Θ> – –
6
40 Underexcitation protection 1/XD – – – – – –
46 Unbalanced-load protection I2> – – – – – –
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2>, I2/I1> – – – – – –
47 Phase-sequence-voltage supervision LA, LB, LC
7 47
48
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence system
Starting-time supervision
V>2
I2start – – – – – –
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t –
50/50N Definite time-overcurrent protection I>
8 SOFT
50Ns
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault
Sensitive ground-current protection INs> –
Intermittent ground fault protection Iie> – –
9
50EF End fault protection – – – – – –
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP
51/51N Inverse time-overcurrent protection IP, INp
50L Load-jam protection I>L – – – – – –
10 51C
51V
Cold load pickup
Voltage dependent overcurrent protection t=f(I)+V<
– – – – –
–
–
–
55 Power factor cosφ 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
59 Overvoltage protection V>
11 59N
59R, 27R
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system
Rate-of-voltage-change protection
V0>
dV/dt – – – – – –
60FL Fuse-Failure-Monitor
12
64 Sensitive ground-fault protection (machine) – – – – – –
66 Restart inhibit I2t – – – – – –
= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available
13 1) via CFC
More functions on page 1/4
You will find the whole function overview of the SIPROTEC devices at:
www.siemens.com/protection
14
15
1/2 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8
Function overview
Device application Generator Transformer Busbar Bay controller Breaker Synchroniz High Speed
1
and motor protection protection management ing Busbar
protection Transfer
7VU683
7UT612
7UT613
7UM62
6MD66
7UT63
7VK61
7SS52
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ64
7SJ66
7VE6
–
3
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
4
– – – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
– –
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
– – – – –
6
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – –
– –
– – –
–
–
–
– –
–
–
–
– 7
– – – – –
– –
– – –
–
–
–
– – – –
8
– – – – – – – – –
9
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
– – –
– – – – – – – – –
–
– –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10
– – – – – –
– – – – –
–
– –
–
– – –
–
–
–
– –
–
–
–
–
11
– – – – – – – –
12
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
Table continued on next page
13
14
15
Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8.1 1/3
Function overview
Device application Distance Line
1
protection differential
protection
7SD610
7SA522
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
7SD5
Type
ANSI Functions Abbr.
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, phase I>,IP ∠ (V,I) 1) 1) 1) 1) –
3
67N Directional time-overcurrent protection for ground-faults IN>, INP ∠ (V,I)
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or INs>,
isolated neutral –
INsP ∠ (V,I)
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection Iie dir> – – – – – –
4
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt –
74TC Trip-circuit supervision TCS
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt –
79 Automatic reclosing AR
5 81
81R
Frequency protection
Rate-of-frequency-change protection
f<, f>
df/dt – – – – – –
Vector-jump protection ∆φU> – – – – – –
85 Teleprotection
6 86
87
Lockout
Differential protection ΔI – – – –
87N Differential ground-fault protection ΔIN
7
Broken-wire detection for differential protection – – – –
FL Fault locator FL
Further Functions
Measured values
8 Switching-statistic counters
Logic editor
CFC switching sequences for control applications – – – –
Inrush-current detection
9 External trip initiation

High Speed busbar transfer function – – – – – –
Fault recording of analog and binary signals
10
Monitoring and supervision
Protection interface, serial
No. Setting groups 4 4 4 4 4 4
Changeover of setting group
11 Circuit breaker test
= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available
12
1) via CFC
You will find the whole function overview of the SIPROTEC devices at:
13
14
15
Function overview
Device application Generator Transformer Busbar Bay controller Breaker Synchroniz High Speed
1
and motor protection protection management ing Busbar
protection Transfer
7VU683
7UT612
7UT613
7UM62
6MD66
7UT63
7VK61
7SS52
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ64
7SJ66
7VE6
– – – – – – – – –
3
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
4
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – –
–
–
–
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
– – – – – – – – – – –
6
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – –
7
– – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
– –
8
– – – – –
9
– –
–
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – 10
4 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 4
–
– – – – – – – – – – – –
11
12
13
14
15
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview / Applications
Page
SIPROTEC Device Series 2/3
Typical protection schemes 2/16

2
Protection coordination 2/37
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
SIPROTEC Device Series
Solutions for today’s and future power supply systems –

for more than 100 years
SIPROTEC has established itself on the energy market for 1
decades as a powerful and complete system family of numerical
protection relays and bay controllers from Siemens.
SIPROTEC protection relays from Siemens can be consistently
used throughout all applications in medium and high voltage.
2
With SIPROTEC, you have their systems firmly and safely under
control, and have the basis to implement cost-efficient solutions
for all duties in modern, intelligent and “smart” grids. Users can
combine the units of the different SIPROTEC device series at 3
will for solving manifold duties – because SIPROTEC stands for
continuity, openness and future-proof design.
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the field of protection
systems for more than 100 years, Siemens helps you to design 4
their grids in an intelligent, ecological, reliable and efficient way,
and to operate them economically. As a pioneer, Siemens has
decisively influenced the development of numerical protection
systems (Fig. 2/2). The first application went into operation in
Fig. 2/1 SIPROTEC Relay Family
5
Würzburg, Germany, in 1977. Consistent integration of protec-
tion and control functions for all SIPROTEC devices was the How can system operators benefit from this experience?
innovation step in the 90ies. After release of the communication • Proven and complete applications
standard IEC 61850 in the year 2004, Siemens was the first
manufacturer worldwide to put a system with this communica-
• Easy integration into your system 6
tion standard into operation. In the meantime we have delivered • Highest quality of hardware and functionality
more than 500,000 devices with IEC 61850 included. • Excellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
Many users have approved SIPROTEC protection devices for use • Easy data exchange between applications 7
in their power systems. The devices have also been certified by • Extraordinary consistency between product- and system-
independent test institutes and universities (KEMA, EPRI, LOYD, engineering
UR Laboratories). • Reduced complexity by easy operation
• Siemens as a reliable, worldwide operating partner. 8
Information about SIPROTEC 5 and SIPROTEC Compact product
families can be found in the related catalogs or at:
www.siemens.com/siprotec
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 2/2 SIPROTEC – Pioneer over generations

15
Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8 2/3
Overview
SIPROTEC Compact – Maximum protection-minimum space
1 Perfect protection, smallest space reliable and flexible protection

for energy distribution and industrial systems with minimum
space requirements. The devices of the SIPROTEC Compact
family offer an extensive variety of functions in a compact and
thus space-saving ¹⁄₆ x 19" housing. The devices can be used as
2 main protection in medium-voltage applications or as back-up
protection in high-voltage systems.
SIPROTEC Compact provides suitable devices for many applica-
tions in energy distribution, such as the protection of feeders,
3 lines or motors. Moreover, it also performs tasks such as system
decoupling, load shedding, load restoration, as well as voltage
and frequency protection.
4 The SIPROTEC Compact series is based on millions of operational

experience with SIPROTEC 4 and a further-developed, compact
hardware, in which many customer suggestions were integrated.
This offers maximum reliability combined with excellent func-
tionality and flexibility.
5 • Simple installation by means of pluggable current and voltage
Fig. 2/3 SIPROTEC Compact
terminal blocks
• Thresholds adjustable via software (3 stages guarantee a safe
6 and reliable recording of input signals)

• Easy adjustment of secondary current transformer values
(1 A/5 A) to primary transformers via DIGSI 4
• Quick operations at the device by means of 9 freely program-
7 mable function keys
• Clear overview with six-line display
• Easy service due to buffer battery replaceable at the front side
• Use of standard cables via USB port at the front
8 • Integration in the communication network by means of two
further communication interfaces
• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
9 electrical Ethernet rings

• Ethernet redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for highest
availability
• Reduction of wiring between devices by means of cross-
10 communication via Ethernet (IEC 61850 GOOSE)
• Time synchronization to the millisecond via Ethernet with Fig. 2/4 SIPROTEC Compact – rear view
SNTP for targeted fault evaluation
• Adjustable to the protection requirements by means of
11 “flexible protection functions”
• Comfortable engineering and evaluation via DIGSI 4.
12
13
14
15 Fig. 2/5 Feeder protection relay SIPROTEC with HMI

Overview
SIPROTEC 5 – the new benchmark for protection,

automation and monitoring
The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on the long field experience of 1
the SIPROTEC device series, and has been especially designed
for the new requirements of modern high-voltage systems.
For this purpose, SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive func-
tionalities and device types. With the holistic and consistent
engineering tool DIGSI 5, a solution has also been provided for
2
the increasingly complex processes, from the design via the
engineering phase up to the test and operation phase.
Thanks to the high modularity of hardware and software, 3
the functionality of the device types can be tailored to the
requested application and adjusted to the ever changing
requirements throughout the entire lifecycle.
In addition to the reliable and selective protection and the 4
complete automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive
database for operation and monitoring of modern power sup-
ply systems. Synchrophasors (PMU), power quality data and
extensive operational equipment data are part of the scope of
Fig. 2/6 SIPROTEC 5 – modular hardware
5
supply.
• Powerful protection functions guarantee the safety of the
system operator's equipment and employees
• Individually configurable devices save money on initial 6
investment as well as storage of spare parts, maintenance,
expansion and adjustment of your equipment
• Arc protection, detection of transient ground faults, and
process bus can easily be integrated and retrofitted 7
• Clear and easy-to-use of devices and software thanks to
user-friendly design
• Increase of reliability and quality of the engineering process
• High reliability due to consequent implementation of safety
8
and security
• Powerful communication components guarantee safe and
effective solutions
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
9
• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
electrical Ethernet rings
Fig. 2/7 SIPROTEC 5 – rear view
10
availability
• Efficient operating concepts by flexible engineering of
IEC 61850 Edition 2
• Comprehensive database for monitoring of modern power 11
grids
• Optimal smart automation platform for transmission grids
based on integrated synchrophasor measurement units
(PMU) and power quality functions. 12
13
14
Fig. 2/8 Application in the high-voltage system

15
Overview
SIPROTEC 4 – the proven, reliable and future-proof

protection for all applications
1 SIPROTEC 4 represents a worldwide successful and proven device
series with more than 1 million devices in field use.
Due to the homogenous system platform, the unique engineer-
2 ing program DIGSI 4 and the great field experience, the
SIPROTEC 4 device family has gained the highest appreciation
of users all over the world. Today, SIPROTEC 4 is considered
the standard for numerical protection systems in all fields of
application.
3 SIPROTEC 4 provides suitable devices for all applications from
power generation and transmission up to distribution and
industrial systems.
4 SIPROTEC 4 is a milestone in protection systems. The SIPROTEC 4
device series implements the integration of protection, control,
measuring and automation functions optimally in one device. In
many fields of application, all tasks of the secondary systems can
5 be performed with one single device. The open and future-proof
concept of SIPROTEC 4 has been ensured for the entire device Fig. 2/9 SIPROTEC 4
series with the implementation of IEC 61850.
• Proven protection functions guarantee the safety of the
6 systems operator's equipment and employees
• Comfortable engineering and evaluation via DIGSI 4
• Simple creation of automation solutions by means of the
integrated CFC
7 • Targeted and easy operation of devices and software thanks to
user-friendly design
• Powerful communication components guarantee safe and
effective solutions
8 • Maximum experience worldwide in the use of SIPROTEC 4 and
in the implementation of IEC 61850 projects
• Future-proof due to exchangeable communication interfaces
9 and integrated CFC.

• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical Ethernet
rings
10 availability.
Fig. 2/10 SIPROTEC 4 rear view
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 2/11 SIPROTEC 4 in power plant application

Overview
To fulfill vital protection redundancy requirements, only those Measuring included

functions that are interdependent and directly associated with
each other are integrated into the same unit. For backup protec-
tion, one or more additional units should be provided.
For many applications, the accuracy of the protection current
transformer is sufficient for operational measuring. The addi- 1
tional measuring current transformer was required to protect
All relays can stand fully alone. Thus, the traditional protection the measuring instruments under short-circuit conditions. Due
principle of separate main and backup protection as well as the to the low thermal withstand capability of the measuring instru-
external connection to the switchyard remain unchanged. ments, they could not be connected to the protection current
transformer. Consequently, additional measuring core current
2
“One feeder, one relay” concept transformers and measuring instruments are now only necessary
Analog protection schemes have been engineered and where high accuracy is required, e.g., for revenue metering.
assembled from individual relays. Interwiring between these
Corrective rather than preventive maintenance
3
relays and scheme testing has been carried out manually in the
workshop. Numerical relays monitor their own hardware and software.
Exhaustive self-monitoring and failure diagnostic routines are
Data sharing now allows for the integration of several protection
and protection-related tasks into one single numerical relay.
not restricted to the protection relay itself but are methodically
carried through from current transformer circuits to tripping
4
Only a few external devices may be required for completion of
relay coils.
the total scheme. This has significantly lowered the costs of
engineering, assembly, panel wiring, testing and commissioning. Equipment failures and faults in the current transformer circuits
Scheme failure probability has also been lowered. are immediately reported and the protection relay is blocked. 5
Engineering has moved from schematic diagrams toward a Thus, service personnel are now able to correct the failure upon
parameter definition procedure. The powerful user-definable occurrence, resulting in a significantly upgraded availability of
logic of SIPROTEC 4 allows flexible customized design for protec- the protection system.
tion, control and measurement. 6
8
52
9
21 67N FL 79 25 SM ER FR BM
10
85
SIPROTEC Line protection
Serial link to station – or personal computer 11

kA, ER
to remote line end kV,
Hz,
MW,
FR
SM
12
21 Distance protection MVAr,
67N Directional ground-fault protection MVA BM
Load monitor
FL Distance-to-fault locator
79
25
Auto-reclosure
Synchrocheck
Fault report
13
Fault record
85 Carrier interface (teleprotection)
SM Self-monitoring Relay monitor
ER Event recording
FR
BM
Fault recording
Breaker monitor
Breaker monitor
Supervisory control
14
Fig. 2/12 Numerical relays offer increased information availability
15
Overview
Adaptive relaying
1000 Parameter
1 Numerical relays now offer reliable, convenient and comprehen-
sive matching to changing conditions. Matching may be initiated 1000
1100
.
Parameter
.
Line data D
either by the relay’s own intelligence or from other systems via 1100 Line
1200 data O/C C Phase settings
1000 .
Parameter .
contacts or serial telegrams. Modern numerical relays contain a . . B
1100 Line data
1200 O/C Phase settings
number of parameter sets that can be pretested during commis- . . 1500 O/C Earth settings
2 sioning of the scheme. One set is normally operative. Transfer to
the other sets can be controlled via binary inputs or a serial data
1000
1100
.
.
Parameter
.
Line
.
data
1200
. A
O/C
.
Phase
1500
.
.
settings
O/C
2800Earth settings
Fault recording
. . .
1200 O/C Phase settings .
link (Fig. 2/13). . 1500 O/C Earth settings
2800 Fault
3900recording
. . . Breaker failure
. .
There are a number of applications for which multiple setting 1500 O/C Earth settings
3 groups can upgrade the scheme performance, for example:
.
.
2800
2800
.
.
Fault
Fault
recording
3900recording
Breaker failure
. 3900 Breaker failure

• For use as a voltage-dependent control of overcurrent-time .
relay pickup values to overcome alternator fault current 3900 Breaker failure
decrement to below normal load current when the automatic
4 voltage regulator (AVR) is not in automatic operation
Fig. 2/13 Alternate parameter groups
• For maintaining short operation times with lower fault
currents, e.g., automatic change of settings if one supply
transformer is taken out of service
5 • For “switch-onto-fault” protection to provide shorter time
settings when energizing a circuit after maintenance so that
normal settings can be restored automatically after a time
delay
6 • For auto-reclosure programs, that is, instantaneous operation
for first trip and delayed operation after unsuccessful reclosure
• For cold load pickup problems where high starting currents
7 may cause relay operation

• For “ring open” or “ring closed” operation.
Implemented functions
8 SIPROTEC relays are available with a variety of protective

functions (please refer to Fig. 2/15). The high processing power
of modern numerical units allows further integration of non-
protective add-on functions.
9 The question as to whether separate or combined relays should

be used for protection and control cannot be unambiguously
answered. In transmission-type substations, separation into
independent hardware units is still preferred, whereas a trend Fig. 2/14 Left: switchgear with numerical relay (7SJ62) and traditional
control; right: switchgear with combined protection and
10 toward higher function integration can be observed on the
distribution level. Here, the use of combined feeder / line relays
control relay (7SJ64)
for protection, monitoring and control is becoming more com-

mon (Fig. 2/14).
11 Relays with protection functions only and relays with combined

protection and control functions are being offered. SIPROTEC 4
relays offer combined protection and control functions.
SIPROTEC 4 relays support the “one relay one feeder” principle,
12 and thus contribute to a considerable reduction in space and

wiring requirements.
With the well-proven SIPROTEC 4 family, Siemens supports both
stand-alone and combined solutions on the basis of a single
13 hardware and software platform. The user can decide within
wide limits on the configuration of the control and protection,
and the reliability of the protection functions (Fig. 2/15).
The following solutions are available within one relay family:
14 • Separate control and protection relays
• Feeder protection and remote control of the line circuit-breaker
via the serial communication link
15 • Combined relays for protection, monitoring and control.

Overview
52
Busbar
7SJ61/62/63/64 7SJ62/63/64 2) 1
Local/remote control CFC logic Metering values
Command/feedback 25 Synchronization
Set points,
I, V, Watts,
Trip circuit
supervision
74TC Lockout 86
mean values,
Min/Max-Log Vars, p.f., f V, f, P
P<>
Q<> p.f. df/dt
2
Motor 33 Communication RTD1) box Energy meter: 32 55 81R
control modules interface calculated and/or by impulses
f<> V> V<
HMI RS232/485/FO/
Ethernet
Fault
recording
Motor protection
Bearing Starting Fault
81O/U 59 27
3
temp. I< time locator Directional
IEC60870-5-103
IEC61850 38 37 48 21FL phase-sequence
47 monitoring
Profibus DP
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
14 Locked
rotor
66/86
Restart
inhibit
I dir.>> I E dir.>>
I dir.> I E dir.>
Ipdir. I Epdir.
4
67 67N
I E >,
I>> I>, Ip I E >> I Ep I2 > >
50 51 50N 51N 46 49
Inrush
restraint
Interm.
earth flt. 50BF
Dir. sensitive
5
Breaker failure ground-fault detection
protection
I EE>>
I E >, High-impedance Auto- I EE> VE>
I E >>
50N
I Ep
51N
restricted ground-fault 79 reclosure
87N 67Ns
I EEp
64 6
1) RTD = resistance temperature detector 2) VT connection for 7SJ62/63/64 only
Fig. 2/15 SIPROTEC 4 relays 7SJ61 / 62 / 63, 64 implemented functions

7
Terminals: Standard relay version with screw-type terminals Mechanical Design
8
Current terminals SIPROTEC 4 relays are available in ⅓ to of 19” wide housings
Connection Wmax =12 mm with a standard height of 243 mm. Their size is compatible with
Ring cable lugs d1 = 5 mm that of other device series. Therefore, compatible exchange is
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2 (AWG 13 – 11)
always possible (Fig. 2/16 to Fig. 2/18). 9
Direct connection Solid conductor, flexible lead, All wires (cables) are connected at the rear side of the relay
connector sleeve with or without ring cable lugs. A special relay version with a
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2 (AWG 13 – 11) detached cable-connected operator panel (Fig. 2/19) is also
Voltage terminals
available. It allows, for example, the installation of the relay 10
itself in the low-voltage compartment, and of the operator panel
Connection Wmax =10 mm separately in the door of the switchgear.
Ring cable lugs d1 = 4 mm
Wire size
Direct connection
1.0 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 17 – 13)
Solid conductor, flexible lead,
11
connector sleeve
Wire size 0.5 – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 20 – 13)
Some relays are alternatively available with plug-in voltage terminals
12
Current terminals
Screw type (see standard version)
Voltage terminals 13
2-pin or 3-pin connectors
Wire size 0.5 – 1.0 mm2
0.75 – 1.5 mm2
1.0 – 2.5 mm2
14
15
Overview
2
3

Fig. 2/16 of 19” housing
4

5 On the backlit LCD display, process and device information can

be displayed as text.
Freely assignable LEDs are used to display process or device
information. The LEDs can be labeled according to user
6 requirements. An LED reset key resets the LEDs and can be used
for LED testing.
Keys for navigation
RS232 operator interface (for DIGSI)
4 configurable function keys permit the user to execute
7
frequently used actions simply and fast.
Numerical keys
Fig. 2/17 ½ of 19” housing Fig. 2/18 ⅓ of 19” housing
Fig. 2/20 Local operation: All operator actions can be executed and
8 information displayed via an integrated user interface. Two
alternatives for this interface are available.
9
10
11

Fig. 2/19 SIPROTEC 4 combined protection, control and monitoring
relay with detached operator panel
12
13
Process and relay information can be displayed on the large
illuminated LC display either graphically in the form of a mimic
diagram or as text in various lists.
14 The keys mainly used for control of the switchgear are located
on the “control axis” directly below the display.
Two key-operated switches ensure rapid and reliable changeover
between “local“ and “remote“ control, and between “interlocked“
and “non-interlocked“ operation.
15 Fig. 2/21 Additional features of the interface with graphic display

Overview
Apart from the relay-specific protection functions, the

SIPROTEC 4 units have a multitude of additional functions that
• provide the user with information for the evaluation of faults 1
• facilitate adaptation to customer-specific application
• facilitate monitoring and control of customer installations.
Operational measured values 2

The large scope of measured and limit values permits improved
power system management as well as simplified commissioning.
The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current and
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and
3
reactive power. The following functions are available depending
on the relay type
• Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN, IEE (67Ns) 4
• Voltages VL1,VL2, VL3, VL1-L2,VL2-L3, VL3-L1
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0; V1, V2, 3V0
• Power Watts, Vars, VA / P, Q, S
• Power factor p.f. (cos ϕ)
5
• Frequency
• Energy ± kWh ± kVarh, forward and reverse power flow Fig. 2/22 Operational measured values
• Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage 6
values
• Operating hours counter
• Mean operating temperature of overload function
• Limit value monitoring
7
Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indication.
• Zero suppression
In a certain range of very low measured values, the value is set
8
to zero to suppress interference.
Metered values (some types)

For internal metering, the unit can calculate energy metered
9
values from the measured current and voltage values. If an
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, some
SIPROTEC 4 types can obtain and process metering pulses via an
indication input. 10
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made
between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy.
11
Operational indications and fault indications with time
stamp
The SIPROTEC 4 units provide extensive data for fault analysis as
well as control. All indications listed here are stored, even if the 12
power supply is disconnected.
• Fault event log
The last eight network faults are stored in the unit. All fault
recordings are time-stamped with a resolution of 1 ms. 13
• Operational indications
All indications that are not directly associated with a fault
(e.g., operating or switching actions) are stored in the status
indication buffer. The time resolution is 1 ms (Fig. 2/22, Fig. 14
2/23). Fig. 2/23 Fault event log on graphical display of the device
15
Overview
Display editor Reliable battery monitoring
1 A display editor is available to design the display on SIPROTEC 4

units with graphic display. The predefined symbol sets can be
The battery provided is used to back up the clock, the switching
statistics, the status and fault indications, and the fault record-
expanded to suit the user. The drawing of a single-line diagram ing in the event of a power supply failure. Its function is checked
is extremely simple. Load monitoring values (analog values) by the processor at regular intervals. If the capacity of the
and any texts or symbols can be placed on the display where battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated. Regular
2 required. replacement is therefore not necessary.
Four predefined setting groups for adapting relay settings All setting parameters are stored in the Flash EPROM and are
not lost if the power supply or battery fails. The SIPROTEC 4 unit
The settings of the relays can be adapted quickly to suit changing remains fully functional.
3 network configurations. The relays include four setting groups
that can be predefined during commissioning or even changed Commissioning support
remotely via a DIGSI 4 modem link. The setting groups can be
Special attention has been paid to commissioning. All binary
activated via binary inputs, via DIGSI 4 (local or remote), via the
4 integrated keypad or via the serial substation control interface.
inputs and output contacts can be displayed and activated
directly. This can significantly simplify the wiring check for the
Fault recording up to five or more seconds user. Test telegrams to a substation control system can be initi-
ated by the user as well.
The sampled values for phase currents, earth (ground) currents,
5 line and zero-sequence currents are registered in a fault record.
The record can be started using a binary input, on pickup or
CFC: Programming logic
With the help of the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) graphic
when a trip command occurs. Up to eight fault records may be
tool, interlocking schemes and switching sequences can be
stored. For test purposes, it is possible to start fault recording
configured simply via drag and drop of logic symbols; no special
6 via DIGSI 4. If the storage capacity is exceeded, the oldest fault
record in each case is overwritten.
knowledge of programming is required. Logical elements, such
as AND, OR, flip-flops and timer elements are available. The
For protection functions with long delay times in generator pro- user can also generate user-defined annunciations and logical
tection, the RMS value recording is available. Storage of relevant combinations of internal or external signals.
7 calculated variables (V1, VE, I1, I2, IEE, P, Q, f-fn) takes place at
increments of one cycle. The total time is 80 s. Communication interfaces
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been
Time synchronization
placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization
8 A battery-backed clock is a standard component and can be
synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF77, IRIG B via
of standards commonly used in energy automation. The design
of the communication modules permits interchangeability on
satellite receiver), binary input, system interface or SCADA the one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for
(e.g., SICAM). A date and time is assigned to every indication. future standards.
9 Selectable function keys Local PC interface

Four function keys can be assigned to permit the user to perform The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
frequently recurring actions very quickly and simply. quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
10 Typical applications are, for example, to display the list of

operating indications or to perform automatic functions such
advantage is the use of the DIGSI 4 operating program during
commissioning.
as “switching of circuit-breaker”.
11 Continuous self-monitoring
The hardware and software are continuously monitored. If
abnormal conditions are detected, the unit immediately signals.
In this way, a great degree of safety, reliability and availability is
12 achieved.
13
14
15
Overview
Retrofitting: Communication modules

It is possible to supply the relays directly with two communica-
tion modules for the service and substation control interfaces, 1
or to retrofit the communication modules at a later stage.
The modules are mounted on the rear side of the relay.
As a standard, the time synchronization interface is always
supplied. 2
The communication modules are available for the entire
SIPROTEC 4 relay range. Depending on the relay type, the
following protocols are available: IEC 60870-5-103,
PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET I/O, MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0 and Ether-

3
net with IEC 61850. No external protocol converter is required.
With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed
on the requirements in energy automation:
• Every data item is time-stamped at the source, that is, where
4

it originates.
• The communication system automatically handles the
transfer of large data blocks (e.g., fault records or parameter
data files). The user can apply these features without any
5
additional programming effort.
• For reliable execution of a command, the relevant signal is
first acknowledged in the unit involved. When the command
has been enabled and executed, a check-back indication The following interfaces can be applied: 6
is issued. The actual conditions are checked at every
command-handling step. Whenever they are not satisfactory, Service interface (optional)
controlled interruption is possible. Several protection relays can be centrally operated with
DIGSI 4, e.g., via a star coupler or RS485 bus. On connection of 7
a modem, remote control is possible. This provides advantages
in fault clearance, particularly in unmanned power stations.
(Alternatively, the external temperature monitoring box can be
connected to this interface.) 8
System interface (optional)
This is used to carry out communication with a control system
and supports, depending on the module connected, a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs.
9
Time synchronization interface
A synchronization signal (DCF 77, IRIG B via satellite receiver)
may be connected to this input if no time synchronization is 10
executed on the system interface. This offers a high-precision
Fig. 2/24 Protection relay Fig. 2/25 Communication
time tagging.
module, optical
Fig. 2/28 Rear view with wiring, terminal safety cover and serial 11
interfaces
12
Fig. 2/26 Communication Fig. 2/27 Communication 13

module RS232,RS485 module, optical ring
14
15
Overview
Safe bus architecture Substation automation system

• Fiber-optic double ring circuit via Ethernet
1 The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electro- Option: Control
magnetic interference. Upon failure of a section between DIGSI SICAM center
two units, the communication system continues to operate PAS
without interruption. If a unit were to fail, there is no effect
2 on the communication with the rest of the system
(Fig. 2/29).
• RS485 bus switch
With this data transmission via copper wires, electro-
3 magnetic interference is largely eliminated by the use
of twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the
remaining system continues to operate without any faults
(Fig. 2/30).
4 • Star structure
The relays are connected with a fiber-optic cable with a star
structure to the control unit. The failure of one relay / con-
nection does not affect the others (Fig. 2/31).
5 Depending on the relay type, the following protocols are

available:
• IEC 61850 protocol Fig. 2/29 Ring bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
Since 2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the IEC 61850
6 worldwide standard for protection and control systems used

by power supply corporations. Siemens is the first manu-
facturer to support this standard. By means of this protocol, Substation
information can also be exchanged directly between control system
7 feeder units so as to set up simple masterless systems for
feeder and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI.
• IEC 60870-5-103
8 IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol

for efficient communication between the protection relays
and a substation control system. Specific extensions that
are published by Siemens can be used.
9 • PROFIBUS DP
For connection to a SIMATIC PLC, the PROFIBUS DP protocol
is recommended. With the PROFIBUS DP, the protection
relay can be directly connected to a SIMATIC S5 / S7. The
transferred data are fault data, measured values and control
10 commands. Fig. 2/30 PROFIBUS: Electrical RS485 bus wiring
11 Substation
control system
12
13
14
Fig. 2/31 IEC 60870-5-103: Star structure with fiber-optic cables
15
Overview
MODBUS RTU
MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is
used in numerous automation solutions. 1
DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol, version 3) is a
messaging-based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units 2
are fully Level 1 and Level 2-compliant with DNP 3.0, which is
supported by a number of protection unit manufacturers.
Control 3
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also
support all control and monitoring functions required for operat-
ing medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. The main
application is reliable control of switching and other processes. 4
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the relay
via binary inputs. Fig. 2/32 Protection engineer at work
Therefore, it is possible to detect and indicate both the OPEN and 5

CLOSED positions or a faulty or intermediate breaker position. Switching authority
The switchgear can be controlled via:
The following hierarchy of switching authority is applicable:
• Integrated operator panel
• Binary inputs
LOCAL, DIGSI 4 PC program, REMOTE. The switching authority is
determined according to parameters or by DIGSI 4. If the LOCAL
6
• Substation control system mode is selected, only local switching operations are possible.
• DIGSI 4 Every switching operation and change of breaker position is
Automation
stored in the status indication memory with detailed information
and time tag.
7
With the integrated logic, the user can set specific functions for Command processing
the automation of the switchgear or substation by means of a
graphic interface (CFC). Functions are activated by means of
function keys, binary inputs or via the communication interface.
The SIPROTEC 4 protection relays offer all functions required for
command processing, including the processing of single and
8
double commands, with or without feedback, and sophisticated
monitoring. Control actions using functions, such as runtime
monitoring and automatic command termination after output
check of the external process, are also provided by the relays. 9
Typical applications are:
• Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common
or 2 trip contacts
• User-definable feeder interlocking 10
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations,
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors (isolators)
and grounding switches
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarms by
11
logical combination of existing information (Fig. 2/32).
The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices are
monitored by feedback signals. These indication inputs are
logically assigned to the corresponding command outputs.
12
The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indication
changes as a consequence of a switching operation or due
to a spontaneous change of state.
13
Indication derivation
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed.
The volume of information to the system interface can thus
14
be reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
15
Overview
Typical protection schemes

Infeed
1 1. Cables and overhead lines Transformer
protection
see fig. 2/49
Radial systems
2 Notes: A
1) Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) only with overhead lines. B I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t ARC
2) Negative sequence overcurrent protection 46 as sensitive Further 51 51N 46 79
feeders
3 backup protection against asymmetrical faults.
General notes:
7SJ80 *) 2) 1)
• The relay at the far end (D) is set with the shortest operating C I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t
time. Relays further upstream have to be time-graded against 51 51N 46
4 the next downstream relay in steps of about 0.3 s.
7SJ80 *)
• Inverse time or definite time can be selected according to the

following criteria: Load
– Definite time: I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t

5 Source impedance is large compared to the line impedance,
that is, there is small current variation between near and far
D
51 51N 46
end faults. 7SJ80 *)

– Inverse time: Load Load
6 Longer lines, where the fault current is much less at the far
end of the line than at the local end. *) Alternatives: 7SJ82, 7SJ66
– Strong or extreme inverse-time:
Lines where the line impedance is large compared to the
7 source impedance (high difference for close-in and remote
faults), or lines where coordination with fuses or reclosers is
Fig. 2/33 Radial systems
necessary. Steeper characteristics also provide higher stabil-

ity on service restoration (cold load pickup and transformer
8 inrush currents).
Ring-main circuit
9 General notes: Infeed

Transformer
• Operating time of overcurrent relays to be coordinated with protection
downstream fuses of load transformers (preferably with strong see fig. 2/52
52 52
inverse-time characteristic with about 0.2 s grading-time
10 delay)
• Thermal overload protection for the cables (option) 52 52
• Negative sequence overcurrent protection (46) as sensitive 7SJ80 *) 7SJ80 *)
protection against asymmetrical faults (option). I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t > I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t >
11 51 51N 46 49 51 51N 46 49
12
13
14 *) Alternatives:
7SJ82, 7SJ66
Fig. 2/34 Ring-main circuit
15
Overview
Switch-onto-fault protection
If switched onto a fault, instantaneous tripping can be effected.
If the internal control function is used (local, via binary input 52
1
or via serial interface), the manual closing function is available Busbar
without any additional wiring. If the control switch is connected
TRIP (high-speed dead fault clearance) (511)
to a circuit-breaker bypassing the internal control function,
manual detection using a binary input is implemented. 52 52 52
I>>, I>>>
2
Feeder earthed 50
&
Typical feeder
Manual close
(356 > m close) 7SJx, 7SAx 3
Fig. 2/35 Switch-onto-fault protection
4
Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)
Substation A Substation B Substation C Substation D
Cross-coupling is used for selective protection of sections fed Bus 52 52 Bus 52 52 Bus 52 52 Bus
from two sources with instantaneous tripping, that is, without
the disadvantage of time coordination. The directional compari-
7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/
5
son protection is suitable if the distances between the protection 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64
stations are not significant and pilot wires are available for signal 50 50 50 50 50 50
transmission. In addition to the directional comparison protec-
tion, the directional coordinated overcurrent-time protection is 52 6
Blocking bus
used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in a
closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission 50 7SJ80
line is detected. Pick-
up
52 7
Blocking signal
Non-directional
50 7SJ80 50 fault detection
Pick- Direction
up of fault (67)
8
Fig. 2/36 Directional comparison protection
Distribution feeder with reclosers

General notes:
Infeed
9
• The feeder relay operating characteristics, delay times and
auto-reclosure cycles must be carefully coordinated with
downstream reclosers, sectionalizers and fuses.
The 50 / 50N instantaneous zone is normally set to reach out to
10
the first main feeder sectionalizing point. It has to ensure fast 52 52
clearing of close-in faults and prevent blowing of fuses in this I>>, I E >>, I2 >, t 7SJ61
area (“fuse saving”). Fast auto-reclosure is initiated in this case.
Further time-delayed tripping and reclosure steps (normally
I>, t
50/51 50N/51N
I E >, t
46
7SJ80
11
two or three) have to be graded against the recloser.
• The overcurrent relay should automatically switch over to less
sensitive characteristics after long breaker interruption times
in order to enable overriding of subsequent cold load pickup
79 Auto-
reclose 12
and transformer inrush currents. Recloser Further
feeders
Sectionalizers
13
Fuses
14
Fig. 2/37 Distribution feeder with reclosers
15
Overview
3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)

52 Elements can Elements Performs
1 Auto-reclosure (AR) enables 3-phase auto-reclosing of a feeder
that has previously been disconnected by overcurrent protection.
be blocked are slower
than the
reclosure
of feeder
fuse
SIPROTEC 7SJ61 allows up to nine reclosing shots. The first four CLOSE
52 52 (2851)
dead times can be set individually. Reclosing can be blocked or
2 initiated by a binary input or internally. After the first trip in a
reclosing sequence, the high-set instantaneous elements (I>>>, TRIP
(511)
I>>, IE>>) can be blocked. This is used for fuse-saving applications
7SJ61*)
and other similar transient schemes using simple overcurrent 50 51
relays instead of fuses. The low-set definite-time (I>, IE>) and the
3 inverse-time (Ip, IEp) overcurrent elements remain operative during
50N 51N
AR
79
the entire sequence.
4
52 Fuse opens on
sucessful reclosure
5 Circuit-breaker opens on
unsucessful reclosure
51
6 *) Alternatives:
7SJ62/63/64/66, 7SJ80/82/85
Fig. 2/38 3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)

7
Parallel feeder circuit
52
Infeed
General notes:
8 • The preferred application of this circuit is in the reliable supply 52 52
of important consumers without significant infeed from the I>, t I E >, t > I2 >, t 7SJ61
load side. 7SJ80
51 51N 49 46
• The 67 / 67N directional overcurrent protection trips instan- 7SJ82
9 taneously for faults on the protected line. This saves one O H line or O H line or Protection
time-grading interval for the overcurrent relays at the infeed. cable 1 cable 2 same as
line or cable 1
• The 51 / 51N overcurrent relay functions must be time-graded 7SJ62
67 67N 51 51N
against the relays located upstream. 7SJ80
10 52
7SJ82
52
52
11 52 52
12 Load Load
Fig. 2/39 Parallel feeder circuit
13
14
15
Overview
Reverse-power monitoring at double infeed

Infeed A Infeed B
If a busbar is fed from two parallel infeeds and a fault occurs
on one of them, only the faulty infeed should be tripped selec- 1
tively in order to enable supply to the busbar to continue from
the remaining supply. Unidirectional devices that can detect
a short-circuit current or energy flow from the busbar toward
the incoming feeder should be used. Directional overcurrent
protection is usually set via the load current. However, it
52 52
2
cannot clear weak-current faults. The reverse-power protection
67 67N 67 67N
can be set much lower than the rated power, thus also detect-
ing the reverse-power flow of weak-current faults with fault
currents significantly below the load current.
32R 32R 3
7SJ64 *) 7SJ64 *)
52
4
52 52
6
Feeders *) Alternatives: 7SJ62, 7SJ80, 7SJ66, 7SJ82 Feeders
Fig. 2/40 Reverse-power monitoring at double infeed 7

Synchronization function
Note:
52 U2
Busbar
8
Also available in relays 7SA6, 7SD5, 7SA522, 7VK61. CLOSE command
General notes: 1
• When two subsystems must be interconnected, the synchroni-

zation function monitors whether the subsystems are synchro-
Transformer
Local/remote
9
3 control
nous and can be connected without risk of losing stability. 1)
25 SYN
• This synchronization function can be applied in conjunction
with the auto-reclosure function as well as with the control
function CLOSE commands (local / remote). Infeed
U1
79 AR
7SJ641)
10
Fig. 2/41 Synchronization function
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends

Infeed
1 Notes:
1) Auto-reclosure only with overhead lines
52
52
2) Differential protection options: 52 52
2 • Type 7SD5 or 7SD610 with direct fiber-optic connection up

to about 100 km or via a 64 kbit / s channel (optical fiber,
7SJ80 79 1)
7SD61,
7SD80 or
51N/51N 87L 49 Same
microwave) Line 7SD5
or protection
• Type 7SD52 or 7SD610 with 7XV5662 (CC-CC) cable 7SJ80 2) for parallel line,
3 with 2 and 3 pilot wires up to about 30 km

• Type 7SD80 with pilot wire and/or fibre optic protection data
51N/51N 87L 49
7SD61,
7SD80 or
if applicable
79 52
interface. 52 1) 7SD5
52
4 52 52 52 52
Load Backfeed
5 Fig. 2/42 Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends
Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed from both ends

Infeed
6 Notes: 52
1) Teleprotection logic (85) for transfer trip or blocking schemes. 52

Signal transmission via pilot wire, power line carrier, digital 52 52
network or optical fiber (to be provided separately). The tele-
7 protection supplement is only necessary if fast fault clearance
on 100 % line length is required, that is, second zone tripping 21N/21N 67N
2)
2)
3)
(about 0.3 s delay) cannot be accepted for far end faults. For 85 79
7SA6 or Same
Line 7SA522 protection
further application notes on teleprotection schemes, refer to or 1) for parallel
8 the table on the following page. cable
85 79
3)
line, if
applicable
2) Directional ground-fault protection 67N with inverse-time 2) 7SA6 or
delay against high-resistance faults 21N/21N 67N
7SA522
9 3) Single or multishot auto-reclosure (79) only with overhead

lines. 52
52
52 52 52 52
10 Load Backfeed
Fig. 2/43 Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed from both ends
11 Subtransmission line
Note:
Connection to open delta winding if available. Relays 7SA6 / 522
12 and 7SJ62 can, however, also be set to calculate the zero-

sequence voltage internally.
General notes:
• Distance teleprotection is proposed as main protection and 25 79 21N/21N 67/67N
13 time-graded directional overcurrent as backup protection.
68/78 67N 51/51N
• The 67N function of 7SA6 / 522 provides additional high-
resistance ground-fault protection. It can be used in parallel 7SJ62
BF
7SJ80
with the 21 / 21N function.
14 • Recommended teleprotection schemes: PUTT on medium and 85
S
R
CH To remote
line end
long lines with phase shift carrier or other secure communica-
7SA6 or 7SA522
tion channel POTT on short lines. BLOCKING with On / Off Signal transmission equipment
carrier (all line lengths).
15 Fig. 2/44 Subtransmission line

Overview
Permissive underreach Permissive overreach Blocking Unblocking

transfer trip (PUTT) transfer trip (POTT)
Preferred Signal Dependable and secure communication channel: Reliable communication Dedicated channel with 1
application transmission • Power line carrier with frequency shift modulation. channel (only required continuous signal transfer
system HF signal coupled to 2 phases of the protected line, or during external faults) • Power line carrier with
even better, to a parallel circuit to avoid transmission of • Power line carrier with frequency shift keying.
the HF signal through the fault location.
• Microwave radio, especially digital (PCM)
amplitude modulation
(ON / OFF). The same
Continuous signal trans-
mission must be permitted. 2
• Fiber-optic cables frequency may be used
on all terminals)
Characteristic Best suited for longer lines • Excellent coverage on All line types – preferred Same as POTT
of line – where the underreach
zone provides sufficient
short lines in the presence
of fault resistance.
practice in the US 3
resistance coverage • Suitable for the protection
of multi-terminal lines
with intermediate infeed
Advantages • Simple technique • Can be applied without Same as POTT Same as POTT but: 4
• No coordination of zones underreaching zone 1 • If no signal is received
and times with the op- stage (e.g., overcompen- (no block and no uncompen-
posite end required. The sated series uncompensa- sated block) then tripping by
combination of different
relay types therefore
ted lines)
• Can be applied on extre-
the overreach zone is
released after 20 ms 5
presents no problems mely short lines (impe-
dance less than minimum
relay setting)
• Better for parallel lines
as mutual coupling is not 6
critical for the overreach
zone
• Weak infeed terminals
are no problem (Echo
and Weak Infeed logic is
included)
7
Drawbacks • Overlapping of the • Zone reach and signal Same as POTT Same as POTT
zone 1 reaches must be timing coordination with • Slow tripping – all
ensured. On parallel
lines, teed feeders and
the remote end is
necessary (current
teleprotection trips
must be delayed to wait
8
tapped lines, the reversal) for the eventual
influence of zero blocking signal
sequence coupling and • Continuous channel
intermediate infeeds
must be carefully
monitoring is not
possible
9
considered to make sure
a minimum overlapping
of the zone 1 reach is
always present.
• Not suitable for weak
10
infeed terminals
Table 2/1 Application criteria for frequently used teleprotection schemes

11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Transmission line with reactor (Fig. 2/45) Teleprotection schemes based on distance relays therefore
have operating times on the order of 25 to 30 ms with digital
1 Notes:
1) 51N only applicable with grounded reactor neutral.
PCM coded communication. With state-of-the-art two-cycle
circuit-breakers, fault clearing times well below 100 ms
(4 to 5 cycles) can normally be achieved.
2) If phase CTs at the low-voltage reactor side are not available,
the high-voltage phase CTs and the CT in the neutral can be • Dissimilar carrier schemes are recommended for main 1
2 connected to a restricted ground-fault protection using a and main 2 protection, for example, PUTT, and POTT or
Blocking / Unblocking.
high-impedance relay (SIPROTEC 7SJ80, Reyrolle 7SR23).
• Both 7SA522 and 7SA6 provide selective 1-pole and / or 3-pole
General notes: tripping and auto-reclosure.
3 • Distance relays are proposed as main 1 and main 2 protection.
Duplicated 7SA6 is recommended for series-compensated
The ground-current directional comparison protection (67N)
of the 7SA6 relay uses phase selectors based on symmetrical
lines. components. Thus, 1-pole auto-reclosure can also be executed
• Operating time of the distance relays is in the range of 15 to with high-resistance faults.
4 25 ms depending on the particular fault condition.

These tripping times are valid for faults in the underreaching
The 67N function of the 7SA522 relay can also be used as
time-delayed directional overcurrent backup.
distance zone (80 to 85 % of the line length). Remote end • The 67N functions are provided as high-impedance fault
faults must be cleared by the superimposed teleprotection protection. 67N is often used with an additional channel as
scheme. Its overall operating time depends on the signal
5 transmission time of the channel, typically 15 to 20 ms for
a separate carrier scheme. Use of a common channel with
distance protection is only possible if the mode is compatible
frequency shift audio-tone PLC or microwave channels, and (e.g., POTT with directional comparison). The 67N may be
lower than 10 ms for ON / OFF PLC or digital PCM signaling via blocked when function 21 / 21N picks up. Alternatively, it can
optical fibers. be used as time-delayed backup protection.
6
CC
7 52L
52R
TC1 TC2
8 CVT
50/50N 51/51N BF
7SJ80
9
Reactor 87R
25 59 21/21N 25 21/21N
7SR23
2)
10 79 67N 79 67N
51N
7SJ80
11 68/79 BF 68/79 87
BF, 59
BF
S Direct trip
1)
85 Trip
52L R channel
7SA6 7SA522
12 S
R
Channel
2
To remote
line end
S Channel
13 R 3
Fig. 2/45 Transmission line with reactor
14
15
Overview
Transmission line or cable

(with wide-band communication) CC
General notes: 52L 1

TC1 TC2
• Digital PCM-coded communication (with n × 64 kbit / s
channels) between line ends is becoming more and more
frequently available, either directly by optical or microwave
point-to-point links, or via a general-purpose digital com- 2
munication network.
79 87L 25 59 21/21N
In both cases, the relay-type current differential protection
7SD52 / 61 can be applied. It provides absolute phase and
zone selectivity by phase-segregated measurement, and is not
affected by power swing or parallel line zero-sequence cou-
BF 79 67N
3
pling effects. It is, furthermore, a current-only protection that
does not need a VT connection. For this reason, the adverse 7SD522 68/79 85 BF 7SA522 or
effects of CVT transients are not applicable.
This makes it particularly suitable for double and multi-circuit
7SD6 7SA6 4
lines where complex fault situations can occur. S Channel
R 1
The 7SD5 / 61 can be applied to lines up to about 120 km in
Optical fiber To remote
direct relay-to-relay connections via dedicated optical fiber
cores (see also application “Cables or short overhead lines
FO
Wire
X.21
S
R
PCM line end 5
with infeed from both ends”, page 2/21), and also to much Direct connection with dedicated
longer distances of up to about 120 km by using separate PCM fibers up to about 120 km
devices for optical fiber or microwave transmission.
The 7SD5 / 61 then uses only a small part (64 to 512 kbit / s) of
the total transmission capacity (on the order of Mbits / s).
Fig. 2/46 Redundant transmission line protection
6
• The 7SD52 / 61 protection relays can be combined with the
distance relay 7SA52 or 7SA6 to form a redundant protection
system with dissimilar measuring principles complementing
each other (Fig. 2/46). This provides the highest degree of 52L
CC
7
availability. Also, separate signal transmission ways should be TC1 TC2
used for main 1 and main 2 line protection, e.g., optical fiber
or microwave, and power line carrier (PLC).
The current comparison protection has a typical operating time
8
of 15 ms for faults on 100 % line length, including signaling
25
time.
79 87L 59 21/21N
General notes for Fig. 2/47:
67N
9
• SIPROTEC 7SD5 offers fully redundant differential and distance BF
relays accommodated in one single bay control unit, and
provides both high-speed operation of relays and excellent
fault coverage, even under complicated conditions. Precise
distance-to-fault location avoids time-consuming line patrol- 7SD5 85 68/79 10
ling, and reduces the downtime of the line to a minimum.
S Channel
• The high-speed distance relay operates fully independently 1
R
from the differential relay. Backup zones provide remote
backup for upstream and downstream lines and other power Optical fiber FO
X.21
S
PCM
To remote 11
line end
system components. Wire R
Direct connection with dedicated
fibers up to about 120 km
12
Fig. 2/47 Transmission line protection with redundant algorithm
in one device
13
14
15
Overview
Transmission line,
one-breaker-and-a-half terminal 87/BB1 7SS52
1 Notes:
BB1
7VK61 7SA522 or
1) When the line is switched off and the BF 85
7SA6
line line disconnector (isolator) is UBB1
1) 1) 2)
2 open, high through-fault currents in

the diameter may cause maloperation
52
79
25
21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59
of the distance relay due to unequal

UBB1 UL1 or
CT errors (saturation). UL1
UL2 or
Normal practice is therefore to block
3 the distance protection (21 / 21N) and
UBB2
Line 1
the directional ground-fault protection 7VK61 7SD5
(67N) under this condition via an 87L
BF
auxiliary contact of the line line discon-
4 nector (isolator). A standby overcurrent
function (50 / 51N, 51 / 51N) is released
52 79
25
instead to protect the remaining stub
between the breakers (“stub” protec- 8 /
5 tion). Line 2
2) Overvoltage protection only with Main 1 Protection of line 2

7SA6 / 52. (or transformer,
Main 2
if applicable)
6 General notes:
• The protection functions of one
52 BF
79
7VK61
diameter of a breaker-and-a-half
arrangement are shown. UBB2 25
UL2 or
7 • The currents of two CTs have each to
be summed up to get the relevant line
UL1 or UBB1 UBB2 BB2
currents as input for main 1 and 2 line 87/BB2 7SS52

protection.
8 • The location of the CTs on both sides of

the circuit-breakers is typical for substa-
Fig. 2/48 Transmission line, one-breaker-and-a-half terminal,
using 3 breaker management relays 7VK61
tions with dead-tank circuit-breakers.
Live-tank circuit-breakers may have
CTs only on one side to reduce cost. A fault between circuit-
9 breakers and CT (end fault) may then still be fed from one side
even when the circuit-breaker has opened. Consequently, final
fault clearing by cascaded tripping has to be accepted in this
case.
10 • The 7VK61 relay provides the necessary end fault protection
function and trips the circuit-breakers of the remaining infeed-
ing circuits.
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
General notes for Fig. 2/48 and Fig. 2/49:

• For the selection of the main 1 and 87/BB1 7SS52
main 2 line protection schemes, the BB1 1
comments of application examples 7SA522 or
“Transmission with reactor”, page 2/23 7SA6
BF 85
and “Transmission line or cable”, page UBB1
2/24 apply.
52
1) 1) 2)
21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59 2
• Auto-reclosure (79) and synchrocheck 25
function (25) are each assigned directly
to the circuit-breakers and controlled by UBB1 UL1 or
main 1 and 2 line protection in parallel.
In the event of a line fault, both adja-
UL2 or
UBB2 UL1 3
cent circuit-breakers have to be tripped Line 1
by the line protection. The sequence of 7VK61 7SD5
auto-reclosure of both circuit-breakers
or, alternatively, the auto-reclosure of
BF 87L
4
only one circuit-breaker and the manual 52 79
closure of the other circuit-breaker, may
25
be made selectable by a control switch.
• A coordinated scheme of control UL1 or UL2 or 5
circuits is necessary to ensure selective UBB1 UBB2
tripping interlocking and reclosing of
Line 2
the two circuit-breakers of one line (or
transformer feeder). UL2 6
• The voltages for synchrocheck have to
52 Main 1 Protection of Line 2
be selected according to the circuit- (or transformer,
breaker and disconnector (isolator) Main 2 if applicable)
position by a voltage replica circuit.
UBB2
7
General notes for Fig. 2/49:
• In this optimized application, the 7VK61 BB2
is only used for the center breaker. In
the line feeders, functions 25, 79 and 87/BB2 7SS52 8
BF are also performed by transmission
line protection 7SA522 or 7SA6. Fig. 2/49 Transmission line, breaker-and-a-half terminal,
using 1 breaker management relay 7VK61
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
2. Transformers
HV infeed
1 Small transformer infeed
General notes:
52
• Ground faults on the secondary side are detected by current I>> I>, t IE > > I2 >, t
relay 51N. However, it has to be time-graded against down-
2 stream feeder protection relays. 50 51 50N 49 46
7SJ80
• The restricted ground-fault relay 87N can optionally be applied
to achieve fast clearance of ground faults in the transformer
secondary winding. 63 Optional resistor
or reactor
3 SIPROTEC 7SJ80 is of the high-impedance type and requires
class × CTs with equal transformation ratios.
RN
• Primary circuit-breaker and relay may be replaced by fuses.

I >>
4 87N
52 7SJ80 51N
IE >
5 Distribution bus
7SJ80
52
6 O/C Fuse
relay
Load Load
7 Fig. 2/50 Small transformer infeed
Large or important transformer infeed

8 General note:
HV infeed
52
• Relay 7UT612 provides numerical ratio and vector group
adaptation. Matching transformers as used with traditional
I>> I>, t IE > > I2 >, t
relays are therefore no longer applicable.
9 Notes:
50 51 51N 49 46 7SJ61 or
7SJ80
1) If an independent high-impedance-type ground-fault function
is required, the 7SJ6x or 7SJ80 can be used instead of the 87N
10 inside the 7UT612. However, class × CT cores would also be
necessary in this case (see small transformer protection). 63
1)
2) 51 and 51N may be provided in a separate 7SJ80 or 7SJ61 if
required. 51N 87N 87T
11 2) 2)
51 51N
I>, t I E >, t 7UT612
12 52
Load bus
52 52
13
Load Load
14 Fig. 2/51 Large or important transformer infeed
15
Overview
Dual infeed with single transformer

Protection line 1 Protection line 2
General notes:
• Line CTs are to be connected to separate stabilizing inputs of
same as line 2
52
21/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N
52
1
the differential relay 87T in order to ensure stability in the
event of line through-fault currents. I>> I>, t I E >, t > I2 >
• Relay 7UT613 provides numerical ratio and vector group
adaptation. Matching transformers, as used with traditional
50 51 51N
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
49 46
2
relays, are therefore no longer applicable. 63
87N 87T
51N 7SJ80
7UT613
3
I>> I E >
7SJ80
51 51N
52
4
Load
52 52 52 bus
Load Load Load

5
Fig. 2/52 Dual infeed with single transformer
Parallel incoming transformer feeders

HV infeed 1 HV infeed 2
6
Note: 52 52
The directional functions 67 and 67N do not apply for cases I>> I>, t I E >, t > I2 >, t
where the transformers are equipped with the transformer
differential relays 87T.
50 51 51N
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
49 46
Protection
7
63 same as
infeed 1
I>, t I E >, t I> IE >
51
51N
51N
I E >, t
67 67N
7SJ62
8
7SJ80
52 52
1)
52 52 52
Load
bus 9
Load Load Load
Fig. 2/53 Parallel incoming transformer feeders

10
Parallel incoming transformer feeders with bus tie
Infeed 1 I>> I>, t I E > t > I2 >, t Infeed 2
General notes:
• Overcurrent relay 51, 51N each connected as a partial differ-
50 51 51N 49 46
Protection
11
7SJ80
ential scheme. This provides simple and fast busbar protection same as
and saves one time-grading step. 63 63 infeed 1
I>, t I E >, t IE >, t I2>, t 12

51 51N 51N 51
51N
7SJ80 7SJ80
7SJ80
52
52
52
13
52 52
Load Load 14
Fig. 2/54 Parallel incoming transformer feeders with bus tie
15
Overview
Three-winding transformer
HV Infeed
1 Notes:
1) The zero-sequence current must be blocked before entering
52
I>>, I >, t > I2 >, t

the differential relay with a delta winding in the CT connec-
50 51 49 46
tion on the transformer side with grounded starpoint. This
2 is to avoid false operation during external ground faults
(numerical relays provide this function by calculation). About
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
30 % sensitivity, however, is then lost in the event of internal

faults. Optionally, the zero-sequence current can be regained 51N 7SJ80 63 51N 7SJ80
by introducing the winding neutral current in the differential
3 relay (87T). Relay type 7UT613 provides two current inputs
1) 87T 7UT613
for this purpose. By using this feature, the ground-fault 87N 7SR232)
sensitivity can be upgraded again to its original value.
Restricted ground-fault protection (87T) is optional. It
4 provides backup protection for ground faults and increased
ground-fault sensitivity (about 10 % IN, compared to about 20
I>, t I E >, t I>, t I E >, t
51 51N 51 51N
to 30 % IN of the transformer differential relay).
Separate class × CT-cores with equal transmission ratio are 87N 7SJ61
or 7SJ80 7SJ802)
5 also required for this protection.
M.V.
52 52 52 52
M.V.
2) High impedance and overcurrent in one 7SJ61.
General notes:
6 • In this example, the transformer feeds two different distribu-

tion systems with cogeneration. Restraining differential relay Load Backfeed Load Backfeed
inputs are therefore provided at each transformer side.
• If both distribution systems only consume load and no Fig. 2/55 Three-winding transformer
7 through-feed is possible from one MV system to the other,
parallel connection of the CTs of the two MV transformer
windings is admissible, which allows the use of a two-winding
differential relay (7UT612)
8 Autotransformer
52
Notes:
9 1) 87N high-impedance protection requires special class ×

current transformer cores with equal transformation ratios. 51N 50/BF 46 50/51 2) 87N 7SR23
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
2) The 7SJ80 relay can alternatively be connected in series with 1)
the 7UT613 relay to save this CT core.
10 General note:
87T 49
52
• Two different protection schemes are provided: 87T is chosen 63

as the low-impedance three-winding version (7UT613). 7UT613
87N is a 1-phase high-impedance relay (Reyrolle 7SR23) con- 52
11 nected as restricted ground-fault protection. (In this example,
1)
50/51
it is assumed that the phase ends of the transformer winding 46

are not accessible on the neutral side, that is, there exists a CT
51
only in the neutral grounding connection.). 50/BF
12 50/BF 51N
59N 1)
7RW80 7SJ80*) 7SJ80*)
*) Alternatives: 7SJ61
13
Fig. 2/56 Autotransformer
14
15
Overview
Large autotransformer bank

General notes:
• The transformer bank is connected in a breaker-and-a-half 7SV600
21 21N 68/78
7SA52/6 7SV600 1
arrangement. 50/BF 50/BF
52 52
Duplicated differential protection is proposed: EHV
• Main 1: Low-impedance differential protection 87TL (7UT613)
connected to the transformer bushing CTs.
2
• Main 2: High-impedance differential overall protection 87TL 3x 87/TH 50/BF 7SV600
(Reyrolle 7SR23). Separate class × cores and equal CT ratios are 7SR23 52
required for this type of protection.
• Backup protection is provided by distance protection relay 87/TL 49 7SA52/6 3
21
(7SA52 and 7SA6), each “looking” with an instantaneous first 7UT613 63
zone about 80 % into the transformer and with a time-delayed 52 21N
zone beyond the transformer.
• The tertiary winding is assumed to feed a small station supply
68/78 4
system with isolated neutral. 51
52
59N
7RW80
50/BF
7SJ80*)
51N
7SJ80*)
50/BF 7SV600
5
*) Alternatives: 7SJ61
Fig. 2/57 Large autotransformer bank

6
3. Motors
Small and medium-sized motors < about 1 MW 52 7
a) With effective or low-resistance grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor)
I>> IE > > I2 >
General note:
• Applicable to low-voltage motors and high-voltage motors 50 51N 49 48 46 8
with low-resistance grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor)
b) With high-resistance grounded infeed (IE ≤ IN Motor) 7SJ61/7SK80
Notes: 9
1) Core-balance CT.
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protection (67N) only Fig. 2/58 Motor protection with effective or low-resistance grounded
applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil grounded
system (for dimensioning of the sensitive directional ground-
infeed 10
fault protection, see also application circuit page 2/33 and
Fig. 2/66) 52
3) The 7SK80 relay can be applied for isolated and compensated
systems.
I >> > I2 > I< 11
50 49 48 46 37 51U
IE > 2)
7XR96
1)
60/1A
51N 67N
3)
12
7SJ62/7SK80
13
Fig. 2/59 Motor protection with high-resistance grounded infeed
14
15
Overview
Large HV motors > about 1 MW
1 Notes:
1) Core-balance CT.
52
I >> > I2 > U<

2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protection (67N) only
applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil grounded
2 system.
50 49 48 46 27
Optional
IE > 2) I < 37
3) This function is only needed for motors where the startup 7XR96
time is longer than the safe stall time tE. According to 1) 51N 67N
60/1A
3 IEC 60079-7, the tE time is the time needed to heat up AC
windings, when carrying the starting current IA, from the Startup
super- 49T 87M
temperature reached in rated service and at maximum ambi- visor 3) 5) 7UM62
ent air temperature to the limiting temperature. A separate
speed switch is used to supervise actual starting of the motor. 3)
4 The motor circuit-breaker is tripped if the motor does not
Speed
switch
RTD´s 4)
optional
reach speed in the preset time. The speed switch is part of
the motor supply itself.
5 4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni120

5) 49T only available with external temperature detector device
(RTD-box 7XV5662) Fig. 2/60 Protection of large HV motors > about 1 MW
6 Cold load pickup

52
By means of a binary input that can be wired from a manual Trip
close contact, it is possible to switch the overcurrent pickup
7 settings to less sensitive settings for a programmable amount
of time. After the set time has expired, the pickup settings auto-
I >> t
51.1
I> t
51.2
matically return to their original setting. This can compensate for
Binary input 51.1
initial inrush when energizing a circuit without compromising 82
(1727 > c/o) Trip
8 the sensitivity of the overcurrent elements during steady-state
conditions.
Desensitized
during inrush
51.2
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
52
Busbar
9 Trip
52 52 52 52
10 M
I >> t I > t
51.1 51.2 Typical feeder
11 Binary input 51.1 (1727 > C/O = cold

load pickup of over-
(1727 > C/O)
51.2 current pickup)
7SJ61 or 7SK80
12
Fig. 2/61 Cold load pickup
13
14
15
Overview
4. Generators
LV
Generators < 500 kW (Fig. 2/62 and Fig. 2/63)
Note:
1
If a core-balance CT is provided for sensitive ground-fault
protection relay 7SJ80 with separate ground-current input can
be used.
I >, I E >, t
51/51N
I2 >
46
>
49
2
Generators, typically 1 – 3 MW
7SJ80
(Fig. 2/64)
Note: Fig. 2/62 Generator with solidly grounded neutral
3
Two VTs in V connection are also sufficient.
Generators > 1 – 3 MW
MV
4
(Fig. 2/65)
Notes:
1) Functions 81 and 59 are required only where prime mover
can assume excess speed and the voltage regulator may
Generator 2
I >, I E >, t I2 > > 5
51/51N 46 49
permit rise of output voltage above upper limit. 1)
7SJ80
2) Differential relaying options:
– Low-impedance differential protection 87.
RN
UN 6
– Restricted ground-fault protection with low-resistance 0.5 to 1 rated
grounded neutral (Fig. 2/64).
Fig. 2/63 Generator with resistance-grounded neutral 7
52
52
MV
8
1)
I >/U <
50/27
9
59 U <
1)
Field
f 1)
81 f
87 10
81 RG Field <
64R
11
51 49 46 32 59 I2 > > I >, t U < L. O. F. –P>
I >, t > I2 > P> U> 46 49 51V 40 32
I E >, t
12
IG >, t
51N 2)
51N 87N
7UM61
7UM62 13
Fig. 2/64 Protection for generators 1 – 3 MW Fig. 2/65 Protection for generators >1 – 3 MW 14
15
Overview
Generators > 5 –10 MW feeding into a system For the most sensitive setting of 2 mA, we therefore need 20 mA
with isolated neutral secondary ground current, corresponding to (60 / 1) × 20 mA =
1 (Fig. 2/66)
1.2 A primary.
If sufficient capacitive ground current is not available, an
General notes:
grounding transformer with resistive zero-sequence load can
• The setting range of the directional ground-fault protection be installed as ground-current source at the station busbar. The
2 (67N) in the 7UM6 relay is 2 –1,000 mA. Depending on the
current transformer accuracy, a certain minimum setting is
smallest standard grounding transformer TGAG 3541 has a 20 s
short-time rating of input connected to: SG = 27 kVA
required to avoid false operation on load or transient currents.
In a 5 kV system, it would deliver:
• In practice, efforts are generally made to protect about 90 % of
3 the machine winding, measured from the machine terminals.
The full ground current for a terminal fault must then be ten
√3 · SG √3 · 27,000 VA
IG 20 s = ――― = ――――――― = 9.4 A
UN 5,000 V
times the setting value, which corresponds to the fault current
of a fault at 10 % distance from the machine neutral. corresponding to a relay input current of 9.4 A × 1 / 60 A =
156 mA. This would provide a 90 % protection range with a
4 Relay ground-current input Minimum relay
setting of about 15 mA, allowing the use of 4 parallel connected
Comments: core-balance CTs. The resistance at the 500 V open-delta
connected to: setting:
winding of the grounding transformer would then have to be
Core-balance CT 60 / 1 A: designed for
5 1 single CT
2 parallel CTs
2 mA
5 mA RB = U2SEC / SG = 500 U2 / 27,000 VA = 9.26 Ω (27 kW, 20 s)
3 parallel CTs 8 mA
4 parallel CTs 12 mA For a 5 MVA machine and 600 / 5 A CTs with special calibration
for minimum residual false current, we would get a secondary
6 Three-phase CTs in residual
(Holmgreen) connection
1 A CT: 50 mA
5 A CT: 200 mA
In general not
suitable for sensi-
tive ground-fault
current of IG SEC = 9.4 A / (600 / 5) = 78 mA.
With a relay setting of 12 mA, the protection range would in
protection
⎛ 12 ⎞
2 – 3 ‰ of 1 A CTs are not this case be 100 ⎜1− ⎟ = 85 %.
Three-phase CTs in ⎝ 78 ⎠
7 residual (Holmgreen)
connection with special
secondary rated
CT current In SEC
recommended in
this case
10 – 15 mA with
factory calibration 5 A CTs
to minimum residual false
8 currents (≤ 2 mA)
9 52 3)
Earthing transformer 59N

1) UN
52
10 RB
62
I>/U<
Redundant 50/27
IG 67N IG
11 protection
U<
67N
27
27 U < 59N 87 6 I
59 U >
12 46 I2 > 81 f >
<
64R 59 U >
4) U >
O
81 f
13 32
–P
40
L. O. F.
51V
I > t, U t, U <
51V
L. O. F.
40 32
–P >
49
I2 >
46
7UM61 or 7UM62 2) 7UM62
14
Fig. 2/66 Protection for generators > 5 – 10 MW
15
Overview
Notes (Fig. 2/66):

1) The standard core-balance CT 7XR96 has a transformation
ratio of 60 / 1 A. 52
1
2) Instead of an open-delta winding at the terminal VT, Transf. fault press
Unit 63 3)
a 1-phase VT at the machine neutral could be used as zero- trans.
sequence polarizing voltage.
87T
71 Oil low
2
3) The grounding transformer is designed for a short-time rating
of 20 s. To prevent overloading, the load resistor is automati-
51N
cally switched off by a time-delayed zero-sequence voltage
relay (59N + 62) and a contactor (52). Transf. neut. OC
Unit aux.
3
4) During the startup time of the generator with the open 87T
backup
circuit-breaker, the grounding source is not available. To Unit diff.
51
ensure ground-fault protection during this time interval, an Oil low
auxiliary contact of the circuit-breaker can be used to change
over the directional ground-fault relay function (67N) to a
Transf.
fault press 3) 71
4
63
zero-sequence voltage detection function via binary input.
Overvolt. 59
Unit
aux. 5
81 51N
Overfreq. Trans.
78
Loss of
sync. 24
neut.
OC 6
40 Volt/Hz
87T
A
Stator Loss of Trans.
field
O.L.
49S 32
diff.
7
E Reverse
87G power
64R
2)
64R
Gen.
diff. 8
Field Field 46 21
grd. grd.
Neg. Sys.
seq. backup
9
Generators > 50 –100 MW in generator transformer
unit connection 59/GN
(Fig. 2/67)
1)
Gen.
neut. OV 10
Notes: 51/GN
1) 100 % stator ground-fault protection based on 20 Hz voltage

injection Fig. 2/67 Protections for generators > 50 MW
11
2) Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection based on 1– 3 Hz
voltage injection
3) Non-electrical signals can be incoupled in the protection via
binary inputs (BI) Relay
type Functions 4)
Number
of relays
required
12
4) Only used functions shown; further integrated functions 21 24 32 40 46 49
7UM62
available in each relay type; for more information, please refer 1) 2)
to part 1 of this catalog. 51GN
81
59GN
87G
59
via BI:
64R
71
64R
63
78 2
13
7UM61 or 51 51N optionally 21 59 81 via BI: 71 63 1
7UM62
7UT612 87T 51N optionally 1
2 14
7UT613 87T 1
Fig. 2/68 Assignment for functions to relay type

15
Overview
Synchronization of a generator
Bus
1 Fig. 2/69 shows a typical connection for synchronizing a genera-

tor. Paralleling device 7VE6 acquires the line and generator 52 U1
voltage, and calculates the differential voltage, frequency and
phase angle. If these values are within a permitted range, a
CLOSE command is issued after a specified circuit-breaker make 7VE6
2 time. If these variables are out of range, the paralleling device
automatically sends a command to the voltage and speed
U2
25 U f
controller. For example, if the frequency is outside the range, an
actuation command is sent to the speed controller. If the voltage
3 is outside the range, the voltage controller is activated.
G
5 Fig. 2/69 Synchronization of a generator
5. Busbars
Infeed
Busbar protection by overcurrent relays with reverse
6 interlocking
General note:
Reverse interlocking
I >, t0 I >, t
• Applicable to distribution busbars without substantial
50/50N 51/51N
(< 0.25 × IN) backfeed from the outgoing feeders. 52 7SJ80
7 t0 = 50 ms
52 52 52
8
I> I >, t I> I >, t I> I >, t
50/50N 51/51N 50/50N 51/51N 50/50N 51/51N
7SJ80 7SJ80 7SJ80
9
Fig. 2/70 Busbar protection by O / C relays with reverse interlocking
10
Distributed busbar protection 7SS52
General notes:
11 • Suitable for all types of busbar schemes.
• Preferably used for multiple busbar schemes where a discon-
nector (isolator) replica is necessary. 52 52 52 52
• The numerical busbar protection 7SS52 provides additional
12 breaker failure protection.
50BF
50
50BF
50
50BF
50
50BF
50
• Different CT transformation ratios can be adapted numerically.
51 51 51 51
• The protection system and the disconnector (isolator) replica Bay
are continuously self-monitored by the 7SS52.
13 • Feeder protection can be connected to the same CT core.
units 50N
51N
50N
51N
50N
51N
50N
51N
7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO
14
87BB 50BF
Central unit 7SS522
15 Fig. 2/71 Distributed busbar protection 7SS52

Overview
6. Power systems
Übererregungsschutz
Load shedding
In unstable power systems (e.g., isolated systems, emergency
U >, t; U >>, t U/f >, t; U/f >>, t; U/f=f(t)
59 24
1
7RW80
power supply in hospitals), it may be necessary to isolate
selected loads from the power system to prevent overload of the Motorschutz ohne
overall system. The overcurrent-time protection functions are
effective only in the case of a short-circuit.
Wiedereinschaltverriegelung
f >,t; f <, t U <, t U >, t; U >>, t 2
81 27 59
Overloading of the generator can be measured as a frequency or 7RW80
voltage drop.
(Protection functions 27 and 81 available in 7RW80, 7SJ6 and
Weiteres
Netz 3
7SJ8.)
f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t
81 27
7RW80, 7SJ62 oder 7SJ80
59 81 27
7RW80 oder 7SJ62
59
M 4
Entkopplung Lastabwurf
Fig. 2/72 Load shedding

5
Load shedding with rate-of-frequency-change protection
50
The rate-of-frequency-change protection calculates, from the
measured frequency, the gradient or frequency change df / dt.
It is thus possible to detect and record any major active power
f
Hz
6
loss in the power system, to disconnect certain consumers fm
accordingly and to restore the system to stability. Unlike fre- t
quency protection, rate-of-frequency-change protection reacts
before the frequency threshold is undershot. To ensure effective
49
fa 7
protection settings, it is recommended to consider requirements fb
throughout the power system as a whole. The rate-of-frequency- fc
change protection function can also be used for the purposes of
system decoupling. 48 8
0 1 2 3 4 5
Rate-of-frequency-change protection can also be enabled by an t
underfrequency state.
Fig. 2/73 Load shedding with rate-of-frequency-change protection
9
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
VCV
One or two binary inputs can be used for the trip circuit
supervision.
L+
10
7SJx, 7SAx, 7SDx 7SJx, 7SAx, 7SDx
or any other or any other Trip
protective TCo BI 1 protective circuit
relay relay faulty
11
CLOSE TRIP R TCo Trip contact of the relay
BI Binary input of the relay
AUX 1 AUX 1 TC Trip coil
52a
TC
52
52b Aux
R
Circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact
Equivalent resistor instead
12
CB
of BI 2
L– Ucv Control voltage
CB Circuit-breaker
13
Fig. 2/74 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
14
15
Overview
Disconnecting facility with flexible protection function

52
1 General note:
The SIPROTEC protection relay 7SJ64 disconnects the
CB 1
Connection to power utility
switchgear from the utility power system if the generator Customer switchgear with autonomous supply
Switch-
feeds energy back into the power system (protection function disconnector
2 Preverse>). This functionality is achieved by using flexible protec-
tion. Disconnection also takes place in the event of frequency 7UT612
1)
or voltage fluctuations in the utility power system (protection

functions f<, f>, U<, U>, Idir>, IEdir> / 81, 27, 59, 67, 67N). G
3 Notes:
1) The transformer is protected by differential protection and
inverse or definite-time overcurrent protection functions
for the phase currents. In the event of a fault, the circuit- 52 52
4 breaker CB1 on the utility side is tripped by a remote link.
Circuit-breaker CB2 is also tripped.
CB 2 CB 3
2) Overcurrent-time protection functions protect feeders 1 and

2 against short-circuits and overload caused by the con-
5 nected loads. Both the phase currents and the zero currents
7SJ64 f < f> U Sync. I >dir I E >dir
Preserve >
of the feeders can be protected by inverse and definite-time 32 81 81 27 59 25 67 67N
overcurrent stages. The circuit-breakers CB4 and CB5 are
tripped in the event of a fault. Busbar
6 7SJ61/ 2) 7SJ61/ 2)
7SJ80 7SJ80
52 52
7 CB 4 CB 5
8 Feeder 1 Feeder 2
Fig. 2/75 Example of a switchgear with autonomous generator supply
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Protection coordination
12.0
Typical applications and functions Rush

11.0 1
10.0
Relay operating characteristics and their settings must be N
9.0
carefully coordinated in order to achieve selectivity. The aim is
basically to switch off only the faulty component and to leave
the rest of the power system in service in order to minimize
8.0
7.0 2
supply interruptions and to ensure stability. 6.0
5.0
Sensitivity
Protection should be as sensitive as possible in order to detect
4.0
3.0
3
faults at the lowest possible current level. At the same time, 2.0
however, it should remain stable under all permissible load,
1.0
overload and through-fault conditions. For more information:
http: / / www.siemens.com / systemplanning. The Siemens engi-
2 10 100
Rated transformer power (MVA)
400
4
neering programs SINCAL and SIGRADE are especially designed
for selective protection grading of protection relay systems. They
provide short-circuit calculations, international standard charac-
teristics of relays, fuses and circuit-breakers for easy protection
Time constant of inrush current
Nominal power (MVA) 0.5 … 1.0 1.0 … 10 > 10
5
grading with respect to motor starting, inrush phenomena, and
equipment damage curves. Time constant (s) 0.16 … 0.2 0.2 … 1.2 1.2 … 720
Phase-fault overcurrent relays Fig. 2/76 Peak value of inrush current

6
The pickup values of phase overcurrent relays are normally set
30 % above the maximum load current, provided that sufficient Ground-fault protection relays
short-circuit current is available. This practice is recommended
particularly for mechanical relays with reset ratios of 0.8 to
0.85. Numerical relays have high reset ratios near 0.95 and
Ground-current relays enable a much more sensitive setting,
because load currents do not have to be considered (except
7
allow, therefore, about a 10 % lower setting. Feeders with high 4-wire circuits with 1-phase load). In solidly and low-resistance
transformer and / or motor load require special consideration. grounded systems, a setting of 10 to 20 % rated load current
Transformer feeders
can generally be applied. High-resistance grounding requires
a much more sensitive setting, on the order of some amperes 8
primary. The ground-fault current of motors and generators,
The energizing of transformers causes inrush currents that may
for example, should be limited to values below 10 A in order
last for seconds, depending on their size (Fig. 2/75). Selection
to avoid iron burning. In this case, residual-current relays in
of the pickup current and assigned time delay have to be
coordinated so that the inrush current decreases below the
the start point connection of CTs cannot be used; in particular, 9
with rated CT primary currents higher than 200 A. The pickup
relay overcurrent reset value before the set operating time has
value of the zero-sequence relay would be on the order of the
elapsed. The inrush current typically contains only about a 50 %
error currents of the CTs. A special core-balance CT is therefore
fundamental frequency component. Numerical relays that filter
out harmonics and the DC component of the inrush current can
used as the ground-current sensor. The core-balance CT 7XR96
is designed for a ratio of 60 /1 A. The detection of 6 A primary
10
therefore be set to be more sensitive. The inrush current peak
would then require a relay pickup setting of 0.1 A secondary. An
values of Fig. 2/76 will be reduced to more than one half in this
even more sensitive setting is applied in isolated or Petersen coil
case. Some digital relay types have an inrush detection function
that may block the trip of the overcurrent protection resulting
from inrush currents.
grounded systems where very low ground currents occur with
1-phase-to-ground faults. Settings of 20 mA and lower may then 11
be required depending on the minimum ground-fault current.
Sensitive directional ground-fault relays (integrated into the
relays 7SJ62, 63, 64, 7SJ80, 7SK80, 7SA6) allow settings as
low as 5 mA. 12
13
14
15
Overview
Motor feeders
10,000
1 The energization of motors causes a starting current of initially

5 to 6 times the rated current (locked rotor current).
Time in
1,000
seconds 100
A typical time-current curve for an induction motor is shown in
Fig. 2/77. 10
2 In the first 100 ms, a fast-decaying asymmetrical inrush current 1
also appears. With conventional relays, it was common practice 0.1

to set the instantaneous overcurrent stage of the short-circuit
0.01
protection 20 to 30 % above the locked rotor current with a
3 short-time delay of 50 to 100 ms to override the asymmetrical
inrush period.
0.001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Current in multiplies of full-load amps
Numerical relays are able to filter out the asymmetrical current
component very rapidly so that the setting of an additional time Motor starting current High set instantaneous O/C stage
4 delay is no longer applicable. Locked-rotor current

Overload protection characteristic
Motor thermal limit curve
Permissible locked-rotor time
The overload protection characteristic should follow the thermal
motor characteristic as closely as possible. The adaptation is Fig. 2/77 Typical motor current-time characteristics
made by setting the pickup value and the thermal time constant,
5 using the data supplied by the motor manufacturer. Further-
more, the locked-rotor protection timer has to be set according
to the characteristic motor value.
6 Time grading of overcurrent relays (51) Time 51
The selectivity of overcurrent protection is based on time grad-

ing of the relay operating characteristics. The relay closer to the 51 51
infeed (upstream relay) is time-delayed against the relay further
7 away from the infeed (downstream relay). The calculation of
necessary grading times is shown in Fig. 2/79 by an example for 0.2-0.4 seconds
definite-time overcurrent relays. Main
Feeder
The overshoot times take into account the fact that the measur-
8 ing relay continues to operate due to its inertia, even if when
Maximum feeder fault level
Current
the fault current is interrupted. This may be high for mechanical

Fig. 2/78 Coordination of inverse-time relays
relays (about 0.1 s) and negligible for numerical relays (20 ms).
9 Inverse-time relays (51)

For the time grading of inverse-time relays, in principle the same lnstantaneous overcurrent protection (50)
rules apply as for the definite-time relays. The time grading is
This is typically applied on the final supply load or on any
first calculated for the maximum fault level and then checked for
10 lower current levels (Fig. 2/78).
protection relay with sufficient circuit impedance between
itself and the next downstream protection relay. The setting at
If the same characteristic is used for all relays, or if when the transformers, for example, must be chosen about 20 to 30 %
upstream relay has a steeper characteristic (e.g., very much higher than the maximum through-fault current. The relay must
over normal inverse), then selectivity is automatically fulfilled at remain stable during energization of the transformer.
11 lower currents.
Differential relay (87)

Transformer differential relays are normally set to pickup values
12 between 20 and 30 % of the rated current. The higher value has
to be chosen when the transformer is fitted with a tap changer.
Restricted ground-fault relays and high-resistance motor / gen-
13 erator differential relays are, as a rule, set to about 10 % of the

rated current.
14
15
Overview
Calculation example
52M Operating time
The feeder configuration of Fig. 2/80 and the associated load
and short-circuit currents are given. Numerical overcurrent relays 1
7SJ80 with normal inverse-time characteristics are applied. 51M
The relay operating times, depending on the current, can be 52F 52F
derived from the diagram or calculated with the formula given in
Fig. 2/81.
51F 51F
2
The Ip / IN settings shown in Fig. 2/80 have been chosen to get 0.2-0.4
pickup values safely above maximum load current. Time grading
This current setting should be lowest for the relay farthest

Fault Fault
inception detection
Interruption of
fault current
3
downstream. The relays further upstream should each have t 51F t 52F
equal or higher current settings. Circuit-breaker
Set time delay interruption time
The time multiplier settings can now be calculated as follows:
Overshoot* 4
Station C: t OS Margin tM
• For coordination with the fuses, we consider the fault in loca- t 51M
tion F1.
The short-circuit current Iscc. max. related to 13.8 kV is 523 A.
*also called overtravel or coasting time 5
This results in 7.47 for I / Ip at the overcurrent relay in
location C. Time grading
• With this value and Tp = 0.05, an operating time of tA = 0.17 s
can be derived from Fig. 2/81.
trs = t51M – t51F = t52F + tOS + tM
Example 1 tTG =0.10 s + 0.15 s + 0.15 s = 0.40 s
6
• This setting was selected for the overcurrent relay to get a safe
grading time over the fuse on the transformer low-voltage Oil circuit-breaker t52F = 0.10 s
side. Safety margin for the setting values for the relay at sta-
tion C are therefore:
Mechanical relays
Safety margin for
tOS = 0.15 s
7
• Pickup current: Ip / IN = 0.7 measuring errors, etc. tM = 0.15 s
• Time multiplier: Tp = 0.05. Example 2 tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s
Station B:
Vacuum circuit-breaker t52F = 0.08 s 8
Numerical relays tOS = 0.02 s
The relay in B has a primary protection function for line B-C and
Safety margin tM = 0.10 s
a backup function for the relay in C. The maximum through-fault
current of 1.395 A becomes effective for a fault in location F2.
For the relay in C, an operating time time of 0.11 s (I / Ip = 19.93)
Fig. 2/79 Time grading of overcurrent-time relays 9
is obtained.
It is assumed that no special requirements for short operating
times exist and therefore an average time grading interval of
0.3 s can be chosen. The operating time of the relay in B can A F4 B F3 C
13.8 kV/ Fuse:
F2 0.4 kV
160 A
D
Load
F1
10
then be calculated. Load
13.8 kV
625 kVA L.V. 75
• t = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s

B
51
7SJ80
51
7SJ80
51
7SJ80
5.0 % Load
11
1,395 A
• Value of I / I = ――――
p N
220 A
= 6.34 (Fig. 2/80)
Station Max. ISCC. CT Ip / IN** Iprim*** Iscc. max
• With the operating time 0.41 s and Ip / IN = 6.34,
Tp = 0.11 can be derived from Fig. 2/81.
load
A
max*
A
ratio
A
I / Ip = ――――
Iprim 12
A 300 4,500 400 / 5 1.0 400 11.25
B 170 2,690 200 / 5 1.1 220 12.23
C 50 1,395 100 / 5 0.7 70 19.93 13
D – 523 – – – –
*) ISCC. max = Maximum short-circuit current
**)
***)
Ip / IN
Iprim
= Relay current multiplier setting
= Primary setting current corresponding to Ip / IN 14
Fig. 2/80 Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder
15
Overview
The setting values for the relay at station B are:

• Pickup current: Ip / IN = 1.1 100
1 • Time multiplier Tp = 0.11
t 50
Given these settings, the operating time of the relay in B for a
40
close fault in F3 can also be checked: The short-circuit current
30
2 increases to 2,690 A in this case (Fig. 2/80). The corresponding
I / Ip value is 12.23. 20
• With this value and the set value of Tp = 0.11, an operating Tp [s]
time of 0.3 s is obtained again (Fig. 2/81).
10
3 Station A: 3.2
• Adding the time grading interval of 0.3 s, the desired operat- 5
ing itme is tA = 0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6 s. 4 1.6
4 Following the same procedure as for the relay in station B,

the following values are obtained for the relay in station A:
3
2 0.8
• Pickup current: Ip / IN = 1.0
• Time multiplier Tp = 0.17
5 • For the close-in fault at location F4, an operating time of
1
0.4
0.48 s is obtained.
0.50
0.2
The normal way 0.4
6 To prove the selectivity over the whole range of possible short-
0.3
circuit currents, it is normal practice to draw the set of operating 0.1
0.2
curves in a common diagram with double log scales. These
diagrams can be calculated manually and drawn point-by-point
7 or constructed by using templates. 0.1
0.05
Today, computer programs are also available for this purpose.

Fig. 2/82 shows the relay coordination diagram for the selected 0.05
example, as calculated by the Siemens program SIGRADE 2 4 6 8 10 20
8 (Siemens Grading Program).
[A]
p
Note:
To simplify calculations, only inverse-time characteristics have Fig. 2/81 Normal inverse-time characteristic of the 7SJ80 relay
9 been used for this example. About 0.1 s shorter operating times
could have been reached for high-current faults by additionally
applying the instantaneous zones I>> of the 7SJ80 relays.
10 Coordination of overcurrent relays with fuses and

low-voltage trip devices
The procedure is similar to the above-described grading of
overcurrent relays. A time interval of between 0.1 and 0.2 s is Normal inverse
11 usually sufficient for a safe time coordination.
t = ――――――
0.14
(I / Ip)0.02 – 1
· Tp(s)
Strong and extremely inverse characteristics are often more
suitable than normal inverse characteristics in this case.
Fig. 2/83 shows typical examples. Strong inverse characteristics may be used with expulsion-type
12 Simple distribution substations use a power fuse on the
fuses (fuse cutouts), while extremely inverse versions adapt
better to current limiting fuses.
secondary side of the supply transformers (Fig. 2/83a).
In any case, the final decision should be made by plotting the
In this case, the operating characteristic of the overcurrent relay curves in the log-log coordination diagram.
13 at the infeed has to be coordinated with the fuse curve.
Electronic trip devices of LV breakers have long-delay, short-
delay and instantaneous zones. Numerical overcurrent relays
with one inverse-time and two definite-time zones can closely
be adapted to this (Fig. 2/83b).
14
15
Overview
Setting range
IN
Bus-A Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s
Ip = 1.0 IN
Tp = 0.17 s
1
/5 A I>> = 0.1 – 25 IN I>> = ∞
52 Ip = 1.0 IN
7SJ80
Tp = 0.11 s
I>> = ∞
2
Bus-B
Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s
/5 A
I>> = 0.1 – 25 IN
52 7SJ80
3
Ip = 0.7 IN
Bus-C Tp = 0.05 s
I>> = ∞
/5 A Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s
4
7SJ80 I>> = 0.1 – 25 IN
52
13.8/0.4 kV
5
TR 625 kVA
5.0%
fuse VDE 160

HRC fuse 160 A 6
Fig. 2/82 Overcurrent-time grading diagram
7
MV bus
Time Inverse-time relay

51
8
Other Fuse
consumers
n
9
a
LV bus
Fuse 0.2 s
10
Current
a) Maximum fault available at HV bus
Fig. 2/83 Coordination of an overcurrent relay with an MV fuse and low-voltage breaker trip device
11
Coordination of distance relays Where measured line or cable impedances are available, the pro-
tected zone setting may be extended to 90 %. The second and
12
The distance relay setting must take into account the limited
third zones have to keep a safety margin of about 15 to 20 %
relay accuracy, including transient overreach (5 %, according
to the corresponding zones of the following lines. The shortest
to IEC 60255-6), the CT error (1 % for class 5P and 3 % for class
10P) and a security margin of about 5 %. Furthermore, the line
parameters are often only calculated, not measured. This is a
following line always has to be considered (Fig. 2/84).
As a general rule, the second zone should at least reach 20 %
13
further source of errors. A setting of 80 to 85 % is therefore over the next station to ensure backup for busbar faults, and the
common practice; 80 % is used for mechanical relays, while 85 % third zone should cover the longest following line as backup for
can be used for the more accurate numerical relays. the line protection.
14
15
Overview
Grading of zone times
1 The first zone normally operates undelayed. For the grading

of the time delays of the second and third zones, the same Ope-
t
rating 3
Z3A
rules as for overcurrent relays apply (Fig. 2/79, page 2/41). For time t 2 Z2A Z2B
the quadrilateral characteristics (relays 7SA6 and 7SA5), only Z1A Z1B Z1C
t1
the reactance values (X values) have to be considered for the
2 protected zone setting. The setting of the R values should cover
the line resistance and possible arc or fault resistances. The arc
ZL A-B ZL B-C ZLC-D
A B C D
resistance can be roughly estimated as follows: Load Load Load
Z1A = 0.85 · ZLA–B

3 RARC =
2.5⋅ larc
I SSC Min
[Ω] Z2A = 0.85 · (ZLA–B + Z1B)
Z2A = 0.85 · (ZLA–B + Z2B)
larc = Arc length in mm
4 ISCC Min = Minimum short-circuit current in kA Fig. 2/84 Grading of distance zones
• Typical settings of the ratio R / X are:

– Short lines and cables (≤ 10 km): R / X =2 to 6
– Medium line lengths < 25 km: R / X =2 D
5 – Longer lines 25 to 50 km: R / X =1 X
X 3A
Shortest feeder protectable by distance relays C
The shortest feeder that can be protected by underreaching
6 distance zones without the need for signaling links depends on
the shortest settable relay reactance.
X 2A
B
X1A
VTratio
XPrim Min = XRelay Min ⋅
CTratio
7 lmin =
XPrim Min
XLine
ʹ
R1A R 2A R 3A
8 The shortest setting of the numerical Siemens relays is 0.05 Ω
for 1 A relays, corresponding to 0.01 Ω for 5 A relays. This allows A R
distance protection of distribution cables down to the range of
some 500 meters.
9 Breaker failure protection setting

Most numerical relays in this guide provide breaker failure (BF)
protection as an integral function. The initiation of the BF pro- Fig. 2/85 Operating characteristics of Siemens distance relays
tection by the internal protection functions then takes place via
10 software logic. However, the BF protection function may also be
initiated externally via binary inputs by an alternate protection. The reset time is 1 cycle for EHV relays (7SA6 / 52, 7VK61) and
In this case, the operating time of intermediate relays (BFI time) 1.5 to 2 cycles for distribution type relays (7SJ**).
may have to be considered. Finally, the tripping of the infeeding
11 breakers requires auxiliary relays, which add a small time delay
(BFI) to the overall fault clearing time. This is particularly the
Fig. 2/87 (next page) shows the time chart for a typical breaker
failure protection scheme. The stated times in parentheses apply
case with one-breaker-and-a-half or ring bus arrangements for transmission system protection and the times in square
where a separate breaker failure relay (7VK61) is used per brackets for distribution system protection.
12 breaker (Fig. 2/79, Fig. 2/80).

The decisive criterion of BF protection time coordination is the
reset time of the current detector (50BF), which must not be
exceeded under any condition during normal current interrup-
13 tion. The reset times specified in the Siemens numerical relay
manuals are valid for the worst-case condition: interruption of a
fully offset short-circuit current and low current pickup setting
(0.1 to 0.2 times rated CT current).
14
15
Overview
High-impedance differential protection;

verification of design 50BF
The following design data must be established:

1
CT data
The prerequisite for high-impedance scheme is that all CTs 50BF
used for that scheme must have the same ratio. They should
also be of low leakage flux design according to Class PX of IEC P1
A
N
D
2
60044-1 (former Class X of BS 3938) or TPS of IEC 60044-6, O
when used for high-impedance busbar protection scheme. When R
P1: primary P 2: alternate P2
used for restricted ground-fault differential protection of e.g. a
transformer winding especially in solidly grounded networks,
protection protection
3
CTs of Class 5P according to IEC 60044-1 can be used as well.
Fig. 2/86 Breaker failure protection, logic circuit
In each case the excitation characteristic and the secondary
winding resistance are to be provided by the manufacturer. The
knee-point voltage of the CT must be at least twice the relay
Fault incidence BFI =
4
pickup voltage to ensure operation on internal faults.
breaker failure
Normal interrupting time initiation time
The relay Current (intermediate
The relay can be either: Protect. Breaker inter.

detector
(50 BF)
reset time Margin
relays, if any)
BFT =
5
a) dedicated design high-impedance relay, e.g., designed as breaker failure
time time tripping time
a sensitive current relay Reyrolle 7SR23 with external series (1~) (2~) (1~) (2,5~) (auxilary relays,
resistor Rstab. If the series resistor is integrated into the relay, the [2~] [4~] [2~] [2,5~] if any)
setting values may be directly applied in volts; or
b) digital overcurrent protection relay with sensitive current 0,5~
(5~)
[8~]
0,5~
(2~)
[4~]
6
input, like 7SJ6 or 7SR1 (Argus-C). To the input of the relay BFI BF timer (F) (62BF) BFT Adjacent
a series stabilizing resistor Rstab will be then connected as a rule breaker
in order to obtain enough stabilization for the high-impedance
scheme. Typically, a non-linear resistor V (varistor) will be also
Total breaker failure interrupting time
(9~) [15~]
int. time
7
connected to protect the relay and wiring against overvoltages.
Fig. 2/87 Time coordination of BF time setting
Sensitivity of the scheme
For the relay to operate in the event of an internal fault, the
8
primary current must reach a minimum value to supply the relay
pickup current (Iset), the varistor leakage current (Ivar) and the
magnetizing currents of all parallel-connected CTs at the set
pickup voltage. A low relay voltage setting and CTs with low 9
magnetizing current therefore increase the protection sensitivity
Stability during external faults

This check is made by assuming an external fault with maximum mR m 10
through-fault current and full saturation of the CT in the faulty
feeder. The saturated CT is then substituted with its secondary
winding resistance RCT, and the appearing relay voltage VR
corresponds to the voltage drop of the in-feeding currents
(through-fault current) across RCT and Rlead. The current (volt-
UK = CT knee-point voltage
UR = RR · IR
11
age) at the relay must, under this condition, stay reliably below UK = ≥ 2 · UR
the relay pickup value.
In practice, the wiring resistances Rlead may not be equal.
Fig. 2/88 Principle connection diagram for high-impedance restricted
ground-fault protection of a winding of the transformer using
12
In this case, the worst condition with the highest relay voltage SIPROTEC digital overcurrent relay (e.g. 7SJ61)
(corresponding to the highest through-fault current) must be
sought by considering all possible external feeder faults.
Setting
Relay setting Urms C β Varistor type 13
≤ 125 450 0.25 600 A / S1 / S256
The setting is always a trade-off between sensitivity and
125 – 240 900 0.25 600 A / S1 / S1088
stability. A higher voltage setting leads not only to enhanced
through-fault stability but also to higher CT magnetizing and
varistor leakage currents, resulting consequently in a higher
14
primary pickup current.
15
Overview
Calculation example: Moreover, Rstab must have a short time rating large enough to withstand
the fault current levels before the fault is cleared. The time duration of
1 Restricted ground fault protection for the 400 kV winding of 400 MVA
power transformer with Ir, 400 kV = 577 A installed in a switchgear with
0.5 seconds can be typically considered (Pstab, 0.5s) to take into account
longer fault clearance times of back-up protection.
rated withstand short-circuit current of 40 kA.
The rms voltage developed across the stabilizing resistor is decisive for
Given:
the thermal stress of the stabilizing resistor. It is calculated according to
N = 4 CTs connected in parallel; Ipn / Isn = 800 A / 1 A – CT ratio;
formula:
2 Uk = 400 V – CT Knee-point voltage;
Im = 20 mA – CT magnetizing current at Uk;
Urms,relay = 1.3⋅ 4 Uk3 ⋅ Rstab ⋅ I k,max,int
I sn
= 1.3⋅ 4 400 3 ⋅ 1000⋅ 50 = 1738.7 V
RCT = 3 Ω – CT internal resistance; I pn
Rlead = 2 Ω – secondary wiring (lead) resistance
Relay: 7SJ612; Time overcurrent 1Phase input used with setting range The resulting short-time rating Pstab, 0.5 s equals to:
3 Iset = 0.003 A to 1.5 A in steps of 0.001 A; relay internal burden
Rrelay = 50 mΩ Pstab,0.5s =
Urms,relay 2
=
17392
= 3023 W
Stability calculation Rstab 1000
Isn 1 Check whether the voltage limitation by a varistor is required
Us ,min = Ik, max, thr — (RCT + Rlead) = 10,000 ―― (3+2) = 62.6 V
4 Ipn 800
with Ik, max, thr taken as 16 . Ir, 400 kV = 16 . 577 A = 9,232 A, rounded up to 10 kA.
The relay should normally be applied with an external varistor which should
be connected across the relay and stabilizing resistor input terminals. The
varistor limits the voltage across the terminals under maximum internal
The actual stability voltage for the scheme Us can be taken with enough fault conditions. The theoretical voltage which may occur at the terminals
safety margin as Us = 130 V (remembering that 2Us < Uk). can be determined according to following equation:
5 Fault setting calculation

For the desired primary fault sensitivity of 125 A, which is approx. 22 %
Isn
Ipn
1
Uk, max, int = Ik, max, int — (Rrelay + Rstab) = 40,000 —— (0.05+1000) = 50003 V
800
of the rated current of the protected winding Ir, 400 kV (i.e. Ip, des = 125 A) with Ik,max,int taken as the rated short-circuit current of the switchgear = 40 kA.
the following current setting can be calculated:
The resulting maximum peak voltage across the panel terminals
6 Isn Us 1 130
Iset = Ip,des — – N . Im —— = 125 —— – 4 . 0.02 —— = 0.13 A
Ipn Uk 800 400
(i.e. tie with relay and Rstab connected in series):
Stabilizing resistor calculation

( )
Û max,relay = 2 2Uk Uk,max,int = 2 2⋅ 400(50003 − 400) = 12600 V
From the Us and Iset values calculated above the value of the stabilizing Since Umax, relay > 1.5 kV the varistor is necessary.
7 resistor Rstab can be calculated:
Us 130 Exemplarily, a METROSIL of type 600A / S1 / Spec.1088 can be used
Rstab = — – Rrelay = —— – 0.05 = ≈ 1,000 Ω (β = 0.25, C = 900).
Iset 0.13 This Metrosil leakage current at voltage setting Us =130 V equals to
. 1/β
8 where the relay resistance can be neglected.

The stabilizing resistor Rstab can be chosen with a necessary minimum
Irms = 0.52 ( U————
set, rms √2
C
) = 0.91 mA
continuous power rating Pstab,cont of:
and can be neglected by the calculations, since its influence on the
U s2 1302
Pstab,cont ≥ —— = ―― = 16.9 W proposed fault-setting is negligible.
Rstab 1000
9
A higher voltage setting also requires a higher knee-point voltage CT requirements for protection relays
10 of the CTs and therefore greater size of the CTs. A sensitivity of 10
to 20 % of Ir (rated current) is typical for restricted ground-fault Instrument transformers
protection. With busbar protection, a pickup value ≥ Ir is normally Instrument transformers must comply with the applicable
applied. In networks with neutral grounding via impedance the IEC recommendations IEC 60044 and 60186 (PT),
fault setting shall be revised against the minimum ground fault
11 conditions.
ANSI / IEEE C57.13 or other comparable standards.
Voltage transformers (VT)

Non-linear resistor (varistor)
Voltage transformers (VT) in single-pole design for all primary
Voltage limitation by a varistor is needed if peak voltages near
12 or above the insulation voltage (2 kV … 3 kV) are expected. A
voltages have typical single or dual secondary windings of
100, 110 or 115 V / √3 with output ratings between 10 and
limitation to Urms = 1,500 V is then recommended. This can be 50 VA suitable from most application with digital metering and
checked for the maximum internal fault current by applying the protection equipment, and accuracies of 0.1 % to 6 % to suit the
formula shown for Umax relav. A restricted ground-fault protection particular application. Primary BIL values are selected to match
13 may sometimes not require a varistor, but a busbar protection in
general does. However, it is considered a good practice to equip
those of the associated switchgear.
with a varistor all high impedance protection installations. The Current transformers
electrical varistor characteristic of a varistor can be expressed as
Current transformers (CT) are usually of the single-ratio type
14 U = C Iβ where C and β are the varistor constants.
with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating.
Single, double or triple secondary windings of 1 or 5 A are stan-
dard. 1 A rating should, however, be preferred, particularly in HV
and EHV stations, to reduce the burden of the connected lines.
15 Output power (rated burden in VA), accuracy and saturation
characteristics (rated symmetrical short-circuit current limiting

Overview
factor) of the cores and secondary windings must meet the The requirements for protective current transformers for
requirements of the particular application.The CT classification transient performance are specified in IEC 60044-6. In many
code of IEC is used in the following: practical cases, iron-core CTs cannot be designed to avoid satura-
tion under all circumstances because of cost and space reasons,
1
• Measuring cores
These are normally specified 0.2 % or 0.5 % accuracy (class 0.2 particularly with metal-enclosed switchgear.
or class 0.5), and an rated symmetrical short-circuit current The Siemens relays are therefore designed to tolerate CT satura-
limiting factor FS of 5 or 10.
The required output power (rated burden) should be higher
tion to a large extent. The numerical relays proposed in this
guide are particularly stable in this case due to their integrated
2
than the actually connected burden. Typical values are 2.5, 5 saturation detection function.
or 10 VA. Higher values are normally not necessary when only
electronic meters and recorders are connected.
A typical specification could be: 0.5 FS 10, 5 VA.
CT dimensioning formulae
3
Rct + Rb
• Cores for billing values metering K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― (effective)
Rct + R’b
In this case, class 0.25 FS is normally required.
• Protection cores
The size of the protection core depends mainly on the maxi-
Iscc max
with K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――
Ipn
(required) 4
mum short-circuit current and the total burden (internal CT
burden, plus burden of connected lines plus relay burden) The effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor K'SSC can be
Furthermore, a transient dimensioning factor has to be
considered to cover the influence of the DC component in the
calculated as shown in the table above. 5
short-circuit current. The rated transient dimensioning factor Ktd depends on the type
of relay and the primary DC time constant. For relays with a
Glossary of used abbreviations required saturation free time from ≤ 0.4 cycle, the primary (DC)
(according to IEC 60044-6, as defined)
Kssc = Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
time constant TP has little influence. 6
(example: CT cl. 5P20 Kssc = 20) CT design according to BS 3938 / IEC 60044-1 (2000)
K’ssc = Effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor IEC Class P can be approximately transfered into the IEC Class PX
Ktd = Transient dimensioning factor

(BS Class X) standard definition by following formula:
(Rb + Rct) · In · Kssc
7
Issc max = Maximum symmetrical short-circuit current Uk = ―――――――――
1.3
Ipn = CT rated primary current
Example:
Isn = CT rated secondary current IEC 60044: 600 / 1, 5P10, 15 VA, Rct = 4 Ω 8
Rct = Secondary winding d.c. resistance at 75 °C / 167 °F (15 + 4) · 1 · 10
(or other specified temperature) IEC PX or BS: UK = ―――――――― = 146 V
1.3
Rb = Rated resistive burden Rct = 4 Ω
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay = connected resistive burden For CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13 please refer to page 2/50 9
TP = Primary time constant (net time constant) The CT requirements mentioned in Table 2/2 are simplified
UK = Kneepoint voltage (r.m.s.) in order to allow fast CT calculations on the safe side. More
Rrelay = Relay burden
accurate dimensioning can be done by more intensive calcula-
tion with Siemens’s CTDIM (www.siemens.com / ctdim) program.
10
2·ρ·l Results of CTDIM are released by the relay manufacturer.
Rlead = ――――
A
Adaption factor for 7UT6, 7UM62 relays –
with
l = Single conductor length from CT to relay in m
(limited resolution of measurement) 11
ρ = Specific resistance = 0.0175 Ωmm2 / m (copper wires)
Ipn INrelay Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay
at 20 °C / 68 °F (or other specified temperature)
FAdap = ―― · ――― = ――――――― · ――― Request: ⅛ ≤ 8
InO Isn SNmax Isn
A = Conductor cross-section in mm2
7SD52, 53, 610, when transformer inside protected zone 12
In general, an accuracy of 1 % in the range of 1 to 2 times In-pri-CTmax 1
nominal current (class 5 P) is specified. The rated symmetrical ―――― · ―――――― ≤ 8
short-circuit current factor KSSC should normally be selected so In-pri-CTmin Transformer Ratio*
that at least the maximum short-circuit current can be transmit-
ted without saturation (DC component is not considered).
* If transformer in protection zone, else 1 13
In-pri-CT-Transf-Site ≤ 2 · In-Obj-Transf-Site AND
This results, as a rule, in rated symmetrical short-circuit current
factors of 10 or 20 depending on the rated burden of the CT in In-pri-CT-Transf-Site ≥ In-Obj-Transf-Site with
relation to the connected burden. A typical specification for pro- InO = Rated current of the protected object 14
tection cores for distribution feeders is 5P10, 10 VA or 5P20, 5 VA. UnO = Rated voltage of the protected object
INrelay = Rated current of the relay
SNmax = Maximun load of the protected object
(for transformers: winding with max. load) 15
Overview
Relay type Transient dimensioning Min. required sym. short- Min. required knee-point
factor Ktd circuit current factor K’ssc voltage Uk
1 IHigh set point
Overcurrent-time IHigh set point Uk ≥ ――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
K’ssc ≥ ――――― 1.3 · Ipn
and motor protection Ipn
–
7SJ61, 62, 63, 64
2 7SJ80, 7SK80 at least: 20
20
at least: ―― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
1.3
Line differential protection Busbar / Gen. / K’ssc ≥ UK ≥

(without distance function) Transformer Line Motor Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault)
3 7SD52x, 53x, 610 (50 / 60 Hz)
Transformer / generator
1.2 1.2
Busbar /
1.2
Gen. /
Ktd · ―――――――
Ipn
Ktd · ―――――――
1.3 · Ipn
· (Rct + R’b) · Isn
and (only for 7SS):

differential protection Transformer Line Motor and (only for 7SS):
7UT612, 7UT612 V4.0 4 4 5 Iscc max (ext. fault)
――――――― ≤ 100
4 7UT613, 633, 635, 7UT612 V4.6 3
7UM62 4
3
–
5
5
Iscc max (ext. fault)
―――――――
Ipn
≤ 100 Ipn
(measuring range)
Busbar protection for stabilizing factors k ≥ 0.5 (measuring range)
7SS52 0.5
5 Distance protection
7SA522, 7SA6, 7SD5xx
primary DC time constant Tp [ms]
≤ 30 ≤ 50 ≤ 100 ≤ 200
K’ssc ≥
Iscc max (close – in fault)
Ktd (a) · ―――――――――
UK ≥
Iscc max (close – in fault)
Ktd (a)· ――――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
(with distance function) Ktd (a) 1 2 4 4 Ipn 1.3 · Ipn
Ktd (b) 4 5 5 5 and: and:
6 Iscc max (zone 1 – end fault)

Ktd (b) · ――――――――――
Ipn
Iscc max (zone 1 – end fault)
Ktd (b) · ―――――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
1.3 · Ipn
Table 2/2 CT requirements
8 132 kV, 50 Hz
-T (G S2) -G1 -T (T LV1)) -T1

9 6,000/1 A
5P20
120 MVA
13.8 kV,
6,000/1 A
5P20
240/120/120 MVA
132/13.8/13.8 kV -T (T HV)
1,200/5 A
-T (L end 1)
1,000/5 A
-T (L end 2)
1,500/1 A
20 VA 50 Hz 20 VA 50 Hz
Rct = 18 x“d = 0.16 Rct = 18 uk 1-2 = 14 % 5P20 BS cl.X
50 VA Uk = 200 V
G 2 Rct = 0.96 Rct = 0.8
10 3~ 1)
3
1 7.5 kA
35.8 kA 34.5 kA 1 = HV
2 = LV1 17 kA
I = 60 m I = 40 m 3 = LV2 l = 100 m l = 60 m (given)
11 A = 4 mm2 A = 4 mm2
-G2
A = 4 mm2 A = 4 mm2
7UM62 7UT633 7SD52*) 7SD52
*) without
12 CB
x“d
uk 1-2
arrangement inside power station is not shown
= Generator direct axis subtransient reactance in p.u.
= Transformer impedance voltage HV side – LV side in %
distance function
Rrelay = Assumed with 0.1 , (power consumption for above relays is below 0.1 VA)
1) Current from side 3 is due to uk 2-3 and x“d of G2 in most cases negligible
13 Fig. 2/89 Example 1 – CT verification for 7UM62, 7UT6, 7SD52 (7SD53, 7SD610)
14
15
Overview
-T (G S2), 7UM62 -T (T LV1), 7UT633 -T (T HV), 7UT633 -T (L end 1), 7SD52
c · SNG
Iscc max (ext. fault) = ――――――
√3 · UNG x“d
SNT
√3 · UNT uk“
SNT
√3 · UNT uk“
Iscc max (ext. fault) = 17 kA (given) 1
1.1 · 120,000 kVA 120,000 kVA 240,000 kVA
= ――――――――― = 34,516 A = ――――――――― = 35,860 A = ――――――――― = 7,498 A
√3 · 13.8 kV · 0.16 √3 · 13.8 kV · 0.14 √3 · 132 kV · 0.14
2
Ktd = 5 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 3 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 3 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 1.2 (from Table 2/2)
Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault)
3
K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――――― K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――――― K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ―――――――
Ipn Ipn Ipn
31,378 A
= 5 · ――――― = 28.8
6,000 A
35,860 A
= 3 · ――――― = 17.9
6,000 A
7,498 A
= 3 · ――――― = 18,7
1,200 A
4
Sn 20 VA Sn 20 VA Sn 50 VA
Rb = ――
I2sn
= ――― = 20 Ω
1 A2
Rb = ――
I2sn
= ――― = 20 Ω
1 A2
Rb = ―― = ――― = 2 Ω
I2sn (5 A)2 5
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay
2·p·l 2·p·l 2·p·l 2·p·l

Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A
Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A
Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A
Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A 6
Ω mm2 Ω mm2 Ω mm2 Ω mm2
2 · 0.0175 ――― · 60 m 2 · 0.0175 ――― · 640 m 2 · 0.0175 ――― · 100 m 2 · 0.0175 ――― · 60 m
m m m m
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2 7
+ 0.1 Ω + 0.1 Ω + 0.1 Ω + 0.1 Ω
= 0.625 Ω = 0.450 Ω = 0.975 Ω = 0.625 Ω
Iscc max (ext. fault)

8
Rct + Rb Rct + Rb Rct + Rb UK ≥ Ktd · ――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― 1.3 · Ipn
Rct + R’b Rct + R’b Rct + R’b
18 Ω + 20 Ω
= 20 · ――――――― = 40.8
18 Ω + 20 Ω
= 20 · ――――――― = 41.2
0.96 Ω + 2 Ω
= 20 · ――――――――― = 30.6
17,000 A
= 1.2 · ――――― · (0.8 Ω + 0.625 Ω) ·5 A
1.3 · 1,000 A 9
18 Ω + 0.625 Ω 18 Ω + 0.450 Ω 0.96 Ω + 0.975 Ω
= 111.8 V
K’ssc required = 28.8, K’ssc required = 17.9, K’ssc required = 18.7, UK required = 111.8 V,
Kssc effective = 40.8 Kssc effective = 41.2 Kssc effective = 30.6 UK effective = 200 V 10
28.8 < 40.8 17.9 < 41.2 18.7 < 30.6 111.8 V < 200 V
CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok
Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay

FAdap = ―――――― · ―――
FAdap = ―――――― · ―――
FAdap = ―――――― · ―――
Ipn max
――― ≤8
11
SNmax Isn SNmax Isn SNmax Isn Ipn min
6,000 A · √3 · 13.8 kV 1A 6,000 A · √3 · 13.8 kV 1A 1,200 A · √3 · 132 kV 5A 1,500 A

= ――――――――――― · ――
120,000 kVA 1A
= ――――――――――― · ――
240,000 kVA 1A
= ――――――――――― · ――
240,000 kVA 5A
―――― = 1.5 ≤ 8
1,000 A
ok!
12
= 1.195 = 0.598 = 1.143
⅛ ≤ 1.195 ≤ 8 ok! ⅛ ≤ 0.598 ≤ 8 ok! ⅛ ≤ 1.143 ≤ 8 ok!
Table 2/3 Example 1 (continued) – verification of the numerical differential protection

13
Attention (only for 7UT6 V4.0): When low-impedance REF is Further condition for 7SD52x, 53x, 610 relays (when used as
used, the request for the REF side (3-phase) is:
¼ ≤ FAdap ≤ 4, (for the neutral CT: ⅛ ≤ FAdap ≤ 8)
line differential protection without transformer inside protected
zone): Maximum ratio between primary currents of CTs at the 14
end of the protected line:
Ipn max
――― ≤8
Ipn min 15
Overview
Given case:
Analog static relays in general have burdens below about 1 VA.
1 Mechanical relays, however, have a much higher burden, up to

the order of 10 VA. This has to be considered when older relays
are connected to the same CT circuit.
l = 50 m
2 A = 6 mm2
In any case, the relevant relay manuals should always be
consulted for the actual burden values.
7SS52
Burden of the connection leads

3 600/1
5 P 10,
scc.max. = 30 kA The resistance of the current loop from the CT to the relay has to
15 VA, be considered:
Rct = 4
2·ρ·l
Rlead = ――――
4 Fig. 2/90 Example 2
A
l = Single conductor length from the CT to the relay in m

Specific resistance:
Iscc max 30,000 A
Ω · mm2
5 ―――
Ipn
= ―――― = 50
600 A ρ = 0.0175 ―――― (copper wires) at 20 °C / 68 °F
m
According to Table 2/2, page 2/48 Ktd = ½ A = Conductor cross-section in mm2
6 K’ssc
1
≥ ― · 50 = 25
2 CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13
15 VA Class C of this standard defines the CT by ist secondary terminal

7 Rb = ―――
1 A2
= 15 Ω
voltage at 20 times rated current, for which the ratio error shall
not exceed 10 %. Standard classes are C100, C200, C400 and
Rrelay = 0.1 Ω C800 for 5 A rated secondary current.
8 Rlead
2 · 0.0175 · 50
= ――――――― = 0.3 Ω
6
This terminal voltage can be approximately calculated from the
IEC data as follows:
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay = 0.3 Ω + 0.1 Ω = 0.4 Ω ANSI CT definition

9 K’ssc
Rct + Rb
= ――――
4 Ω + 15 Ω
· Kssc = ――――― · 10 = 43.2
Us.t.max
Kssc
= 20 · 5 A · Rb · ――
20
Rct + R’b 4 Ω + 0.4 Ω
with
Pb
10 Result: Rb = ――
Isn2
and INsn = 5 A, the result is
The effective K’ssc is 43.2, the required K’ssc is 25. Therefore the
Pb · Kssc
stability criterion is fulfilled. Us.t.max = ――――
5A
11 Relay burden Example:

IEC 600 / 5, 5P20, 25 VA,
The CT burdens of the numerical relays of Siemens are below
60044
0.1 VA and can therefore be neglected for a practical estimation.
Exception is the pilot-wire relay 7SD600. ANSI (25 VA · 20)
12 C57.13: Us.t.max = ―――――― = 100 V, acc. to class C100
5A
Intermediate CTs are normally no longer necessary, because the
ratio adaptation for busbar protection 7SS52 and transformer
protection is numerically performed in the relay.
13
14
15
Software for Engineering and Data Evaluation
Page
DIGSI 4 an operating software

for all SIPROTEC protection relays 3/3
IEC 61850 System Configurator 3/5
SIGRA 4 powerful analysis

of all protection fault records 3/7
DIGSI 4 – Description
Description
The PC operating program DIGSI 4 is the user interface to all

Siemens protection devices, up to and including SIPROTEC 4 and
SIPROTEC Compact. It has a simple and intuitive user interface.
Using DIGSI 4, the parameters for the SIPROTEC devices are set
and evaluated – it is the tailor-made program for industrial and
energy supply systems.
Functions
LSP2324-afpen.tif
• Simple protection settings
The functions actually required can simply be selected from
the numerous protection functions. This facilitates increased
clarity over the other menus.
• Setting devices with primary and secondary values
Fig. 3/3 CFC Chart
The settings can be entered and displayed as primary or secon-
dary values. You can switch between primary and secondary • Commissioning
values using the mouse click on the toolbar. Special attention was paid to commissioning. All binary inputs
and outputs can be individually tested and read. This enables
an extremely simple wiring check. For test purposes, messages
can be intentionally sent to the serial interfaces.
• IEC 61850 System Configurator
Using the IEC 61850 system configurator, which is launched
from the DIGSI manager, the IEC 61850 network structure and
the scope of the data exchange between the participants of
an IEC 61850 station can be defined. To do so, subnetworks
sc_digsi4_main_menue.tif
are added as required to the network working area. These

subnetworks are then allocated available participants and the
addressing is set. In the GOOSE working area, the data objects
between the participants are linked, for example, the pickup
indication of the V/AMZ I> function of the feeder 1, which is
transmitted to the infeed, in order to effect the reverse interlo-
cking of the V/AMZ I>> function there. For more information,
see "IEC 61850 System Configurator – Description".
Fig. 3/1 DIGSI 4: Main Menu, Selecting the Protection Functions
• Routing matrix
The DIGSI 4 matrix shows the user the entire device configu-
ration at a glance. For instance, the allocation of LEDs, binary
inputs and standard relays is displayed on one screen. The
routing can be changed with the click of a mouse.
sc_digsi4_matrix1.tif
DIGSI 4_IEC 61850.tif
Fig. 3/2 DIGSI 4: Routing Matrix
• CFC: Configure logic instead of programming it

Using CFC (Continuous Function Chart), interlockings and Fig. 3/4 IEC 61850 System Configurator
switching sequences can be configured, information linked
and derived without software expertise simply by drawing
technical processes. Logical elements such as AND, OR and
timing elements are available, as are limiting value interroga-
tions of measured values.

DIGSI 4 – Selection and Ordering Data
Description Variants Order no.

Software for project engineering Basic 7XS5400-0AA00
and operation of Siemens protection Basic version with license for 10 computers (authorization using serial
devices of the SIPROTEC 4/3/2 and number)
SIPROTEC Compact product families,
executable under the following Professional 7XS5402-0AA00
operating systems: Basic and in addition SIGRA (fault-record analysis), CFC editor (logic editor),
- Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate, display editor (editor for basic and branch control images) and DIGSI 4
Professional and Enterprise (32/64 remote (remote control) with license for 10 computers (authorization using
Bit) serial number)
- Microsoft Windows 10 Professional DIGSI 4 Professional + IEC 61850 7XS5403-0AA00
and Enterprise (64 Bit) Professional und zusätzlich IEC 61850 System Confi gurator mit Lizenz für 10
- Microsoft Windows Server Rechner (Autorisierung per Seriennummer)
2008/2012 R2 (64 Bit)
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 basic to DIGSI 4 professional 7XS5407-0AA00
See product information for details
about the supported service packs of Upgrade from DIGSI 4 basic to DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850 7XS5408-0AA00
the operating systems.
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 professional to DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850 7XS5460-0AA00
Including device templates, Comt-
rade Viewer, electronic help, DIGSI DIGSI 4 Trial 7XS5401-1AA00
cables (for all devices) and service Like DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850, but only valid for 30 days (test
(update, hotline). version, no authorization necessary)
Interface languages: German, DIGSI 4 scientific 7XS5402-2AA00
English, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Russian, and Turkish Like DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850, only for scientific equipment (univer-
(selectable) sity, technical college, research institution) with license for 10 computers
(authorization using serial number)
Delivery is on DVD-ROM
DIGSI 4 DVD copy 7XS5490-0AA00
Contains latest DIGSI 4, IEC 61850 system configurator and SIGRA, without
license
Table 1 DIGSI 4 Selection and Ordering Data
3/4 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8.1

IEC 61850 System Configurator – Description
Description IEDs from the IEC 61850 standard of Edition 1 or Edition 2 are
supported. The possible engineering therefore includes not only
GOOSE communication and client/server configuration via MMS
The IEC 61850 system configurator is the manufacturer-inde-
reporting, but also system topology, process bus communication
pendent solution for the interoperable engineering of IEC 61850
with SMV (sampled measured values) and IEC 60870-5-104
products and systems. It supports all devices with IEC 61850,
addresses for the gateway to the network control center via
not just Siemens products – like SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4,
IEC 61850-80-1.
SIPROTEC Compact, Reyrolle, SICAM RTUs, SICAM IO/AI/P85x/
Q100 – but also devices from other Siemens divisions (such as Simple engineering thanks to customer-friendly workflows and
SITRAS PRO) or from third parties. universal display of IEC 61850 addresses as well as customer
description texts. Users with IEC 61850 basic or expert know-
The tool supports SCL configuration files (substation confi-
ledge find the desired level of detail.
guration language) from the IEC 61850-6 through import or
export of all formats (ICD/IID/CID/SCD/SSD/SED). Thus, IEC 61850
devices can be added and a complete IEC 61850 station is
available for substation automation technology.
Fig. 3/5 An IEC 61850 System Configurator for All Devices in the Station

IEC 61850 System Configurator – Selection and Ordering Data

IEC 61850 System Configurator Stand-alone 7XS5461-0A A00
Software for configuring stations with IEC 61850 communication For configuration independent from
Executable under 32-bit and 64-bit MS Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise manufacturers of a plant with IEC 61850
and Professional/MS Windows 8.1/MS Windows Server 2012 R2 64-bit/MS devices (SIPROTEC, Reyrolle and devices
Windows 10 Professional and Enterprise (64 Bit) from the competition), installation
See product information for supported service packs of the operating independent from DIGSI, with license for
systems including electronic help and service (update, hotline) 10 computers (authorization using serial
number)
Interface languages: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Portugue-
se, Chinese, Russian and Turkish selectable Supplied on DVD-ROM.
Table 2 SIGRA – Selection and Ordering Data

SIGRA – Description
Description
The SIGRA user program supports you in analyzing failures in

your electrical power system. It graphically analyzes data recor-
ded during the failure and calculates additional supplemental
quantities such as impedances, powers or RMS values, from the
supplied measured values, making evaluation of the fault record
easier for you.
The quantities can be shown as desired in the diagrams of the
views
• Time signals
• Phasor diagrams Fig. 3/6 SIGRA 4
• Locus diagrams • Calculation of additional values, such as positive-sequence
• Harmonics impedances, RMS values, symmetrical components and
• Fault locator phasors
• 2 measuring cursors that are synchronized in all views
and in the ”Table” view.
• High-performance panning and zoom functions
After a system incident, it is especially important to quickly and (for example, section enlargement)
completely analyze the error, so that the respective measures
• User-friendly project engineering via drag and drop
can be derived immediately from the cause analysis. This will
enable the original network status to be recovered and the down • Innovative signal routing in a clearly structured matrix
time to be reduced to an absolute minimum. • Time-saving user profiles, which can be assigned to individual
relay types or series
As well as the usual time signal display of the recorded
measured quantity, the current version is also set up to display • Addition of further fault records and synchronization of
vector, pie and bar charts to show the harmonics and data multiple fault records with a common time base
tables. From the measured values recorded in the fault records, • Simple documentation through copying of the diagrams for
SIGRA 4 calculates further values, for instance missing quantities example, into MS Office programs
in the 3-phase electrical power system, impedances, outputs, • Offline fault-location determination
symmetrical components, etc. Using two measurement cursors,
• Commenting of fault records, and commenting of individual
the fault current can be evaluated easily and conveniently. With
measuring points in diagrams and free placement of these
the aid of SIGRA however, further fault record can also be added.
comments in diagrams
The signals from another fault record (for example, from the
opposite end of the line) are added to the current signal pattern • Application of mathematical operations to signals
using drag and drop.
Hardware Requirements
SIGRA 4 facilitates the display of signals from various fault • Pentium 4 with 1 GHz processor or similar
records in one diagram as well as a fully automated synchroni-
zation of these signals on a common time base. As well as the • 1 GB RAM (2 GB recommended)
precise determination of the individual factors of the line fault, • Graphic display with resolution of 1024 × 768
the fault location is also of particular interest. (1280 × 1024 recommended)
A precise determination of the fault location saves time which • 50 MB available hard disk space
the user can use for an on-site inspection of the error. This • DVD ROM drive
function is also supported by SIGRA 4 using the ”offline fault • Keyboard and mouse
location” function. SIGRA 4 can be used for all fault records in
the COMTRADE file format. Software requirements
The functions and advantages of SIGRA 4 can often only be • MS Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise and Professional
optimally displayed directly on the product. For this reason, • MS Windows 8.1 Enterprise
SIGRA 4 is available as a 30-day test version. • MS Windows Server 2008 R2
Functions
• 6 diagram types:
–– Time-signal representation (standard)
–– Locus diagram (for example for RX)
–– Vector diagram (reading of angles)
–– Bar chart (for example for visualizing harmonics)
–– Table (with values of several signals at the same point in
time)
–– Fault-location determination (display of fault location)

SIGRA – Selection and Ordering Data

SIGRA SIGRA for DIGSI 7XS5410-0AA00
Software for graphical visualization, analysis and evaluation of fault With license for 10 computers (authori-
records zation using serial number). The DIGSI 4
Executable under 32-bit and 64-bit MS Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise license number is required to order.
and Professional/MS Windows 8.1 Enterprise/MS Windows Server 2008 R2 SIGRA Stand-alone 7XS5416-0AA00
See product information for supported service packs of the operating Installation without DIGSI 4 with license
systems including sample fault record, electronic help and service for 10 computers (authorization using
(update, hotline) serial number)
Interface languages: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, SIGRA Scientific 7XS5416-1AA00
Russian and Turkish, selectable
Installation without DIGSI 4 only for
Incl. Multimedia Tutorial on separate CD-ROM scientific equipment (university, technical
Supplied on DVD-ROM. college, research institution) with license
for 10 computers (authorization using
serial number)
SIGRA Trial 7XS5411-1AA00
Like SIGRA Stand-alone version but only
usable for 30-days (no authorization
required)
Upgrade from SIGRA Trial to SIGRA 7XS5416-2AA00
Stand-alone
Like SIGRA Stand-alone version for
customers who want to activate a trial
version with full capabilities and a license
for 10 computers
Table 3 SIGRA – Selection and Ordering Data

Communication
Page
Description 4/3
Function overview 4/3
Typical applications 4/5
Integration into substation control systems 4/7
Integration into the SICAM power automation system 4/9
Integration into the substation automation system 4/10 4

Integration into the SICAM PAS power automation system 4/11
Solution without substation control system 4/12

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Description, function overview
Function overview
Description 1
• Remote communication with DIGSI
• Remote communication with SIPROTEC
4 units
• Remote communication with SIPROTEC
2
3 units and SIPROTEC ‘600 units
Typical applications
• SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485 bus
3
• SIPROTEC 4 units with FO/RS485
• Mixed system SIPROTEC 4
• Configuration with active star-coupler 4
Integration into substation control
systems
Integration into the SICAM power

5
automation system
Integration into other systems

Fig. 4/1 Communication structure 6
Description
Communication interfaces on protection relays are becoming 7

increasingly important for the efficient and economical opera-
tion of substations and networks. The interfaces can be used for:
• Accessing the protection relays from a PC using the DIGSI oper-
ating program. Remote access via modem, Ethernet modem 8
is possible with a serial service port at the relay. This allows
remote access to all data of the protection relay.
• Integrating the relays into control systems with IEC 60870-
5-103 protocol, PROFIBUS DP protocol, DNP 3.0 protocol, 9
MODBUS protocol, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and Redundancy
protocols for Ethernet (RSTP; PRP and HSR).
The standardized IEC 61850 protocol is available since Oct.
2004 and with its SIPROTEC units Siemens has provided this 10
standard as the first manufacturer worldwide.
• Peer-to-peer communication of differential relays and distance
relays to exchange real-time protection data via fiber-optic
cables, communication network, telephone networks or
analog pilot wires.
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Description
Description
1 Remote communication with DIGSI

By using the remote communication
functions of DIGSI it is possible to access
2 relays from your office via the telephone

network. So you do not have to drive
to the substation at all and, if you need
to carry out a quick fault analysis, for
example, you can transfer the fault data
3 into your office in just a few minutes so
that you can use DIGSI to evaluate it.
Another alternative is the ability to access
4 all the units of a substation from a central

point within that station. This saves you
having to connect your PC individually to
all the relays in the station.
5 In both cases you need a few simple

communication units and a PC with DIGSI
and a remote communication component
installed. The data traffic with DIGSI uses
a secure protocol based on the IEC stand-
6 ard similar to IEC 60870-5-103 so that, Fig. 4/2 Remote relay communication
amongst other things, the relays have
unique addresses for accessing purposes.
7 A high level of data integrity is achieved through the check sum

incorporated in the telegram. Any telegrams that might become
Since Oct. 2004, a relay can be accessed remotely with DIGSI via
an Ethernet interface in the relay and with the IEC 61850 pro-
distorted during transmission are repeated. A comparison of tocol. This allows access to the relays via an Ethernet network.
parameters between relay and PC to ensure that they match also Some relays include a Web server, so an Internet browser can
improves the integrity. There are other security functions too also be used for remote access via Ethernet.
8 such as passwords and a substation modem callback function
which can also be triggered from events.
Remote communication with SIPROTEC 4 units

9 SIPROTEC 4 units are well equipped for remote communication.
A separate serial service interface for the protection engineer,
independent of the system interface, allows the units to be
easily integrated into any communication configuration. The
10 front interface then remains free for local operation. Together
with a flexibility in the choice of interface, i.e. optical with an
ST connector for multi-mode FO cables or electrical for RS232 or
RS485 hard-wired connections, it is easy to create the optimum
11 solution for any particular application.
With SIPROTEC 4 units you can also use PROFIBUS DP to provide
a central link with DIGSI via the control system interface. For
this you will need a PC with a special PROFIBUS card that must
12 be connected to the PROFIBUS system. This solution is intended
exclusively for SIPROTEC 4 units with PROFIBUS DP.
13
14
15
Communication
An extensive range of communication 1

components, such as modems, star
couplers, optoelectric converters,
prefabricated FO connection cables and
electric connection cables (see part 13 of
this catalog) allows you to create a variety
2
of different solutions: FO connections
immune to interference or cost-effective
solutions using the two-wire RS485
electric bus.
3
The following examples give some indica-
tion of what configurations are possible,
which items are needed for the purpose
and what baud rates are possible.
4
Example 1: SIPROTEC 4 units on an
RS485 bus
Remote communication is effected via
5
a private or public telephone network
with both analog or digital telephone
lines being possible. An Ethernet network
can also be used together with Ethernet Fig. 4/3 SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485 bus (Example 1) 6
modems. The 8N1 data format and an
analog baud rate of 57.6/64 kbit/s have
become established as the standard
for serial modem links. The connection 7
between modem and units is initially
optical. An FO/RS485 converter 7XV5650
that can be installed close to the units
then converts the signals for the RS485
bus. Up to 31 relays can be connected to
8
the RS485 bus. Particularly in the case of
modems, we recommend the use of the
types of units listed in part 13.
9
Example 2: SIPROTEC 4 units with
FO/RS485
In the case of larger substations with
longer distances we recommend the use
10
of FO connection cables. The following
example shows a mixed system of optical
and electrical connections. Typically, all
relays in a cubicle can be linked together 11
via RS485 and the cubicles themselves
can be connected to the star coupler via
FO cables (see Fig. 4/4).
Fig. 4/4 Two groups of SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485bus (Example 2) 12
13
14
15
Communication
Example 3: Mixed system – SIPROTEC 4
1 Relays from different families can be

integrated into a remote communication
system, as illustrated in Example 3 (see
Fig. 4/5). This example also shows how
relays can be integrated by means of FO
2 links and star couplers. In this case we
recommend to use the 7XV5550 active
mini star-coupler (see Fig. 4/6).
Communication will then generally be
3 at 57.6/64 kbit/s on the modem link. For
any units that cannot operate at this baud
rate the active star-coupler will convert
the rate accordingly.
4 Example 4: Configuration with active
star- coupler
With this configuration it is also possible
5 to integrate relays that can only be con-
nected via the front interface and whose
maximum baud rates are less than
19.2 kbaud (see Fig. 4/6).
6 The following points must be noted with
this type of configuration: Fig. 4/5 Mixed system, FO/RS485 with units from different families (Example 3)
• One output of the active mini star-cou-
pler is used to service several SIPROTEC
7 4 units through further star couplers or RS485 converters. On The solutions for central and/or remote communication with
that output, a mixed system containing SIPROTEC 3 and series SIPROTEC units have easy upgrade compatibility. Different ver-
‘600 relays should be avoided so that 57600 baud operation is sions of relays can be integrated into a remote communication
possible for SIPROTEC 4 relays. concept. This is supported by the substation and device manage-
8 • Several SIPROTEC 3 units and series ‘600 relays can also be ment in the DIGSI software. A substation can be retrofitted with
add-on remote communication components provided it has
connected to another output of the active mini star-coupler
(via mini star-couplers or RS485 converters). The baud rate for the communication connection available. And changing of the
this output must be set less or equal to 19200 baud. telephone line from, say, analog to digital does not necessitate
9 • Relays that are not available with communication functions
according to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (e.g. 7VE51, 7VK51,
the replacement of all components. Also, Ethernet networks
can be used. The telephone modem is then replaced by an
7SV51 and older firmware versions of some relays) can also be Ethernet modem. The infrastructure in the substation remains
connected via the active star-coupler as illustrated in Fig. 4/6. unchanged.
10 In this case one output must be assigned to each relay. The

baud rate must be set according to the unit.
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Typical applications, integration into substation control systems
7
Fig. 4/6 Mixed system with relays from different families, with active star-coupler (Example 4)
8
Integration into substation control systems An overview which communication protocols are available in
the various SIPROTEC relays can be found in the Internet at
Almost all SIPROTEC units can be integrated into substation
control systems via communication interfaces.
www. siemen.com/siprotec or in the catalog "Selection Guide for
SIPROTEC and Reyrolle" 9
The relays can be supplied as part of an integrated Siemens
system offering all substation control and protection. In addi-
tion, the relays can also be integrated into other control systems
via standard protocols. An integrated system offers type-tested
10
functions, consistent con-figuration and optimally coordinated
communication protocols. SICAM PAS and SICAM RTUs are
proven systems available from Siemens. These systems, also
offer Ethernet communication with IEC 61850.
11
For situations where you would like to integrate SIPROTEC units
into other control systems we can offer open communication
interfaces. In addition to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol that is
available in almost all relays we can also offer other communica-
12
tion protocols for SIPROTEC 4 units like PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS,
DNP 3.0, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and Redundancy protocols for
Ethernet (RSTP;PRP and HSR).
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into substation control systems
IEC 61850 protocol ands to one or two (redundant) masters. Switchgear can be
switched in command direction via the protocol.
1 Since Oct. 2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the
worldwide standard for protection and control systems used by
Time synchronization can be implemented via SNTP or IEEE1588
via the network, supporting redundant time servers. All addi-
power supply corporations, Siemens was the first manufacturer
tional services on Ethernet like the DIGSI 5 protocol, network
to support the protocol in its devices. By means of this protocol,
redundany or SNMP for network monitoring can be activated
information can also be exchanged directly between bay units
2 so as to enable the creation of simple masterless systems for bay
and system interlocking. Access to the units via the Ethernet bus
at the same time as Modbus TCP and GOOSE messages of
IEC 61850 can be sent over the network between the devices.
is also possible with DIGSI. Serial DNP3 or DNP3 TCP
3 WebMonitor DNP 3 is supported as a serial protocol via RS485 or an optical

820 nm interface, and as an Ethernet-based TCP variant via
It will also be possible to retrieve operating and fault messages
the electrical or optical Ethernet module. In conjunction with
and fault recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also
Ethernet, the switch integrated in the module can be used such
provide a few items of unit specific information in browser
that redundant ring structures for DNP 3 can be realized. In
4 windows.
this way, for example, connection to a DNP 3 via a redundant
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol optical Ethernet ring can be established. Information about a
device, and the fault records of the device, can be routed and
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for transferred using the DNP 3 protocol. Switching commands can
5 the transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All
messages from the unit (and also control commands) can be
be executed in the control direction.
transferred via published, Siemens-specific extensions. Redundant connection to 2 serial substation controllers can be
established via 2 modules or 1 serial double module. With Eth-
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol ernet, 2 Ethernet modules that can work independently of one
6 The IEC 60870-5-104 substation and power system automation
another via 1 or 2 networks are to be provided for a redundant
connection. Settings values in the device cannot be read or
protocol is supported via the electrical and optical Ethernet mod- changed via the protocol.
ule. Indications (single and double), measured values, metered
7 values can be transmitted to one or two (redundant) masters.
IEC 104 file transfer is also supported and fault recordings can
For DNP 3, the network topologies can also be used for Ethernet-
based or serial communication.
be read out of the device in Comtrade format. In the command
direction, secured switching of switching objects is possible via PROFINET
the protocol. Time synchronization can be supported via the
8 T104 master or via SNTP across the network.Redundant time
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor of Profibus DP and
is supported in the variant PROFINET I/O. The protocol which
servers are supported. All auxiliary services on Ethernet such as is used in industry together with the SIMATIC systems control
the DIGSI 5 protocol, network redundancy, or SNMP for network is realized on the optical and electrical Plus ethernet modules
monitoring can be activated concurrently with T104. Moreover, which are delivered since November 2012. All network redun-
9 GOOSE messages of IEC 61850 can be exchanged between
devices.
dancy procedures which are available for the ethernet modules,
such as RSTP, PRP or HSR, are also available for PROFINET. The
PROFIBUS DP protocol time synchronization is made via SNTP. The network monitor-
ing is possible via SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist for
10 PROFIBUS DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial auto-
mation. Via PROFIBUS DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the device also supports the
monitoring of the network topology. Single-point indications,
available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, double-point indications, measured and metered values can be
receive commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can transmitted cyclically in the monitoring direction via the protocol
11 also be transferred. The information is assignable to a mapping

file with DIGSI.
and can be selected by the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
are also transmitted spontaneously via confi gurable process
alarms. Switching commands can be executed by the system
Modbus RTU protocol control via the device in the controlling direction. The PROFINET
implementation is certified. The device also supports the IEC
12 This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry
and by power supply corporations, and is supported by a num- 61850 protocol as a server on the same ethernet module in
ber of unit vendors. SIPROTEC units behave as MODBUS slaves, addition to the PROFINET protocol. Client server connections are
making their information available to a master or receiving possible for the intercommunication between devices, e.g. for
information from it. Information is assignable to a mapping file transmitting fault records and GOOSE messages.
13 with DIGSI.
Redundancy protocols for Ethernet (RSTP; PRP and HSR)
Protocol Modbus TCP The redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR can be loaded and
The Modbus TCP communication protocol is supported by the activated easily via software on the existing optical Ethernet
14 electrical or optical Ehternet module. Modbus TCP and Modbus
RTU are very similar, with Modbus TCP using TCP/IP packets for
modules. PRP and HSR guarantee a redundant, uninterruptible
and seamless data transfer in Ethernet networks without exten-
data transfer. sive parameter settings in the switches.
Modbus TCP can be used to transmit indications (single- and
15 double-point indications), measured values, metered measure-

Communication
Integration into the SICAM power automation system
Substation control port B Port C
Alarms
IEC 61850
with
IEC 60870-5-103 PROFIBUS DP
with with
MODBUS
with
DNP 3.0
with
DNP3
with
TCP 4) PROFINET 4)
with
DIGSI
with
1
(relay Æ central unit) time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp
Commands
(BC/central unit Æ relay)
Measured values
2
Time 1)
synchronization
Fault records Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port 3
(sampled values) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)3)
Protection settings (with DIGSI) Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port
(with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3)
Parameter group 4
switchover
RSTP/PRP/HSR
1) There is no time synchronization via this protocol. For time

Integration into the SICAM power automation system
5
synchronization purposes it is possible to use a separate time
synchronization interface (Port A in SIPROTEC 4 relays).
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with the power automation
2) The transmission of fault records is not part of the protocol. They can
be read out with DIGSI via the service interface Port C or the front
operating interface.
system SICAM. The SICAM family comprises the following
components: 6
• SICAM RTUs, the modern telecontrol systems with automation
3) This protocol does not support the transmission of protection
and programmable logic functions
settings. Only setting groups can be changed. For this purpose you
should use the service interface or the front operating interface
together with DIGSI.
• SICAM PAS, the substation automation system based on
computer hardware
7
4) Only 7SJ61/62/64; 7SJ80/7SK80; 7SC80 Data management and communication is one of the strong
points of the SICAM / SIPROTEC 4 system. Powerful engineering
tools make working with SICAM convenient and easy. SIPROTEC 4
units are optimally matched for use in SICAM PAS. With SICAM
8
and SIPROTEC 4 continuity exists at three crucial points:
• Data management
• Software architecture 9
• Communication
The ability to link SICAM/ SIPROTEC to other substation control,
protection and automation components is assured, thanks
to open interfaces such as IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and 10
the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol. Other protocols like
PROFIBUS DP, DNP 3.0, MODBUS, RTU, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and
Redundancy protocols for Ethernet (RSTP;PRP and HSR) are also
supported. 11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into substation automation system
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with

the SICAM substation automation system.
1 Over the low-cost electrical RS485 bus,
the units exchange information with
the control system. Units featuring
IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be
2 connected to SICAM interference free and
radially by fiber-optic link. Through this
interface, the system is open for the con-
nection of units of other manufacturers.
4
Fig. 4/7 Communication structure with substation automation system
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into the SICAM PAS power automation system
Integration into the SICAM PAS power

automation system
1
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with
the SICAM power automation system
together with IEC 61850 protocol. Via
the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet bus, the units
are linked electrically or optically to the
2
station PC with PAS. Connection may be
simple or redundant. The interface is
standardized, thus also enabling direct
connection of units of other manufactur-
3
ers to the Ethernet bus. Units featuring an
IEC 60870-5-103 interface or other serial
protocols are connected via the Ethernet
station bus to SICAM PAS by means of 4
serial/Ethernet converters (see Fig. 4/8).
DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be
used over the same station bus.
Together with Ethernet/IEC 61850, an 5
interference-free optical solution is also
provided (see Fig. 4/9). The Ethernet
interface in the relay includes an Ethernet
switch. Thus, the installation of expensive 6
external Ethernet switches can be
avoided. The relays are linked in an
optical ring structure.
Integrated SNMP (Simple Network Fig. 4/8 Ethernet-based system with SICAM PAS with electrical Ethernet interface 7
Management Protocol) facility allows
the supervision of the network from the
station controller.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into a substation automation system, solution without substation control system
Integration into a substation auto-

mation system of other makes
1
Thanks to the standardized interfaces,
IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3.0,
MODBUS, PROFIBUS DP, SIPROTEC units
2 can also be integrated into non-Siemens
systems or in SIMATIC S5/S7. Electrical
RS485 or optical interfaces are available.
The optimum physical data transfer
3 medium can be chosen thanks to opto-
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus
allows low-cost wiring in the cubicles and
an interference-free optical connection to
the master can be established.
4
6 Fig. 4/9 Ethernet-based system with SICAM PAS with optical Ethernet interface
Solution without substation control

7 system
Ethernet-based communication with opti-

cal Ethernet interface between SIPROTEC
8 protection relays offers also many
advantages without substation control:
• Fast remote access via DIGSI 4
• High-speed setting and parameteriza-
9 tion with DIGSI 4
• Interlocking between different field
devices and exchange of binary signals
via GOOSE messages of IEC 61850
10 • Common time synchronization of all
relays from central time synchronization
server (eg. SICLOCK)
For automation of new substations (or
11 plants) and modernization of existing
substations you get future investment
security, without additional investment.
12 Fig. 4/10 Ethernet-based system with optical Ethernet interface

and migration of relays with serial protocol
13
14
15
Overcurrent Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SJ61 multifunction protection relay 5/3
SIPROTEC 7SJ62 multifunction protection relay 5/25
SIPROTEC 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay

with synchronization 5/53

with local control 5/87
5
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overcurrent Protection / 7SJ61
SIPV6_116.eps
LSP2299-afpen.eps
4
Fig. 5/1 SIPROTEC 7SJ61 multifunction protection relay with text (left) and graphic display 5
Description • Breaker failure protection
The SIPROTEC 7SJ61 relays can be used for line protection of

• Negative-sequence protection
• Auto-reclosure
6
high and medium voltage networks with earthed (grounded), • Lockout
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral
point. When protecting motors, the SIPROTEC 7SJ61 is suitable
for asynchronous machines of all sizes. The relay performs all
Control functions/programmable logic 7
• Commands for control of a circuit-breaker and of isolators
functions of backup protection supplementary to transformer
differential protection. • Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic
8
display
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further
• Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
switching devices and automation functions. The integrated pro-
grammable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their own • User-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
functions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking).
9
Monitoring functions
The user is also allowed to generate user-defined indications.
• Operational measured values I
The flexible communication interfaces are open for modern
• Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
communication architectures with control systems.
• Slave pointer
• Time metering of operating hours 10
Function overview • Trip circuit supervision
• 8 oscillographic fault records
Protection functions
• Overcurrent protection
• Motor statistics
11
(definite-time/inverse-time/user-def.) Communication interfaces
• Sensitive ground-fault detection • System interface
12
• Intermittent ground-fault protection – IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
– PROFIBUS DP
• High-impedance restricted ground fault
– DNP 3/ DNP3 TCP/MODBUS RTU
• Inrush-current detection – PROFINET
13
• Motor protection • Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
– Undercurrent monitoring
• Front interface for DIGSI 4
– Starting time supervision
– Restart inhibit • Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
– Locked rotor
– Load jam protection
• Overload protection Hardware
14
• Temperature monitoring • 4 current transformers
• 3/8/11 binary inputs
• 4/8/6 output relays
15
Application
LSA2959-egpen.eps
7
Fig. 5/2 Function diagram
8 Application Motor protection

When protecting motors, the 7SJ61 relay is suitable for asyn-
9
The SIPROTEC 7SJ61 unit is a numerical protection relay that also chronous machines of all sizes.
performs control and monitoring functions and therefore sup-
ports the user in cost-effective power system management, and Transformer protection
ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local
The relay performs all functions of backup protection supple-
operation has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A
10
mentary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.
suppression effectively prevents tripping by inrush currents.
Control The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
11 devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-

grated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or the control and
Backup protection
protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position) The 7SJ61can be used universally for backup protection.
of the primary equipment can be displayed, in case of devices
12
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func- Flexible protection functions
tions is provided. By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
Programmable logic
the relays can be easily expanded by up to 20 protection stages
13 The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to

implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
or protection functions.
Metering values
(interlocking) or a substation via a graphic user interface. The
user can also generate user-defined indications. Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values
14 Line protection
permit improved system management.
The relay is a non-directional overcurrent relay which can be

used for line protection of high and medium-voltage networks
15
with earthed (grounded), low-resistance grounded, isolated or
compensated neutral point.

Application, construction
ANSI IEC Protection functions 1

50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>> Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
IE>, IE>>
2
50, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
50Ns, 51Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Sensitive ground-fault protection
– Cold load pick-up (dynamic setting change)

– IE> Intermittent ground fault 3
87N High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
4
50BF Breaker failure protection
79 Auto-reclosure
46 I 2> Phase-balance current protection (negative-sequence protection)
49 ϑ> Thermal overload protection 5

48 Starting time supervision
51M Load jam protection 6

14 Locked rotor protection
66/86 Restart inhibit

7
37 I< Undercurrent monitoring
8
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box),
e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
Construction 9
Connection techniques and housing with many advantages
⅓-rack size (text display variants) and ½-rack size (graphic display
variants) are the available housing widths of the 7SJ61 relays 10
referred to a 19" module frame system. This means that previous
models can always be replaced. The height is a uniform 244 mm
11
for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-mounting
housing. All cables can be connected with or without ring lugs.
LSP2099-afpen.eps
In the case of surface mounting on a panel, the connection

terminals are located above and below in the form of screw-type
terminals. The communication interfaces are located in a sloped
case at the top and bottom of the housing. 12
13
Fig. 5/3 Rear view with screw-type, ⅓-rack size
14
15
1 Overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
2
This function is based on the phase-
selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four
transformers). Three definite-time over-
current protection elements (DMT) exist
3 both for the phases and for the ground.

The current threshold and the delay time
can be set within a wide range. In addi-
tion, inverse-time overcurrent protection
4
characteristics (IDMTL) can be activated.
Reset characteristics
For easier time coordination with electro- Fig. 5/4 Definite-time overcurrent Fig. 5/5 Inverse-time overcurrent
5
mechanical relays, reset characteristics characteristic characteristic
according to ANSI C37.112 and
IEC 60255-3 / BS 142 standards are
applied. Available inverse-time characteristics
6
When using the reset characteristic (disk Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
emulation), a reset process is initiated
Inverse • •
after the fault current has disappeared.
This reset process corresponds to the Short inverse •
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of • •
7
Long inverse
an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
Moderately inverse •
emulation).
Very inverse • •
User-definable characteristics Extremely inverse • •
8 Instead of the predefined time char-

acteristics according to ANSI, tripping
characteristics can be defined by the user for phase and ground Flexible protection functions
units separately. Up to 20 current/ time value pairs may be
9
The 7SJ61 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20 protec-
programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically
tive functions. To this end, parameter definitions are used to link
in DIGSI 4.
a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic quan-
Inrush restraint tity (measured or derived quantity). The standard logic consists
of the usual protection elements such as the pickup message,
10 The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second

harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup
the parameter- definable delay time, the TRIP command, a block-
ing possibility, etc. The mode of operation for current quantities
of non-directional normal elements (I>, Ip) are blocked. can be three-phase or single-phase. The quantities can be oper-
ated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate with
Cold load pickup/dynamic setting change
11
protection priority. Protection stages/functions attainable on the
For overcurrent protection functions the initiation basis of the available characteristic quantities:
thresholds and tripping times can be switched via binary
inputs or by time control. Function ANSI No.
12
I>, IE> 50, 50N
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1> 50N, 46
Binary input
13
14
15
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns/50N, 51N) • The overcurrent elements can either be blocked or operated
1
non-delayed depending on the auto-reclosure cycle
For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input
transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current • Dynamic setting change of the overcurrent elements can be
transformer (also called core-balance CT). activated depending on the ready AR
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
additional short-circuit protection.
Intermittent ground-fault protection

For protecting cables and transformers, an overload protection
with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and cur-
2
rent can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a thermal
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weaknesses homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8), which
3
in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints. Such takes account both of the energy entering the equipment and the
faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into lasting energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly adjusted
short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however, star-point accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load and the
resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded may undergo load fluctuations.
4
thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault protection cannot
reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses, some of which can For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a further
be very brief. time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can be detected
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is achieved correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is stopped. The
by summating the duration of the individual pulses and by trig- ambient temperature or the temperature of the coolant can be
gering when a (settable) summed time is reached. The response
threshold IIE> evaluates the r.m.s. value, referred to one systems
detected serially via an external temperature monitoring box
(resistance-temperature detector box, also called RTD-box). The 5
period. thermal replica of the overload function is automatically adapted
to the ambient conditions. If there is no RTD-box it is assumed that
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
6
the ambient temperatures are constant.
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
upon issuance of a trip command, another command can be
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates the The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
and sensitive method for detecting ground faults, especially on
7
circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection relay.
Breaker failure is detected if after a trip command, current is still transformers. It can also be applied to motors, generators and
flowing in the faulted circuit. As an option it is possible to make reactors when these are operated on an grounded network.
use of the circuit-breaker position indication. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied,
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46)
(Negative-sequence protection)
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high
R whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/6). In the case of 7SJ6
8
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground
faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event of
an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage spikes 9
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time, this results
resistance faults beyond the transformer. in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy reduction
10
of the average value. If no faults have occurred and in the event
Settable dropout delay times of external faults, the system is at equilibrium, and the voltage
If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays in through the resistor is approximately zero. In the event of internal
networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of the faults, an imbalance occurs which leads to a voltage and a current
flow through the resistor R.
11
electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds) can
lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time grading is The current trans-
only possible if the dropout time is approximately the same. This formers must be of
is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined for certain the same type and
functions such as overcurrent protection, ground short-circuit and
12
must at least offer
phase-balance current protection. a separate core for
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) the high-impedance
restricted ground-
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will fault protection.
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following
functions are possible:
They must in
particular have the 13
• 3-pole ARC for all types of faults same transforma-
• Separate settings for phase and ground faults tion ratio and an
• Multiple ARC, one rapid auto-reclosure (RAR) and up to nine
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR)
approximately
identical knee-point 14
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection (e.g. voltage. They
46, 50, 51) should also demon-
15
• Blocking option of the ARC via binary inputs strate only minimal
measuring errors. Fig. 5/6 High-impedance restricted
• ARC can be initiated externally or via CFC ground-fault protection

 Motor protection
1 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48)

Starting time supervision protects the
motor against long unwanted start-ups
2
that might occur when excessive load
torque occurs, excessive voltage drops
occur within the motor or if the rotor is
locked. Rotor temperature is calculated
from measured stator current. The tripping
3 time is calculated according to the follow-
ing equation:
for I > IMOTOR START
4  I 2
t =  A  ⋅ TA
I 
I = Actual current flowing
5 IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a

motor start
t = Tripping time Fig. 5/7
6 IA
TA
= Rated motor starting current
= Tripping time at rated motor starting current
(2 times, for warm and cold motor) The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
7
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the state
protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in dependence
of either cold or warm motor state. For differentiation of the motor Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)
state the thermal model of the rotor is applied.
8
If a motor is started up too many times in succession, the rotor can
If the trip time is rated according to the above formula, even a be subject to thermal overload, especially the upper edges of the
prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up bars. The rotor temperature is calculated from the stator current.
current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the motor if the
(current dependent). rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete start-up (see
9 A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.

An instantaneous tripping is effected.
Fig. 5/7).
Emergency start-up
Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38) This function disables the reclosing lockout via a binary input by
10 Up to 2 temperature monitoring boxes with a total of 12 meas-

uring sensors can be used for temperature monitoring and
storing the state of the thermal replica as long as the binary input
is active. It is also possible to reset the thermal replica to zero.
detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of motors,
generators and transformers can be monitored with this device. Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
11 Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines

are monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are being
With this function, a sudden drop in current, that can occur due to
a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to shaft break-
measured with the help of temperature detectors at various loca- age, no-load operation of pumps or fan failure.
tions of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted to the
12
protection relay via one or two temperature monitoring boxes (see Motor statistics
“Accessories”, page 5/78).
Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, current,
Load jam protection (ANSI 51M) voltage) and general information on number of starts, total opera-
ting time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in the device.
13
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of the
motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due to a load Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and tripping). The
Methods for determining circuit-breaker contact wear or the
overload protection function is too slow and therefore not suitable
remaining service life of a circuit-breaker (CB) allow CB mainte-
under these circumstances.
14 nance intervals to be aligned to their actual degree of wear. The
benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs.
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the wear
or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes into
15 account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB opens.

This is why various methods of determining CB wear have evolved
1
which reflect the different operator philosophies. To do justice to
these, the devices offer several methods:
• ΣI
• Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
• Σ i2t
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the
2
remaining service life:
3
• Two-point method
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle diagram
(see Fig. 5/8) and the breaking current at the time of contact
opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB opening, the
4
two-point method calculates the number of still possible switching
cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 only have to be set on
the device. These are specified in the CB's technical data.
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be
5
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining
service life.
Commissioning
6
Fig. 5/8 CB switching cycle diagram
Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The Automation / user-defined logic
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
7
With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or
controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide-
substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary input
ranging operational measured values.
or via communication interface.
8
To prevent transmission of information to the control center during
maintenance, the bay controller communications can be disabled Switching authority
to prevent unnecessary data from being transmitted. During com- Switching authority is determined according to parameters and
missioning, all indications with test marking for test purposes can communication.
be connected to a control and protection system.
9
If a source is set to “LOCAL”, only local switching operations are
Test operation possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”.
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an auto-
matic control system for test purposes. Command processing
All the functionality of command processing is offered. This
includes the processing of single and double commands with
10
 Control and automatic functions
or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control
11
Control hardware and software, checking of the external process, control
actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also automatic command termination after output. Here are some
support all control and monitoring functions that are required for typical applications:
operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. • Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or
The main application is reliable control of switching and other
processes.
2 trip contacts
• User-definable bay interlocks
12
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be • Operating sequences combining several switching operations
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the 7SJ61
13
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate ing switches
both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate • Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by
circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position. combination with existing information
14
The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via:
– integrated operator panel
– binary inputs
– substation control and protection system
15
– DIGSI 4

Functions
Functions
1 Assignment of feedback to command

The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and
transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication inputs
2 are logically assigned to the corresponding command outputs. The

unit can therefore distinguish whether the indication change is a
consequence of switching operation or whether it is a spontane-
ous change of state.
3 Chatter disable
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured period
of time, the number of status changes of indication input exceeds
4
a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is blocked for
a certain period, so that the event list will not record excessive
operations.
Indication filtering and delay
LSP2077f.eps
5 Binary indications can be filtered or delayed.
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes in potential at the indica-
tion input. The indication is passed on only if the indication voltage
6
is still present after a set period of time. In the event of indication
delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The information is passed
on only if the indication voltage is still present after this time.
Indication derivation
7 A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an exist-
ing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The volume Fig. 5/9 NXAIR panel (air-insulated)
of information to the system interface can thus be reduced and
8
restricted to the most important signals.
Metered values
Measured values
If an external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current. The SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
9
following functions are available for measured value processing: indication input.
• Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (50Ns) The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0 center as an accumulation with reset.
• Mean as well as minimum and maximum current values
Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
10 • Operating hours counter
• Mean operating temperature of overload function
All units are designed specifically to meet the requirements of
high/medium-voltage applications.
• Limit value monitoring
In general, no separate measuring instruments or additional
11
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica- control components are necessary.
tion.
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
In terms of communication, the units offer substantial flexibility 1

in the context of connection to industrial and power automation
standards. Communication can be extended or added on thanks
2
to modules for retrofitting on which the common protocols run.
Therefore, also in the future it will be possible to optimally inte-
grate units into the changing communication infrastructure, for
example in Ethernet networks (which will also be used increasingly
in the power supply sector in the years to come).
Serial front interface 3

There is a serial RS232 interface on the front of all the units. All of
the unit’s functions can be set on a PC by means of the DIGSI 4
protection operation program. Commissioning tools and fault
analysis are also built into the program and are available through
4
this interface. Fig. 5/10 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial fiber-optic connection
5
Rear-mounted interfaces1)
A number of communication modules suitable for various applica-
tions can be fitted in the rear of the flush-mounting housing. In
the flush-mounting housing, the modules can be easily replaced
by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications:
6
• Time synchronization interface
7
All units feature a permanently integrated electrical time
synchronization interface. It can be used to feed timing
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time
synchronization receivers.
8
• System interface
Communication with a central control system takes place
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
gies can be configured depending on the chosen interface.
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this
interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be
operated by DIGSI. 9
• Service interface Fig. 5/11 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a and IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be
an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
10
applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring means of published, Siemens-specific extensions to the protocol.
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an
11
alternative. Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
System interface protocols (retrofittable) redundant module).
IEC 61850 protocol PROFIBUS DP protocol

The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide standard
for protection and control systems used by power supply corpora-
PROFIBUS DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial automa-
tion. Via PROFIBUS DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
12
tions. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support this standard. available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, receive
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
transferred.
13
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. MODBUS RTU protocol
This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and
14
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages making their information available to a master or receiving
information from it.
1) F
or units in panel surface-mounting housings
A time-stamped event list is available.
15
please refer to note on page 5/77.

Communication
PROFINET
1 PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor

of PROFIBUS DP and is supported in the
variant PROFINET IO. The protocol which
is used in industry together with the
2
SIMATIC systems control is realized on
the optical and electrical Plus ethernet
modules which are delivered since
November 2012. All network redundancy
3
procedures which are available for the
ethernet modules, such as RSTP, PRP or
HSR, are also available for PROFINET. The
time synchronization is made via SNTP.
The network monitoring is possible via
4 SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist

for PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the
device also supports the monitoring of
the network topology. Single-point indica-
5
tions, double-point indications, measured
and metered values can be transmitted
cyclically in the monitoring direction
via the protocol and can be selected by
6
the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
are also transmitted spontaneously via
configurable process alarms. Switching Fig. 5/12 System solution/communication
commands can be executed by the system
control via the device in the controlling
7 direction. The PROFINET implementation

is certifi ed. The device also supports
the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on
the same ethernet module in addition
8
LSP3.01-0021.tif
to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
connections are possible for the intercom-
munication between devices, e.g. for
transmitting fault records and GOOSE
9
messages.
DNP 3.0
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0 (Dis-
10
tributed Network Protocol) for the station
and network control levels. SIPROTEC units
function as DNP slaves, supplying their
information to a master system or receiving Fig. 5/13 Optical Ethernet communication module
information from it. for IEC 61850 with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 DNP3 TCP System solutions for protection and station control

The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is supported Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two DNP3 TCP
12
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical RS485
clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can be realized bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the units
for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch in the module. exchange information with the control system.
For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring can be constructed.
Single-point indications, double-point indications, measured and Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
13 metered values can be configured with DIGSI 4 and are transmitted SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.
to the DNP3 TCP client. Switching commands can be executed in Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
the controlling direction. Fault records of the device are stored in units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/10).
the binary Comtrade format and can be retrieved via the DNP3 file
Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also
14
transfer. The time synchronization is performed via the DNP3 TCP
be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC.
client or SNTP. The device can also be integrated into a network
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum
monitoring system via the SNMP V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto-
TCP protocol the IEC 61850 protocol (the device works as a server)
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
and the GOOSE messages of the IEC 61850 are available for the
15
in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the
intercommunication between devices.
master can be established.

Typical connections
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with
1
SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units of
other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, how-
ever, the units can also be used in other manufacturers’ systems
(see Fig. 5/11).
2
Typical connections
Connection of current

3
and voltage transformers
Standard connection
For grounded networks, the ground current
4
is obtained from the phase currents by the
residual current circuit.
5
Fig. 5/14 Residual current circuit

7
10
11
12
Fig. 5/15 Sensitive ground current detection
13
14
15
Overview of connection types
1 Type of network Function Current connection
(Low-resistance) grounded network Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current transformers required,
hase/ground non-directional phase-balance neutral current transformer possible
2
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase current transformers possible
phases non-directional
Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
3 Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
4 Typical applications
5 One or two binary inputs can be used for

monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil
including its incoming cables. An alarm
signal occurs whenever the circuit is
6
interrupted.
8
Fig. 5/16 Trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Electrical tests

Measuring circuits
System frequency 50 / 60 Hz (settable)
Specification
Standards IEC 60255 1
Current transformer ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
UL508
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable)
2
Insulation tests
Option: sensitive ground-fault CT IEE < 1.6 A
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
Power consumption
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase all circuits except for auxiliary
3
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA voltage and RS485/RS232 and
time synchronization
Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s Auxiliary voltage DC 3.5 kV
150 A for 10 s Communication ports AC 500 V
20 A continuous and time synchronization
Dynamic (impulse current)
Overload capability if equipped with
250 x Inom (half cycle) Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J
all circuits, except communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses 4
sensitive ground-fault CT ports and time synchronization, at intervals of 5 s
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s class III
5
100 A for 10 s
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests
15 A continuous
Dynamic (impulse current) 750 A (half cycle) Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(product standard)
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter)
EN 50082-2 (generic specification)
Rated auxiliary DC 24/48 V 60/125 V 110/250 V DIN 57435 Part 303
voltage Vaux
Permissible tolerance
AC 115/230 V
DC 19-58 V 48-150 V 88-330 V
High-frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1, class III
2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; τ =15 ms;
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s 6
AC 92-138 V 184-265 V and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Ripple voltage, peak-to-peak ≤ 12 % Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
7
Power consumption IEC 60255-22-2 class IV 15 kV air gap discharge;
Quiescent Approx. 3 W and EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
Energized Approx. 7 W Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
Backup time during ≥ 50 ms at V ≥ DC 110 V field, non-modulated
loss/short-circuit of ≥ 20 ms at V ≥ DC 24 V IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III
auxiliary voltage ≥ 200 ms at AC 115 V/230 V
Binary inputs/indication inputs
Irradiation with radio-frequency
field, amplitude-modulated
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
AM 80 %; 1 kHz 8
IEC 61000-4-3; class III
Type 7SJ610 7SJ611, 7SJ612,
7SJ613 7SJ614 Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition
9
field, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 %
Number 3 8 11 IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
Voltage range DC 24–250 V Fast transient interference/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
Pickup threshold Modifiable by plug-in jumpers IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms;
Pickup threshold DC 19 V 88 V IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities;
10
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
For rated control voltage DC 24/48/60/110/125 V 110/220/250 V
High-energy surge voltages
Response time/ (Surge)
drop-out time Approx. 3.5 ms IEC 61000-4-5; class III
Power consumption 1.8 mA (independent of operating voltage) Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
energized
Binary outputs/command outputs Binary inputs/outputs
across contacts: 1 kV; 2 Ω ;18 µF
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 11
µF
Type 7SJ610, 7SJ611, 7SJ613
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
7SJ612, 7SJ614
12
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
Number command/indication relay 4 8 6
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz
Contacts per command/ 1 NO / form A IEC 61000-4-6, class III
indication relay (2 contacts changeable to Power frequency magnetic field 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
NC / form B, via jumpers) IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s
Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form
A/B
IEC 60255-6
Oscillatory surge withstand
0.5 mT, 50 Hz
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz 13
Switching capacity Make 1000 W/VA capability damped wave; 50 surges per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Break 30 W/VA / 40 Wresistive /
Switching voltage ≤ DC 250 V

25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
14
Permissible current 5 A continuous, 30 A for 0.5 s making current,
2000 switching cycles
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests (cont'd) Climatic stress tests
1 Fast transient surge withstand

capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Ω
Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C /-13 °F to +185 °F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz; and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
interference amplitude and pulse-modulated Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C /-4 °F to -158 °F
2
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 temperature, tested for 96 h
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C /+25 °F to +131 °F
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating) operating temperature acc. to
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz, IEC 60255-6
Ri = 200 Ω (Legibility of display may be
3 EMC tests for interference emission; type tests

Standard EN 50081-* (generic specification)
impaired above +55 °C /+131 °F)
– Limiting temperature during
permanent storage
-25 °C to +55 °C /-13 °F to +131 °F
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz – Limiting temperature during

only auxiliary voltage IEC/CISPR 22 Limit class B -25 °C to +70 °C /-13 °F to +158 °F
transport
4 Radio interference field strength

IEC/CISPR 11
30 to 1000 MHz
Limit class B
Humidity
Permissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative
Units with a detached operator
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
panel must be installed in a metal
units in such a way that they are 95 % relative humidity;
cubicle to maintain limit class B
5
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation not permissible!
pronounced temperature changes
Mechanical stress tests that could cause condensation.
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration Unit design
6
During operation Housing 7XP20
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14
Vibration Sinusoidal Weight

IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz; ± 0.075 mm amplitude; 1/3 19’’, surface-mounting housing 4.5 kg
1/3 19’’, flush-mounting housing 4.0 kg
7
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep 1 octave/min 1/2 19’’, surface-mounting housing 7.5 kg
20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes 1/2 19’’, flush-mounting housing 6.5 kg
Shock Semi-sinusoidal Degree of protection

IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms; acc. to EN 60529
8
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes Surface-mounting housing IP 51
Flush-mounting housing Front: IP 51, rear: IP 20;
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal Operator safety IP 2x with cover
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
9 (vertical axis) Futher information can be found in the current manual at:
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration www.siemens.com/siprotec
(horizontal axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
10 Frequency sweep 1 octave/min

1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
During transportation
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
11 Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
12 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
13
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions
of 3 axes
14
15
Selection and ordering data
Description Order No.

7SJ61multifunction protection relay
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO)

7SJ61 - -
1
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 live status contact 0
2
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 3
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 4
Measuring inputs (4 x I)
Iph =1A1), Ie =1A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
3
Position 15 only with A 1
Iph =1A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
4
Position 15 only with B 2
Iph =5A1), Ie =5A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
Iph =5A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
5
Position 15 only with B 6
Iph =5A1), Ie =1A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
2
4 6
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V4) , threshold binary input DC 88 V 3) 5
Unit version
For panel surface mounting, 2 tier terminal top/bottom
7
B
For panel flush mounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
8
For panel flush mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specific default settings/function versions and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable
C
D
9
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish, selectable E
10
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian, selectable F
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/77

No system interface 0
Protocols see page 5/77
Service interface (Port C)

No interface at rear side
11
0
DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232 1
12
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3
Measuring/fault recording
Fault recording 1
Slave pointer,mean values, min /max values, fault recording 3
13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers.

2) T
ransition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected
5) T
emperature monitoring box 7XV5662-
refer to “Accessories”.
AD10, 14
by means of jumpers. 6) When using the temperature monitoring box at an optical interface,
3) T
he binary input thresholds can be selected per binary input by the additional RS485 fiber-optic converter 7XV5650-0 A00 is
means of jumpers.
4) A
C 230 V, starting from device version …/EE.
required.
7) s tarting from device version .../GG and FW-Version V4.82 15
Description Order No. Order code
1 7SJ61multifunction protection relay
Designation ANSI No. Description

7SJ61 - -
Basic version Control
2 50/51
50N/51N
50N/51N
Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, IEp
Ground-fault protection via insensitive
IEE function: IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp1)
50/50N Flexible protection functions (index quantities
3

49
derived from current): Additional time-overcurrent
protection stages I2>, I>>>>, IE>>>>
Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
46 Phase balance current protection
(negative-sequence protection)
4 50BF
37
74TC
Breaker failure protection
Undercurrent monitoring
Trip circuit supervision
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
Inrush blocking
5 86
 IEF
Lockout
Intermittent ground fault

F A
P A
 50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)
 IEF 50Ns/51Ns
87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)

F B 2)

Intermittent ground fault P B 2)
7  Motor IEF 50Ns/51Ns

87N
Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)
High-impedance restricted ground fault
48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
8
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics R B 2)
 Motor 50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)

9
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics H B 2)
 Motor 48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
10
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics H A
ARC Without 0
79 With auto-reclosure 1
11
12
13
14  Basic version included

IEF = Intermittent ground fault
1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer
15 when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
2) Sensitive ground-current transformer only when position 7 = 2, 6.


7SJ61multifunction protection relay
System interface (on rear of unit, Port B)

7SJ61 - - -
1
2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 820 nm fiber, ST connector 3
PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 9 L 0 A
PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1)
MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0 D
3
MODBUS, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)
9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2)
9
9
L 0 H
L 0 P
4
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100) 2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3)
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3)
9
9
L 2 R
L 2 S
5
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9 L 3 R
L 3 S
6
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9
1) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters.
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3AB10, not available with position 9 = “B”.
For double ring, please order converter 6GK1502-4AB10, not available with position 9 = “B”.
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply 7XV5810-0BA00).
2) Not available with position 9 = “B”.
3) Available with V4.9
7
Sample order 9
Position Order No. + Order code
10
7SJ612 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F A 1 + L 0 G
6 I/O’s: 11 BI/6 BO, 1 live status contact 2

7 Current transformer: 5 A 5
11
8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V 5
9 Unit version: Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals E
10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI C
11 Communication: System interface: DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
12
13
Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232
Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records
1
3
12
14/15 Protection function package: Basic version F A
13
14
15
Accessories Description Order No.
1 Temperature monitoring box

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
2 Varistor / Voltage Arrester

Voltage arrester for high-impedance REF protection
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
3 Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit
(9-pin connector) (contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered
additionally) 7XV5100-4
4 Cable between temperature monitoring box and

SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m /16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
5
- length 50 m /164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
Manual for 7SJ61

English/German C53000-G1140-C210-x 1)
8 1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier
1
package
Terminal safety cover
LSP2289-afp.eps
Voltage/current terminal 18-pole/12-pole C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens
Mounting rail Connector 2-pin
Connector 3-pin
C73334-A1-C35-1
C73334-A1-C36-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
2
Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
3
taped on reel
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
Crimp connector: Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163084-2 1 1)
4
taped on reel
2-pin connector 3-pin connector Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 1)
and matching female 0-539668-2 1 1)
Crimping tool for CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
for current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens
for other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens
Short-circuit links
for current terminals
Short-circuit links
for current terminals Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6
1) Your local Siemens representative can inform you on local suppliers.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14 *) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 of this catalog.

For the allocation of the terminals of the panel surface-mounting version
refer to the manual (http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
15 Fig. 5/17 7SJ610 connection diagram

Connection diagram
1
7SJ611x-x B xxx-xxxx
7SJ611x-x D xxx-xxxx
7SJ611, E
7SJ613 E
9
LSA2820-dgpen.eps
10
11
12
13
*) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 of this catalog. 14

Fig. 5/18 7SJ611, 7SJ613 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/19 7SJ612, 7SJ614 connection diagram

Protection functions (continued)
1
• Inrush restraint
• Motor protection
• Overload protection
• Temperature monitoring
• Under-/overvoltage protection 2
• Under-/overfrequency protection
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection
3
LSP2299-afpen.eps
• Power protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
SIPV6_116.eps
• Undervoltage controlled reactive power
protection
• Breaker failure protection
• Negative-sequence protection 4
• Phase-sequence monitoring
• Synchro-check
Fig. 5/20 Multifunction protection relay with text (left) and graphic display
• Fault locator
• Lockout
5
• Auto-reclosure
Description
Control functions/programmable logic
• Commands f. ctrl of CB and of isolators
6
The SIPROTEC 7SJ62 relays can be used for line protection of • Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic
high and medium voltage networks with earthed (grounded), display
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
With regard to motor protection, the SIPROTEC 7SJ62 is suitable
• Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system 7
• User-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
for asynchronous machines of all sizes. The relay performs all
functions of backup protection supplementary to transformer Monitoring functions
differential protection.
7SJ62 is featuring the "flexible protection functions". Up to
• Operational measured values V, I, f 8
• Energy metering values Wp, Wq
20 protection functions can be added according to individual
• Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
requirements. Thus, for example, a rate-of-frequency-change
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented. • Slave pointer
• Trip circuit supervision
9
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further
switching devices and automation functions. The integrated pro- • Fuse failure monitor
10
grammable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their own • 8 oscillographic fault records
functions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking). • Motor statistics
The user is also allowed to generate user-defined messages.
The flexible communication interfaces are open for modern Communication interfaces
11
communication architectures with control systems. • System interface
– IEC 60870-5-103 / IEC 61850
– PROFIBUS DP
Function overview – DNP 3/DNP3 TCP/MODBUS RTU
– PROFINET
• Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem) 12
• Directional overcurrent protection • Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
13
• Sensitive directional ground-fault detection
• Displacement voltage
• Intermittent ground-fault protection Hardware
• Directional intermittent ground fault protection
14
• 4 current transformers
• High-impedance restricted ground fault • 3/4 voltage transformers
• 8/11 binary inputs
• 8/6 output relays
15
Application
LSA2958-egpen.eps
7
8 Application Synchro-check
In order to connect two components of a power system, the
9
The SIPROTEC 7SJ62 unit is a numerical protection relay that also relay provides a synchro-check function which verifies that
performs control and monitoring functions and therefore sup- switching ON does not endanger the stability of the power
ports the user in cost-effective power system management, and system.
ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local
operation has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A Motor protection
10 large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.

When protecting motors, the 7SJ62 relay is suitable for asyn-
chronous machines of all sizes.
Control
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect Transformer protection
11 devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-

protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position)
The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
12
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func-
short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
tions is provided.
Backup protection
Programmable logic
The 7SJ62 can be used universally for backup protection.
13 The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to
implement their own functions for automation of switchgear Flexible protection functions
user can also generate user-defined messages. By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
14 Line protection the relays can be easily expanded by up to 20 protection stages
The 7SJ62 units can be used for line protection of high and
medium-voltage networks with earthed (grounded), low- Metering values
15
resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values

Application
ANSI IEC Protection functions
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>,IE>>> Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
1
50, 51V, 51N
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (definite/inverse, phase/neutral),
2
IEdir>, IEdir>>, IEp dir Directional comparison protection
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Directional / non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection
3
59N/64 VE, V0> Displacement voltage, zero-sequence voltage
– IIE> Intermittent ground fault
67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection
4
79 Auto-reclosure
25 Synchro-check 5
6
47 V2>, phase-sequence Unbalance-voltage protection and / or phase-sequence monitoring
49 ϑ> Thermal overload protection

8
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box), e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage / overvoltage protection 9

59R dV/dt Rate-of-voltage-change protection
P<>, Q<>
10
32 Reverse-power, forward-power protection
27/Q Q>/V< Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
55 cos φ Power factor protection
81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency / underfrequency protection

11
81R df/dt Rate-of-frequency-change protection
12
21FL Fault locator
13
14
15
Construction, protection functions
2
LSP2099-afpen.eps
3
4
Fig. 5/22 Rear view with screw-type Fig. 5/23 Definite-time overcurrent protection Fig. 5/24 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
5 terminals, 1/3-rack size
Construction Available inverse-time characteristics
6
Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
Inverse • •
1/3-rack size (text display variants) and 1/2-rack size (graphic Short inverse •
display variants) are the available housing widths of the 7SJ62
• •
7
Long inverse
relays, referred to a 19" module frame system. This means that
previous models can always be replaced. The height is a uniform Moderately inverse •
244 mm for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface- Very inverse • •
mounting housing. All cables can be connected with or without
Extremely inverse • •
8
ring lugs.
In the case of surface mounting on a panel, the connection Reset characteristics
terminals are located above and below in the form of screw-type
terminals. The communication interfaces are located in a sloped For easier time coordination with electromechanical relays, reset
9
case at the top and bottom of the housing. characteristics according to ANSI C37.112 and IEC 60255-3 /
BS 142 standards are applied.
When using the reset characteristic (disk emulation), a reset
Protection functions process is initiated after the fault current has disappeared. This
10
reset process corresponds to the reverse movement of the Fer-
Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51V, 51N) raris disk of an electromechanical relay (thus: disk emulation).
This function is based on the phase-selective measurement of User-definable characteristics

the three phase currents and the ground current (four trans-
11
Instead of the predefined time characteristics according to ANSI,
formers). Three definite-time overcurrent protection elements
tripping characteristics can be defined by the user for phase and
(DMT) exist both for the phases and for the ground. The current
ground units separately. Up to 20 current/time value pairs may
threshold and the delay time can be set within a wide range.
be programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically
In addition, inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics
12
in DIGSI 4.
(IDMTL) can be activated.
The inverse-time function provides – as an option – voltage- Inrush restraint
restraint or voltage-controlled operating modes.
The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second
13
harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup of
non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.
14
For directional and non-directional overcurrent protection
functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
switched via binary inputs or by time control.
15
Directional overcurrent protection (ANSI 67, 67N)

Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.
They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent 1
elements. Their pickup values and delay times can be set sepa-
rately. Definite-time and inverse-time characteristics are offered.
2
The tripping characteristic can be rotated about ± 180 degrees.
By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
reliably even for close-in (local) faults. If the switching device
closes onto a fault and the voltage is too low to determine direc-
tion, directionality (directional decision) is made with voltage
from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory, 3
tripping occurs according to the coordination schedule.
For ground protection, users can choose whether the direction
is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable). Using negative- 4
sequence variables can be advantageous in cases where the zero
Fig. 5/25 Directional characteristic of the directional overcurrent
voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero-sequence protection
impedances.

5
It is used for selective protection of sections fed from two
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disad-
vantage of time coordination. The directional comparison 6
protection is suitable if the distances between the protection
stations are not significant and pilot wires are available for
7
signal transmission. In addition to the directional comparison
protection, the directional coordinated overcurrent protection
is used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in
a closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission
line is detected.
(Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection 8

(ANSI 64, 67Ns, 67N)
For isolated-neutral and compensated networks, the direction
of power flow in the zero sequence is calculated from the zero-
sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0.
9
For networks with an isolated neutral, the reactive current
10
component is evaluated; for compensated networks, the active
current component or residual resistive current is evaluated.
For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded
networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low- Fig. 5/26 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the
11
compensated networks
tripping characteristics can be rotated approximately
± 45 degrees.
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection
12
mented: tripping or “signalling only mode”.
(ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns / 50N, 51N)
It has the following functions:
• TRIP via the displacement voltage VE. transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
• Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one transformer (also called core-balance CT).
user-defined characteristic.
• Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an
13
directional.
• The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as
an additional short-circuit protection.
14
15
1 Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-

nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
lasting short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however,
2
star-point resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded
may undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault pro-
tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
some of which can be very brief.
3
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
by triggering when a (settable) summed time is reached. The
response threshold IIE> evaluates the r.m.s. value, referred to
one systems period.
4 Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

Fig. 5/27 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
The directional intermittent ground fault protection has to detect
intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems
5 selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded

cable systems are usually characterized by the following proper- High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
ties:
The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
• A very short high-current ground current pulse (up to several
6
hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms
transformers. It can also be applied to motors, generators and
• They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one halfperiod reactors when these are operated on an grounded network.
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi-
tions and the fault characteristic. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied,
7
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in
• Over longer periods (many seconds to minutes), they can
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high
develop into static faults.
R whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/27). In the case of 7SJ6
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
8
insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables.
Ground fault functions based on fundamental component input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground of an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent spikes occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time,
ground faults. The function described here evaluates specifi cally this results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy
9 the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
zero-sequence voltage to determine the direction.
reduction of the average value.
If no faults have occurred and in the event of external faults, the
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) system is at equilibrium, and the voltage through the resistor is
10
(Negative-sequence protection) approximately zero. In the event of internal faults, an imbalance
occurs which leads to a voltage and a current flow through the
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ resistor R.
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground The current transformers must be of the same type and must
11 faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
resistance faults beyond the transformer. transformation ratio and an approximately identical knee-point
voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) errors.
12 If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates
13
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection
relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
is still flowing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to
make use of the circuit-breaker position indication.
14
15
Flexible protection functions

The 7SJ62 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20
protective functions. To this end, parameter definitions are used 1
to link a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic
quantity (measured or derived quantity) (Fig. 5/28). The stand-
2
ard logic consists of the usual protection elements such as the
pickup message, the parameter-definable delay time, the TRIP

command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of operation
for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can be
3
three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be oper-
ated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate with
protection priority.
Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-

Fig. 5/28 Flexible protection functions
4
able characteristic quantities:
Function ANSI No.

I>, IE> 50, 50N
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
5
V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt 27, 59, 59R, 64
• Blocking option of the ARC via binary inputs
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1, 50N, 46,
3V0>, V1><, V2>< 59N, 47 • ARC can be initiated externally or via CFC
P><, Q>< 32
• The directional and non-directional elements can either be
6
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto-
cos φ (p.f.)>< 55 reclosure cycle
f>< 81O, 81U • Dynamic setting change of the directional and non-directional
df/dt>< 81R elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
For example, the following can be implemented:

Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
7
• Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and
8
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a
thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment
(ANSI 27/Q) and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly
adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load
9
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage and the load fluctuations.
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a genera- For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a
tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
10
be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the
power system situations and ensures that the power generation coolant can be detected serially via an external temperature
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system called RTD-box). The thermal replica of the overload function
conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized. is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is
no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are 11
Synchro-check (ANSI 25) constant.
In case of switching ON the circuit- breaker, the units can check
12
whether the two subnetworks are synchronized. Settable dropout delay times
Voltage-, frequency- and phase-angle-differences are being If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
checked to determine whether synchronous conditions are in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
existent. the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)

can lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time
grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the 13
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following for certain functions such as time-over-current protection,
14
functions are possible: ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
• 3-pole ARC for all types of faults
• Separate settings for phase and ground faults
15
1 Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)

If a motor is started up too many times in
succession, the rotor can be subject to
thermal overload, especially the upper
2 edges of the bars. The rotor temperature

is calculated from the stator current. The
reclosing lockout only permits start-up
of the motor if the rotor has sufficient
3
thermal reserves for a complete start-up
(see Fig. 5/29).
Emergency start-up
This function disables the reclosing lockout
4 via a binary input by storing the state of
the thermal replica as long as the binary
input is active. It is also possible to reset
the thermal replica to zero.
5 Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)

Up to two temperature monitoring boxes
Fig. 5/29
with a total of 12 measuring sensors
can be used for temperature monitoring
6 and detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of
motors, generators and transformers can be monitored with this
Load jam protection (ANSI 51M)
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of
device. Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating the motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due
machines are monitored for limit value violation. The tempera- to a load jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and
7 tures are being measured with the help of temperature detectors

at various locations of the device to be protected. This data is
tripping).
The overload protection function is too slow and therefore not
transmitted to the protection relay via one or two temperature suitable under these circumstances.
monitoring boxes (see “Accessories”, page 5/115).
8 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
unwanted start-ups that might occur in the event of excessive a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
9 rotor is locked. Rotor temperature is calculated from measured
stator current. The tripping time is calculated according to the Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
following equation: With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to
10  I 2
shaft breakage, no-load operation of pumps or fan failure.
Motor statistics
t =  A  ⋅ TA
I  Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
11 I = Actual current flowing
IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a motor start
operating time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in
the device.
t = Tripping time
 Voltage protection
IA
12
TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
(2 times, for warm and cold motor) The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
network and machine overvoltage conditions. The function can
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
13 state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in
dependence of either cold or warm motor state. For differentia-
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence system voltage.
Three-phase and single-phase connections are possible.
tion of the motor state the thermal model of the rotor is applied.
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
If the trip time is rated according to the above formula, even a
14
The two-element undervoltage protection provides protec-
prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
tion against dangerous voltage drops (especially for electric
current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse
machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
(current dependent).
motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.
15
and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
An instantaneous tripping is effected. of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
sequence quantities. The protection function is active over a

wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when
1
falling below this frequency range the function continues to
work, however, with a greater tolerance band.
The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-
ground or positive phase-sequence voltage and can be moni-
2
tored with a current criterion. Three-phase and single-phase
connections are possible.
Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and under-
frequency protection. Electric machines and parts of the system
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted 3
frequency changes in the network can be detected and the load
can be removed at a specified frequency setting.
Frequency protection can be used over a wide frequency range
(40 to 60, 50 to 70 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable 4
as overfrequency or underfrequency) and each element can be
delayed separately. Blocking of the frequency protection can be
5
performed if using a binary input or by using an undervoltage
element.
Fault locator (ANSI 21FL)
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and
6
the distance-to-fault. The results are displayed in Ω, kilometers
(miles) and in percent of the line length.
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring Commissioning
7
Methods for determining circuit-breaker contact wear or the Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
remaining service life of a circuit-breaker (CB) allow CB mainte- DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
nance intervals to be aligned to their actual degree of wear. The and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The
benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs. operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
8
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the
wear or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide-
into account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
evolved which reflect the different operator philosophies. To do controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces-
justice to these, the devices offer several methods:
• ΣI
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected 9
to a control and protection system.
• Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
Test operation
10
• Σ i2t
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the
automatic control system for test purposes.
• Two-point method  Control and automatic functions
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle
diagram (see Fig. 5/30) and the breaking current at the time
Control
11
of contact opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB
support all control and monitoring functions that are required
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still
12
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations.
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2
only have to be set on the device. These are specified in the CB's The main application is reliable control of switching and other
technical data. processes.
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
13
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining 7SJ62 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and
service life. indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
Customized functions (ANSI 32, 51V, 55, etc.)
14
Additional functions, which are not time critical, can be imple- – integrated operator panel
mented via the CFC using measured values. Typical functions – binary inputs
include reverse power, voltage controlled overcurrent, phase – substation control and protection system
angle detection, and zero-sequence voltage detection. – DIGSI 4
15
1) The 45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz range is available for fN = 50/60 Hz.

Functions
Automation / user-defined logic
1
substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
input or via communication interface.
2 Switching authority
Switching authority is determined according to parameters and
communication.
3 possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
Command processing
4
LSP2077f.eps
hardware and software, checking of the external process,
5
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and
automatic command termination after output. Here are some
typical applications:
• Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2
trip contacts
6 • User-definable bay interlocks
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations Fig. 5/31 NXAIR panel (air-insulated)
7
ing switches
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
combination with existing information All units are designed specifically to meet the requirements of
Assignment of feedback to command high/medium-voltage applications.
8 The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication
In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g., for current,
voltage, frequency, …) or additional control components are
inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command necessary.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica- Measured values
9 tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
it is a spontaneous change of state.
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
Chatter disable tive power. The following functions are available for measured
value processing:
10
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input • Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (67Ns)
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is • Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1
blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0; V1, V2, V0
excessive operations.
11 Indication filtering and delay
• Power Watts, Vars, VA/P, Q, S (P, Q: total and phase selective)
• Power factor (cos φ), (total and phase selective)
Binary indications can be filtered or delayed.
• Frequency
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes in potential at the
12
• Energy ± kWh, ± kVarh, forward and reverse power flow
indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the • Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The values
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still • Operating hours counter
13
present after this time. • Mean operating temperature of overload function
Indication derivation • Limit value monitoring
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
14 volume of information to the system interface can thus be

reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
tion.
15
Communication
Communication

2

4
5
by the user. The interface modules support the following applica-
tions: 6
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time 7
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo- 8
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this inter-
9
face via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be
operated by DIGSI.
• Service interface
Fig. 5/33 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
10
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be
an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special
applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
alternative. redundant module).
System interface protocols (retrofittable) PROFIBUS DP protocol 11

IEC 61850 protocol
available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, receive
commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be 12
tions. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support this standard. transferred.
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged
MODBUS RTU protocol
13
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
14
making their information available to a master or receiving infor-
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the mation from it. A time-stamped event list is available.
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages
from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
15
means of published, Siemens-specific extensions to the protocol.
1) F
or units in panel surface-mounting housings

Communication
PROFINET
1 PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor

of Profi bus DP and is supported in the
2
November 2012. All network redundancy
3
4 SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist

5
6
confi gurable process alarms. Switching Fig. 5/34 System solution/communication
commands can be executed by the system
7 direction. The PROFINET implementation

is certified. The device also supports
the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on
the same ethernet module in addition
LSP3.01-0021.tif
8
to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
connections are possible for the intercom-
munication between devices, e.g. for
transmitting fault records and GOOSE
9
messages.
DNP 3.0 protocol

Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0
10
(Distributed Network Protocol) for the sta-
tion and network control levels. SIPROTEC
units function as DNP slaves, supplying
their information to a master system or Fig. 5/35 Optical Ethernet communication module
receiving information from it. for IEC 61850 with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 DNP3 TCP
The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is sup- System solutions for protection and station control
ported with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two
12
Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
DNP3 TCP clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical RS485
be realized for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch
bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the units
in the module. For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring
exchange information with the control system.
can be constructed. Single-point indications, double-point indi-
13 cations, measured and metered values can be configured with

DIGSI 4 and are transmitted to the DNPi client. Switching com-
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.
mands can be executed in the controlling direction. Fault records Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
of the device are stored in the binary Comtrade format and can units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/32).
14
be retrieved via the DNP 3 file transfer. The time synchronization
is performed via the DNPi client or SNTP. The device can also
be integrated into a network monitoring system via the SNMP
V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3 TCP protocol the IEC 61850
protocol (the device works as a server) and the GOOSE messages
15
of the IEC 61850 are available for the intercommunication
between devices.

Typical connections
1
2
(see Fig. 5/33).
3
Typical connections
Connection of current and voltage transformers

 4
Standard connection
5
For grounded networks, the ground current is obtained from the
phase currents by the residual current circuit.
Fig. 5/36 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/37 Sensitive ground-current detection without directional element 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 5/38 Residual current circuit with directional element 15

Typical connections
Connection for compensated networks
1 The figure shows the connection of

two phase-to-ground voltages and the
VE voltage of the open delta winding
and a phase-balance neutral current
2
transformer for the ground current. This
connection maintains maximum precision
for directional ground-fault detection and
must be used in compensated networks.
3
Fig. 5/39 shows sensitive directional
ground-fault detection.
5 Fig. 5/39 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection with directional element for phases
Connection for isolated-neutral

6 or compensated networks only
If directional ground-fault protection is
not used, the connection can be made
7
with only two phase current transformers.
Directional phase short-circuit protection
can be achieved by using only two
primary transformers.
9
Fig. 5/40 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
10
Connection for the synchro-check
function
11 The 3-phase system is connected as refer-

ence voltage, i. e. the outgoing voltages
as well as a single-phase voltage, in this
case a busbar voltage, that has to be
12 checked for synchronism.
13
14 Fig. 5/41 easuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder
M
voltage for the synchro-check
15
Type of network Function Current connection Voltage connection 1

(Low-resistance) grounded network Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current –
phase/ground non-directional transformers required, phase-balance
2
neutral current transformer possible
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current –

transformers required
Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection phases Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase –
non-directional
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection

current transformers possible
Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection or

3
phases directional transformers possible phase-to-phase connection
4
Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase- Phase-to-ground connection or
phases directional current transformers possible phase-to-phase connection
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection required
ground directional transformers required, phase-balance
neutral current transformers possible
Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault

protection
Residual circuit, if ground current
> 0.05 IN on secondary side, otherwise
3 times phase-to-ground connection or
phase-to-ground connection with open
5
phase-balance neutral current delta winding
Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault p

cos φ measurement
rotection Phase-balance neutral current
Phase-to-ground connection with open
delta winding required 6
7
 Connection of circuit-breaker
Undervoltage releases
8
Undervoltage releases are used for auto-
9
matic tripping of high-voltage motors.
Example:
DC supply voltage of control system fails
and manual electric tripping is no longer
10
possible.
Automatic tripping takes place when
voltage across the coil drops below the trip
limit. In Fig. 5/42, tripping occurs due to Fig. 5/42 Undervoltage release with make contact (50, 51)
failure of DC supply voltage, by automatic
opening of the live status contact upon 11
failure of the protection unit or by short-
circuiting the trip coil in event of network
12
fault.
In Fig. 5/43 tripping is by failure of auxiliary
voltage and by interruption of tripping
circuit in the event of network failure. Upon
13
failure of the protection unit, the tripping
circuit is also interrupted, since contact
held by internal logic drops back into open
position.
14
Fig. 5/43 Undervoltage trip with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted) 15

2
interrupted.
Lockout (ANSI 86)

All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs
3
and reset using the LED reset key. The
lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only
occur after the lockout state is reset.
4 Reverse-power protection for dual

supply (ANSI 32R)
If power is fed to a busbar through two
5
parallel infeeds, then in the event of any
fault on one of the infeeds it should be
selectively interrupted. This ensures a
continued supply to the busbar through
the remaining infeed. For this purpose,
6 directional devices are needed which

detect a short-circuit current or a power
flow from the busbar in the direction of
the infeed. The directional overcurrent
7
protection is usually set via the load
current. It cannot be used to deactivate
low-current faults. Reverse-power
protection can be set far below the rated
8
power. This ensures that it also detects
power feedback into the line in the event
of low-current faults with levels far below
the load current.
Reverse-power protection is performed via
9 the “flexible protection functions” of the
7SJ62.
10
Fig. 5/45 Reverse-power protection for dual supply
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary outputs/command outputs

Measuring circuits
Type 7SJ621,
7SJ623,
7SJ625,
7SJ622
7SJ624
7SJ626
1
Current transformer
Command/indication relay 8 6
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable)
2
Contacts per command/ 1 NO / form A
Option: sensitive ground-fault CT IEE < 1.6 A indication relay (Two contacts changeable to NC/form
Power consumption B, via jumpers)
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A/B
at Inom = 5 A Switching capacity
3
Approx. 0.3 VA per phase
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA Make 1000 W / VA
Overload capability Break 30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s
≤ DC 250 V
4
150 A for 10 s
Switching voltage 5 A continuous,
20 A continuous
Permissible current 30 A for 0.5 s making current,
Dynamic (impulse current) 250 x Inom (half cycle) 2000 switching cycles
5
sensitive ground-fault CT
Electrical tests
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s
Specification
100 A for 10 s
Standards IEC 60255
15 A continuous
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
6
Dynamic (impulse current) 750 A (half cycle) UL508
Voltage transformer Insulation tests
Type 7SJ621, 7SJ623, 7SJ625 Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
7SJ622, 7SJ624, 7SJ626
7
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
Number 3 4 4 all circuits except for auxiliary
Rated voltage Vnom 100 V to 225 V voltage and RS485/RS232 and
Measuring range 0 V to 170 V time synchronization
Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V < 0.3 VA per phase Auxiliary voltage DC 3.5 kV
Overload capability in voltage path

(phase-neutral voltage)
Communication ports
and time synchronization
AC 500 V
8
Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J
all circuits, except communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Auxiliary voltage
ports and time synchronization, at intervals of 5 s
Rated auxiliary
voltage Vaux
DC 24 / 48 V 60 /125 V 110 / 250 V
AC 115 / 230 V
class III
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests
9
Permissible tolerance DC 19-58 V 48–150 V 88–300 V
AC 92–138 V 184–265 V Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(product standard)
10
Ripple voltage, ≤ 12 % EN 50082-2 (generic specification)
peak-to-peak DIN 57435 Part 303
Power consumption High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; τ =15 ms;
Quiescent Approx. 4 W IEC 60255-22-1, class III 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
Energized Approx. 7 W and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Backup time during
loss/short circuit of
≥ 50 ms at V ≥ DC 110 V
≥ 20 ms at V ≥ DC 24 V
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV
8 kV contact discharge;
15 kV air gap discharge;
11
auxiliary voltage ≥ 200 ms at 115 V / AC 230 V and EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
Binary inputs/indication inputs Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
12
Type 7SJ621, 7SJ622, field, non-modulated
7SJ623, 7SJ624 IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III
7SJ625, 7SJ626 Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
Number 8 11 field, amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz
13
Voltage range DC 24–250 V
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition
Pickup threshold modifiable by plug-in jumpers
Pickup threshold DC 19 V IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
For rated control 24/48/60/ 110/125/ Fast transient interference/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
14
voltage 110/125 V DC 220/250 V IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms;
Response time/drop- Approx. 3.5 4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities;
out time Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
Power consumption 1.8 mA (independent of operating voltage)
energized
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests (cont'd) During transportation
1 High-energy surge voltages

(Surge)
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
across contacts: 1 kV; 2 Ω ;18 µF frequency sweep 1 octave/min
2 Binary inputs/outputs From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF

across contacts: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF Shock
Semi-sinusoidal
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
3
IEC 61000-4-6, class III Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
Power frequency magnetic field 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz of 3 axes
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
4 capability
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
damped wave; 50 surges per s;
duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Climatic stress tests
Temperatures
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Ω Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C /-13 °F to +185 °F
5
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz; and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
interference amplitude and pulse-modulated Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C /-4 °F to -158 °F
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 temperature, tested for 96 h
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C /+25 °F to +131 °F
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating) operating temperature acc. to
6 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz,

Ri = 200 Ω
IEC 60255-6
(Legibility of display may be
impaired above +55 °C /+131 °F)
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
– L imiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C /-13 °F to +131 °F
Standard EN 50081-* (generic specification)
permanent storage
7 Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz

only auxiliary voltage IEC/CISPR 22 Limit class B
– L imiting temperature during
transport -25 °C to +70 °C /-13 °F to +158 °F
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz Humidity
IEC/CISPR 11 Limit class B
Permissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative
8
Units with a detached operator It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
panel must be installed in a metal units in such a way that they are 95 % relative humidity;
cubicle to maintain limit class B not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation not permissible!
that could cause condensation.
Mechanical stress tests
9 Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
Unit design
Housing 7XP20
During operation
Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14
10
Weight
Vibration Sinusoidal
Surface-mounting housing 4.5 kg
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz; ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
Flush-mounting housing 4.0 kg
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep 1 octave/min Degree of protection
20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes acc. to EN 60529
11
Surface-mounting housing IP 51
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
Operator safety IP 2x with cover
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
12
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis) Futher information can be found in the current manual at:
1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude www.siemens.com/siprotec
(vertical axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
13
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axe
14
15

7SJ62 multifunction protection relay
Housing, inputs, outputs

7SJ62 - -
1
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 3 x U, 4 x I, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status-contact 1
2
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 3 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI,6 BO, 1 live status-contact 2
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status-contact 3
See next
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI,6 BO, 1 live status-contact 4 page
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 4 x U, 4 x I,8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 5
3
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 6
Measuring inputs (3 x V / 4 x V, 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
Position 15 only with A, C, E, G 1
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 2 4
Iph = 5A1),Ie = 5 A1)(min. = 0.25 A)
5
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 6
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
Position 15 only with A, C, E,G 7

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 2 6
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V4) , threshold binary input DC 176 V 3)
Unit version
6
7
For panel surfacemounting, two-tier terminal top/bottom B
8
For panel flushmounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
For panel flushmounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection /ring-type cable lugs) E

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
B
C
9
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable D
10
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish, selectable E
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian, selectable F
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian, selectable G
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/114

No system interface
Protocols see page 5/114
0
11
12
No interface at rear side 0
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3
Measuring / fault recording

Fault recording 1
13
Slave pointer,mean values, min/max values, fault recording 3

2) T
5) T
emperature monitoring box 7XV5662-
refer to “Accessories”.
AD10, 14
by means of jumpers. 6) When using the temperature monitoring box at an optical interface,
3) T
he binary input thresholds can be selected per binary input by the additional RS485 fiber-optic converter 7XV5650-0 A00 is
means of jumpers.
4) A
C 230 V, starting from device version …/EE. 7) S
required.
tarting from device version .../GG and FW-Version V4.82 15
1 7SJ62 multifunction protection relay

7SJ62 - -

50/51 Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
2

50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection via
3

51 V
49
Voltage-dependent inverse-time overcurrent protection
4

37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
Displacement voltage
74TC Trip circuit supervision
5

86
Inrush blocking
Lockout
 V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
6
81O/U Under-/overfrequency
27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from
32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,
rate-of-frequency-change protection F E
7
 IEF V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
8
rate-of-frequency-change protection
Intermittent ground fault P E
 Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground F C
 V, P, f 67/67N
9
Dir Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
27/59 Under-/overvoltage
10
 Dir IEF 67/67N
Direction determination for overcurrent,
F G
phases and ground

Intermittent ground fault P C
11 

Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N
27/59
Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Intermittent ground fault protection
Under-/overvoltage
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
12 27/47/59(N) Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
32/55/81R
current & voltages):
Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/rate of freq. change-protection
Intermittent ground-fault P G
Sens.ground-f.det. 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
13 

Dir REF
67Ns
phases and ground
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
87N High-impedance restricted ground fault F D 2)
14 Continued on
1) 5
0N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer when next page
 Basic version included
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
15 Dir
IEF
= Directional overcurrent protection
= Intermittent ground fault
3) available beginning with FW / Parameterset-version V4.90



7SJ62 - -
1
2
50N/51N Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, IEp
50N/51N Insensitive ground-fault protection via
3
51 V Voltage-dependent inverse-time overcurrent protection
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
4
37 Undercurrent monitoring
47 Phase sequence
59N/64 Displacement voltage
5
74TC Trip circuit supervision, 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
V, P, f 67Ns
Sens.ground-f.det. Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
6
 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
7
rate-of-frequency-change protection F F 2)
Sens.ground-f.det.
67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir IEF REF
67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
8
 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
Intermittent ground faults P D 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)

Sens.ground-f.det. Motor
67Ns

F B 2)
9
V,P,f REF
10
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics
11
H F 2)
Dir V,P,f REF
67Ns
67Ns
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3) 12

51M
27/59
Load jam protection, motor statistics
Under-/overvoltage 13

H H 2)
14
 Basic version included 1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer when
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Dir
IEF
3) available beginning with FW / Parameterset-version V4.90
Continued on
next page 15
1 7SJ62 multifunction protection relay

7SJ62 - -
2
3
protection, stages I2>, I>>>>, IE>>>>
4
47 Phase sequence
5
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
6
Dir IEF V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
7

66/86
51M
27/59
Restart inhibit
Undervoltage/overvoltage
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency
8

rate-of-frequency-change protection R H 2)
 Motor V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
9
Dir phases and ground
10
rate-of-frequency-change protection H G
11  Motor

48/14
66/86
Starting time supervision, locked rotor
Restart inhibit
ARC, fault locator, synchro-check Without
0
12
79 With auto-reclosure
1
21FL With fault locator
2
79, 21FL With auto-reclosure, with fault locator
3
25 With synchro-check3)
4
25, 79,21FL With synchro-check3), auto-reclosure, fault locator
7
13
 Basic version included 3) Synchro-check (no asynchronous
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection switching), one function group; available
14 Dir
IEF
only with devices 7SJ623, 7SJ624, 7SJ625 and 7SJ626.
4) with FW V4.90
1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current

transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
15 2) Sensitive ground-current transformer

only when position 7 = 2, 6.



7SJ62 - - -
1
2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2
PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1)
MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0 D 3
MODBUS, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2)
9
9
L 0 H
L 0 P
4
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100)2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3)
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3)
9
9
L 2 R
L 2 S
5
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9 L 3 R
6
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3) 9 L 3 S
1) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters.
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3AB10, not available with position 9 = “B”.
7
For double ring, please order converter 6GK1502-4AB10, not available with position 9 = “B”.
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply 7XV5810-0BA00).
2) Not available with position 9 = “B”.
3) available with V4.9
9
Sample order
Position Order No. + Order code

7SJ622 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F A 1 + L 0 G
6 I/O’s: 11 BI/6 BO, 1 live status contact 2 10

7 Current transformer: 5 A 5
8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V 5
11
9 Unit version: Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals E
10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI C
11 Communication: System interface: DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
12 Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232 1
13 Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records
14/15 Protection function package: Basic version plus directional TOC
3
F C
12
13
14
15

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
2 Varistor / Voltage Arrester

125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
3 Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit

SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
5
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
Manual for 7SJ62

English C53000-G1140-C207-x 1)
German C53000-G1100-C207-6
8
1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.).
9 Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier

LSP2289-afp.eps
10 Voltage/current terminal 18-pole/12-pole

Voltage/current terminal 12-pole/8-pole
C73334-A1-C31-1
C73334-A1-C32-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens
Mounting rail
11 Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000

taped on reel
1)
0-827396-1
LSP2090-afp.eps
Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 1)

LSP2091-afp.eps
1
0-163084-2
12
Crimp connector: Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 1 1)

taped on reel
13 Crimping tool for CI2

and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1
1
1)
1)
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
14 for current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens

Short-circuit links Short-circuit links

Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
for current terminals for current terminals
15 1) Your local Siemens representative can inform you on local suppliers.

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

Fig. 5/46 7SJ621 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
1
7SJ623, E
7SJ625 7SJ625x-x D xxx-xxxx
E
9
LSA4734a-en.eps
10
11
12
13

Fig. 5/48 7SJ623, 7SJ625 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
1
7SJ624, E
7SJ626 7SJ626x-x D xxx-xxxx
E
9
LSA4735a-en.eps
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/49 7SJ624, 7SJ626 connection diagram

SIPROTEC 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization
Function overview
Protection functions 1
• Directional overcurrent protection
• Sensitive dir./non-dir. ground-fault detection
2
• Intermittent ground-fault protection
3
• Directional intermittent ground fault protection
LSP2316-afpen.tif
• Motor protection
• Overload protection
• Temperature monitoring
4
• Under-/overvoltage protection
• Under-/overfrequency protection
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection 5
Fig. 5/50 SIPROTEC 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay • Power protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
• Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
Description
• Breaker failure protection 6
7
The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 can be used as a protective control and
• Synchronization
monitoring relay for distribution feeders and transmission
lines of any voltage in networks that are earthed (grounded), • Auto-reclosure
low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compensated • Fault locator
neutral point structure. The relay is suited for networks that
8
• Lockout
are radial or looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal
feeds. The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 is equipped with a synchronization Control functions/programmable logic
function which provides the operation modes ‘synchronization • Flexible number of switching devices
check’ (classical) and ‘synchronous/asynchronous switching’
• Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic
9
(which takes the CB mechanical delay into consideration). Motor
display
protection comprises undercurrent monitoring, starting time
supervision, restart inhibit, locked rotor, load jam protection as • Local/remote switching via key-operated switch
well as motor statistics. • Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
10
The 7SJ64 is featuring the "flexible protection functions". Up to • Extended user-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
20 protection functions can be added according to individual Monitoring functions
requirements. Thus, for example, rate-of-frequency-change
• Operational measured values V, I, f, ...
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented.
• Energy metering values Wp, Wq
The relay provides easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The number of controllable switchgear depends only
• Circuit-breaker wear monitoring 11
on the number of available inputs and outputs. The integrated • Slave pointer
programmable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their • Trip circuit supervision
own functions, e.g. for the automation of switchgear (interlock-
ing). CFC capacity is much larger compared to 7SJ63 due to
• Fuse failure monitor
12
extended CPU power. The user is able to generate user-defined
messages as well. • Motor statistics

communication architectures with control systems.
Communication interfaces
13
– IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
– PROFIBUS DP
– DNP 3 / DNP3 TCP / MODBUS RTU
– PROFINET 14
• Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
• Additional interface for temperature detection (RTD-box)
• Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
15
Application
7 Fig. 5/51 Function diagram
Application Synchronization
8
In order to connect two components of a power system, the relay
The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 unit is a numerical protection relay that also provides a synchronization function which verifies that switching
performs control and monitoring functions and therefore supports ON does not endanger the stability of the power system.
the user in cost-effective power system management, and ensures
reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local operation The synchronization function provides the operation modes ‘syn-
9 has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A large, easy-

to-read graphic display was a major design aim.
chro-check’ (classical) and ‘synchronous/asynchronous switching’
(which takes the c.-b. mechanical delay into consideration).
Control Motor protection
10 The integrated control function permits control of disconnect

devices (electrically operated/motorized switches) or circuit-
When protecting motors, the relays are suitable for asynchro-
nous machines of all sizes.
breakers via the integrated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4
Transformer protection
or the control and protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present
11 status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed.

7SJ64 supports substations with single and duplicate busbars.
The 7SJ64 units perform all functions of backup protection
supplementary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
The number of elements that can be controlled (usually 1 to 5) is suppression effectively prevents tripping by inrush currents.
only restricted by the number of inputs and outputs available. A
12
full range of command processing functions is provided.
short-circuits and insulation faults of the transformer.
Programmable logic
Backup protection
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow users to
The relays can be used universally for backup protection.
13
implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
(interlocking) or a substation via a graphic user interface. Due Flexible protection functions
to extended CPU power, the programmable logic capacity is
much larger compared to 7SJ63. The user can also generate By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
user-defined messages. and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
14 Line protection
The 7SJ64 units can be used for line protection of high and Metering values
medium-voltage networks with grounded, low-resistance
15 grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point. Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values

Application
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>

IE>, IE>>, IE>>>
Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
1
50, 50N I>>>>, I2> Additional definite-time overcurrent protection stages
IE>>>> (phase/neutral) via flexible protection functions
2
51, 51V, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (definite/inverse, phase/neutral),
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Sensitive ground-fault protection
– Cold load pick-up (dynamic setting change) 3

67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection 4

5
79M Auto-reclosure
25 Synchronization

6
47 V2>, phase seq. Unbalance-voltage protection and/or phase-sequence monitoring
ϑ> Thermal overload protection
7
49
51M Load jam protection

8
I< Undercurrent monitoring
9
37
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage/overvoltage protection
59R dV/dt
P<>, Q<>
Rate-of-voltage-change protection
Reverse-power, forward-power protection

10
32
35 cos φ Power factor protection 11

81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency/underfrequency protection
12
21FL Fault locator
13
14
15
Construction
Construction
1 Connection techniques and housing

with many advantages
⅓, ½ and �-rack sizes
2 These are the available housing widths

of the 7SJ64 relays, referred to a
LSP2299-bfpen.tif
19” module frame system. This means
that previous models can always be
3
LSP2174-afp.tif
replaced. The height is a uniform 244 mm
for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm
for surface-mounting housings for all
housing widths. All cables can be con-
4 nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in

terminals are available as an option.
It is thus possible to employ prefabricated
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 5/52 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 5/53 F
ront view of 7SJ64 with
5 mounting on a panel, the connection

terminals are located above and below
with screw-type terminals ⅓ × 19" housing
in the form of screw-type terminals. The

communication interfaces are located in
6 a sloped case at the top and bottom of

the housing. The housing can also be sup-
plied optionally with a detached operator
panel (refer to Fig. 5/91), or without
7
operator panel, in order to allow optimum
operation for all types of applications.
LSP2196-afp.eps
9
10 Fig. 5/54 Housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
11
12
13
LSP2219-afpen.eps
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
15
Fig. 5/55 Surface-mounting housing with Fig. 5/56 Communication interfaces in a
screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing

Overcurrent protection 1
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51,51V, 51N)
This function is based on the phase-
selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four 2
transformers). Three definite-time over-
current protection elements (DMT) exist
3
both for the phases and for the ground.
The current threshold and the delay time
can be set in a wide range. In addition,
inverse-time overcurrent protection
4
characteristics (IDMTL) can be activated.
The inverse-time function provides – as
an option – voltage-restraint or voltage-
controlled operating modes.
With the "flexible protection functions", Fig. 5/57 Definite-time overcurrent protection Fig. 5/58 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
further definite-time overcurrent stages
can be implemented in the 7SJ64 unit. 5
Reset characteristics Available inverse-time characteristics
6
For easier time coordination with electro-
mechanical relays, reset characteristics Inverse • •
according to ANSI C37.112 and Short inverse •
IEC 60255-3 / BS 142 standards are
• •
7
Long inverse
applied.
When using the reset characteristic (disk
emulation), a reset process is initiated
after the fault current has disappeared. Extremely inverse • •
This reset process corresponds to the
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of
Definite inverse •
8
an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
emulation).
User-definable characteristics 9
10
ground units separately. Up to 20 current / time value pairs may
in DIGSI 4.
Inrush restraint
The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second 11

12
For directional and nondirectional overcurrent protection
13
14
15
1 Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.

They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent
rately. Definite-time and inverse-time characteristic is offered.
2
3 tion, directionality (directional decision) is made with voltage

from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory,
4 is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable).
Using negative-sequence variables can be advantageous in cases
where the zero voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable protection
5 zero-sequence impedances.

6 sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disadvan-

tage of time coordination. The directional comparison protection
is suitable if the distances between the protection stations are
not significant and pilot wires are available for signal transmis-
7
sion. In addition to the directional comparison protection, the
directional coordinated overcurrent protection is used for com-
plete selective backup protection. If operated in a closed-circuit
connection, an interruption of the transmission line is detected.
8 (Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection (ANSI 64,

67Ns/67N)
9 sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0. For networks
with an isolated neutral, the reactive current component is
evaluated; for compensated networks, the active current compo-
nent or residual resistive current is evaluated.
10 For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded

networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low-
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the Fig. 5/60 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
11
± 45 degrees.
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode, as an
implemented: tripping or “signalling only mode”. additional short-circuit protection.
12 It has the following functions:

• TRIP via the displacement voltage VE.
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-
• Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
user-defined characteristic. Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
13 • Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-

directional.
• The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode, as tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
14
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns/50N, 51N) The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
15
transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
transformer (also called core-balance CT).
one systems period.

Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems 1
selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable
systems are usually characterized by the following properties:
hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms 2

• They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one halfperiod
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi-
tions and the fault characteristic.
3
4
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak
insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables. Fig. 5/61 Flexible protection functions
Ground fault functions based on fundamental component
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground Flexible protection functions
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent
5
The 7SJ64 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20
ground faults. The function described here evaluates specifically
protective functions. To this end, parameter definitions are used
the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
to link a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic
quantity (measured or derived quantity) (Fig. 5/98). The stan-
dard logic consists of the usual protection elements such as the
6
(Negative-sequence protection) pickup message, the parameter-definable delay time, the TRIP
command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of operation
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can be
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be oper-
7
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground ated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate with
faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the protection priority.
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high-
resistance faults beyond the transformer. Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-
Function ANSI No. 8
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
I>, IE> 50, 50N
V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt
9
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates 27, 59, 59R, 64
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection 3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1, 50N, 46,
relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current 3V0>, V1><, V2>< 59N, 47
is still flowing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to P><, Q>< 32
Auto-reclosures (ANSI 79)

cos φ (p.f.)><
f><
55
81O, 81U
10
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will df/dt>< 81R
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following
functions are possible:
For example, the following can be implemented: 11
• Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R)
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
12
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR) Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (ANSI
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection 27/Q)
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
• ARC can be initiated externally or via CFC
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a genera-
13
• The directional and non-directional elements can either be tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto- devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
reclosure cycle
• Dynamic setting change of the directional and non-directional
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical
power system situations and ensures that the power generation 14
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures
elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system
15
• The AR CLOSE command can be given synchronous by use of conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
the synchronization function.

Synchronization (ANSI 25)
1
• In case of switching ON the circuit-breaker, the units can
check whether the two subnetworks are synchronized (classic
synchro-check). Furthermore, the synchronizing function
may operate in the “Synchronous/asynchronous switching”
2
mode. The unit then distinguishes between synchronous and
asynchronous networks:
In synchronous networks, frequency differences between the
two subnetworks are almost non-existant. In this case, the
circuit-breaker operating time does not need to be considered.
3 Under asynchronous condition, however, this difference is

markedly larger and the time window for switching is shorter.
In this case, it is recommended to consider the operating time
of the circuit- breaker.
4 The command is automatically pre-dated by the duration of the

operating time of the circuit-breaker, thus ensuring that the
contacts of the CB close at exactly the right time. Fig. 5/62 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
5
Up to 4 sets of parameters for the synchronizing function can
be stored in the unit. This is an important feature when several event of internal faults, an imbalance occurs which leads to a
circuit-breakers with different operating times are to be oper- voltage and a current flow through the resistor R.
ated by one single relay. The current transformers must be of the same type and must
6
at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
For protecting cables and transformers, an overload protection transformation ratio and an approximately identical knee-point
with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a errors.
7 thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment Settable dropout delay times
and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
8 and the load fluctuations.
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator), a
the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the
be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined
9 stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the

coolant can be detected serially via an external temperature
for certain functions such as time-overcurrent protection,
ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
called RTD- box). The thermal replica of the overload function  Motor protection
10 is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is

no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are
Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)
constant. If a motor is started up too many times in succession, the rotor

can be subject to thermal overload, especially the upper edges
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
11
of the bars. The rotor temperature is calculated from the stator
current. The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the motor
if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete start-
up (see Fig. 5/100).
12
reactors when these are operated on an grounded network. Emergency start-up
When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied, This function disables the reclosing lockout via a binary input
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in by storing the state of the thermal replica as long as the binary
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high input is active. It is also possible to reset the thermal replica to
13
R whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/99). In the case of 7SJ6 zero.
units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)
input IEE.
Up to two temperature monitoring boxes with a total of
14 The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event of an
internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage spikes
12 measuring sensors can be used for temperature monitoring
and detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of
occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time, this motors, generators and transformers can be monitored with
results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy this device. Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of
15
reduction of the average value. If no faults have occurred and rotating machines are monitored for limit value violation. The
in the event of external faults, the system is at equilibrium, and temperatures are being measured with the help of temperature
the voltage through the resistor is approximately zero. In the

detectors at various locations of the device
1
to be protected. This data is transmitted
to the protection relay via one or two
temperature monitoring boxes (see “Acces-
sories”, page 5/197).
Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)

Starting time supervision protects the
2
motor against long unwanted start-ups
that might occur in the event of excessive
load torque or excessive voltage drops
within the motor, or if the rotor is locked.
3
Rotor temperature is calculated from
measured stator current. The tripping time
is calculated according to the following
equation: 4
5
 I 2
t =  A  ⋅ TA
I 
I = Actual current flowing
Fig. 5/63
IMOTOR START = P
ickup current to detect a
t
motor start
= Tripping time
Motor statistics
6
Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
IA = Rated motor starting current rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current (2 times, for
7
warm and cold motor) the device.
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the

state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in  Voltage protection
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) 8
The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
9
operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence voltage. Three-
phase and single-phase connections are possible.
10
An instantaneous tripping is effected.
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of the machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
11
motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due to a load motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and tripping). and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
suitable under these circumstances.
wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) falling below this frequency range the function continues to
work, however, with a greater tolerance band.
12
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-
13
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and to-ground or positive phase-sequence voltage, and can be
protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise. monitored with a current criterion.
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and under-
14
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted
1) The 45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz range is available for fN = 50/60 Hz.

can be removed at a specified frequency setting. Frequency pro-
tection can be used over a wide frequency range (40 to 60, 50 to
15
Protection functions, functions
70 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable as overfrequency
1
or underfrequency) and each element can be delayed separately.
Blocking of the frequency protection can be performed if using a
binary input or by using an undervoltage element.
2 The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and

3 Circuit-breaker wear monitoring

remaining service life of a circuit-breaker (CB) allow CB mainte-
nance intervals to be aligned to their actual degree of wear. The
4 benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs.
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the
wear or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes
5
into account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have
evolved which reflect the different operator philosophies. To do
justice to these, the devices offer several methods:
• ΣI
6 • Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
• Σ I 2t
Functions
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the  Control and automatic functions
7
Control
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle support all control and monitoring functions that are required
diagram (see Fig. 5/101) and the breaking current at the time
8
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still The main application is reliable control of switching and other
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 processes.
only have to be set on the device. These are specified in the CB's The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
9 technical data. All of these methods are phase-selective and a
limit value can be set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
7SJ64 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and
value falls below or exceeds the limit value during determination indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
of the remaining service life. intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
10 Commissioning The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via:

Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
– binary inputs
DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
11
and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The
– DIGSI 4
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay Automation / user-defined logic
controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide-
ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
12 information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces-
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all input or via communication interface.
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
13 to a control and protection system. Switching authority

Switching authority is determined according to parameters,
Test operation communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an If a source is set to “LOCAL”, only local switching operations are
14 automatic control system for test purposes. possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
Key-operated switch
15 1) The 40 to 60, 50 to 70 Hz range is available for fN = 50/60 Hz.

7SJ64 units are fitted with key-operated switch function for
local/remote changeover and changeover between interlocked
switching and test operation.
Functions
Command processing
All the functionality of command process-
ing is offered. This includes the processing 1
of single and double commands with or
without feedback, sophisticated monitor-
2
ing of the control hardware and software,
checking of the external process, control
actions using functions such as runtime
monitoring and automatic command
3
termination after output. Here are some
• Single and double commands using 1,
1 plus 1 common or 2 trip contacts
4
• User-definable bay interlocks
• Operating sequences combining several
switching operations such as control
of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and
5
grounding switches
• Triggering of switching operations,
indications or alarm by combination with
existing information Fig. 5/65 Typical wiring for 7SJ642 motor direct control (simplified representation without
fuses). Binary output BO6 and BO7 are interlocked so that only one set of contacts
Motor control are closed at a time.
6
The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 with high perfor-
mance relays is well-suited for direct
7
activation of the circuit-breaker, discon-
nector and grounding switch operating
mechanisms in automated substations.
Interlocking of the individual switching
8
devices takes place with the aid of
programmable logic. Additional auxiliary
relays can be eliminated. This results in
less wiring and engineering effort.
Assignment of feedback to command

9
The positions of the circuit-breaker or
switching devices and transformer taps
10
are acquired by feedback. These indica-
tion inputs are logically assigned to the
Fig. 5/66 Example: Single busbar with circuit-breaker and motor-controlled three-position
corresponding command outputs. The
switch
unit can therefore distinguish whether
the indication change is a consequence
of switching operation or whether it is a
spontaneous change of state. 11
Chatter disable
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether,
in a configured period of time, the number
12
of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the
indication input is blocked for a certain
period, so that the event list will not record 13
Indication filtering and delay

Binary indications can be filtered or 14
delayed.
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes
in potential at the indication input. The
Fig. 5/67 Example: Circuit-breaker interlocking 15
Functions
indication is passed on only if the indication voltage is still pres-
1
ent after a set period of time.
In the event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time.
The information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
present after this time.
2 Indication derivation
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
3
volume of information to the system interface can thus be
Measured values
4 voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
tive power. The following functions are available for measured
value processing:
• Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (67Ns)
5 • Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1, Vsyn
LSP2078-afp.eps
6 • Power factor (cos φ), (total and phase selective)

• Frequency
7
• Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
values
• Mean operating temperature of overload function Fig. 5/68 NX PLUS panel (gas-insulated)
8 • Limit value monitoring

CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
9 • Zero suppression
Metered values
10 For internal metering, the unit can calculate an energy metered
value from the measured current and voltage values. If an
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
11
SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
indication input.
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made
12
between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy.
Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
All units are designed specifically to meet the requirements of
13
high/medium-voltage applications.
In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g. for current,
voltage, frequency measuring transducer ...) or additional
control components are necessary.
14
15
Communication
Communication

2

4
5
by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications: 6
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time 7
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo- 8
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this
9
operated by DIGSI.
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
Fig. 5/70 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
10
number of protection units via DIGSI. It can be an electrical
IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
RS232/RS485 interface. For special applications, a maximum
of two temperature monitoring boxes (RTD-box) can be con-
nected to this interface as an alternative.
11
• Additional interface
Up to 2 RTD-boxes can be connected via this interface. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages
System interface protocols (retrofittable) from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
12
IEC 61850 protocol
Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide standard read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
for protection and control systems used by power supply corpora- redundant module).
tions. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support this standard.
PROFIBUS DP protocol
13
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via
the Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. It is also possible to
available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, receive
14
retrieve operating and fault messages and fault recordings via
commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
a browser. This Web monitor also provides a few items of unit-
transferred.
specific information in browser windows.
1) F
or units in panel surface-mounting housings 15

Communication
MODBUS RTU protocol
1 This uncomplicated, serial protocol is

mainly used in industry and by power
supply corporations, and is supported by a
number of unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC
2
units function as MODBUS slaves, making
their information available to a master
or receiving information from it. A time-
stamped event list is available.
3 PROFINET
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor
of PROFIBUS DP and is supported in the
4
5 November 2012. All network redundancy

6
SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist Fig. 5/71 System solution/communication
7
LSP3.01-0021.tif
configurable process alarms. Switching
9 commands can be executed by the system

direction. The PROFINET implementation is
certified. The device also supports the IEC
10
61850 protocol as a server on the same
ethernet module in addition to the PRO-
FINET protocol. Client server connections
are possible for the intercommunication
between devices, e.g. for transmitting Fig. 5/72 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
11
with integrated Ethernet-switch
fault records and GOOSE messages.
DNP 3.0 protocol

the binary Comtrade format and can be retrieved via the DNP3 file
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network transfer. The time synchronization is performed via the DNP3 TCP
12 Protocol) for the station and network control levels. SIPROTEC units
function as DNP slaves, supplying their information to a master
client or SNTP. The device can also be integrated into a network
monitoring system via the SNMP V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3
system or receiving information from it. TCP protocol the IEC 61850 protocol (the device works as a server)
and the GOOSE messages of the IEC 61850 are available for the
13
DNP3 TCP intercommunication between devices.
The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is supported System solutions for protection and station control
with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two DNP3 TCP
clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can be realized Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
14 for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch in the module. can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical RS485
For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring can be constructed. bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the units
Single-point indications, double-point indications, measured and exchange information with the control system.
metered values can be confi gured with DIGSI 4 and are transmit-
15
ted to the DNPi client. Switching commands can be executed in
SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.
the controlling direction. Fault records of the device are stored in

Typical connections
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with
1
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/106). SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
2
(see Fig. 5/107).
3
Typical connections

 4
Standard connection
5
phase currents by the residual current circuit.
10
Fig. 5/73 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/74 Sensitive ground current detection without directional element
11
12
13
14
15
Fig. 5/75 Residual current circuit with directional element

Typical connections
1 The figure shows the connection of two

phase-to-ground voltages and the VE
voltage of the open delta winding and a
phase-ground neutral current transformer
2
for the ground current. This connection
maintains maximum precision for direc-
tional ground-fault detection and must be
used in compensated networks.
3

7
9 Fig. 5/77 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
10
Connection for the synchronization
11 function
The 3-phase system is connected as refer-
12
synchronized.
13
Fig. 5/78 Measuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder
14
voltage for synchronization
15

2

non-directional


3
4

protection
5
Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

cos φ measurement transformers required
Typical applications 7
 Application examples
Synchronization function
When two subnetworks must be intercon-
8
nected, the synchronization function
9
monitors whether the subnetworks are
synchronous and can be connected without
risk of losing stability.
As shown in Fig. 5/116, load is being fed
10
from a generator to a busbar via a trans-
former. It is assumed that the frequency
difference of the 2 subnetworks is such
that the device determines asynchronous 1) Synchronization function
system conditions.
11
2) Auto-reclosure function
The voltages of the busbar and the feeder
should be the same when the contacts Fig. 5/79 Measuring of busbar and feeder voltages for synchronization
are made; to ensure this condition the
12
synchronism function must run in the
“synchronous/asynchronous switching” mode. In this mode, the
operating time of the CB can be set within the relay. The vector group of the transformer can be considered by setting
Differences between angle and frequency can then be calculated parameters. Thus no external circuits for vector group adaptation
by the relay while taking into account the operating time of the are required.
CB. From these differences, the unit derives the exact time for
issuing the CLOSE command under asynchronous conditions.
This synchronism function can be applied in conjunction with the
auto-reclosure function as well as with the control function CLOSE
13
When the contacts close, the voltages will be in phase. commands (local/remote).
14
15
1 Undervoltage releases
2
Example:
possible.
3 Automatic tripping takes place when

voltage across the coil drops below the
trip limit. In Figure 5/172, tripping occurs
due to failure of DC supply voltage, by
4
automatic opening of the live status
contact upon failure of the protection unit
or by short-circuiting the trip coil in event
of a network fault.
5 Fig. 5/80 Undervoltage release with make contact 50, 51
In Fig. 5/118 tripping is by failure of auxil-
6
iary voltage and by interruption of tripping
7 position.
10 Fig. 5/81 Undervoltage release with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted)
11
12
13
14
15

One or two binary inputs can be used for
monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil 1
2
interrupted.
Lockout (ANSI 86)

3
Reverse-power protection for

dual supply (ANSI 32R)
4
5
fault on one of the infeeds it should be Fig. 5/82 Trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs
directional devices are needed which
detect a short-circuit current or a power 6
7
low-current faults. Reverse-power protec-
tion can be set far below the rated power.
8
This ensures that it also detects power
feedback into the line in the event of low-
current faults with levels far below the
load current. Reverse-power protection
is performed via the “flexible protection
functions” of the 7SJ64.
9
10
Fig. 5/83 Reverse-power protection for dual supply 11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary outputs/command outputs
1 Measuring circuits
Type
Number (marshallable)
7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
7 15 20 33 48
Current transformer Voltage range DC 24 – 250 V
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable) Pickup threshold
2 Option: sensitive ground-fault CT

Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A
modifiable by plug-in
jumpers
Pickup threshold DC DC 19 V DC 88 V
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase For rated control voltage
3
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA DC DC 24/48/60/110/ DC 110/125/220/250 V
125 V
Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s Power consumption 0.9 mA (independent of operating voltage)
150 A for 10 s energized for BI 8…19 / 21…32;
20 A continuous 1.8 mA for BI 1…7 / 20/33…48
4 Dynamic (impulse current)

250 x Inom (half cycle) Binary outputs/command outputs
Type 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
sensitive ground-fault CT
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s Command/indication 5 13 8 11 21
relay
5
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous Contacts per command/ 1 NO / form A
Dynamic (impulse current) 750 A (half cycle) indication relay
Voltage transformer Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A / B
Rated voltage Vnom 100 V to 225 V Switching capacity
6 Measuring range
Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V
0 V to 200 V
< 0.3 VA per phase

Make 1000 W / VA
Break 30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
Overload capability in voltage path
(phase-neutral voltage) Switching voltage ≤ DC 250 V
7 Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous Permissible current 5 A continuous,

30 A for 0.5 s making current,
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter)
2000 switching cycles
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 24 / 48 V 60 /125 V 110 / 250 V
Power relay (for motor control)
Permissible tolerance DC 19 – 58 V 48 – 150 V 88 – 300 V
8
Type 7SJ640 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
Ripple voltage, ≤ 12 % of rated auxiliary voltage 7SJ641
peak-to-peak
Number 0 2 (4) 4 (8) 4 (8)
Power consumption 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645 7SJ647
7SJ642 Number of contacts/relay 2 NO / form A
9 Quiescent Approx. 5 W 5.5 W 6.5 W 7.5 W Switching capacity

Energized Approx. 9 W 12.5 W 15 W 21 W Make 1000 W / VA
at 48 V … 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
Backup time during ≥ 50 ms at V > DC 110 V
loss/short-circuit of ≥ 20 ms at V > DC 24 V Break 1000 W / VA
auxiliary direct voltage at 48 V … 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
10 Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux AC

Permissible tolerance AC
115 V / 230 V
92 – 32 V / 184 – 265 V
Switching voltage
Permissible current
≤ DC 250 V
5 A continuous,
30 A for 0.5 s
Power consumption 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645 7SJ647
7SJ642
11 Quiescent
Energized
Approx. 7 W
Approx. 12 W
9W
19 W
12 W
23 W
16 W
33 W
Backup time during ≥ 200 ms
loss/short-circuit of
12
auxiliary alternating voltage
13
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;
1
Specification interference amplitude and pulse-modulated
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
Standards IEC 60255
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating)
UL508
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz,
2
Insulation tests Ri = 200 Ω
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz Standard EN 50081-* (generic specification)
all circuits except for auxiliary
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz
3
voltage and RS485/RS232 and
only auxiliary voltage IEC/CISPR 22 Limit class B
time synchronization
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz
Auxiliary voltage DC 3.5 kV
IEC/CISPR 11 Limit class B
Communication ports AC 500 V
Units with a detached operator
4
panel must be installed in a metal
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J cubicle to maintain limit class B
all circuits, except communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
ports and time synchronization, at intervals of 5 s
class III Mechanical stress tests
5
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22 During operation
(product standard) Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
EN 50082-2 (generic specification)
DIN 57435 Part 303 Vibration Sinusoidal
6
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz; ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; τ =15 ms; IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration
IEC 60255-22-1, class III 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s frequency sweep 1 octave/min
and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III 20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; Shock Semi-sinusoidal
7
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV 15 kV air gap discharge; IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
and EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
field, non-modulated IEC 60255-21-3, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III
8
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz; 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
field, amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz (vertical axis)
IEC 61000-4-3; class III 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition (horizontal axis)
9
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III (vertical axis)
Fast transient interference/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms;
4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; During transportation
10
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
High-energy surge voltages Vibration Sinusoidal
(Surge) IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
IEC 61000-4-5; class III IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Binary inputs/outputs
across contacts: 1 kV; 2 Ω ;18 µF
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF Shock
Semi-sinusoidal
11
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
12
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 61000-4-6, class III IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms
Power frequency magnetic field 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s of 3 axes
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz
Oscillatory surge withstand
capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
damped wave; 50 surges per s; 13
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
14
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Ω
15
Technical data
1 Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C / -4 °F to +158 °F
2
temperature, tested for 96 h
Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
operating temperature acc. to
IEC 60255-6
3 impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)

permanent storage
-25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to +131 °F
– Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F

transport
4 Humidity
Permissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative humi-
It is recommended to arrange the dity; on 56 days a year up to 95 %
units in such a way that they are relative humidity; condensation not
5
not exposed to direct sunlight or permissible!
Unit design
6
Type 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645
7SJ642 7SJ647
Housing 7XP20
Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14 of
this catalog
7 Weight in kg Housing
width ⅓
Housing
width ½
Housing
width �
Surface-mounting housing 8 11 15
Flush-mounting housing 5 6 10
8
Housing for detached operator
operator panel – 8 12
Detached operator panel – 2.5 2.5
Degree of protection
acc. to EN 60529
9
Operator safety IP 2x with cover
10 Futher information can be found in the current manual at:

11
12
13
14
15

7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization
Housing, binary inputs and outputs

7SJ64 - -
1
Housing ⅓ 19”, 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live status contact, text display 4 x 20 character (only for 7SJ640)
9th position only with: B, D, E 0
Housing ½ 19”, 15 BI, 13 BO (1 NO/NC or 1a/b contact), 1 live status contact, graphic display
Housing ½ 19”, 20 BI, 8 BO, 2 power relays (4 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display
1
2
See next page 2
Housing � 19”, 33 BI, 11 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display 5
3
Housing � 19”, 48 BI, 21 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display 7
Measuring inputs (4 x V , 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
4
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
5
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
Position 15 only with A, C, E,G 7
6
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs)
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC19 V 3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC 88 V 3) 5
Unit version
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel,
7
panel mounting in low-voltage housing A
Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier terminals on top/bottom B
Surface-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs),
detached operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housing C
8
Flush-mounting housing, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E
Surface-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs),
without operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housingg F
9
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, without operator panel,
panel mounting in low-voltage housing G
Region-specific default settings / function versions and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German (language selectable) A
10
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB) (language selectable) B
11
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US) (language selectable) C
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French (language selectable) D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish (language selectable) E
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian (language selectable) F
12
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian(language can be changed) G
13
14
2) T
15
by means of jumpers.
3) T
he binary input thresholds can be selected per binary input by
means of jumpers.

1 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization

7SJ64 - - -
2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1 See
following
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2 pages
3
PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, RS485 9 L 0 D
MODBUS, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2) 9
4
L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2) 9 L 0 H
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2) 9 L 0 P
5 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100) 2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 4) 9 L 2 R
6 DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 4)

PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 4)
9
9
L 2 S
L 3 R
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 4) 9 L 3 S
7 Only Port C (service interface)

DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box3), electrical RS485 2
8
Port C and D (service and additional interface) 9 M
Port C (service interface)
DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box3), electrical RS485
2
9 PortD(additional interface)
RTD-box3), 820 nm fiber, ST connector 5) A
RTD-box3), electrical RS485
F
10 Measuring/fault recording
Fault recording 1
Slave pointer,mean values, min/max values, fault recording
3
11
12
1) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”, please order 7SJ6 unit with 2) Not available with position 9 = “B”.
RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters. 3) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662- AD10,
13
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-2CB10, not availab- refer to “Accessories”.
le with position 9 = “B”. 4) Available with V4.9
For double ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3CB10, not
5) When using the temperature monitoring box at an optical interface,
available with position 9 = “B”.
the additional RS485 fiber-optic converter 7XV5650-0 A00 is
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply
required.
14
7XV5810-0BA00).
15


7SJ64 - - -
1

50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection through
2

51 V
49
3

37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
Displacement voltage
4

86
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup, Inrush blocking
Lockout F A 5
 V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
6
27/Q
rate-of-frequency-change protection F E
 IEF V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
7
32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,rate-of-frequency-
change protection Intermittent ground fault P E
 Dir

67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground F C 8
 Dir V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground

27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from 9
rate-of-frequency-change protection F G
10
 Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Intermittent ground fault protection
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
11
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
current & voltages)
32/55/81R Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/rate of freq. change-protection
Intermittent ground-fault P G
 Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
12
Intermittent ground fault P C
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
13
F D 2)
14
Continued on
next page
 Basic version included 1) O
nly with insensitive ground-current transformer when position
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 7 = 1, 5, 7.
2) F
or isolated/compensated networks only with sensitive
15
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection
ground-current transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
3) available with V4.9

1 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization

7SJ64 - - -

2

50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection via
3

51 V
49
4

37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
Displacement volt
5

86
Inrush blocking
Lockout
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
6 

87N
27/59
Under-/overvoltage
7
rate-of-frequency-change protection F F 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor IEF 67/67N Directional sensitive ground-fault detection, phases and ground
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
8
Intermittent ground fault P D 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
9 
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67Ns

F B 2)

10
11
rate-of-frequency-change protection H F 2)
12 Dir V,P,f REF

67Ns
67Ns
87N
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
13

51M
27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
Under-/overfrequency
14

H H 2)
 Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Continued on
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 2) For isolated/compensated networks only with sensitive ground-current next page
15 Dir = Directional overcurrent protection transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
IEF = Intermittent ground fault 3) available with V4.9



7SJ64 - - -
1
2
3
4
47 Phase sequence
5
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
6
Dir V,P,f REF
7
27/59 Undervoltage/overvoltage
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency
8
rate-of-frequency-change protection R H 2)
 Motor V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
Dir phases and ground

48/14
66/86
Starting time supervision, locked rotor
Restart inhibit 9

10
H G
11
 Motor 48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
ARC, fault locator, synchronization
Without
12
0
21FL With fault locator 2
79, 21FL With auto-reclosure, with fault locator 3
25 With synchronization 4
25, 79,21FL With synchronization, auto-reclosure, fault locator 7
ATEX100 Certification
For protection of explosion-protected motors (increased-safety type of protection “e”)
13
Z X 9 9 2)
14
 Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection
2) This variantmight be supplied with a previous firmware version.
3) available with V4.9 15

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
2 Varistor/VoltageArrester
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
3 Connecting cable
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit

SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
5
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
Manual for 7SJ64

English /German C53000-G1100-C147-x 1)
8
1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.).

package
Supplier

LSP2289-afp.eps
C73334-A1-C31-1
10
Voltage/current terminal 18-pole/12-pole 1 Siemens
Mounting rail
11 Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

taped on reel
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
12 mm2 0-163083-7
Crimp connector: Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 4000 1)
taped on reel
13 0-734372-1
Crimping tool for CI2 1 1)

LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens
14
for current terminals
Short-circuit links Short-circuit links Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
for current terminals for current terminals

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
*) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 1) Power relays are intended to directly control motorized switches. The power relays are
of this catalog. interlocked so only one relay of each pair can close at a time, in order to avoid shorting
For the allocation of the terminals of the panel out the power supply. The power relay pairs are BO6/BO7, BO8/BO9. If used for protection
surface-mounting version refer to the manual purposes only one binary output of a pair can be used.
(http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).

Connection diagram
10
11
12 *) For pinout of communication ports see

part 14 of this catalog.
For the allocation of the terminals of
the panel surface-mounting version
13
refer to the manual
(http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
1) Power relays are intended to directly
control motorized switches. The power
relays are interlocked so only one relay
14
of each pair can close at a time, in order
to avoid shorting out the power supply.
The power relay pairs are BO6/BO7,
BO8/BO9, BO13/BO14, BO15/BO16.
If used for protection purposes only one
15
binary output of a pair can be used.
Fig. 5/87 7SJ645 connection diagram

Connection diagram
10
11
12
1) Power relays are intended to directly

13
control motorized switches. The power
relays are interlocked so only one relay
14
of each pair can close at a time, in order
to avoid shorting out the power supply.
The power relay pairs are BO6/BO7,
BO8/BO9, BO13/BO14, BO15/BO16.
If used for protection purposes only one
15
binary output of a pair can be used.
Fig. 5/88 7SJ647 connection diagram part 1; continued on following page

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/89 7SJ647 connection diagram part 2

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Description
Protection functions (continued)

• Under-/overvoltage protection
• Under-/overfrequency protection 1
2
• P
ower protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
• U
ndervoltage controlled reactive power protection
• Breaker failure protection
• Synchro-check
3
• Fault locator
4
• Lockout
• Admittance Earth Fault Protection
• Auto-reclosure
5
Control functions/programmable logic
Fig. 5/90 SIPROTEC 7SJ66 multifunction protection relay • Commands f. ctrl of CB and of isolators
• Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
• Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
Description • User-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking) 6
The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 unit is a numerical protection, control and
• Operational measured values V, I, f
7
monitoring device, designed to use in Medium Voltage and
Industry applications. • Energy metering values Wp, Wq
SIPROTEC 7SJ66 is featuring the "flexible protection functions". • Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
Up to 20 protection functions can be added according to individ- • Slave pointer
8
ual requirements. Thus, for example, a rate-of-frequency-change • Trip circuit supervision
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented.
• Fuse failure monitor
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further switch- • 8 oscillographic fault records with a sampling rate of 1.6 kHz
ing devices and automation functions. The integrated graphical
9
• Motor statistics
logic editor (CFC) allows the user to implement its own func-
tions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking). • Security log
The communication interfaces support the easy integration into Communication (build in interfaces)
modern communication networks.
10
IEC 60870-5-103 / IEC 61850 / Modbus RTU / DNP3
Function overview • Service interface for DIGSI 4/ RTD-Box
• Electrical and optical interface
11
Protection functions • RSTP, PRP (Redundancy Protocol for Ethernet)
• Overcurrent protection • Front USB interface for DIGSI 4
• Directional overcurrent protection • Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
• Sensitive directional ground-fault detection
Hardware
12
• Intermittent ground-fault protection
• Directional intermittent ground fault protection • Screw-type current terminals
• Spring or Screw-type Voltage and Binary I/O terminals
• 4 current and 4 voltage transformers
13
• Motor protection • 16/22/36 binary inputs
14
• Overload protection • 7/10/23 output relays
• Temperature monitoring • Graphical or 8 line text display
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Application
1
Busbar
Local/remote control CFC logic Metering values

25 Synchrocheck
Commands/Feedbacks
2
Set points
74TC Trip circuit supervision V, f, P
52 AND Mean value I, V, Watts,
Vars,p.f.,f Flexible protection functions
86 Lock out Min/Max-Log P<>, Q<> cosφ df/dt
32 55 81R
HMI Communication interface Energy meter:
3
RTD 1) box
calculated and/or by impulses f<, f> V> V<
Electrical: IEC61850 interface
IEC60870-5-103 81U/O 59 27
Motor protection Fault Locator
Modbus RTU Fault recording
Restart Starting Load
DNP3 inhibit I< time jam Directional
Phase sequence
Optical: IEC61850 66/86 37 48 51M
4
FL 47
monitoring
DNP3
38 14
I>> dir. IE>> dir.
Bearing Locked Motor I> dir. IE> dir.
temp rotor statistics Ip dir. IEp dir.
67 67N
5 I>>,
I>>>
I>,
Ip
IE>>,
IE>>>
IE>,
IEp I2> >
Breaker failure
protection
Dir. Sensitive earth-fault
InRush Intermitt.
50 51 50N 51N 46 49 50BF 51V detection
BLK ground flt
IEE>>,
6
IEE>
IE>>, IE>, Hight-impedance Auto- IEEp VE>
IE>>> IEp restricted earth-fault 79
reclosure
50N 51N 87N 67Ns 64
7
1)
RTD = resistance temperature detector
8 Application Synchro-check
In order to connect two components of a power system, the
The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 unit is a numerical protection relay that also relay provides a synchro-check function which verifies that
9 performs control and monitoring functions and therefore sup-

ports the user in cost-effective power system management. The
switching ON does not endanger the stability of the power
system.
relay ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic Motor protection
10
criteria. A large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.
When protecting motors, the SIPROTEC 7SJ66 relay is suitable for
Control asynchronous machines of all sizes.
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect Transformer protection
11
devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-
protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position)
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func-
12
short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
tions is provided.
Backup protection
Programmable logic
The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 can be used universally for backup protec-
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to
13 implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
tion.

user can also generate user-defined messages.
By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
14 Line protection
The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 units can be used for line protection of
high and medium-voltage networks with earthed (grounded),
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point. Metering values
15 Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values


SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Application
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>,IE>>> Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
1
50, 51V, 51N
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (definite/inverse, phase/neutral), Admittance Y0>,
2
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Directional / non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection
3
67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection
4
79 Auto-reclosure
25 Synchro-check 5
6
47 V2>, phase-sequence Unbalance-voltage protection and / or phase-sequence monitoring
49 ϑ> Thermal overload protection

8
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage / overvoltage protection 9

59R dV/dt Rate-of-voltage-change protection
P<>, Q<>
10
32 Reverse-power, forward-power protection
55 cos φ Power factor protection
81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency / underfrequency protection

11
12
21FL Fault locator
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
4
Fig. 5/92 SIPROTEC 7SJ66 rear view with Fig. 5/93 Definite-time overcurrent Fig. 5/94 Inverse-time overcurrent
5 optical Ethernet system interfaces protection protection
Construction Available inverse-time characteristics
6
Inverse • •
1/3-rack size and 1/2-rack size are the available housing Short inverse •
widths of the SIPROTEC 7SJ66 relays, referred to a 19" module
• •
7
Long inverse
frame system. This means that previous models can always be
replaced. The height is a uniform 244 mm for flush-mounting Moderately inverse •
housing. All CT-cables can be connected with or without ring Very inverse • •
lugs.
Extremely inverse • •
8 Reset characteristics
For easier time coordination with electromechanical relays, reset
9
characteristics according to ANSI C37.112 and IEC 60255-3 /
BS 142 standards are applied.
Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51V, 51N)
When using the reset characteristic (disk emulation), a reset
This function is based on the phase-selective measurement of process is initiated after the fault current has disappeared. This
10
the three phase currents and the ground current (four trans- reset process corresponds to the reverse movement of the Fer-
formers). Three definite-time overcurrent protection elements raris disk of an electromechanical relay (thus: disk emulation).
(DMT) exist both for the phases and for the ground. The current
threshold and the delay time can be set within a wide range. User-definable characteristics
In addition, inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics
11
(IDMTL) can be activated.
The inverse-time function provides – as an option – voltage-
ground units separately. Up to 20 current/time value pairs may
restraint or voltage-controlled operating modes.
12
in DIGSI 4.
Inrush restraint
The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second
13
14
For directional and non-directional overcurrent protection
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66

Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.
They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent 1
rately. Definite-time and inverse-time characteristics are offered.
2
tion, directionality (directional decision) is made with voltage
from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory, 3
is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable). Using negative- 4
sequence variables can be advantageous in cases where the zero
voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero-sequence protection
impedances.

5
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disad-
vantage of time coordination. The directional comparison 6
protection is suitable if the distances between the protection
stations are not significant and pilot wires are available for
7
signal transmission. In addition to the directional comparison
protection, the directional coordinated overcurrent protection
is used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in
a closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission
line is detected.
(Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection 8

(ANSI 64, 67Ns, 67N)
sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0.
9
For networks with an isolated neutral, the reactive current
10
component is evaluated; for compensated networks, the active
current component or residual resistive current is evaluated.
For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded
networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low- Fig. 5/96 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the
11
± 45 degrees.
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection
12
mented: tripping or “signalling only mode”.
(ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns / 50N, 51N)
It has the following functions:
• TRIP via the displacement voltage VE. transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
• Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one transformer (also called core-balance CT).
user-defined characteristic.
• Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an
13
directional.
It is also possible to detect gound faults with the admittance
• The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as
principle.
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-

nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
2
tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
3
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
one systems period.
4 Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

Fig. 5/97 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems
5 selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded

cable systems are usually characterized by the following proper- High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
ties:
6
hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms
• They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one halfperiod reactors when these are operated on an grounded network.
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi
tions and the fault characteristic. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied, all
7
current transformers in the protected area are connected in par-
allel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high R
whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/134). In the case of 7SJ6
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
8
insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables.
Ground fault functions based on fundamental component input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground of an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent spikes occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time,
ground faults. The function described here evaluates specifi cally this results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy
9 the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
reduction of the average value.
If no faults have occurred and in the event of external faults, the
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) system is at equilibrium, and the voltage through the resistor is
10
(Negative-sequence protection) approximately zero. In the event of internal faults, an imbalance
occurs which leads to a voltage and a current flow through the
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ resistor R.
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground The current transformers must be of the same type and must
11 faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
resistance faults beyond the transformer. transformation ratio and an approximately identical knee-point
voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) errors.
12 If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates
13
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection
relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
is still flowing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66

The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 units enable the user to easily add on up
to 20 protective functions. To this end, parameter definitions 1
are used to link a standard protection logic with any chosen
characteristic quantity (measured or derived quantity). The
2
standard logic consists of the usual protection elements such
as the pickup message, the parameter-definable delay time, the

TRIP command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of opera-
tion for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can
3
be three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be
operated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate
with protection priority.
Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-

Fig. 5/98 Flexible protection functions
4
Function ANSI No.

I>, IE> 50, 50N
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
5
V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt 27, 59, 59R, 64
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1, 50N, 46,
3V0>, V1><, V2>< 59N, 47 • ARC can be initiated externally or via CFC
P><, Q>< 32
• The directional and non-directional elements can either be
6
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto-
cos φ (p.f.)>< 55 reclosure cycle
f>< 81O, 81U • Dynamic setting change of the directional and non-directional
df/dt>< 81R elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
For example, the following can be implemented:

7
• Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and
8
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a
thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment
(ANSI 27/Q) and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly
adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load
9
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage and the load fluctuations.
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a genera- For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a
tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
10
be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the
power system situations and ensures that the power generation coolant can be detected serially via an external temperature
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system called RTD-box). The thermal replica of the overload function
conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized. is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is
no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are 11
Synchro-check (ANSI 25) constant.
In case of switching ON the circuit- breaker, the units can check
12
whether the two subnetworks are synchronized. Settable dropout delay times
Voltage-, frequency- and phase-angle-differences are being If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
checked to determine whether synchronous conditions are in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
existent. the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)

grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the 13
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following for certain functions such as time-over-current protection,
14
functions are possible: ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)

If a motor is started up too many times in
succession, the rotor can be subject to
thermal overload, especially the upper
2 edges of the bars. The rotor temperature

is calculated from the stator current. The
reclosing lockout only permits start-up
of the motor if the rotor has sufficient
3
thermal reserves for a complete start-up
(see Fig. 5/136).
Emergency start-up
This function disables the reclosing lockout
4 via a binary input by storing the state of
the thermal replica as long as the binary
input is active. It is also possible to reset
the thermal replica to zero.
5 Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)

One temperature monitoring box with a
Fig. 5/99
total of 12 measuring sensors can be used
for temperature monitoring and detection
6 by the protection relay. The thermal status of motors, generators
and transformers can be monitored with this device. Addition-
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of
ally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines are the motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due
monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are being to a load jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and
7 measured with the help of temperature detectors at various

locations of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted
tripping).
to the protection relay via one or two temperature monitoring suitable under these circumstances.
boxes (see “Accessories”, page 5/115).
8 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
unwanted start-ups that might occur in the event of excessive a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
9 rotor is locked. Rotor temperature is calculated from measured
stator current. The tripping time is calculated according to the Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
following equation: With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to
10  I 2
Motor statistics
t =  A  ⋅ TA
I  Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
11 I = Actual current flowing
IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a motor start
the device.
t = Tripping time
 Voltage protection
IA
12
TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
(2 times, for warm and cold motor) The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
13 state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence system voltage.
14
machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
15
and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
An instantaneous tripping is effected. of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
wide frequency range (25 to 70 Hz). Even when falling below
1
this frequency range the function continues to work, however,
with a greater tolerance band.
The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-
ground or positive phase-sequence voltage and can be moni-
2
tored with a current criterion. Three-phase and single-phase
connections are possible.
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and under-
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted 3
can be removed at a specified frequency setting.
There are four elements (selectable as overfrequency or
underfrequency) and each element can be delayed separately. 4
Blocking of the frequency protection can be performed if using a
binary input or by using an undervoltage element.
5
6
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
remaining service life of a circuit-breaker (CB) allow CB mainte- Commissioning
7
nance intervals to be aligned to their actual degree of wear. The Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs. DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The
wear or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
8
into account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide-
evolved which reflect the different operator philosophies. To do ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
justice to these, the devices offer several methods: information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
• ΣI
• Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected 9
• Σ i2t to a control and protection system.
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the Test operation
10
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle
diagram (see Fig. 5/137) and the breaking current at the time  Control and automatic functions
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still
Control
11
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2
support all control and monitoring functions that are required
only have to be set on the device. These are specified in the CB's
12
technical data.
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be
processes.
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
13
service life. obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
SIPROTEC 7SJ66 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to
Customized functions (ANSI 32, 51V, 55, etc.) detect and indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a
Additional functions, which are not time critical, can be imple- fault or intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
mented via the CFC using measured values. Typical functions
14
include reverse power, voltage controlled overcurrent, phase – integrated operator panel
angle detection, and zero-sequence voltage detection. – binary inputs
– DIGSI 4
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Functions
Automation / user-defined logic
1
2 Switching authority
Switching authority is determined according to parameters and
communication.
3 possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
Command processing
7SJ66_breit_W11.png
4
hardware and software, checking of the external process,
5
trip contacts
6 • User-definable bay interlocks
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations Fig. 5/101 SIPROTEC 7SJ663 rear view with communication ports
7
ing switches
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
combination with existing information All units are designed specifically to meet the requirements of
Assignment of feedback to command high/medium-voltage applications.
8 The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g., for current,
voltage, frequency, …) or additional control components are
inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command necessary.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica- Measured values
9 tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
it is a spontaneous change of state.
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
Chatter disable tive power. The following functions are available for measured
value processing:
10
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input • Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (67Ns)
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is • Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1
11 Indication filtering and delay
• Power factor (cos φ), (total and phase selective)
Binary indications can be filtered or delayed.
• Frequency
12
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the • Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The values
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still • Operating hours counter
13
present after this time. • Mean operating temperature of overload function
Indication derivation • Limit value monitoring
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
14 volume of information to the system interface can thus be

tion.
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Communication
Communication

standards.
USB interface 2
There is a USB interface on the front of the relay. All the relay
functions can be parameterized on PC by using DIGSI.
3
Commissioning tools and fault analysis are built into the DIGSI
program and are used through this interface.
Rear interfaces
4
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time Fig. 5/102 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial electrical connection
5
through this interface. The units can exchange data through
this interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also
be operated by DIGSI.
6
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
number of protection units via DIGSI. It also allows commu-
nication via modem. For special applications, a temperature
monitoring box (RTD box) can be connected to this interface. 7
System interface protocols
IEC 61850 protocol

8
9
tions. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support this standard.
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI.
10
Fig. 5/103
Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
IEC 61850, electrical and optical ring
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages DNP3
from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
DNP (Distributed Network Protocol, version 3) is a messaging-
based communication protocol. SIPROTEC 7SJ66 is fully Level
11
Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to 1 and Level 2-compliant with DNP3, which is supported by a
12
read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the number of protection units manufactures.
redundant module).
Modbus RTU protocol
13
This serial protocol is mainly used in industry and by power supply
corporations, and is supported by a number of unit manufacturers.
SIPROTEC units function as Modbus slaves, making their informa-
tion available to a master or receiving information from it. A
time-stamped event list is available.
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Selection table
Selection table for multifunctional overcurrent protection devices
1 Device 7SJ80 7SJ61 7SJ62 7SJ63 7SJ64 7SJ82 7SJ66
Multifunctional protection ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
functions
2 CTs
VTs
4
0/3
4
0
4
3/4
4
3
4
4
4
0/4
4
Binary inputs 3 - 11 3 - 11 8 - 11 11 - 37 7 - 48 11 - 23 16 - 36
3
incl. Life contact
Binary outputs 5-9 4-9 6-9 8 - 19 5 - 26 8 - 16 7 - 24
Spring-type terminals - - - - - - ü
4
DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 110 - 250 V
Auxiliary voltage
AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V
UL listing ü ü ü ü ü ü -
Surface mounting case l l l l l - -
5 Detached on-site operation

- - - l l - -
panel
Languages ge/en/es/fr/it/ ge/en/es/fr/it/ru ge/en/es/fr/it/ru ge/en/es/fr ge/en/es/fr/it/ru ge/en/pt/es/ru en/es/ru/pl/tr
6
ru/ch
Front USB ü - - - - ü ü
Interfaces exchangeable ü ü ü ü ü ü -
7 IEC 61850 l l l l l l l
IEC 60870-5-103 l l l l l l l (elec.)
8
Modbus RTU l l l l l l l (elec.)
PROFIBUS FMS - l l l l - -
PROFIBUS DP l l l l l - -
9 PROFINET I/O l l l - l - -
DNP3 serial/TCP l l l - l l l
10
RSTP ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
PRP ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
HSR ü ü ü ü ü ü -
11 ü basic
- not available
l optional
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Typical connections
Typical connections

 1
Standard connection
phase currents by the residual current circuit. 2
7
Fig. 5/104 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/105 Sensitive ground-current detection without directional element
10
11
12
Fig. 5/106 Residual current circuit with directional element
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Typical connections
1 The figure shows the connection of

two phase-to-ground voltages and the
VE voltage of the open delta winding
and a phase-balance neutral current
2
transformer for the ground current. This
connection maintains maximum precision
for directional ground-fault detection and
must be used in compensated networks.
3

7
9
Fig. 5/108 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
10
Connection for the synchro-check
function
11 The 3-phase system is connected as refer-

12 checked for synchronism.
13
14 Fig. 5/109 easuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder
M
voltage for the synchro-check
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66

2

non-directional


3
4

protection
5
Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault p

cos φ measurement
rotection Phase-balance neutral current
7
Undervoltage releases
8
9
Example:
10
possible.
Automatic tripping takes place when
voltage across the coil drops below the trip
limit. In Fig. 5/147, tripping occurs due to Fig. 5/110 Undervoltage release with make contact (50, 51)
failure of DC supply voltage, by automatic
opening of the live status contact upon 11
failure of the protection unit or by short-
circuiting the trip coil in event of network
12
fault.
In Fig. 5/148 tripping is by failure of auxil-
iary voltage and by interruption of tripping
13
position.
14
Fig. 5/111 Undervoltage trip with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted) 15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66

2
interrupted.
Lockout (ANSI 86)

3
4 Reverse-power protection for dual

supply (ANSI 32R)
5
fault on one of the infeeds it should be
6 directional devices are needed which

detect a short-circuit current or a power
7
low-current faults. Reverse-power
protection can be set far below the rated
8
power. This ensures that it also detects
power feedback into the line in the event
of low-current faults with levels far below
the load current.
Reverse-power protection is performed via
9 the “flexible protection functions” of the
SIPROTEC 7SJ66.
10
Fig. 5/113 Reverse-power protection for dual supply
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
SIPROTEC 7SJ66 multifunction protection relay and bay controller

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
- - 1
Housing, inputs, outputs
Housing 1/3 19”, 4 x U, 4 x I, 16 BI, 7 BO, 1 life contact 1
Housing 1/3 19”, 4 x U, 4 x I, 22 BI, 10 BO, 1 life contact
Housing 1/2 19", 4 x U, 4 x I, 36 BI, 23 BO, 1 life contact, 4 function keys
2
3
2
3
Measuring inputs
Iph = 1 A, IN = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A)
Iph = 1 A, IN = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
4
Iph = 5 A, IN = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
Iph = 5 A, IN = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
5
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 4
5
6
DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC 88 V
DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC 176V 6
Construction
7
Flush-mounting case, screw-type terminals, 8-line text display D
Flush-mounting case, spring-type terminals (direct connection), screw-type terminals for CT connec-
tion (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs), 8-line text display E
Flush-mounting case, screw-type terminals, graphical display J
Flush-mounting case, spring-type terminals (direct connection),
screw-type terminals for CT connection (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs), graphical display K 8
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (language can be changed)
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish (language can be changed)
B
E
9
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian (language can be changed) G
10
System interface (Port B)
IEC 60870-5-103, electrical RS485, RJ45-connector 1) 2
Modbus RTU, electrical RS485, RJ45-connector 1) 9 L 0 D
11
DNP3, RS485 1) 9 L 0 G
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector 2) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC-connector 2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 + IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector 2) 9 L 2 R
DNP3 + IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC-connector 2)

9 L 2 S
12
No interface 0
13
DIGSI 4 / Modem / RTD-box, electrical RS485, RJ45-connector 2
Ethernet port (DIGSI port, RTD box connection, not IEC 61850), RJ45-connector 6
Functionality Continued on next page

See next page
14
1) only available with position 12 = 0 or 2
15
2) o nly available with position 12 = 0 or 6
3) only available with position 6 = 1

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 Multifunction protection relay with local control

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
- -
ANSI No.
2
Basic version Control F A
3
4
47 Phase sequence
5

74TC Trip circuit supervision, 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
Basic+ Basic version (see above), Intermittent earth-fault F E
6
V,P,f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
27Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
7
Basic + Basic version (see above) P E
V,P,f IEF 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
8
Basic + Basic version (see above) F C
9
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
ground
Basic + Basic version (see above) F G

Dir V,P,f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
10
ground
11
Basic + Basic version (see above) P G
Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
ground
12

27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
Under-/overfrequency
13
Basic +
Basic version (see above) P C
Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
ground
14 Continued on
next page
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 1) o nly with position 7 = 1 or 5 (non-sensitive ground current input)
15

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Multifunction protection relay with local control

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
- - 1
ANSI No.
Basic + Basic version included
2
F D
Sens.earth-f-det. 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
Dir REF2) phases and ground
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection
87N High-impedance restricted earth fault
P D 3
Basic + Sens.earth-f-det. Basic version included
Dir IEF REF2) 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground

67Ns
67Ns
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 4
Intermittent earth-fault
5
F F
Basic + Dir. Sens.earth-f-det. Basic version included
V,P,f REF2) 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
6
7
Basic + Dir. Sens.earth-f-det. Basic version included F B

REF2) 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
8
Basic + Dir. Sens.earth-f-det.

Basic version included H F
Motor V,P,f REF2) 67Ns
67Ns
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
9
87N
48/14
Starting ime supervision, locked rotor
Restart inhibit66/86
51M
Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
10
11
H H
Basic + Sens.earth-f-det.
Basic version included
Motor Dir V,P,f REF2) 67/67N
phases and ground

67Ns
67Ns
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
87N
12
48/14
66/86
Restart inhibit
27/59
51M
Motor statistics
Under-/overvoltage
13
14
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection REF = Restricted earth fault Continued on
15
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection Motor = Motor protection next page
IEF = Intermittent ground fault 2) F
or isolated/compensated networks, only with postition 7=2,6 (sensitive earth current input)

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 SIPROTEC 7SJ66 multifunction protection relay and bay controller

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
-
ANSI No. Description

RH
2
Basic + Basic version included
Dir. S.EF Motor2) 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground
3
48/14 Starting ime supervision, locked rotor
51M Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
4
5 Basic + Basic version included HG

Motor Dir V,P,f 67/67N
phases and ground
6
48/14
66/86
Restart inhibit
51M
Motor statistics
7
8 Basic +
Motor 48/14
Basic version included
HA

51M Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
9 Measuring/fault recording
13
With fault recording 1

Slave pointer, average values, 3
10
min/max-values with fault recording
16
ARC, fault locator, synchro-check
without 0
11
79 with autoreclose 1
21FL with fault locator 2
79,21FL with 79 and fault locator 3
25 with synchro-check 3) 4
25, 79, 21FL with synchro-check 3), with auto reclose, with fault recorder 7
12 Conformal Coating ZY13
13
14
Motor = Motor protection
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection
15
2) Only with position 7 = 2, 6 (sensitive earth current input).
3) Synchrocheck (no asynchronous switching), one function group

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
RTD-Box (Resistance Temperature Detector)

RTD box, VH = 24 to 240 V AC/DC 7XV5662-6AD10
1
RTD box Eth, VH = 24 to 240 V AC/DC 7XV5662-8AD10
Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks

Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) 53207-A406-D280-1 2
Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA
3
VARTA 6127 101,301
Panasonic BR-1/2AA
Varistor (Voltage-Limiting Resistor for High-Impedance

Differential Protection)
125 Veff, 600 A, 1S/S256
240 Veff, 600 A, 1S/S1088
W73028-V3125-A1
W73028-V3300-A2
4
Screw Cover
5
Screw Cover C53207-A406-D278-1
Front Unit with Display and HMI

Front unit with display and HMI 1/3 C53207-A406-D276-1
Front unit with display and HMI 1/2 C53207-A406-D277-1
USB Cover 6
USB Cover C53207-A406-D271-1
7
Terminals
Terminal voltage,12 pin spring type C53207-A406-D272-1
Terminal voltage,16 pin spring type C53207-A406-D273-1
Terminal voltage,12 pin screw type C53207-A406-D274-1
8
Terminal voltage,16 pin screw type C53207-A406-D275-1
10
11
12
13
14
1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.)
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
1
Q1 BO1 P3
IA
P4
2
Q2
Q3 BO2 P5
IB
Q4 P6
Q5
3
IC BO3 R7 P7
Q6
BO4 R7 P8
Q7 IN/INs P9
Q8
4 R1 Q2 VA
BO5
BO6
R7
R7
P11
P12
R2 Q2 VB
P10
5
R3 VC
R7 K11
R4
BO7 R7 K13
R5 V4 K12
6 R6
R7 K15
+ Life contact
F1 K16
BI1
7 F2 -
F3 +
BI2 = + P1
- Power Supply (~)
F4
=
- P2
8
F6 +
- BI3
F5
F7 + BI4 System Interface
B
+ RJ45
9
F8 BI5
F9 -
Service interface
F11 + BI6 C
RJ45
F12 + BI7
10 F10 -
+
Time Synchronization
RJ45
A
K1 BI8
K2 + BI9
11 + Front PC Interface
K3 BI10 USB
K4 + BI11
K5 + BI12
12 K6
K7
+
+
BI13
BI14
Grounding on the Rear Wall
K8 + BI15
13 K9 + BI16
K10 -
14
15 Fig. 5/114 SIPROTEC 7SJ661 connection diagram

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
Q1 IA BO1 P3 1
Q2 P4
Q3 BO2 P5
2
IB
Q4 P6
Q5 IC BO3 R7 P7
Q6
BO4 R7 P8
3
Q7 IN/INs P9
Q8
BO5 R7 P11
R1 Q2 VA BO6 R7 P12
VB
4
R2 Q2
P10
R3 VC
R7 K11
R4
BO7 R7 K13
R5 V4 K12
R6
BO8 R7 J8 5
+ BO9 R7 J9
F1
BI1 J10
6
F2 -
1 2
F3 + BO10 J11
- BI2 3 2
J12
F4
F6 +
7
- BI3
F5
F7 + BI4
F8 + BI5
-
8
F9
+ R7 K15
F11 BI6 Life contact
+ K16
F12 BI7
F10 -
9
K1 + BI8 = + P1
Power Supply ( ~)
K2 + BI9
=
- P2
K3 + BI10
K4 + BI11
10
+ System Interface
K5 BI12 B
RJ45
K6 + BI13
K7 + BI14 Service interface
C
11
K8 + BI15 RJ45
K9 + BI16
- Time Synchronization
K10 A
RJ45
J1 + BI17
J2
J3
+
+
BI18
BI19
Front PC Interface
USB 12
J4 + BI20
+
13
J5 BI21
J6 + BI22 Grounding on the Rear Wall
J7 -
14
Fig. 5/115 SIPROTEC 7SJ662 connection diagram 15

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
1 Q1 IA BO1 P3
Q2 P4
BO2 P5
2
Q3 IB
Q4 P6
Q5 IC BO3 R7 P7
Q6
3
BO4 R7 P8
Q7 IN/INs P9
Q8
BO5 R7 P11
R1 Q2 VA
4
BO6 R7 P12
R2 Q2 VB
P10
R3 VC
BO7 K6
R4
5
K7
R5 V4 BO8 R7 K8
R6 BO9 R7 K9
6
+ BI1 K10
F1
F2 + BI2 R7 L14
F3 + BI3 Life contact R7 L15
+
7
F4 BI4 L16
F5 + BI5
F6 + BI6 = + P1
+ Power Supply ( ~)
F7 BI7 -
8 + = P2
F8 BI8
F9 -
F10 + BI9
9 + System Interface
F11 BI10 B
RJ45
F12 -
K1 + Service interface
BI11 C
10
K2 - RJ45
K3 +
- BI12 Time Synchronization
K4 A
RJ45
+
11
H1 BI13
H2 + BI14 Front PC Interface
H3 + BI15 USB
H4 + BI16
12 H5 +
+
BI17
BI18
Grounding on the Rear Wall
H6
H7 + BI19
13 H8 + BI20
H9 -
14 1
Continue Next Figure
2
Continue Next Figure
15 Fig. 5/116 SIPROTEC 7SJ663 connection diagram

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
1
Continue from Previous Continue from Previous
Figure Figure
2
1 2
BO10 R7 K11 3
BO11 R7 K13
+
4
H10 BI21 K12
H11 + BI22 R7 K14
H12 -
BO12 R7 K15
M1 +
- BI23 K16 5
M2
M3 + BO13 M6
M4 - BI24 M7 6
G1 + BI25 BO14 R7 M8
+ BO15 M9
7
BI26 R7
G2
G3 + BI27 M10
G4 + BI28 BO16 R7 M11
G5 + BI29 BO17 R7 M13 8
G6 + BI30 M12
G7 + BI31 M14
9
R7
G8 + BI32 BO18 R7 M15
G9 -
M16
+
G10
G11 +
BI33
BI34 BO19 L6 10
G12 - L7
L1 +
BI35
BO20 R7 L8 11
L2 - BO21 R7 L9
L3 + L10
L4 - BI36
BO22 R7 L11 12
BO23 R7 L13
L12 13
14
Fig. 5/117 SIPROTEC 7SJ663 connection diagram 15

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Dimensions
1 29.5 172 20
150
145
Mounting Plate
2
R P J F
3 244
266
4
Q N K
5
B
C
D
6
Side View Rear View
7
146+2
9 Ø6
255.8 ± 0.3
245 +1
10
11 Ø5
12
5.4
13.2 105 ±0.3
13 7.3 131.5 ±0.3
Dimensional Drawing
(Front View)
14
15 Fig. 5/118 Dimensional drawing for SIPROTEC 7SJ66 (housing size 1/3)

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Dimensions
1
29.5 172 20
225
Dimensions in mm
Mounting Plate 220
`
4
266
244
6
Side View Rear View
221 7
7.3 206.5
180 8
Ø6 9
10
255.8
245
11
Ø5 or M4
12
5.4
13
13.2
Dimensional Drawing
(Front View)
14
Fig. 5/119 Dimensional drawing of a SIPROTEC 7SJ66 (housing size 1/2)

15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay

for all voltage levels 6/3
SIPROTEC 7SA522 distance protection relay

for transmission lines 6/39
6
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance Protection 7SA6
SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Function overview
• Non-switched distance protection with
6 measuring systems (21/21N)
• H
igh resistance ground-fault protection
for single and three-pole tripping (50N, 2
51N, 67N)
• G
round-fault detection in isolated and
resonant-grounded networks
• Tele (pilot) protection (85)
3
• Fault locator (FL)
4
• Power-swing detection/tripping
(68/68T)
LSP2318-afp.tif
• Phase overcurrent protection
(50/51/67)
5
• Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)
• STUB bus overcurrent protection
(50STUB)
• Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
Fig. 6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay

(59/27)
• Over/underfrequency protection 81O/U)
6
• Auto-reclosure (79)
7
Description • Synchro-check (25)
• Breaker failure protection (50BF)
The SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay is a universal • Thermal overload protection (49)
device for protection, control and automation on the basis of the
Control function
8
SIPROTEC 4 system. Its high level of flexibility makes it suitable
to be implemented at all voltage levels. With this relay you are • Commands for control of CBs and isolators
ideally equipped for the future: it offers security of investment
and also saves on operating costs. Monitoring functions
9
– High-speed tripping time • Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
• Self-supervision of the relay
– Impedance setting range allows very small settings for the
protection of very short lines • Measured-value supervision
• Event logging/fault logging
10
– Self-setting detection for power swing frequencies up to 7 Hz
• Oscillographic fault recording
– Current transformer saturation detector prevents non-selective
• Switching statistics
tripping by distance protection in the event of CT saturation.
– Phase-segregated teleprotection for improved selectivity and Front design
availability • Easy operation with numeric keys
• Function keys
11
– Digital relay-to-relay communication by means of an inte-
grated serial protection data interface • LEDs for local alarm
12
– Adaptive auto-reclosure (ADT) • PC front port for convenient relay setting
• Front interface for connecting a PC
13
• System interface for connecting to a control system via vari-
ous protocols
– IEC 61850 Ethernet
– IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
– PROFIBUS DP
– DNP 3
• 1 serial protection data interface for teleprotection
14
• Rear-side service/modem interface
15
• Time synchronization via
– IRIG-B or DCF 77 or
– system interface

Application
Application
1 The distance protection relay 7SA6 is non-

switched incorporating all the additional
functions for protection of overhead lines
2
and cables at all voltage levels from 5 to
765 kV.
All methods of neutral point connection
(resonant grounding, isolated, solid or
3
low-resistance grounding) are reliably
dealt with. The unit can issue single or
three-pole TRIP commands as well as
CLOSE commands. Consequently both
4
single-pole, three-pole and multiple auto-
reclosure is possible.
Teleprotection functions as well as
ground-fault protection and sensitive
5
ground-fault detection are included.
Power swings are detected reliably and
non-selective tripping is prevented. The
unit operates reliably and selectively 1) Teleprotection schemes can use conventional
6
even under the most difficult network signaling or serial data exchange
conditions.
Cost-effective power system Fig. 6/2 Function diagram

management
7 The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide

control and monitoring functions and therefore support the ANSI Protection functions
user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
21/21N Distance protection
security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of
8 minimizing the use of hardware.

The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
FL Fault locator
50N/51N/67N Directional ground-fault protection

criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
9
50/51/67 Backup overcurrent protection
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree
of functionality which represents a benchmark-level of 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage
performance in protection and control. If the requirements
for protection, control or interlocking change, it is possible in 68/68T Power swing detection/tripping
10
the majority of cases to implement such changes by means of Teleprotection for distance protection
85/21
parameterization using DIGSI 4 without having to change the
hardware. 27WI Weak-infeed protection
The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of 85/67N Teleprotection for ground-fault protection
11
digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
50HS Switch-onto-fault protection
presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components. Breaker-failure protection
50BF
12
59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
25 Synchro-check
13 79 Auto-reclosure
Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
14
86
49 Thermal overload protection
IEE Sensitive ground-fault detection
15
Construction
Construction
Connection techniques and housing 1

⅓, ½, ²⁄₃, and �-rack sizes:
These are the available housing widths
of the 7SA6 relays, referred to a 2
19" module frame system. This means
3
LSP2174-afp.tif
for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm
LSP2166-afp.tif
4
nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in
terminals are available as an option.
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 6/3 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 6/4 ear view of flush-mounting housing
R
5
mounting on a panel, the connection with screw-type terminals with covered connection terminals
terminals are located above and below and wirings
communication interfaces are located
6
in a sloped case at the top and bottom
of the housing. The housing can also
be supplied optionally with a detached
operator panel (refer to Fig. 6/5), in order
to allow optimum operation for all types
of applications.
7
LSP2244-afp.eps
9
Fig. 6/5 Flush-mounting housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
10
11
12
LSP2219-afp.eps
13
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
15
screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing

1 Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

The main function of the 7SA6 is a non-
2
switched distance protection. By parallel
calculation and monitoring of all six
impedance loops, a high degree of
sensitivity and selectivity is achieved
for all types of fault. The shortest
3 tripping time is less than one cycle. All

methods of neutral-point connection
(resonant grounding, isolated, solid or
low-resistance grounding) are reliably
4
dealt with. Single-pole and three-pole
tripping is possible. Overhead lines can be
equipped with or without series capacitor
compensation.
5 Four pickup methods

The following pickup methods can be
Fig. 6/8 Impedance fault detection Z< with quadrilateral characteristic
employed alternatively:
• Overcurrent pickup I>>
6 • Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup

V/I
• Voltage-dependent and phase angle-
dependent overcurrent pickup V / I / φ
7 • Impedance pickup Z<

Load zone
The pickup mode with quadrilateral
8
impedance pickup (Z<) is fitted with a
variable load zone. In order to guarantee
a reliable discrimination between load
operation and short-circuit (especially
on long high loaded lines), the relay is
9 equipped with a selectable load encroach-
ment characteristic. Impedances within
this load encroachment characteristic pre-
vent the distance zones from unwanted Fig. 6/9 V
oltage and angle-dependent Fig. 6/10 ngle pickup for the V / I / φ fault
A
10 tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity
overcurrent fault detection V / I / φ detection
The 7SA6 distance protection incorpo-

rates a well-proven, highly sophisticated
11 phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
unfaulted phases is reliably eliminated.
This phase selection algorithm achieves
single-pole tripping and correct distance
12 measurement in a wide application range.

Interference to distance measurement
caused by parallel lines can be compen-
sated by taking the ground current of the
13
parallel system into account.
This parallel line compensation can be
taken into account both for distance
measurement and for fault locating.
14
15 Fig. 6/11 Distance zones with circle characteristic

Seven distance zones
1
Six independant distance zones and one
separate overreach zone are available.
Each distance zone has dedicated time
stages, partially separate for single-phase
and three-phase faults. Ground faults
are detected by monitoring the ground
current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage
2
3V0. The quadrilateral tripping charac-
teristic allows use of separate settings
for the X and the R directions. Different
R settings can be employed for ground 3
and phase faults. This characteristic
offers advantages in the case of faults
4
with fault resistance. For applications
LSP2209-afp.tif
to medium-voltage cables with low line
angles, it may be advantageous to select
the distance zones with the optional circle
characteristic.
All the distance protection zones can be
set to forward, reverse or non-directional. Fig. 6/12 Power swing current and voltage wave forms 5
Optimum direction detection Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21)
6
Use of voltages, which are not involved with the short-circuit
A teleprotection function is available for fast clearance of faults
loop, and of voltage memories for determination of the fault
up to 100 % of the line length. The following operating modes
direction ensure that the results are always reliable.
may be selected:
Elimination of interference signals • POTT
7
Digital filters render the unit immune to interference signals
• Directional comparison pickup
contained in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency • Unblocking
changes is considerably reduced. A special measuring method is • PUTT acceleration with pickup
employed in order to assure protection selectivity during satura-
8
• PUTT acceleration with Z1B
tion of the current transformers.
• Blocking
Measuring voltage monitoring • Pilot-wire comparison
Tripping of the distance protection is blocked automatically in
• Reverse interlocking
9
the event of failure of the measuring voltage, thus preventing
spurious tripping. • DUTT, direct underreaching zone transfer trip (together with
The measuring voltage is monitored by the integrated fuse fail- Direct Transfer Trip function).
ure monitor. Distance protection is blocked if either the fuse fail- The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary inputs
ure monitor or the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer
10
and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical relay input
protection switch operates and in this case the EMERGENCY or output. At least one channel is required for each direction.
definite-time overcurrent protection can be activated.
Common transmission channels are powerline carrier, micro-
Fault locator wave radio and fiber-optic links. A serial protection data inter-
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance
and the distance-to-fault. The results are displayed in ohms,
face for direct connection to a digital communication network or
fiber-optic link is available. 11
kilometers (miles) and in percent of the line length. Parallel 7SA6 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals. This
line compensation and load current compensation for high- feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable single-
resistance faults is also available. pole tripping, if single-pole faults occur on different lines. The
transmission methods are suitable also for lines with three ends 12
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T) (three-terminal lines). Phase-selective transmission is also pos-
Dynamic transient reactions, for instance short-circuits, load sible with multi-end application, if some user-specific linkages
13
fluctuations, auto-reclosures or switching operations can cause are implemented by way of the integrated CFC logic.
power swings in the transmission network. During power During disturbances in the signaling channel receiver or on the
swings, large currents along with small voltages can cause transmission circuit, the teleprotection function can be blocked
unwanted tripping of distance protection relays. To avoid via a binary input signal without losing the zone selectivity.
14
uncontrolled tripping of the distance protection and to achieve
controlled tripping in the event of loss of synchronism, the The control of the overreach zone Z1B (zone extension) can be
7SA6 relay is equipped with an efficient power swing detection switched over to the auto-reclosure function. Transient blocking
function. Power swings can be detected under symmetrical load (current reversal guard) is provided for all the release and block-
conditions as well as during single-pole auto-reclosures. ing methods in order to suppress interference signals during
tripping of parallel lines.
15
Direct transfer tripping
1 Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary to

execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SA6 relay is
equipped with phase-selective “external trip inputs” that can be
assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
2 Weak-infeed protection:
echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI)
To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak
3
or zero infeed situations, an echo function is provided. If no
fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of the line,
the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible to
4
initiate phase-selective tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase-
selective single-pole or three-pole trip is issued if a permissive
trip signal (POTT or Unblocking) is received and if the phase-
ground voltage drops correspondingly. As an option, the weak
infeed logic can be equipped according to a French specification.
5 Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection (ANSI 59, 27)

A voltage rise can occur on long lines that are operating at no-
0, 14
load or that are only lightly loaded. The 7SA6 contains a number t= Tp
6 ( )
0, 02
I /I p −1
of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element
is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are
available: Fig. 6/13 Normal inverse
• Phase-to-ground overvoltage
7 • Phase-to-phase overvoltage
• Zero-sequence overvoltage ground faults. The 7SA6 protection relay therefore offers protec-
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage tion functions for faults of this nature.
input or be derived from the phase voltages.
8
The ground-fault protection can be used with three definite-time
• Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT).
for the remote end of the line (compounding)
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and
• Negative-sequence overvoltage ANSI/IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). A 4th definite-time
9 Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected stage can be applied instead of the 1st inverse-time stage.
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by An additional logarithmic inverse-time characteristic is also
means of a transmitted signal. available.
The 7SA6 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage undervolt-
10
The direction decision is determined by the ground current
age measuring elements: and the zero-sequence voltage or by the negative-sequence
• Phase-to-ground undervoltage components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative, the direc-
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage tion can be determined with the ground current of an grounded
power transformer and the zero-sequence voltage. Dual
11
• Positive-sequence undervoltage polarization applications can therefore be fulfilled. Alternatively,
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means the direction can be determined by evaluation of zero-sequence
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs. power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in forward or reverse
direction or in both directions (non-directional).
12
The function is equipped with special digital filter algorithms,
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature is
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in particularly important for small zero-sequence fault currents
the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonic.
13 specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used

over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency) Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault tripping
and each element can be delayed separately. can be activated separately for each stage as well.
14 Directional ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults

(ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground-fault
protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for single-
phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector. It
In an grounded network it may happen that the distance may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto-reclose
15
protection´s sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-resistance cycles or during pickup of the distance protection.

Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground-fault protection Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
(ANSI 85-67N)
The directional ground-fault protection can be combined with
The 7SA6 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, 1
the available signaling methods: for example, due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current
• Directional comparison detection logic is phase-selective and can therefore also be used
2
in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is not inter-
• BLOCKING
rupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip command
• UNBLOCKING or a busbar trip command will be generated. The breaker failure
The transient blocking function (current reversal guard) is also protection can be initiated by all integrated protection functions,
3
provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping as well as by external devices via binary input signals.
of parallel lines.
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB)
The pilot functions for distance protection and for ground-fault
The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate definite-time
protection can use the same signaling channel or two separate
4
overcurrent stage. It can be activated via a binary input signaling
and redundant channels.
that the line isolator (disconnector) is open.
Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67) Separate settings are available for phase and ground faults.
The 7SA6 provides a backup overcurrent protection. Two
Auto-recIosure (ANSI 79)
definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
available, separately for phase currents and for the ground cur- The 7SA6 relay is equipped with an auto-reclosure function (AR). 5
rent. The application can be extended to a directional overcur- The function includes several operating modes:
rent protection (ANSI 67) by taking into account the decision of • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
6
the available direction detection elements. Two operating modes times are available depending on the type of fault
are selectable. The function can run in parallel to the distance
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for
protection or only during failure of the voltage in the VT second-
multi-phase faults
ary circuit (emergency operation).
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
The secondary voltage failure can be detected by the integrated
fuse failure monitor or via a binary input from a VT miniature
without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosure
7
circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
for multi-phase faults
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/
8
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and 2-phase faults
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for multi-phase
faults
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS) • Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
9
• Interaction with an external device for auto-reclosure via
Instantaneous tripping is required when energizing a faulty line.
binary inputs and outputs
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-
fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast three-pole tripping. • Control of the internal AR function by external protection
• Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check
With smaller fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
onto-fault is also possible with the overreach distance zone Z1B
or with pickup.
• Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
10
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary other operating principles can be employed by means of the
integrated programmable logic (CFC).
11
input “manual close” or automatically via measurement.
Ground-fault detection in systems with a star-point that is

not effectively grounded
12
In systems with an isolated or resonant grounded (grounded)
star-point, single-phase ground faults can be detected. The
following functions are integrated for this purpose:
• Detection of an ground fault by monitoring of the displace-
13
ment voltage
• Determination of the faulted phase by measurement of the
phase-to-ground voltage
• Determination of the ground-fault direction by highly accurate
14
measurement of the active and reactive power components in
the residual ground fault current.
• Alarm or trip output can be selected in the event of an
ground-fault in the forward direction.
• Operation measurement of the active and reactive component
in the residual ground current during an ground-fault. 15
Auto-recIosure (continued) (ANSI 79)
1

Integration of auto-reclosure in the
feeder protection allows evaluation of the

line-side voltages. A number of voltage-
dependent supplementary functions are
2
thus available:
• DLC

By means of dead-line check, reclosure

is effected only when the line is deen-
3

ergized (prevention of asynchronous
breaker closure).

• ADT
The adaptive dead time is employed
4
only if auto-reclosure at the remote sta-
tion was successful (reduction of stress
on equipment). Fig. 6/14 Monitoring of active power Fig. 6/15 Monitoring of reactive power
• RDT direction
5
Reduced dead time is employed in
conjunction with auto-reclosure where no teleprotection Directional power protection
method is employed: When faults within the zone extension
The 7SA6 has a function for detecting the power direction by
but external to the protected line are switched off for rapid
measuring the phase angle of the positive-sequence system's
auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the basis of
6 measurement of the return voltage from the remote station
which has not tripped whether or not to reduce the dead time.
power. Fig. 6/15 shows an application example displaying nega-
tive active power. An indication is issued in the case when the
measured angle φ (S1) of the positive-sequence system power is
Synchronism check (ANSI 25) within the P - Q - level sector. This sector is between angles φ A
7
and φ B. Via CFC the output signal of the directional monitoring
Where two network sections are switched in by control com- can be linked to the "Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)" function and
mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured thus, as reverse power protection, initiate tripping of the CB.
that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For this
purpose a synchro-check function is provided. After verification Fig. 6/16 shows another application displaying capacitive
8 of the network synchronism, the function releases the CLOSE reactive power. In the case of overvoltage being detected due
command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled for different to long lines under no-load conditions it is possible to select the
criteria, e.g. checking that the busbar or line is not carrying a lines where capacitive reactive power is measured.
voltage (dead line or dead bus).
9 Fuse failure monitoring and other supervision functions One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
The 7SA6 relay provides comprehensive supervision functions used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea- connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
10
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore is interrupted.
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this
Lockout (ANSI 86)
supervision system.
Under certain operating conditions it is advisable to block CLOSE
If any measured voltage is not present due to short-circuit or
11
commands after a TRIP command of the relay has been issued.
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit, the
Only a manual “RESET” command unblocks the CLOSE command.
distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due to
The 7SA6 is equipped with such an interlocking logic.
this loss of voltage.
This secondary voltage interruption can be detected by means Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
12 of the integrated fuse failure monitor. Immediate blocking of

distance protection and switching to the backup-emergency
For thermal protection of cables and transformers an overload
protection with an early-warning stage is provided. The thermal
overcurrent protection is provided for all types of secondary replica can be generated with the maximum or mean value of
voltage failures. the respective overtemperatures in the three phases, or with the
13 Additional measurement supervision functions are
• Symmetry of voltages and currents
overtemperature corresponding to the maximum phase current.
The tripping time characteristics are exponential functions
• Broken-conductor supervision according to IEC 60255-8 and they take account of heat loss due
14
to the load current and the accompanying drop in temperature
• Summation of currents and voltages
of the cooling medium. The previous load is therefore taken
• Phase-sequence supervision. into account in the tripping time with overload. A settable alarm
stage can output a current or temperature-dependent indication
before the tripping point is reached.
15
BCD-coded output of fault location

The fault location calculated by the unit
can be output for remote indication in 1
BCD code. The output of the fault location
is made in percent of the set line length
2
with 3 decimal digits.
Analog output 0 to 20 mA
Some measured values can be output as
3
analog values (0 to 20 mA). On a plug-in
module (Fig. 6/24) two analog channels
are made available. Up to two plug-in
modules can be installed in the 7SA6. As
4
an option, 2, 4 or no analog channels are
available (please refer to the selection
and ordering data). The measured values
available for output are listed in the
technical data.
Commissioning and fault event 5
LSP2819.tif
analyzing
Special attention has been paid to com-
missioning. All binary inputs and outputs
can be displayed and activated directly. Fig. 6/16 Web Monitor: Supported commissioning by phasor diagram
6
This can simplify the wiring check
significantly for the user. The operational
7
and fault events and the fault records are
clearly arranged. For applications with
serial protection data interface, all cur-
rents, voltages and phases are available
8
via communication link at each local unit,
displayed at the front of the unit with
DIGSI 4 or with WEB Monitor. A common
time tagging facilitates the comparison of
events and fault records.
WEB Monitor – Internet technology 9

simplifies visualization
In addition to the universal DIGSI 4
operating program, the relay contains
a WEB server that can be accessed via a
10
telecommunication link using a browser
LSP2818.tif
(e.g. Internet Explorer). The advantage of
this solution is to operate the unit with
standard software tools and at the same 11
time make use of the Intranet/Internet Fig. 6/17 Web Monitor: Display of the protection direction
infrastructure. Apart from numeric values,
12
graphical displays in particular provide
clear information and a high degree of operating reliability. Of
course, it is also possible to call up detailed measured value dis-
plays and annunciation buffers. By emulation of the integrated
unit operation on the PC it is also possible to adjust selected
settings for commissioning purposes.
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed on

the customer requirements in energy automation:
• Every data item is time-stamped at the source, i.e. where it
2 originates.
• Already during the process of communication, information is
assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
tion “circuit-breaker TRIP” to the corresponding command).
3 • The communication system automatically handles the transfer

of large data blocks (e.g. fault recordings or parameter data
files). The user has access to these features without any
4 • For the safe execution of a control command the correspond-

ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the unit which
will execute the command. After the release and execution of
Fig. 6/18 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
the command a feedback signal is generated. At every stage connection or fiber-optic connection
5
of the control command execution particular conditions are
checked. If these are not satisfied, command execution may be
terminated in a controlled manner.
The units offer a high degree of flexibility by supporting differ-
6 ent standards for connection to industrial and power automation

systems. By means of the communication modules, on which
the protocols run, exchange and retrofit is possible. Therefore,
the units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to
7
changing communication infrastructure such as the application
of Ethernet networks which are already widely applied in the
power supply sector.
Local PC interface
8 The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the

unit permits quick access to all parameters and fault event data.
The use of the DIGSI 4 operating program is particularly advanta-
geous during commissioning.
9 Service/modem interface
7SA6 units are always fitted with a rear-side hardwired service
interface, optionally as RS232 or RS485. In addition to the Fig. 6/19 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 front-side operator interface, a PC can be connected here either

directly or via a modem.
Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication
Time synchronization interface
11
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the
The time synchronization interface is a standard feature in all entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
units. The supported formats are IRIG-B and DCF77. communication protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS,
DNP, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. For fiber-optic
Reliable bus architecture
communication, no external converter is required for SIPROTEC 4.
12 • RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro- IEC 61850 protocol
magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of
twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
for protection and control systems used by power supply
13
system continues to operate without any problem.
corporations. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support
• Fiber-optic double ring circuit this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromagnetic be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
interference. Upon failure of a section between two units, masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
14
the communication system continues to operate without the units via the Ethernet but is also possible with DIGSI. It is also
disturbance. It is usually impossible to communicate with a possible to retrieve operating and fault records as well as fault
unit that has failed. Should a unit fail, there is no effect on the recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also provide a
communication with the rest of the system. few items of unit-specific information in browser windows.
15
Communication
LSP2162-afpen.tif
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally
standardized protocol for efficient com-
munication with protection relays.
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a
LSP3.01-0021.tif
2
number of protection device manufactur-
ers and is used worldwide. Supplements
for control functions are defined in
the manufacturer-specific part of this
3
standard.
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP is an industrial communica-
Fig. 6/20 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 6/21 iber-optic Ethernet communication
F
4
tions standard and is supported by a
module module for IEC 61850 with
number of PLC and protection device integrated Ethernet switch
manufacturers.
DNP 3.0
LSP2163-afpen.tif
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol,
Version 3) is an internationally recognized
protection and bay unit communication
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and
Level 2 compatible.
6
Analog outputs 0 to 20 mA
LSP2207-afp.tif
2 or 4 analog output interfaces for trans-
mission of measured or fault location
values are available for the 7SA6. Two 7
analog output interfaces are provided
in an analog output module. Up to two Fig. 6/22 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 6/23 Output module 0 to 20 mA,
analog output modules can be inserted
per unit.
communication module 2 channels
8
10
11
12
13
Fig. 6/24 Communication

14
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control The communication possibilities are identical to those for the
1
line differential protection relays 7SD5 and 7SD610. The follow-
ing options are available:
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, • FO51), OMA12) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
the units exchange information with the control system. Units FO cable length up to 1.5 km for link to communication
2
equipped with IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected networks via communication converters or for direct FO cable
to SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or connected in star by connection
fiber-optic link. Through this interface, the system is open for • FO61), OMA22) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
the connection of units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 6/25). FO cable length up to 3.5 km, for direct connection via multi-
3
mode FO cable
be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC. • FO171): For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto- • FO181): For direct connection up to 60 km3) 1300 nm, for
4
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the • FO191): For direct connection up to 100 km3) 1550 nm, for
master can be established. mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with • FO301): For transmission with the IEEE C37.94 standard.
5 SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
The link to a multiplexed communication network is made by
separate communication converters (7XV5662). These have
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
a fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and ST connectors to the
of other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850,
protection relay. The link to the communication network is
6
however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers’
optionally an electrical X21 or a G703.1 interface. If the connec-
systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103 interface are connected
tion to the multiplexor supports IEEE C37.94, a direct fibre optic
with PAS via the Ethernet station bus by means of serial/Ethernet
connection to the relay is possible using the FO30 module.
converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used via the
same station bus. For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires), a
7 Serial protection data interface
modern communication converter for copper cables is available.
This operates with both the two-wire and three-wire copper con-
The tele (pilot) protection schemes can be implemented using nections which were used by conventional differential protection
digital serial communication. The 7SA6 is capable of remote systems before. The communication converter for copper cables
8 relay communication via direct links or multiplexed digital com-

munication networks. The serial protection data interface has
is designed for 5 kV insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV
isolation transformer can extend the field of applications of this
the following features: technique into ranges with higher insulation voltage require-
ments. With SIPROTEC 4 and the communication converter
• Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance
9
for copper cables a digital follow-up technique is available for
protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes
two-wire protection systems (typical 15 km) and all three-wire
• Signaling for directional ground-fault protection – directional protection systems using existing copper communication links.
comparison for high resistance faults in solidly grounded
systems Communication data:
10 • Echo-function
• Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented
• Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kBit/s;
X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or 512 kBit/s; IEEE C37.94
without additional logic • Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
• Protocol HDLC
11
• Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure “Adap-
tive dead time” (ADT) mode • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
• 28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
• Flexible utilisation of the communication channels by means • Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
12 of the programmable CFC logic

• Display of the operational measured values of the opposite
data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if
they occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per
terminal(s) with phase-angle information relative to a common minute and hour, of the serial protection data interface can be
reference vector displayed.
13 • Clock synchronization: the clock in only one of the relays

must be synchronized from an external so called “Absolute
Figure 6/26 shows four applications for the serial protection data
interface on a two-terminal line.
Master” when using the serial protection data interface. This
relay will then synchronize the clock of the other (or the two
14
other relays in 3 terminal applications) via the protection data
interface.
• 7SA522 and 7SA6 can be combined via the protection data
interface. 1) For flush-mounting housing.
15
2) For surface-mounting housing.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal fiber-optic module
OMA1 will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
10
11
12
Fig. 6/25 Communication topologies for the serial protection data interface on a two-terminal line
13
14
15
Communication
Three-terminal lines can also be protected
1
with a tele (pilot) protection scheme by
using SIPROTEC 4 distance protection
relays. The communication topology may
then be a ring or a chain topology, see
Fig. 6/27. In a ring topology a loss of one
2 data connection is tolerated by the system.
The topology is re-routed to become a
chain topology within less than 100 ms. To
reduce communication links and to save
3 money for communications, a chain topol-

ogy may be generally applied.
5 Ring topology
10
Chain topology
Fig. 6/26 Ring or chain communication topology
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
Connection of current 1
3 phase current transformers with neutral
point in the line direction, I4 connected as
summation current transformer (= 3I0): 2
Holmgreen circuit
3 voltage transformers, without connection
of the broken (open) delta winding on
the line side; the 3V0 voltage is derived
3
internally.
4
Fig. 6/27 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers
5
Alternative current measurement
The 3 phase current transformers are 6
connected in the usual manner. The neutral
point is in line direction. I4 is connected to
7
a separate neutral core-balance CT, thus
permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
Note: Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer
8
must be connected to the terminal of
the core balance CT pointing in the same
direction as the neutral point of the phase
current transformers (in this case in line
9
direction). The voltage connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/32
or 6/33.
Fig. 6/28 lternative connection of current transformers for sensitive

A
ground-current measuring with core-balance current transformers 10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative current connection
1 3 phase current transformers with neutral

point in the line direction, I4 connected to
a current transformer in the neutral point
of an grounded transformer for directional
2
ground-fault protection. The voltage con-
nection is effected in accordance with
Fig. 6/28, 6/32 or 6/33.
5 Fig. 6/29 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring

neutral current of an grounded power transformer

summation current of the parallel line for
parallel line compensation on overhead
7 lines. The voltage connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/32 or 6/33.
10 Fig. 6/30 lternative connection of current transformers for measuring

A
the ground current of a parallel line
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative voltage connection

3 phase voltage transformers, V4 con-
nected to broken (open) delta winding 1
(Ven) for additional summation voltage
monitoring and ground-fault directional
2
protection.
The current connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/29, 6/30 and
6/31.
4
Fig. 6/31 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring the
displacement voltage (e-n voltage) 5
Alternative voltage connection 6

nected to busbar voltage transformer for
7
synchro-check.
Note: Any phase-to-phase or phase-to-
ground voltage may be employed as the
busbar voltage. Parameterization is carried
out on the unit. The current connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/29, 8
6/30 and 6/31.
Fig. 6/32 lternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

A 10
the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Output contacts
1 Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz (selectable)
“Unit ready” contact
(live status contact)
1 NC/NO contact1)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Command/indication relay
Rated voltage Vnom 80 to 125 V (selectable) Quantity
2
7SA610*-*A/E/J 5 NO contacts, 3 NC/NO contact1)
Power consumption 7SA610*-*B/F/K 5 NO contacts,
With Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA 7SA6*1*-*A/E/J 12 NO contacts, 4 NC/NO contacts1)
With Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA 7SA6*1*-*B/F/K 8 NO contacts, 4 power relays2)
For IE, sensitive with 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA 7SA6*2*-*A/E/J 19 NO contacts, 5 NC/NO contacts1)
Voltage inputs ≤ 0.10 VA
3
7SA6*2*-*B/F/K 26 NO contacts, 6 NC/NO contacts1)
Overload capacity of current 7SA6*2*-*C/G/L 11 NO contacts, 8 power relays2)
circuit (r.m.s.) NO/NC contact
Thermal 500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA
4
20 A continuous
Dynamic (peak value) 1250 A (half cycle) Break, high-speed trip outputs 1000 W / VA
Break, contacts 30 VA
Ground current Break, contacts (for resistive 40 W
Sensitive 300 A for 1 s load)
100 A for 10 s Break, contacts
5
15 A continuous (for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA
Dynamic (peak value) 750 A (half cycle)
Switching voltage 250 V
Thermal overload capacity of 230 V continuous
voltage circuit Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
6
Auxiliary voltage
Operating time, approx.
Rated voltages DC 24 to 48 V NO contact 8 ms
DC 60 to 125 V NO/NC contact (selectable) 8 ms
DC 110 to 250 V Fast NO contact 5 ms
and AC 115 to 230 V (50/60 Hz) High-speed NO trip outputs < 1 ms
7 Permissible tolerance
Superimposed AC voltage
-20 % to +20 %
≤ 15 %
Power relay
for direct control of disconnector
(peak-to-peak) actuator motors
Power consumption Switching capacity
8
Quiescent Approx. 5 W Make for 48 to 250 V 1000 W/ VA
Energized Approx. 12 W to 18 W, depending on Break for 48 to 250 V 1000 W/ VA
design Make for 24 V 500 W/ VA
Break for 24 V 500 W/ VA
Bridging time during failure of the
auxiliary voltage Switching voltage 250 V
9 For Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms

For Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms
Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
Binary inputs Max. operating time 30 s
Quantity Permissible relative operating 1%
10
7SA610*-*A/E/J 5 time
7SA610*-*B/F/K 7 LEDs
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J 13
7SA6*1*-*B/F/K 20 Quantity
7SA6*2*-*A/E/J 21 RUN (green) 1
11
7SA6*2*-*B/F/K 29 ERROR (red) 1
7SA6*2*-*C/G/L 33 LED (red),
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar function can be assigned
Pickup threshold DC 17 or 73 or 154 V, bipolar 7SA610 7
7SA6*1/2/3 14
Functions are freely assignable 1
12 Pickup/reset voltage thresholds DC 9 V/ DC 10 V or DC 88 V/ DC 44 V,

Ranges are settable by means of or DC 176 V/ DC 88 V bipolar
jumpers for each binary input (3 nominal ranges DC 17/73/154 V)
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V
13
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA
Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V
with a recovery time >60 ms
14
15
1) Can be set via jumpers.
2) Each pair of power relays is mechanically
interlocked to prevent simultaneous closing.

Technical data
Unit design Electrical tests

Housing
Dimensions
7XP20
Refer to part 14 for dimension
Specifications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) 1
drawings IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL 508
Degree of protection acc. to VDE 0435
2
EN 60529 Further standards see “Individual
Surface-mounting housing IP 51 functions”
Flush-mounting housing Insulation tests
Front IP 51
Standards IEC 60255–5 and 60870-2-1
Rear IP 50
3
For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on High-voltage test (routine test)
Weight All circuits except for power 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Flush-mounting 1/3 x 19" 4 kg supply, binary inputs,
housing 1/2 x 19" 6 kg high-speed outputs,
2/3 x 19" 8 kg communication and time
4
1/1 x 19" 10 kg synchronization interfaces
Surface-mounting 1/3 x 19" 6 kg Auxiliary voltage, binary DC 3.5 kV
housing 1/2 x 19" 11 kg inputs and high-speed outputs
1/1 x 19" 19 kg (routine test)
5
only isolated communication 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
interfaces and time synchroni-
zation interface (routine test)
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 Ws,
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in
6
cation interfaces and time intervals of 5 s
synchronization interface,
class III
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
7
Standards IEC 60255-6/-22 (product standard)
EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard),
VDE 0435 part 301
DIN VDE 0435-110
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
8
IEC 60255-22-1 class III and 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s,
VDE 0435 Section 303, class III Ri = 200 Ω
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
Irradiation with HF field, frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM;
sweep 1 kHz 9
IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III 10 V/m; 800 to 960 MHz: 80 % AM;
1 kHz
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Irradiation with HF field, single
frequencies
10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHz; duty cycle > 10 s
10
IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3, 900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition
class III frequency 200 Hz
11
amplitude/pulse modulated
Fast transient disturbance/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms;
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polari-
ties; Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
(SURGE),
IEC 61000-4-5 installation class III
Impulse: 1.2/50 µs
12
Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Differential mode:1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
Analog measurement inputs,
binary inputs, relays output
Common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF 13
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, 1 kHz
14
class III
Power system frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
field
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 50 Hz
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
15
Technical data
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz Climatic stress tests
1
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 τ = 50 μs; 400 surges per second, Standard IEC 60255-6
test duration 2 s, Ri = 200 Ω
Temperatures
Fast transient surge withstand 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 15 ms Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
repetition rate 300 ms, ; both polari- and -2, test Bd
2
ties; test duration 1 min; Ri = 50 Ω Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C / -4 °F to +158 °F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz, temperature, tested for 96 h
interference IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated (Legibility of display may be
impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna-
3
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz; Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C / +23 °F to +131 °F
Ri = 200 Ω operating temperature acc. to
IEC 60255-6
EMC tests for noise emission; type test
– L imiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to 131 °F
Standard EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard) permanent storage
4
Radio noise voltage to lines, only 150 kHz to 30 MHz – L imiting temperature during -25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F
auxiliary voltage Limit class B transport
IEC-CISPR 22
Humidity
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on ≤ 75 % relative
5
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days per year up to
Harmonic currents on the Class A limits are observed
units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensation
network lead at AC 230 V,
not exposed to direct sunlight or is not permitted.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations and flicker Limits are observed that could cause condensation.
6
on the network incoming feeder
at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3
Mechanical stress test
7
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
During operation
8
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
9
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions
10 IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)

(vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)
11 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration

(vertical axis)
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
12
During transport
13 Frequency sweep 1 octave/min

14
both directions
15
both directions
Futher information can be found in the current manual at:


7SA61 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Housing, number of LEDs

7SA61 - -
1
Housing width ⅓ 19", 7 LEDs 0
2
Housing width ½ 19", 14 LEDs 1
see pages 6/32
Operator panel with: Housing width � 19", 14 LEDs 2 to 6/35
– 4-line backlit display, Housing width ²⁄₃ 19", 14 LEDs 3
– function keys,
– numerical keys, Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I)
3
– PC interface
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs) 4

DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 17 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 17 V3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 73 V3)
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush- Surface-

5
5
indication command relay4) speed relay5) mounting mounting mounting
inputs outputs trip housing/ housing/ housing/
6
incl. output screw-type plug-in screw-type
live status terminals terminals terminals
contact
For 7SA610
5
5
5
4
4
4
5
5
5



A
E
J
7
7 6  B
7 6  F
7
For 7SA611
6  K
8
13 5 12  A
13 5 12  E
13
13
5
4
12
8 5 
 J
M 9
13 4 8 5  N
13 4 8 5  P
20 9 4  B
20
20
9
9
4
4 
 F
K 10
1) Rated current can be
selected by means of For 7SA612
jumpers. 21 13 12  A
2) T
ransition between the
two auxiliary voltage
21
21
13
13
12
12 
 E
J 11
ranges can be selected by 21 12 8 5  M
means of jumpers. 21 12 8 5  P
21 12 8 5  R
12
3) T
he binary input 29 21 12  B
thresholds are selectable 29 21 12  F
in three stages by means 29 21 12  K
of jumpers, exception: 29 20 8 5  N
versions with power
29 20 8 5  Q
13
relays have some binary
29 20 8 5  S
inputs with only two
33 12 8  C
binary input thresholds.
33 12 8  G
4) F
ast relays are identified 33 12 8  L
in the terminal connec-
For 7SA613
14
tion diagram.
5) Power relay for direct 21 13 12  A
control of disconnector 21 12 8 5  M
actuator motors. Each
pair of contacts is
mechanically interlocked
to prevent simultaneous
closure.
15

LSA2539-agpen.eps
1 7SA63 distance protection relay for all voltage levels

7SA63 - -
2
Housing width � 19", 14 LEDs 2
see pages 6/32
Operator panel with:
– backlit graphic display for Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I) to 6/35
single-line diagram Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
– control keys, Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
3
– key-operated switches,
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5
– function keys,
– numerical keys, Iph = 5 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 6
– PC interface
4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 73 V3) 5
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush- Surface-
5 indication command relay4)

inputs outputs
speed relay5) mounting
trip housing/
mounting
housing/
mounting
housing/
incl. output screw-type plug-in screw-type
live status terminals terminals terminals
contact
6 For 7SA631
13 5 12  A
13 5 12  E
J
7
13 5 12 
13 4 8 5  M
13 4 8 5  N
13 4 8 5  P
20 9 4  B
F
8
20 9 4 
20 9 4  K
For 7SA632
21 13 12  A
9
21 13 12  E
21 13 12  J
21 12 8 5  M
21 12 8 5  P
21 12 8 5  R
10
29 21 12  B
29 21 12  F
29 21 12  K
29 20 8 5  N
29 20 8 5  Q
11
29 20 8 5  S
33 12 8  C
33 12 8  G
33 12 8  L
12
13
14 1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers.

2) T
ransition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges
4) F
ast relays are identified in the terminal connection
diagram.
can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) P
ower relay for direct control of disconnector actu-
3) T
he binary input thresholds are selectable in three ator motors. Each pair of contacts is mechanically
interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
15
stages by means of jumpers, exception: versions
with power relays have some binary inputs with only
two binary input thresholds.

LSA2540-agpen.eps

7SA64 - -
1
2
Housing width � 19", 14 LEDs 2
see pages 6/32
Units with detached Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I) to 6/35
operator panel with: Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
– backlit graphic display Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
3
– control keys,
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5
– key-operated switches,
– function keys, Iph = 5 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 6
– numerical keys,
– PC interface Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs)
4
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush-

indication command relay4)
inputs outputs
speed relay5) mounting
trip housing/
mounting
housing/ 5
incl. output screw-type plug-in
live status terminals terminals
contact
For 7SA641 6
13 5 12  A
13 5 12  J
M
7
13 4 8 5 
13 4 8 5  P
20 9 4  B
20 9 4  K
For 7SA642
21
21
13
13
12
12


A
J
8
21 12 8 5  M
21 12 8 5  R
9
29 21 12  B
29 21 12  K
29 20 8 5  N
29 20 8 5  S
29 12 8  C
10
33 12 8  L
11
12
13
2) T
ransition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges
4) F
ast relays are identified in the terminal connection
diagram. 14
can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) P
ower relay for direct control of disconnector actu-
3) T
he binary input thresholds are selectable in three ator motors. Each pair of contacts is mechanically
15
stages by means of jumpers, exception: versions interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
with power relays have some binary inputs with only
two binary input thresholds.

1 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Region-specific default settings / language settings 1)

7SA6 - -
see pages
Region DE, language: German A
6/33 to 6/35
2
Region World, language: English (GB) B
Region US, language: English (US) C
Region FR, French D
Region World, Spanish E
3
Region World, Italian F
Region World, language: Russian G
Region World, language: Polish H
Port B
4 Empty
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232
0
1
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485 2
5
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
2 analog outputs, each 0.....20 mA 7
System interface, PROFIBUS DP, electrical RS485 9 L 0 A
System interface, PROFIBUS DP, optical 820 nm, double ring 2), ST connector 9 L 0 B
6
System interface, DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0 G
System interface, DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector2) 9 L 0 H
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, electrical, duplicate, RJ45 plug connectors 9 L 0 R
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector3) 9 L 0 S
10 1) Definitions for region-specific default settings and functions:

Region DE: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC
inverse characteristic can be selected, directional earth (ground)
fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision
11
with zero-sequence power Sr; distance protection can be selected with
quadrilateral or circle characteristic.
Region US: preset to f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, ANSI inverse
characteristic only, directional earth (ground) fault protection:
no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision
12
with zero-sequence power Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic.
Region World: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional earth (ground) fault
protection: no direction decision with zero-sequence power Sr,
no U0 inverse characteristic.
13
Region FR: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional earth (ground)
fault protection: no U0 inverse characteristic, no logarithmic inverse
characteristic, weak infeed logic selectable between French specification
and world specification.
2) Optical double ring interfaces are not available with surface mounting housings.
14 3) For surface mounting housing applications please order the relay with electrical Ethernet interface
and use a separate fiber-optic switch.
15

Port C and port D

7SA6 - -
1
see pages
Port C: DIGSI/modem, electrical RS232,
6/34 and
2
Port D: empty 1 6/35
Port C: DIGSI/modem, electrical RS485,
Port D: empty 2
Port C and Port D installed 9 M
Port C
DIGSI/modem, electrical RS232 1
3
DIGSI/modem, electrical RS485 2
4
Port D
Protection data interface: optical 820 nm, two ST connectors, FO cable length up to 1.5 km
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable or communication networks 1) A
5
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B
Two analog outputs, each 0...20 mA K
Protection data interface: optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex connector
FO cable length up to 24 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) G
FO cable length up to 60 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2)3)
H
6
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2)4) J
FO30 optical 820 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km
7
for multimode fibre, for communication networks with IEEEC37.94 interface
or direct optical fibre connection (not available for surface-mounted housing) S
10
11
12
1) For suitable communication converters 7XV5662 (optical to

13
G703.1/X21/RS422 or optical to pilot wire) see "Accessories".
2) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal fiber-optic
14
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external
repeater.
3) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators 7XV5107-0AA00
are required to avoid optical saturation of the receiver element.
15
4) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators 7XV5107-0AA00
are required to avoid optical saturation of the receiver element.

1 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels 7SA6 - -
Functions 1
Trip mode Thermal overload BCD-coded output for
2
protection (ANSI 49) fault location
3-pole 0
3-pole  1
3-pole  2
3-pole   3
3 1/3-pole
1/3-pole
1/3-pole 

4
5
6
1/3-pole   7
4
Functions 2
Distance protection pickup Power swing detection Parallel line compensation
(ANSI 21, 21N) (ANSI 68, 68T)
I> A
V B
5 Quadrilateral (Z<)
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ
C
D
Quadrilateral (Z<)  F
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ  G
V  1) J
6 Quadrilateral (Z<)
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ
 1)
 1)
K
L
Quadrilateral (Z<)   1) N
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ   1) P
7 Functions 3
Auto-reclosure (ANSI Synchro-check Breaker failure protection Over/undervoltage protection
79) (ANSI 25) (ANSI 50BF) V>, V< (ANSI 27, 59)
Over/underfrequency protection
8
(ANSI 81)
A
 B
 C
  D
9
 E
  F
  G
   H
 J
10
  K
  L
   M
  N
   P
11
   Q
    R
Functions 4
Directional ground-fault Ground-fault detection Measured values
12
protection, grounded compensated/ isolated extended Min, max, mean
networks (ANSI 50N, networks
51N, 67N)
0
 1
13
 2) 2
 2)  3
 4
  5
  2) 6
14
  2)  7
15 1) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 1 or 5.

2) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 2 or 6.


Preferential types
7SA6 - -
1
Functions 1
2
Parallel line compensation
Z< (quadrilateral) V/φ
Breaker failure protection
directional for grounded
Ground-fault directional
Ground-fault protection
Power swing detection
Trip mode 1 or 3-pole
Overload protection
Voltage protection
isolated networks
Trip mode, 3-pole
Measured values,
for compensated
min. max. mean

Auto-reclosure 3
Synchro-check
Pickup V
extended,
networks
Pickup I>
Basic version 4
   1 AB 0
Medium voltage, cables

   1 AB 1
5
       1)  3 B D6
       1)   1 B D7 6
Medium voltage, overhead lines
7
        1)  3 BM6
        1)   3 BM7
High voltage, cables
          3 GH4
8
           3 GH5
High voltage, overhead lines
       2)       7 P R 4 9
       2)        7 P R 5
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Connecting cable (copper)

Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection
unit (9-pin connector) (contained in DIGSI 4, but can be
ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4
2 Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

Rated current 1.6 A; thermal overload release 1.6 A;
overcurrent trip 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14
3 Manual for 7SA6

English, V4.70 and higher C53000-G1176-C156-7
German, V4.70 C53000-G1100-C156-8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Opto-electric communication converters

Optical to X21/RS422 or G703.1 7XV5662-0AA00
1
Optical to pilot wires 7XV5662-0AC00
Additional interface modules

Protection data interface FO5, OMA1, 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
2
ST connector, 1.5 km C53207-A351-D651-1
3
Protection data interface FO17, 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A351-D655-1
C53207-A351-D656-1
4
LC-Duplex connector, 60 km
Optical repeaters
5
Serial repeater (2-channel), opt. 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km 7XV5461-0BG00
LC-Duplex connector, 60 km 7XV5461-0BH00
6
LC-Duplex connector, 100 km 7XV5461-0BJ00
Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig. 9
Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens 6/35
10
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 6/36
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
Fig. 6/33 Mounting rail connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)

0-827397-1
11
1 1)
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 1)

0-163084-2 1 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
0-539635-1
LSP2091-afp.eps
Crimping For type III+ 1 1)
12
tool and matching female 0-539668-2 1)
For CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)
and matching female 1-734387-1 1)
Fig. 6/34 Fig. 6/35 19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6/34
13
2-pin connector 3-pin connector
Short-circuit For current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens 6/37
links For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 6/38
C73334-A1-C31-1
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large 1 Siemens 6/4

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens 6/4

14
Fig. 6/36 Fig. 6/37
15
Short-circuit link Short-circuit link
for current contacts for voltage contacts/
indications contacts

Connection diagram
1
LSA2532-agpen.eps
7
Fig. 6/38 Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14 1) Starting from unit version ..../EE.
Fig. 6/39 Serial interfaces
15
Connection diagram
1
LSA2532-agpen.eps
7
Note: For serial interfaces see Fig. 6/40.
Fig. 6/40 Connection diagram 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
1 SA2545-agpen.eps
10
11
12
13 1) Starting from unit version .../EE.

2) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA6*1*-*M, 7SA*1*-*N, 7SA*1*-*P.
Time advantage of high-speed relays over fast relays: approx. 5 ms
3) Time advantage with fast relay approx. 3 ms.
14
4) Version with 3-pole tripping.
5) Version with 1/3-pole tripping.
15 Fig. 6/41 Connection diagram

Connection diagram
SA2545-agpen.eps 1
10
11
12
13
1) Version with 3-pole tripping.
14
2) Each pair of contacts is mechanically interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.

15
Connection diagram
2 SA2546-agpen.eps
10
11
12
13
1) 7SA613 is only available in a 2/3 x 19" flush-mounting housing. 5) V
ersion with 3-pole tripping.
14 2) Starting from unit version .../EE

3) Time advantage with fast relay approx. 3 ms.
4) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA6*2*-*M, 7SA6*2*-*P,
7SA6*2*-*R.
15
Time advantage of high-speed relays over fast relays: approx. 5 ms

Connection diagram
SA2546-agpen.eps
2
10
11
1) Starting from unit version
.../EE.
2) High-speed trip outputs
in versions 7SA6*2*-*N,
12
7SA6*2*-*Q, 7SA6*2*-*S.
3) Time advantage with fast
13
relay approx. 3 ms.
4) Version with 3-pole
tripping.
5) Version with 1/3-pole
14
tripping.
Time advantage of high-
speed relays over fast
relays: approx. 5 ms.
Note: For serial interfaces
15
see Fig. 6/40.

Connection diagram
2 SA2546-agpen.eps
10
11
12
13
1) Version with 3-pole
tripping.
2) Each pair of contacts is
mechanically interlocked
to prevent simultaneous
14 closure.
3) Version with 1/3-pole
tripping.
Note: For serial interfaces see
15
Fig. 6/40.

SIPROTEC 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Function overview
• N
on-switched distance protection with 6 measuring systems
(21/21N)
• H
igh resistance ground (earth)-fault protection for single- and
three-pole tripping (50N/51N/67N) 2
• Tele (pilot) protection (85)
• Fault locator (FL)
• Power swing detection/tripping (68/68T) 3
• Phase-overcurrent protection (50/51/67)
• STUB bus overcurrent protection (50 STUB)
LSP2309-afpen.tif
• Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)
• Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
4
• Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U)
5
• Auto-reclosure (79)
• Synchro-check (25)
• Breaker failure protection (50BF)
6
Control functions
Fig. 6/46 SIPROTEC 7SA522 distance protection relay • Commands for control of CB and isolators
7
Description • Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
The SIPROTEC 7SA522 relay provides full-scheme distance • Measured-value supervision
protection and incorporates all functions usually required for the
• Event logging/fault logging
8
protection of a power line. The relay is designed to provide fast
and selective fault clearance on transmission and subtransmis- • Oscillographic fault recording
sion cables and overhead lines with or without series capacitor • Switching statistics
compensation. The power system star point can be solid or
resistance grounded (earthed), resonant-grounded via Peterson Front design
coil or isolated. The 7SA522 is suitable for single-pole and
three-pole tripping applications with and without tele (pilot)
• User-friendly local operation with numeric keys
• LEDs for local alarm
9
protection schemes.
• PC front port for convenient relay setting
10
– The 7SA522 incorporates several protective functions usually
• Function keys
required for transmission line protection.
– High-speed tripping time Communication interfaces
– Suitable for cables and overhead lines with or without series
capacitor compensation
– Self-setting power swing detection for power swing
• System interface for connecting to a control system via vari-
ous protocols 11
frequencies up to 7 Hz – IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
12
– Digital relay-to-relay communication for two and three – PROFIBUS DP
terminal topologies – DNP 3
• 2 serial protection data interfaces for tele (pilot) protection
– Adaptive auto-reclosure (ADT)
• Time synchronization via IRIG B or DCF77 or system interface
13
Hardware
• Binary inputs: 8/16/24 14

• Output relays: 16/24/32
• High-speed trip outputs: 5 (optional)
15
Application
Application
1 The 7SA522 relay provides full-scheme

distance protection and incorporates all
functions usually required for the protec-
2
tion of a power line. The relay is designed
to provide fast and selective fault clear-
ance on transmission and subtransmission
cables and overhead lines with or without
series capacitor compensation. This
3 contributes towards improved stability and
availability of your electrical power trans-
mission system. The power system star
point can be solid or impedance grounded
4 (earthed), resonant-grounded via Peterson

coil or isolated. The 7SA522 is suitable for
single and three-pole tripping applications
with and without tele (pilot) protection
5
schemes.
The effect of apparent impedances in
unfaulted fault loops is eliminated by a Fig. 6/47 Single-line diagram
sophisticated and improved method which
6 uses pattern recognition with symmetrical components and load

compensation. The correct phase selection is essential for selective ANSI Protection functions
tripping and reliable fault location. Distance protection
21/21N
During network power swings, an improved power swing block-
7
FL Fault locator
ing feature prevents the distance protection from unwanted trip-
ping and optionally provides controlled tripping in the event of 50N/51N/67N Directional earth(ground)-fault protection
loss of synchronism (out of step). This function guarantees power
transmission even under critical network operating conditions. 50/51/67 Backup overcurrent protection
8 Cost-effective power system management 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage
Power swing detection/tripping

The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide 68/68T
control and monitoring functions and therefore support the Teleprotection for distance protection
85/21
9
user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of 27WI Weak-infeed protection
minimizing the use of hardware.
85/67N Teleprotection for earth(ground)-fault protection
The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
10
50HS Switch-onto-fault protection
criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
50BF Breaker-failure protection
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of func-
tionality which represents a benchmark-level of performance in Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
59/27
protection and control. If the requirements for protection, control
11 and interlocking change, it is possible in the majority of the cases
to implement such changes by means of parameterization using
81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
Synchro-check
DIGSI 4 without having to change the hardware. 25
Auto-reclosure
12
The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of 79
presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components. 86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
13 Features
• High speed tripping time
• Suitable for cables and overhead lines with or without series
capacitor compensation
14 • Self setting power swing detection fo frequencies up to 7 Hz

• Digital relay-to-relay communication for two and three
terminal topologies
15
• Adaptive auto-reclosure (ADT)

Construction
Construction
Connection techniques and housing 1

½ and �-rack sizes
These are the available housing widths
of the SIPROTEC 7SA522 relays, referred
2
to a 19" module frame system. This
means that previous models can always
be replaced. The height is a uniform
245 mm for flush-mounting housings and
3
266 mm for surface-mounting housings
LSP2310-afpen.tif
for all housing widths. All cables can be
connected with or without ring lugs. Plug-
in terminals are available as an option. 4
cable harnesses. In the case of surface
mounting on a panel, the connection
terminals are located above and below
5
communication interfaces are located in a Fig. 6/48 Housing widths ½ × 19" and � × 19"
sloped case at the top and bottom of the
housing. 6
8
LSP2174-afp.tif
LSP2166-afp.tif
10
Fig. 6/49 Rear view with screw-type terminals Fig. 6/50 Rear view with terminal covers and
and serial interfaces wiring
11
12
13
14
15
1 Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

The main function of the 7SA522 is a full-scheme distance
protection. By parallel calculation and monitoring of all six
2 impedance loops, a high degree of sensitivity and selectivity is

achieved for all types of faults. The shortest tripping time is less
than one cycle. Single-pole and three-pole tripping is possible.
The distance protection is suitable for cables and overhead lines
3
with or without series capacitor compensation.
Mho and quadrilateral characteristics
The 7SA522 relay provides quadrilateral as well as mho zone
4
characteristics. Both characteristics can be used separately for
phase and ground (earth) faults. Resistance ground (earth)
faults can, for instance, be covered with the quadrilateral
characteristic and phase faults with the mho characteristic.
5
Load zone
In order to guarantee a reliable discrimination between load Fig. 6/51 Distance protection: quadrilateral characteristic
operation and short-circuit - especially on long high loaded
lines - the relay is equipped with a selectable load encroachment
6 characteristic. Impedances within this load encroachment char-

acteristic prevent the distance zones from unwanted tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity
7
The 7SA522 distance protection incorporates a well-proven,
highly sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
unfaulted loops is reliably eliminated to prevent the adverse
influence of currents and voltages in the fault-free loops. This
8
phase selection algorithm achieves single-pole tripping and
correct distance measurement in a wide application range.
The influence of wrong distance measurement due to parallel
9 lines can be compensated by feeding the neutral current of the
parallel line to the relay. Parallel line compensation can be used
for distance protection as well as for the fault locator.
10
7 distance zones
Six independant distance zones and one separate overreach
zone are available. Each distance zone has dedicated time
stages, partly separate for single-phase or multi-phase faults. Fig. 6/52 Distance protection: mho characteristic
11
Ground (earth) faults are detected by monitoring the neutral
current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage 3V0.
Elimination of interference signals
The quadrilateral tripping characteristic permits separate setting
Digital filters render the unit immune to interference signals
of the reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance section R
12
contained in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
can be set separately for faults with and without ground involve-
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
ment. This characteristic has therefore an optimal performance
changes is considerably reduced. A special measuring method is
in case of faults with fault resistance. The distance zones can be
employed in order to assure protection selectivity during satura-
set forward, reverse or non-directional. Sound phase polariza-
tion of the current transformers.
13
tion and voltage memory provides a dynamically unlimited
directional sensitivity. Measuring voltage monitoring
Mho Tripping of the distance protection is blocked automatically in
the event of failure of the measuring voltage, thus preventing
The mho tripping characteristic provides sound phase respec-
14 tively memory polarization for all distance zones. The diagram
shows characteristic without the expansion due to polarizing.
spurious tripping.
The measuring voltage is monitored by the integrated fuse fail-
During a forward fault the polarizing expands the mho circle ure monitor. Distance protection is blocked if either the fuse fail-
towards the source so that the origin is included. This mho circle ure monitor or the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer
15 expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types

of faults, even for close-in faults.
protection switch operates and, in this case, the EMERGENCY
definite-time overcurrent protection can be activated.

Fault locator
The integrated fault locator calculates
the fault impedance and the distance- 1
to-fault. The result is displayed in ohms,
miles, kilometers or in percent of the
2
line length. Parallel line and load current
compensation is also available.
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T)
3
Dynamic transient reactions, for instance
short-circuits, load fluctuations, auto-
reclosures or switching operations can
cause power swings in the transmission
4
network. During power swings, large
LSP2311-afp.tif
currents along with small voltages can
cause unwanted tripping of distance
protection relays. To avoid uncontrolled
tripping of the distance protection and
to achieve controlled tripping in the
event of loss of synchronism, the 7SA522 Fig. 6/53 Power swing current and voltage wave forms 5
relay is equipped with an efficient power
swing detection function. Power swings
6
can be detected under symmetrical load
conditions as well as during single-pole
auto-reclosures.
Tele (pilot) protection for distance pro-

tection (ANSI 85-21)
7
A teleprotection function is available for
fast clearance of faults up to 100 % of
8
the line length. The following operating
modes may be selected:
– PUTT, permissive underreaching zone
transfer trip
LSP2312-afp.tif
– POTT, permissive overreaching zone
transfer trip
– UNBLOCKING
– BLOCKING
– DUTT, direct underreaching zone trans-
fer trip (together with Direct Transfer
Fig. 6/54 Power swing circle diagram 10
Trip function)
11
The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary Phase-selective transmission is also possible with multi-end
inputs and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical applications, if some user-specific linkages are implemented
relay input or output. At least one channel is required for each by way of the integrated CFC logic. During disturbances in the
direction. transmission receiver or on the transmission circuit, the tele-
protection function can be blocked by a binary input signal with-
Common transmission channels are power-line carrier,
microwave radio and fiber-optic links. A serial protection data
out losing the zone selectivity. The control of the overreach zone
Z1B (zone extension) can be switched over to the auto-reclosure
12
interface for direct connection to a digital communication function. A transient blocking function (Current reversal guard)
network or fiber-optic link is available as well. is provided in order to suppress interference signals during trip-
7SA522 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals. This
feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable single-
ping of parallel lines.

13
pole tripping, if two single-pole faults occur on different lines.
The transmission methods are suitable also for lines with three Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary to
14
ends (three-terminal lines). execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SA522 relay
is equipped with phase-selective "external trip inputs" that can
be assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
15
Weak-infeed protection: echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI)
1 To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak

the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated
2
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible
to initiate tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase- selective
1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a permissive trip signal (POTT or
Unblocking) is received and if the phase-ground voltage drops
3
correspondingly. As an option, the weak infeed logic can be
equipped according to a French specification.
Directional ground(earth)-fault protection for high-

resistance faults (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
4 In grounded (earthed) networks, it may happen that the

distance protection sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-
resistance ground (earth) faults. The 7SA522 protection relay
therefore has protection functions for faults of this nature.
5 The ground (earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be used

with 3 definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT).
t=
0, 14
(I /I )
p
0, 02
−1
Tp
A 4th definite-time stage can be applied instead of the one

inverse-time stage.
6
Fig. 6/55 Normal inverse
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). An additional logarith-
Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault
mic inverse-time characteristic is also available.
protection (ANSI 85-67N)
7 The direction decision can be determined by the neutral current

and the zero-sequence voltage or by the negative-sequence
The directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can
be combined with one of the following teleprotection schemes:
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative to the
directional determination with zero-sequence voltage, the star- • Directional comparison
8
point current of an grounded (earthed) power transformer may • BLOCKING
also be used for polarization. Dual polarization applications can • UNBLOCKING
therefore be fulfilled.
The transient blocking function (current reversal guard) is also
Alternatively, the direction can be determined by evaluation of provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping
9 zero-sequence power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in for-
ward or reverse direction or for both directions (non-directional).
of parallel lines.
The pilot functions for distance protection and for ground
As an option, the 7SA522 relay can be provided with a sensitive (earth)-fault protection can use the same signaling channel or
neutral (residual) current transformer. This feature provides a
10
two separate and redundant channels.
measuring range for the neutral (residual) current from 5 mA to
100 A with a nominal relay current of 1 A and from 5 mA to Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67)
500 A with a nominal relay current of 5 A. Thus the ground
(earth)- fault overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme The 7SA522 provides a backup overcurrent protection. Two
11 sensitivity. definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are

available, separately for phase currents and for the neutral
The function is equipped with special digital filter algorithms, (residual) current.
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature
is particularly important for low zero-sequence fault currents The application can be extended to a directional overcurrent
12 which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics. protection (ANSI 67) by taking into account the decision of the
Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault trip can available direction detection elements.
be activated separately for each stage as well. Two operating modes are selectable. The function can run in
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground(earth)- parallel to the distance protection or only during failure of the
13 fault protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for

single-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector.
voltage in the VT secondary circuit (emergency operation).
The secondary voltage failure can be detected by the integrated
It may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto- fuse failure monitor or via a binary input from a VT miniature
reclose cycles or during pickup of the distance protection. circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
14 Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”).
15
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB) Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate definite-time
overcurrent stage. It can be activated from a binary input signal-
The 7SA522 relay incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, for 1
ling that the line isolator (disconnector) is open. example due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current detection
Settings are available for phase and ground(earth)-faults. logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used in
2
single-pole tripping schemes.
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS) If the fault current is not interrupted after a time delay has
expired, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will be
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty line. generated. The breaker failure protection can be initiated by all
3
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto- integrated protection functions as well as by external devices via
fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast 3-pole tripping. binary input signals.
With lower fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
onto-fault is also possible with the overreach distance zone Z1B
or just with pickup in any zone.
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary
The 7SA522 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
(AR). The function includes several operating modes: 4
input “manual close” or automatically via measurement. • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending the type of fault
Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection
(ANSI 59, 27)
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for
multi-phase faults
5
A voltage rise can occur on long lines that are operating at • 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
no-load or that are only lightly loaded. The 7SA522 contains a without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
number of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring
element is of two-stage design. The following measuring ele-
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing
for multi-phase faults
6
ments are available:
• Phase-to-ground overvoltage without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
• Phase-to-phase overvoltage
• Zero-sequence overvoltage
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure 7
• The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th volt- binary inputs and outputs
8
age input or be derived from the phase voltages. • Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
• Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated • Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check
for the remote end of the line (compounding).
• Negative-sequence overvoltage
9
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected other operating principles can be employed by means of the
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by integrated programmable logic (CFC).
means of a transmitted signal.
Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows
10
The 7SA522 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage under- evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage-
voltage measuring elements: dependent supplementary functions are thus available:
• Phase-to-ground undervoltage • DLC
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
11
• Positive-sequence undervoltage the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker
closure).
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means • ADT
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs. The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure
12
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on
equipment).
Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and • RDT
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto-
13
the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are When faults within the zone extension, but external to the pro-
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency) tected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), the
and each element can be delayed separately. RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the return
voltage from the remote station which has not tripped whether
or not to reduce the dead time. 14
15
Synchronism check (ANSI 25)
1

Where two network sections are switched in by control
command or following a 3-pole, it must be ensured that both

network sections are mutually synchronous. For this purpose,
a synchronism-check function is provided. After verification
2
of the network synchronism the function releases the CLOSE
command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled for different
criteria, e.g., checking that the busbar or line is not carrying
a voltage (dead line or dead bus).Fuse failure monitoring and
3
other supervision functions
The 7SA522 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions

covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore
4
monitoring system.
Fig. 6/56 Monitoring of active power direction
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit, the
5 distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due

to this loss of voltage. This secondary voltage interruption can

be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.

Immediate blocking of distance protection and switching to
6
the backup-emergency protection is provided for all types of
secondary voltage failures.

Additional measurement supervision functions are

7 • Broken-conductor supervision

• Phase-sequence supervision
8

Directional power protection
The 7SA522 has a function for detecting the power direction by
Fig. 6/57 Monitoring of reactive power
measuring the phase angle of the positive-sequence system's
9
power. Fig. 6/57 shows an application example displaying nega-
tive active power. An indication is issued in the case when the Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
measured angle φ (S1) of the positive-sequence system power is One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
within the P - Q - level sector. This sector is between angles φ A used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
and φ B.
10
connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
Via CFC the output signal of the directional monitoring can be is interrupted.
linked to the “Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)” function and thus, as
reverse power protection, initiate tripping of the CB. Lockout (ANSI 86)
11
Fig.6/58 shows another application displaying capacitive reactive Under certain operating conditions, it is advisable to block
power. In the case of overvoltage being detected due to long CLOSE commands after a TRIP command of the relay has been
lines under no-load conditions it is possible to select the lines issued. Only a manual “Reset” command unblocks the CLOSE
where capacitive reactive power is measured. command. The 7SA522 is equipped with such an interlocking
logic.
12
13
14
15
Commissioning and fault event

analyzing
Special attention has been paid to com- 1
missioning. All binary inputs and outputs
can be displayed and activated directly.
2
This can simplify the wiring check
significantly for the user. The operational
and fault events and the fault records are
clearly arranged. For applications with
3
serial protection data interface, all cur-
rents, voltages and phases are available
via communication link at each local unit,
displayed at the front of the unit with
DIGSI 4 or with WEB Monitor.
A common time tagging facilitates the
comparison of events and fault records. 4
LSP2818.tif
WEB Monitor – Internet technology
5
simplifies visualization
In addition to the universal DIGSI 4 Fig. 6/58 Web Monitor: Display of the protection direction
operating program, the relay contains
6
standard software tools and at the same
7
time make use of the Intranet/Internet
infrastructure. Apart from numeric values,
graphical displays in particular provide
clear information and a high degree of
operating reliability. Of course, it is also
possible to call up detailed measured
value displays and annunciation buffers. 8
By emulation of the integrated unit opera-
tion on the PC it is also possible to adjust
selected settings for commissioning
purposes. 9
10
LSP2820.tif
11
Fig. 6/59 Web monitor: Supported commissioning by phasor diagram
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication

2 originates.
• The communication system automatically handles the transfer
files). The user has access to these features without any
3
• For the safe execution of a control command the correspond-
ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the device
which will execute the command. After the release and execu-
4
tion of the command a feedback signal is generated. At every
stage of the control command execution particular conditions
are checked. If these are not satisfied, command execution
may be terminated in a controlled manner. Fig. 6/60 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
connection or fiber-optic connection
5 The units offer a high degree of flexibility by supporting different

standards for connection to industrial and power automation
systems. By means of the communication modules, on which the
protocols run, exchange and retrofit is possible. Therefore, the
6
units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to changing
communication infrastructure such as the application of Ethernet
networks which are already widely applied in the power supply
sector.
7 Local PC interface
The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the
8
Service / modem interface
9
By means of the RS 485/RS 232 interface, it is possible to
efficiently operate a number of protection units centrally via
DIGSI 4. Remote operation is possible on connection of a modem.
This offers the advantage of rapid fault clarification, especially
in the case of unmanned power plants. With the optical version, Fig. 6/61 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 centralized operation can be implemented by means of a star

coupler.
Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the
11 The time synchronization interface is a standard feature in all
units. The supported formats are IRIG-B and DCF77.
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where differ-
ent communcation protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103,
PROFIBUS, DNP, etc) are required, such demands can be met. For
Reliable bus architecture fiber-optic communication, no external converter is required for
12 • RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
SIPROTEC 4.
magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of IEC 61850 protocol
13
system continues to operate without any problems.
for protection and control systems used by power supply
• Fiber-optic double ring circuit corporations. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
14
units, the communication system continues to operate without masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
disturbance. the units via the Ethernet but is also possible with DIGSI. It is also
It is usually impossible to communicate with a unit that has possible to retrieve operating and fault records as well as fault
failed. Should the unit fail, there is no effect on the communi- recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also provide a
cation with the rest of the system. few items of unit-specific information in browser windows.
15
Communication
LSP2162-afpen.tif
standardized protocol for efficient com-
LSP2164-afp.tif
munication with protection relays.
2
number of protection relay manufacturers
and is used worldwide. Supplements
for control functions are defined in
the manufacturer-specific part of this
3
standard.
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP is an industrial com-
Fig. 6/62 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 6/63 ROFIBUS fiber-optic double ring
P
4
munication standard and is supported
module communication module
by a number of PLC and protection relay
manufacturers.
DNP 3.0
LSP2163-afpen.tif
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and
LSP3.01-0021.tif
Level 2 compatible.
System solutions for protection and

station control
Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with 7
PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the Fig. 6/64 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 6/65 iber-optic Ethernet communication
F
optical double ring, the units exchange
information with the control system.
communication module module for IEC 61850 with
integrated Ethernet switch 8
Units equipped with IEC 60870-5-103
interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
9
parallel via the RS485 bus or connected in
star by fiber-optic link.
Through this interface, the system is
open for the connection of units of other
10
manufacturers (see Fig. 6/67).
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also The communication possibilities are identical to those for the
1
be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC. line differential protection relays 7SD5 and 7SD610. The follow-
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum ing options are available:
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto- • FO51), OMA12) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring FO cable length up to 1.5 km for link to communication
2
networks via communication converters or for direct FO cable
master can be established. connection
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with • FO61), OMA22) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked FO cable length up to 3.5 km, for direct connection via multi-
3
with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface mode FO cable
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units • FO171): for direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
of other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
• FO181): for direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for
systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103 interface are connected
4
mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
with PAS via the Ethernet station bus by means of serial/Ethernet
converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used via the • FO191): for direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for
same station bus. mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
• FO301): for transmission with the IEEE C37.94 standard
5
Serial protection data interface
The tele (pilot) protection schemes can be implemented using separate communication converters (7XV5662). These have a
digital serial communication. The 7SA522 is capable of remote fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to the
relay communication via direct links or multiplexed digital com- protection relay. The link to the communication network is
6
munication networks. The serial protection data interface has optionally an electrical X21 or a G703.1 interface. If the connec-
the following features: tion to the multiplexor supports IEEE C37.94 a direct fibre optic
• Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance connection to the relay is possible using the FO30 module.
protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes
For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires), a
7 • Signaling for directional ground(earth)- fault protection –
directional comparison for high-resistance faults in solidly
modern communication converter for copper cables is available.
This operates with both the two-wire and three-wire copper con-
grounded systems. nections which were used by conventional differential protection
• Echo-function systems before. The communication converter for copper cables
8 • Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented

without additional logic
is designed for 5 kV insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV
isolation transformer can extend the field of applications of this
technique into ranges with higher insulation voltage require-
• Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure “Adap-
ments. With SIPROTEC 4 and the communication converter
tive dead time” (ADT) mode
9
for copper cables a digital follow-up technique is available for
• Redundant communication path switchover is possible with two-wire protection systems (typical 15 km) and all three-wire
the 7SA522 when 2 serial protection data interfaces are protection systems using existing copper communication links.
installed
Communication data:
10
• 28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals
• Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kbit/s; X21/
• Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means
RS422 with 64 or 128 or 512 kbit/s; IEEE C37.94
of the programmable CFC logic
• Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
• Display of the operational measured values of the opposite
• Protocol HDLC
11
terminal(s) with phase-angle information relative to a common
reference vector • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
• Clock synchronization: the clock in only one of the relays • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
must be synchronized from an external so called “Absolute • Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
12
Master” when using the serial protection data interface. This data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if
relay will then synchronize the clock of the other (or the two they occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per
other relays in 3 terminal applications) via the protection data minute and hour, of the serial protection data interface can be
interface. displayed.
13
• 7SA522 and 7SA6 can be combined via the protection data
Figure 6/68 shows four applications for the serial protection data
interface.
interface on a two-terminal line.
14
1) For flush-mounting housing.
15
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal fiber-optic module
(OMA1) will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
10
11
12
Fig. 6/67 Communication topologies for the serial protection data interface on a two-terminal line
13
14
15
Communication
Three-terminal lines can also be protected
1
with a tele (pilot) protection scheme by
using SIPROTEC 4 distance protection
relays. The communication topology may
then be a ring or a chain topology, see
Fig. 6/69. In a ring topology a loss of one
2 data connection is tolerated by the system.
The topology is re-routed to become a
chain topology within less than 100 ms.
3
To reduce communication links and to
save money for communications, a chain
topology may be generally applied.
5 Ring topology
10
Chain topology
Fig. 6/68 Ring or chain communication topology
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
point in the line direction, I4 connected as
summation current transformer (= 3I0): 2
Holmgreen circuit
of the broken (open) delta winding on
3
internally.
4
Fig. 6/69 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers
5

6
The 3 phase current transformers are
7
permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
Note: Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer 8
must be connected to the terminal of
the core balance CT pointing in the same
9
direction as the neutral point of the phase
current transformers (in this case in line
direction). The voltage connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 66/70,
6/74 or 6/75.
Fig. 6/70 lternative connection of current transformers for sensitive ground-
A
current measuring with core-balance current transformers 10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

of a grounded (earthed) transformer for
2
directional ground(earth)-fault protection.
The voltage connection is effected in
5 Fig. 6/71 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring

neutral current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer

the summation current of the parallel line
for parallel line compensation on overhead
7 lines. The voltage connection is effected in
10 Fig. 6/72 lternative connection of current transformers for measuring

A
the ground (earth) current of a parallel line
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

nected to broken (open) delta winding 1
monitoring and ground(earth)-fault
2
directional protection.
The current connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/70, 6/71, 6/72 and
6/73.
4
Fig. 6/73 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring
the displacement voltage (e-n voltage) 5
Alternative voltage connection 6

7
synchro-check.
Note: Any phase-to-phase or phase-to-
ground (earth) voltage may be employed
as the busbar voltage. Parameterization is
carried out on the unit. The current con-
nection is effected in accordance with 8
Fig. 6/70, 6/71, 6/72 and 6/73.
Fig. 6/74 lternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

A 10
the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
1 Analog inputs
Quantity
Function can be assigned
8 or 16 or 24 (refer to ordering code)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Switching capacity

Make 1000 W/VA
Rated voltage 80 to 125 V (selectable)
2
Break, high-speed trip outputs 1000 W/VA
Power consumption Break, contacts 30 VA
In CT circuits with Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA Break, contacts (for resistive 40 W
In CT circuits with Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA load)
In the CT circuit for high sensitive Approx. 0.05 VA Break, contacts 25 VA
ground(earth)-fault protection
3
(for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms)
(refer to ordering code) at 1 A
In VT circuits Approx. 0.10 VA
Permissible current 30 A for 0.5 s
Thermal overload capacity 5 A continuous
In CT circuits 500 A for 1 s
4
150 A for 10 s Operating time, approx.
20 A continuous NO contact 8 ms
In the CT circuit for high sensitive 300 A for 1 s NO/NC contact (selectable) 8 ms
ground(earth)-fault protection 100 A for 10 s Fast NO contact 5 ms
(refer to ordering code) 15 A continuous High-speed NO trip outputs < 1 ms
5 In VT circuits 230 V continuous per phase LEDs

Dynamic overload capacity Quantity
In CT circuits 1250 A (one half cycle) RUN (green) 1
In the CT circuit for high sensitive 750 A (one half cycle) ERROR (red) 1
Indication (red), 14
6
ground(earth)-fault protection
(refer to ordering code) function can be assigned
Auxiliary voltage Unit design
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V Housing 7XP20
DC 60 to 125 V Dimension 1/2 x 19" or 1/1 x 19"
7 DC 110 to 250 V
and AC 115 V with 50/60 Hz
Refer to ordering code, and see
dimension drawings, part 14
Permissible tolerance of the rated -20 % to +20 % Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
auxiliary voltage
8
Max. superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 % Flush-mounting housing
(peak-to-peak) Front IP 51
Power consumption Rear IP 50
During normal operation Approx. 8 W For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
During pickup with all inputs and Approx. 18 W Weight
9 outputs activated
Bridging time during auxiliary
Flush-mounting housing
½ x 19" 6 kg
voltage failure � x 19" 10 kg
Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms Surface-mounting housing
½x 19" 11 kg
10
Binary inputs
� x 19" 19 kg
Quantity 8 or 16 or 24 (refer to ordering
Functions are freely assignable code)
Pickup/Reset voltage thresholds DC 19 V/ DC 10 V or DC 88 V/ DC
11
Ranges are settable by means of 44 V or DC 176 V/ DC 88 V, bipolar
jumpers for each binary input (3 nominal ranges DC 17/73/154 V)
Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance
12 at 220 V with a recovery time

> 60 ms.
13
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests

Specifications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
Standards IEC 60255-6/-22 (product standard)
VDE 0435 part 301
1
IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL 508
VDE 0435 DIN VDE 0435-110
2
Further standards see “Individual High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
functions” IEC 60255-22-1 class III and 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s,
VDE 0435 Section 303, class III Ri = 200 Ω
Insulation tests
Standards IEC 60255–5 and 60870-2-1
3
High-voltage test (routine test) and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
All circuits except for power 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz Irradiation with HF field, frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM;
supply, binary inputs, sweep 1 kHz
high-speed outputs, IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III 10 V/m; 800 to 960 MHz: 80 % AM;
communication and time 1 kHz
4
synchronization interfaces IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Auxiliary voltage, binary DC 3.5 kV Irradiation with HF field, single 10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz;
inputs and high-speed outputs frequencies 80 % AM; 1 kHz; duty cycle > 10 s
(routine test) IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3, 900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition
class III frequency 200 Hz
5
only isolated communication 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
interfaces and time synchroni- amplitude/pulse modulated
zation interface (routine test) Fast transient disturbance/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
Impulse voltage test (type test) IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms;
All circuits except for commu- 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 Ws, IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms;
both polarities; Ri = 50 Ω;
6
nication interfaces and time 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in
synchronization interface, intervals of 5 s test duration 1 min
class III High-energy surge voltages Impulse: 1.2/50 µs
(SURGE),
7
Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Differential mode:1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
Analog measurement inputs, Common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
binary inputs, relays output Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz
Power system frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
8
field
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 50 Hz
9
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 τ = 50 μs; 400 surges per second,
test duration 2 s, Ri = 200 Ω
Fast transient surge withstand 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 15 ms
repition rate 300 ms, ; both polarities;
test duration 1 min; Ri = 50 Ω
10
Radiated electromagnetic inter- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz,
11
ference IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna-
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz;
Ri = 200 Ω
EMC tests for noise emission; type test
Standard
Radio noise voltage to lines, only
EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard)
150 kHz to 30 MHz
12
auxiliary voltage Limit class B
IEC-CISPR 22
Radio interference field strength
IEC-CISPR 22
30 to 1000 MHz
Limit class B 13
Harmonic currents on the network Class A limits are observed
lead at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-2
14
Voltage fluctuations and flicker Limits are observed
on the network incoming feeder
at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3
15
Technical data
Mechanical stress test

During operation
Standards IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068–2
2 IEC 60255–21–1, class 2

IEC 60068–2–6
3
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068–2–27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions
4
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60068–3–3 (horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
5
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
6 During transport
Standards IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068–2
IEC 60255–21–1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
7
IEC 60068–2–6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
8
both directions
9 both directions
10
Standard IEC 60255-6
Temperatures
and -2, test Bd
11
Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C / +23 °F to +131 °F
12
IEC 60255-6
– Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to 131 °F
permanent storage
13 transport
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on ≤ 75 % relative
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days per year up to
14
not exposed to direct sunlight or is not permitted.



7SA522 distance protection relay or transmission lines
Current transformer
7SA522 - -
1
Iph = 1 A1), IGnd = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
2
Iph = 1 A1), IGnd = high sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
see following
Iph = 5 A1), IGnd = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5 pages
Iph = 5 A1), IGnd = high sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 6

DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold DC 17 V 3)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold DC 17 V 3)
2
4
3
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 V, binary input threshold DC 73 V 3) 5
DC 220 to 250 V 2), AC 115 V, binary input threshold DC 154 V 3) 6
Binary/
indication
Signal/
command
Fast
relay
High-
speed
Housing
width
Flush-
mounting
Flush-
mounting
Surface-
mounting
4
inputs outputs incl. trip referred housing/ housing/ housing/
live status output to 19” screw-type plug-in screw-type
contact terminals terminals terminals
5
8 4 12 – ½  A
8 4 12 – ½  E
6
8 4 12 – ½  J
16 12 12 – �  C
16 12 12 – �  G
16 12 12 – �  L
16
16
4
4
15
15
5
5
�
�


N
Q 7
16 4 15 5 �  S
24 20 12 – �  D
24
24
20
20
12
12
–
–
�
� 
 H
M
8
24 12 15 5 �  P
24 12 15 5 �  R
24
22
24
32
3
12
5
– 
 T
U
9
24 4 18 10  W
Region-specific default settings/language settings (language selectable)

Region DE, language: German A
10
Region World, language: English (GB) B
Region US, language: English (US) C
Region FR, language: French
Region World, language: Spanish
D
E
11
Region World, language: Italian F
Region World, language: Russian G
Region World, language: Polish H 12
Regulation on region-specific presettings and function versions:
Region DE: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC, directional ground-(earth)
fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision with
zero-sequence power Sr
13
Region US: preset to f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, ANSI inverse characteristic only, directional
ground-(earth) fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction
decision with zero-sequence power Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic
Region World: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional ground-(earth) fault protection:
1) Rated current can be selected by
means of jumpers. 14
no direction decision with zero-sequence Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic 2) T
ransition between the three
auxiliary voltage ranges can be
Region FR: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional ground-(earth) fault protection:
15
selected by means of jumpers.
no U0 inverse characteristic, no logarithmic inverse characteristic, weak infeed logic
selectable between French specification and World specification. 3) T
he binary input thresholds can be
selected by means of jumpers.

Description Order No. Order Code
1 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Port B
7SA522 - -
see
Empty 0
following
2
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232 1 pages
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485 2
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
System interface, PROFIBUS DP, electrical RS485 9 L 0 A
3
System interface, PROFIBUS DP, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
System interface, DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0 G
System interface, DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0 H
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, electrical, duplicate,RJ45 plug connectors 9 L 0 R
4 System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector4) 9 L 0 S
Port C and/or Port D

Empty 0
1
5
Port C: DIGSI / modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty
Port C: DIGSI / modem, electrical RS485; Port D: empty 2
Port C: DIGSI / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector; Port D: empty 3
With Port D 9 M
6 Port C
Empty 0
DIGSI / modem, electrical RS232 1
7
DIGSI / modem, electrical RS485 2
DIGSI / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
Port D
8 For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable or communication networks2)

A
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B

9
FO cable length up to 60 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable3) 5) H
10
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable3) 6) J
FO30 optical 820 nm, 2 ST-connectors, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km for multimode fibre,
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct optical fibre connection (not
available for surface-mounted housing) S
11
12
13 1) Optical double ring interfaces are not available with surface- the relay with electrical Ethernet interface and use a separate
mounting housings. Please, order the version with RS485 interface fiber-optic switch.
and a separate electrical/ optical converter. 5) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators
14 2) S
uitable communication converters 7XV5662
(optical to G703.1/X21/RS422 or optical to pilot wire or optical to
ISDN) see “Accessories”.
7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
receiver element.
6) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators
3) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal fiber-optic 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external receiver element.
15 repeater.
4) For surface-mounting housing applications please order


7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Functions 1 and Port E

7SA522 - -
1
see
Trip mode 3-pole; Port E: empty 0 next
2
Trip mode 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location, Port E: empty 1 page
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; Port E: empty 4
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location, Port E: empty 5
With Port E 9 N
Functions 1 3
Trip mode 3-pole 0
Trip mode 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location 1
4
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole 4
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location 5
Port E
Protection data interface:
FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO cable length up to 1.5 km
for communication networks1) or direct connection via multi-mode FO cable A 5
FO6: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO cable length up to 3.5 km
for direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B
6
FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex connector
FO cable length up to 60 km or direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) 3) H
7
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) 4) J
FO30: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km for multimode fibre,
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct optical fibre connection
(not available for surface-mounted housing) S
10
11
12
13
1) Suitable communication converters 7XV5662 3) F

or distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators 14
(optical to G703.1/X21/ RS422 or optical to pilot wire) 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
see "Accessories". receiver element.
15
2) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal fiber-optic 4) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
repeater. receiver element.

1 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Functions 2
7SA522 - -
Distance protection characteristic Power swing detection Parallel line

(ANSI 21, 21N) (ANSI 68, 68T) compensation
2 Quadrilateral
Quadrilateral and / or MHO
C
E
Quadrilateral  F
3
Quadrilateral and / or MHO  H
Quadrilateral 1) K
Quadrilateral and / or MHO 1) M
Quadrilateral  1) N
4
Quadrilateral and / or MHO  1) Q
Functions 3
Auto-reclosure Synchro-check Breaker failure protection Over- / undervoltage
(ANSI 79) (ANSI 25) (ANSI 50BF) protection (ANSI 27, 59)
5
Over- / underfrequency
protection (ANSI 81)
A
 B
6
 C
  D
 E
  F
7
  G
   H
 J
  K
8 


 
L
M
  N
   P
9 




 
Q
R
Functions 4
10
Direction ground(earth)-fault Measured values, extended
protection, grounded (earthed) Min, max, mean
networks (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
0
 1
11 
 
4
5
12
13
14
15 1) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 1 or 5.

Connecting cable (copper)

1
Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker 2

Manual for 7SA522

English, V4.61 and higher C53000-G1176-C155-5 3
German, V4.70 C53000-G1100-C155-8
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Opto-electric communication converters

Optical to X21/RS422 or G703.1 7XV5662-0AA00
Optical to pilot wires 7XV5662-0AC00
2 Additional interface modules

3
C53207-A351-D656-1
4
Optical repeaters
5
6

package
Supplier Fig.

LSP2289-afp.eps
10
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 6/78
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
11 0-827397-1 1 1)
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 1)

0-163084-2 1 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
Crimping For type III+ 0-539635-1 1 1)
12
For CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)
Fig. 6/76 Fig. 6/77

19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6/76
13 Short-circuit
links
For current terminals
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
6/79
6/80
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens 6/51


Fig. 6/78 Fig. 6/79
15 for current contacts for voltage contacts/


Connection diagram, IEC
Fig. 6/80 Housing 1/2 x 19”, basic version 7SA522x-xA, 7SA522x-xE and 7SA522x-xJ
with 8 binary inputs and 16 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF
9
10
11
12
13
Fig. 6/81a Additional setting by jumpers: Fig. 6/81 Serial interfaces 14

Separation of common circuit of BO8 to BO12 with
jumpers X80, X81, X82. Switching of BO13, BO14,
BO15 as NO contact or NC contact with jumpers.
15
5
Fig. 6/83a
Additional setting by jumpers:
Separation of common circuit
of BO8 to BO12 with jumpers
X80, X81, X82. Switching
6
of BO13, BO14, BO15 as NO
contact or NC contact with
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
14 1) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ, 7SA522x-xS.

Note: For serial interfaces see Figure 6/82.
15 Fig. 6/82 Housing � x 19”,medium version 7SA522x-xC, 7SA522x-xG, 7SA522x-xL, 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ and
7SA522x-xS with 16 binary inputs and 24 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF

5
Fig. 6/84a
6
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs in
versions 7SA522x-xP,
14
7SA522x-xR, 7SA522x-xT.
Note: For serial interfaces
see Figure 6/82.
Fig. 6/83 Housing � x 19”, maximum version 7SA522x-xD, 7SA522x-xH, 7SA522x-xM, 7SA522x-xP, 7SA522x-xR and
7SA522x-xT with 24 binary inputs and 32 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF 15
Connection diagram, ANSI
5
Fig. 6/85a
6
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 6/84 Housing ½ x 19”, basic version 7SA522x-xA, 7SA522x-xE and 7SA522x-xJ
with 8 binary inputs and 16 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF

5
Fig. 6/86a
6
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ, 7SA522x-xS. 14

Fig. 6/85 Housing � x 19”,medium version 7SA522x-xC, 7SA522x-xG, 7SA522x-xL, 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ and
7SA522x-xS with 16 binary inputs and 24 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF 15
5
Fig. 6/87a
6
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs
in versions 7SA522x-xP,
14
7SA522x-xR, 7SA522x-xT.
Note: For serial interfaces see
Figure 6/82.
15 Fig. 6/86 Housing � x 19”, maximum version 7SA522x-xD, 7SA522x-xH and 7SA522x-xM
with 24 binary inputs and 32 binary outputs, hardware version ../FF

Line Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SD61 differential protection relay

for two line ends 7/3
SIPROTEC 7SD52/53
multi-end differential and distance
protection in one relay 7/25
7
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Line Differential Protection / 7SD61
SIPROTEC 7SD61 differential protection relay for two line ends
Function overview
• Differential protection for universal use with power lines and
cables on all voltage levels with phase-segregated measure-
ment (87L)
• Two line ends capability 2
• Suitable for transformers in protected zones (87T)
• Restricted ground-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is
within the protection zone
• Well-suited for serial compensated lines
3
LSP2247-afpen.tif
• Two independent differential stages:
one stage for sensitive measuring for high-resistance faults
and one stage for high-current faults and fast fault clearance 4
• Breaker-failure protection (50BF)
• Phase and ground overcurrent protection with directional
element (50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
• Phase-selective intertripping (85) 5
• Overload protection (49)
Fig. 7/1 SIPROTEC 7SD61 differential protection relay • Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U) 6
• Auto-reclosure single/three-pole (79)
Control functions
Description
• Command and inputs for control of CB and disconnectors
(isolators)
7
The 7SD610 relay is a differential protection relay suitable for all
types of applications and incorporating all those functions
required for differential protection of lines, cables and trans-
formers. Transformers and compensation coils within the
differential protection zone are protected by means of integrated
• Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
8
functions, which were previously to be found only in transformer • 8 oscillographic fault records
differential protection. It is also well-suited for complex applica-
• CT-secondary current supervision
tions such as series and parallel compensation of lines and
cables. • Event logging / fault logging 9
It is designed to provide differential and directional back-up • Switching statistics
protection for all voltage levels and types of networks. The relay
Front design
features high speed and phase-selective short-circuit measure-
ment. The unit is thus suitable for single-phase and three-phase • User-friendly local operation 10
fault clearance. • PC front port for convenient relay setting
Digital data communication for differential current measure- • Function keys and 8 LEDs for local alarm
ment is effected via fiber-optic cables, networks or pilot wires
connections, so that the line ends can be quite far apart. The
Communication interfaces 11
serial protection interface (R2R interface) of the relay can flexibly • 1 serial protection data (R2R) interface
be adapted to the requirements of all existing communication • Front interface for PC connection
media. If the communication method is changed, flexible retro-
fitting of communication modules to the existing configuration
12
is possible. – IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Apart from the main protection function, i.e. the differential pro- – PROFIBUS DP, DNP 3 and MODBUS
tection, the 7SD610 has a full range of configurable emergency
and / or back-up protection functions such as phase and ground
• Service / modem interface (rear) 13
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B, DCF77 or system interface
overcurrent protection with directional elements if voltage
transformers are connected. Overload, under- and over-voltage/ Features
frequency and breaker-failure protection round off the functional
scope of the 7SD610.
• Browser-based commissioning tool 14
• Direct connection to digital communication networks
15
Application
6 Fig. 7/2
Application ANSI Protection functions

ΔI for lines / cables
7 The 7SD610 relay is a differential protection relay suitable for
all types of applications and incorporating all those functions
87L
87T ΔI for lines / cables with transformers

required for differential protection of lines, cables and trans-
87N Restricted ground-fault protection
formers.
8 Transformers and compensation coils within the differential
protection zone are protected by means of integrated functions,
85 Phase-selective intertrip, remote trip
which were previously to be found only in transformer differ- 86 Lockout function

ential protection. It is also well-suited for complex applications
50/50N Overcurrent protection
such as series and parallel compensation of lines and cables.
9 It is designed to provide protection for all voltage levels and
51/51N/67/67N
with directional elements
types of networks; two line ends may lie within the protection 50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping
zone. The relay features very high-speed and phase-selective (switch-onto-fault)
10 short-circuit measurement. The unit is thus suitable for single

and three-phase fault clearance. The necessary restraint current
79 Single or three-pole auto-reclosure
with new adaptive technology
for secure operation is calculated from the current transformer 49 Overload protection
data by the differential protection unit itself.
50BF Breaker-failure protection
11 Digital data communication for differential current measure-

ment is effected via fiber-optic cables, digital communication 59/27 Overvoltage / undervoltage protection
networks or pilot wires, so that the line ends can be quite far Overfrequency / underfrequency protection
81O/U
apart. Thanks to special product characteristics, the relay is
Trip circuit supervision
12 particularly suitable for use in conjunction with digital com-
munication networks.
74TC
The units measure the delay time in the communication network

and adaptively match their measurements accordingly. The units
13 can be operated through pilot wires or twisted telephone pairs
at typical distances of 8 km by means of special converters.
The serial communication interfaces for data transmission
between the ends are replaceable by virtue of plug-in modules
14 and can easily be adapted to multi-mode and mono-mode
fiber-optic cables and to leased lines within the communication
networks. Secure, selective and sensitive protection of two-end
lines can now be provided by means of these relays.
15
Application
Typical applications employing fiber-

optic cables or communication net-
works 1
Five applications are shown in Fig. 7/3.
The 7SD610 differential protection relay
is connected to the current transformers
and to the voltage transformers at one
end of the cable, although only the
2
currents are required for the differential
protection function. The voltage connec-
tion improves, among other things, the
frequency measurement and allows the
3
measured values and the fault records
to be extended. Direct connection to the
other units is effected via mono-mode
fiber-optic cables and is thus immune to 4
interference.
Five different modules are available.
In the case of direct connection via
fiber-optic cables, data communication is
5
effected at 512 kbit/s and the command
time of the protection unit is reduced to
15 ms. Parallel compensation (for the
load currents) is provided within the 6
protection zone of the cable. By means
of the integrated inrush restraint, the
differential protection relay can tolerate
the surge on switching-on of the cable
and the compensation reactors, and thus
7
allows sensitive settings to be used under
load conditions.
7SD610 offers many features to reliably 8
and safely handle data exchange via com-
munication networks.
Depending on the bandwidth available a
communication converter for G703- 9
64 kbit/s or X21-64/128/512 kbit/s can max. 1.5 km with max. 1.5 km with
be selected. For higher communication 62.5 μm/125 μm 62.5 μm/125 μm
speed a communication converter with multi-mode fiber multi-mode fiber
10
SIPV6.010en.eps
MUX Communication MUX
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 network
IEEE C37.94 IEEE C37.94
(1,554 kbit/s) is available. Furthermore
the 7SD610 supports the IEEE C37.94
interface with 1/2/4 and 8 timeslots. FO30 with ST connectors FO30 with ST connectors
The connection to the communication 11

converter is effected via a cost-effective
820 nm interface with multi-mode fiber.
This communication converter converts
the optical input to electrical signals in
accordance to the specified telecommuni-
12
cation interface.
The fourth example shows the relays
being connected via a twisted pilot 13
pair. Data exchange and transmission is
effected via pilot wires of a typical length
of 15 km. Here a transformer is in the pro-
tected zone. In this application, 7SD610
is set like a transformer differential
14
relay. Vector group matching and inrush
restraint is provided by the relay.
Fig. 7/3 Typical applications 15

• A special feature of the unit is parameterization of the current

transformer data. The unit automatically calculates the
1 necessary restraint current by means of the previously entered
current transformer error. The unit thus adaptively matches
the working point on the tripping characteristic so that it is no
longer necessary for the user to enter characteristic settings.
2 • Different current-transformer ratios may be employed at the
ends of the line. A mismatch of 1: 8 is permissible.
• Differential protection tripping can be guarded with overcur-
rent pickup. In this case, pickup of the protection relay is
3
LSP2236-afpen.tif
initiated only on simultaneous presence of differential current
and overcurrent.
• Easy to set tripping characteristic. Because the relay works
adaptively, only the set-point IDiff> (sensitive stage) and IDiff>>
4 (high-set current differential stage) must be set according to
the charge current of the line/cable.
• Differential and restraint current are monitored continuously
during normal operation and are displayed as operational
Fig. 7/4
5 measured values.
• High stability during external faults even with different current
Construction transformers saturation level. For an external fault, only 5 ms
of saturation-free time are necessary to guarantee the stability
6 The 7SD610 is available in a housing width of 1/3, referred to a
19” module frame system. The height is a uniform 245 mm for
of the differential protection.
• Single-phase short-circuits within the protection zone can be
flush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-mounting cleared using a time delay, whereas multi-phase faults are
housings. cleared instantaneously. Because of this function, the unit is
7 All cables can be connected with or without cable ring lugs.
Plug-in terminals are available as an option, it is thus possible
optimally suited for applications in inductively compensated
networks, where differential current can occur as a result of
charge transfer phenomena on occurrence of a single-phase
to employ prefabricated cable harnesses. In the case of surface
ground fault within the protection zone, thus resulting in
mounting on a panel, the connection terminals are located
undesired tripping by the differential protection relay. Unde-
8 above and below in the form of screw-type terminals. The
communication interfaces are located on the same sides of the
sired tripping of the differential protection can be suppressed
by making use of the provision for introduction of a time delay
housing. For dimensions, please refer to “Dimension drawings”.
on occurrence of single-phase faults.
• With transformers or compensation coils in the protection
9 Protection functions
zone, the sensitive response threshold IDiff> can be blocked by
an inrush detection function. Like in transformer differential
protection, it works with the second harmonic of the measured
Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T, 87N) current compared with the fundamental component. Blocking
10 The differential protection function has the following features: is cancelled when an adjustable threshold value of the short-
circuit current is reached, so that very high current faults are
• Measurements are performed separately for each phase; thus
switched off instantaneously.
the trip sensitivity is independent of the fault type.
• In the case of transformers within the protection zone, vector
• An adaptive measurement method with high sensitivity for
11 differential fault currents below the rated current offers the
group adaptation and matching of different current trans-
former ratios is carried out within the unit. The interference
detection of highly resistive faults. This trip element uses
zero current, which flows through the grounded winding, is
special filters, which offer high security even with high level
eliminated from the differential current measurement. The
DC components in the short-circuit current. The trip time of
12 this stage is about 35 ms, the pickup value is about 10 % of
the rated current.
7SD610 thus behaves like a transformer differential relay
whose ends, however, can be quite far apart.
• A more sensitive protection for transformers within the protec-
• A high-set differential trip stage which clears differential fault
tion zone is given by measurement of the star-point current on
currents higher than the rated current within 15 ms offers
13 fast tripping time and high-speed fault clearance time. A
high-speed charging comparison method is employed for this
an grounded winding. Therefore the IE current measurement
input has to be used.
If the sum of the phase currents of a winding is compared with
function.
the measured star-point current, a sensitive ground-current
• When a long line or cable is switched on at one end, transient differential protection (REF) can be implemented. This function
14 peaks of the charge current load the line. To avoid a higher
setting of the sensitive differential trip stage, this setpoint may
is substantially more sensitive than the differential protection
during faults to ground in a winding, detecting fault currents
be increased for a settable time. This offers greater sensitivity as small as 10 % of the transformer rated current.
under normal load conditions.
15
Characteristics of differential protection communciation through

the remote relay interfaces
The 7SD610 is ideally adapted for application in communication 1
networks.
The data required for measurement of differential currents and
numerous other variables are exchanged between the protection
units in the form of synchronous serial telegrams employing
2
the full duplex mode. The telegrams are secured using 32-bit
check-sums so that transmission errors in a communication
network are detected immediately. Moreover, each telegram
carries a time stamp accurate to a microsecond, thus allowing 3
measurement and monitoring of the continuous transmission
delay times.
• Data communication is immune to electromagnetic interfer-
ence, since fiber-optic cables are employed in the critical 4
region, e.g. in the relay house or relay room. Fig. 7/5 Tripping characteristic
• Monitoring of each individual incoming telegram and of
overall communication between the units, no need of
supplementary equipment. The check sum (correctness of the
• In addition, four high-speed remote commands are available,
which can be introduced either via a binary input or by means
5
telegram contents), the address of the neighboring unit and
of an internal event and then rapidly communicated to the
the transmission delay time of the telegram are monitored.
other end.
• Unambiguous identification of each unit is ensured by assign-
ment of a settable communication address within a differential
• Provided that the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are wired
to binary inputs at the line ends, the switching status of the
6
protection topology. Only those units mutually known to each
circuit-breakers is indicated and evaluated at the remote ends
other can cooperate. Incorrect interconnection of the com-
of the line. Otherwise the switching status is derived from the
munication links results in blocking of the protection system.
measured current.
• Detection of telegrams, which are reflected back to the trans-
Possible modes of operation of the differential protection section
7
mitting unit within the communication network.
• Detection of path switching in a communication network. Special modes of operation such as the “Commissioning mode”
Automatic restraint of the protection function until measure- and “Test operation” are advantageous for commissioning and
ment of the parameters of the new communication link has
been completed.
servicing the units. 8
• In general, an alarm indication is generated on interruption
• Continuous measurement of the transmission delay time to of the communication links and an attempt is made to
the remote line end. Taking into account the delay time in re-establish the communication link. The units operate in the
differential current measurement and compensation thereof,
including monitoring of a settable maximum permissible delay
emergency mode, provided that these have been parameter-
ized.
9
time of 30 ms. • The complete configuration can also be used in a testing
• Generation of alarm signals on disturbed communication mode. The local end is in an operating mode, which, for
links. Statistical values for the percentage availability of the
communication links per minute and per hour are available as
example, allows the pickup values to be tested. The current
values received from the remote end of the line are set to
10
operational measured values. zero, so as to achieve defined test conditions. The remote-end
• With a GPS high-precision 1-s pulse from a GPS receiver the unit ignores the differential currents, which occur as a result
relays can be syncronized with an absolute, exact time at each
line end. In this way, the delay in the receive and transmit path
of testing, and blocks differential protection and breaker
intertripping. It may optionally operate in the backup protec-
11
can be measured exactly. With this optional feature the relay tion mode.
can used in communication networks where this delay times • Differential protection is activated in the commissioning mode.
are quite different. However, test currents injected at one end of the line and
which generate a differential current do not lead to output of 12
Phase-selective intertrip and remote trip/indications
a TRIP command by the differential protection or to breaker
Normally the differential current is calculated for each line end intertripping. All those indications that would actually occur
in conjunction with a genuine short-circuit are generated
nearly at the same time. This leads to fast and uniform tripping
times. Under weak infeed conditions, especially when the and displayed. TRIP commands can be issued by the backup 13
differential function is combined with an overcurrent pickup, a protection.
phase-selective intertrip offers a tripping of both line ends.
• 7SD610 has 4 intertrip signals which are transmitted in high-
speed mode (20 ms) to the other terminals. These intertrip 14
signals can also be initiated and transmitted by an external
relay via binary inputs. In cases where these signals are not
employed for breaker intertripping, other alternative informa-
tion can be rapidly transmitted to the remote end of the line. 15
1 A built-in overload protection with a current and thermal alarm

stage is provided for thermal protection of cables and transf-
ormers.
The trip time characteristics are exponential functions according
2 to IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the trip times for
overloads.
An adjustable alarm stage can initiate an alarm before tripping is
initiated.
3 Overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
The 7SD610 provides a three-stage overcurrent protection.
4 Two definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT) are
available, separately for phase currents and for the ground cur-
rent. Two operating modes (backup, emergency) are selectable.
Two stages e.g. can run in backup mode, whereas the third stage
5 is configured for emergency operation, e.g. during interruption
of the protection communication and/or failure of the voltage in
t=
0,14
(I / I )
p
0,02
−1
Tp
the VT secondary circuit. The secondary voltage failure can be

detected by the integrated fuse failure monitor or via a binary
Fig. 7/6 Inverse
input from a VT miniature circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
6 The following ANSI/IEC inverse-time characteristics are available:
• Inverse Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
• Short inverse The 7SD610 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
7 • Long inverse (AR). The function includes several operating modes:
• Moderately inverse • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending the type of fault
• Very inverse
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for multi-
8 • Extremely inverse
• Definite inverse
phase faults
If VTs are connected, separate stages with directional measure- without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
ment are available, two definite-time and two inverse-time
9 stages (each for phase and ground). Using the forward pickup
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
multi-phase faults
indication as a signal to the remote end, a 100 % protection cov-
erage of the line can be operated in parallel to the differential
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
protection.
10 Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
protection (ANSI 50HS) binary inputs and outputs
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty • Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
11 line. On large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-fault
overcurrent stage can initiate very fast three-pole tripping.
• Adaptive auto-reclosure. Only one line end is closed after the
dead time. If the fault persists this line end is switched off.
Circuit-breaker closure onto a faulty line is also possible provided Otherwise the other line ends are closed via a command over
that the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts of the remote end are the communication links. This avoids stress when heavy fault
12 connected and monitored. If an overcurrent arises on closing currents are fed from all line ends again.
of the circuit-breaker at one end of a line (while the other • Interaction with an external synchro-check
end is energized) the measured current can only be due to a • Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
short-circuit. In this case, the energizing line end is tripped
13 instantaneously.
In the case of circuit-breaker closure, the auto-reclosure is
blocked at both ends of the line to prevent a further unsuccess-
ful closure onto a short-circuit. If circuit-breaker intertripping to
14 the remote end is activated, intertripping is also blocked.
15
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several The 7SD610 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage under-
other operating principles can be employed by means of the voltage measuring elements:
integrated programmable logic (CFC). • Phase-to-ground undervoltage 1
Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows • Phase-to-phase undervoltage
evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage- • Positive-sequence undervoltage
dependent supplementary functions are thus available:
• DLC
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.
2
By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
closure).
• ADT Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in
3
The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a
equipment). specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
• RDT
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency)
4
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto- and each element can be delayed separately.
reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension, but external to the
protected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR),
the RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the
5
return voltage from the remote station which has not tripped
whether or not to reduce the dead time.
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) 6

The 7SD610 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect the failure of tripping command execution,
for example, due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current
detection logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be
7
used in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is
not interrupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip
command or a busbar trip command is generated. The breaker
failure protection can be initiated by all integrated protection 8
functions as well as by external devices via binary input signals.

(ANSI 59, 27) 9
load or are only lightly loaded. The 7SD610 contains a number
of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element
is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are
available:
10
• Zero-sequence overvoltage 11
• The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage
input or be derived from the phase voltages.
• Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated
for the remote end of the line (compounding).
12
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by 13
means of a transmitted signal.
14
15
Monitoring and supervision functions Lockout (ANSI 86)
1 The 7SD610 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions

covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs and reset using the
LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored in the event of
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only be issued after the
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this lockout state is reset.
monitoring system.
2 Current transformer / Monitoring functions
Local measured values
The measured values are calculated from the measured current
A broken wire between the CTs and relay inputs under load may and voltage signals along with the power factor (cos φ), the
lead to maloperation of a differential relay if the load current frequency, the active and reactive power. Measured values are
3 exceeds the differential setpoint. The 7SD610 provides fast bro- displayed as primary or secondary values or in percent of the
ken wire supervision which immediatelly blocks all line ends if specific line rated current and voltage. The relay uses a 20 bit
a broken wire condition is measured by a local relay. This avoids high-resolution AD converter and the analog inputs are factory-
maloperation due to broken wire condition. Only the phase calibrated, so a high accuracy is reached.
4 where the broken wire is detected is blocked. The other phases
remain under differential operation.
The following values are available for measured-value
processing:
Fuse failure monitoring • Currents 3 x IPhase, 3I0, IE, IE sensitive
5 If any measured voltage is not present due to short-circuit or

open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit this can
• Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground, 3 x VPhase-Phase,
• 3V0,Ven,
lead to a failure or a being missing measuring of the directional • Symmetrical components I1, I2, V1, V2
overcurrent protection. This secondary voltage interruption can
• Real power P (Watt), reactive power
6 be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.
Immediate blocking of the directional steps of the overcurrent • Q (Var), apparent power S (VA)
protection is started automatically. • Power factor PF (= cos φ)
Additional measurement supervision functions are • Frequency f
7 • Symmetry of voltages and currents • Differential and restraint current per phase
• Availability of the data connection to the remote line ends per
minute and per hour
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC) • Regarding delay time measuring with the GPS-version the
8 One or two binary inputs for each circuit- breaker pole can be absolute time for transmit and receive path is displayed
separately.
used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit Limit value monitoring: Limit values are monitored by means
is interrupted. of the CFC. Commands can be derived from these limit value
9 indications.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Measured values at remote line ends

Every two seconds the currents and volt-
ages are freezed at the same time at all 1
line ends and transmitted via the commu-
nication link. At a local line end, currents
and voltages are thus available with their
amount and phases (angle) locally and
remotely. This allows checking the whole
2
configuration under load conditions. In
addition, the differential and restraint
currents are also displayed. Important
communication measurements, such as
3
delay time or faulty telegrams per minute/
hour are also available as measurements.
These measured values can be processed
with the help of the CFC logic editor. 4
Commissioning
Special attention has been paid to
commissioning. All binary inputs and 5
outputs can be displayed and activated
directly. This can simplify the wiring check
LSP2845.tif
significantly for the user. The operational
and fault events and the fault records are 6
clearly arranged.
Furthermore, all currents and optional Fig. 7/7 Browser-aided commissioning: Phasor diagram
voltages and phases are available via
communication link at the local relay and 7
are displayed in the relay, with DIGSI 4 or
with the Web Monitor.
The operational and fault events and
fault records from all line ends share a
8
common time tagging which allows to
compare events registered in the different
line ends on a common time base.
WEB Monitor – Internet technology

9
simplifies visualization
operating program, the relay contains 10
11
infrastructure. This program shows the
protection topology and comprehensive
measurements from local and remote line
12
LSP2846.tif
ends. Local and remote measurements

are shown as phasors and the breaker
positions of each line end are depicted. It
is possible to check the correct connection Fig. 7/8 Browser-aided commissioning: Differential protection tripping characteristic
13
of the current transformers or the correct
vector group of a transformer.
Stability can be checked by using the operating characteristic
as well as the calculated differential and restraint values in the
14
browser windows.
Event log and trip log messages are also available. Remote
control can be used, if the local front panel cannot be accessed. 15
Functions
Functions Assignment of feedback to command
1 Control and automation functions

inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
Control outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
2 support all control and monitoring functions that are required it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position).
Chatter disable
The chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured
3 processes.
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the excessive operations.
4 OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit-
breaker or auxiliary contact position. Filter time
The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via: All binary indications can be subjected to a filter time (indication
– integrated operator panel suppression).
5 – binary inputs
– substation control and protection system Indication filtering and delay
– DIGSI 4 Indications can be filtered or delayed.
6 Command processing
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
includes the processing of single and double commands with event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
7 hardware and software, checking of the external process,
present after this time.
automatic command termination after output. Here are some Indication derivation
8 • Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2
trip contacts
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
• User-definable bay interlocks reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations
9 such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
ing switches
Transmission lockout
A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by transfer of information to the control center during work on a
combination with existing information circuit bay.
10 Automation / user-defined logic Test operation
With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or automatic control system for test purposes.
11 substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
Switching authority
12 Switching authority is determined according to parameters,

communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
13 down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”
Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
in the status indication memory. The switch command source,
switching device, cause (i.e. spontaneous change or command)
14 and result of a switching operation are retained.
15
Functions
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

placed on high flexibility, data security and use of customary
standards in the field of energy automation. The concept of the
communication modules allows interchangeability on the one
1
hand, and, on the other hand, is open for future standards.
Local PC interface
The PC interface provided on the front panel on the unit allows
2
the parameters, status and fault event data to be rapidly accessed
by means of the DIGSI 4 operating program. Use of this program
is particularly advantageous during testing and commissioning.
3
Rear-mounted interfaces
The service and system communication interfaces are located at
the rear of the unit. In addition, the 7SD610 is provided with a
protection interface. The interface complement is variable and
4
retrofitting is possible without any difficulty. These interfaces Fig. 7/9 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
ensure that the requirements for different communication connection or fiber-optic connection
interfaces (electrical and optical) and protocols can be met.
The interfaces are designed for the following applications:
5
Service / modem interface
By means of the RS485 interface, it is possible to efficiently oper-
ate a number of protection units centrally via DIGSI 4. Remote
6
operation is possible on connection of a modem. This offers the
advantage of rapid fault clarification, especially in the case of
unmanned power plants.
In the case of the 7SD610, a PC with a standard browser can
7
be connected to the service interface (refer to “Commissioning
program”).
System interface
8
This interface is used to carry out communication with a control
or protection and control system and supports a variety of com-
munication protocols and interface designs, depending on the
module connected.
9
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser Fig. 7/10 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
In the case of the 7SD610, a PC with a standard browser can be
connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface
10
(refer to “Commissioning program”). The relays include a small Safe bus architecture
Web server and sends its HTML pages to the browser via an • RS485 bus
established dial-up network connection. With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of 11
Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
system continues to operate without any disturbances.
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the
• Fiber-optic double ring circuit
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- 12
(IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP, DNP 3.0, netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
MODBUS, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. units, the communication system continues to operate without
disturbance.
It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has 13
failed. If a unit were to fail, there is no effect on the communica-
tion with the rest of the system.
14
15
Communication
Communication
LSP2163-afpen.tif
1 IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2164-afp.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol
is the worldwide standard for protection
2 and control systems used by power supply

corporations. Siemens was the first
manufacturer to support this standard.
By means of this protocol, information
can also be exchanged directly between
3 bay units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay ans system interlocking.
Access to the units via the Ethernet bus is
Fig. 7/11 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 7/12 PROFIBUS fiber-optic double ring
also possible with DIGSI. communication module communication module
4 IEC 60870-5-103
standardized protocol for the efficient
LSP2162-afpen.tif
5 communication in the protected area.
ers and is used worldwide.
LSP3.01-0021.tif
6 PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP is an industry-recognized
standard for communications and is
7 supported by a number of PLC and protec-
tion device manufacturers.
MODBUS RTU
Fig. 7/13 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 7/14 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
8 MODBUS RTU is an industry-recognized

standard for communications and is
integrated Ethernet switch
supported by a number of PLC and protec-
tion device manufacturers.
9 DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3) is a messaging-based commu-
10 nication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units

are fully Level 1 and Level 2 compliant
with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is supported by
a number of protection device manufac-
turers.
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/15 System solution: Communications
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control New fiber-optic interfaces, series FO1x
FO171):
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for mono-mode 1
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
units exchange information with the control system.
FO181):
SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.
For direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for mono-mode
fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
2
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
FO191):
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 7/9).
For direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for mono-mode
fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector 3
FO30:
820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connection
up to 1.5 km and for connections to a IEEE C37.94 multiplexer
interface. 4
master can be established. The link to a multiplexed communication network is made by
a fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to
the protection relay. The link to the communication network 5
is optionally an electrical X21/G703-64 kbit/s or G703-E1/-T1
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
interface. Furthermore the IEEE C37.94 interface is supported by
the FO30 module.
however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
systems (see Fig. 7/10). For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires or 6
twisted telephone pair), a modern communication converter
Via modem and service interface, the protection engineer has
for copper cables is available. This operates with both the
access to the protection devices at all times. This permits remote
two-wire and three-wire copper connections which were used
maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing).
by conventional differential protection systems before. The 7
Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example, communication converter for copper cables is designed for 5 kV
during a major inspection. insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV isolation transformer
can extend the field of applications of this technique into ranges
Serial protection interface (R2R interface) with higher insulation voltage requirements. The connection
via FO cable to the relay is interference-free. With SIPROTEC 4
8
The 7SD610 provides one protection interface to cover two line
end applications. and the communication converter for copper cables a digital
follow-up technique is available for two-wire protection systems
In addition to the differential protection function, other protec-
tion functions can use this interface to increase selectivity and
(up to 8 km) and all three-wire protection systems using existing
copper communication links.
9
sensitivity as well as covering advanced applications.
Different communication converters are listed under
• Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling using the "Accessories".
directional stages of the overcurrent protection with POTT or
PUTT schemes Communication data: 10
• Two terminal line applications can be implemented without • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
additional logic • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
• Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure “Adaptive
dead time” (ADT) mode
• Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if they
11
• 4 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per minute
• Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means and hour, of the serial protection interface can be displayed.
of the programmable CFC logic • Supported network interfaces X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or
512 kbit/s; or G703-64 kbit/s and G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or
12
The protection interfaces have different options to cover new G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s) or IEEE C37.94.
and existing communication infrastructures.
• Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
• FO51), OMA12) module:
820 nm fiber-optic interface with clock recovery/ST connectors • Protocol HDLC 13
for direct connection with multi-mode FO cable up to 1.5 km
for the connection to a communication converter.
820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connec- 14
tion up to 3.5 km with multi-mode FO cable. 1) For flush-mounting housing.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module
OMA1 will be delivered together with an external repeater. 15
Communication
Communication possibilities between relays
3
Fig. 7/16 Direct optical link up to 1.5 km/3.5 km, 820nm Fig. 7/17 Direct optical link up to 25/60 km with 1300 nm
or up to 100 km with 1550 nm
4
7
Fig. 7/18 Connection to a communication network CC-XG Fig. 7/19 Connection to a communication network CC-2M
9
max. 1.5 km with
62.5 μm/125 μm
7SD52/53 multi-mode fiber
10 7SD610
FO30 IEEE C37.94
MUX Communication
network
SIPV6.011en.eps
FO30 with ST connectors
11 Fig. 7/20 Connection to a communication network via IEEE C37.94 Fig. 7/21 Connection to a pilot wire
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
A typical connection is to the phase CT. The residual cur-
rent at the IE input is formed by summation of the phase
currents. This ensures optimum supervision functions for 2
the current.
Optionally, voltages are measured by means of voltage
transformers and are fed to the unit as a phase-to-ground
voltage. The zero voltage is derived from the summation
3
voltage by calculation performed in the unit.
As a matter of fact, the 7SD610 unit does not require
any voltage transformers for operation of the differential
protection.
Fig. 7/22 Typical connection to current transformers 4
3 phase current transformers with neutral point in the
line direction, I4 connected to a current transformer in
5
the neutral point of a grounded (earthed) transformer
for restricted ground-fault protection (REF) or directional
ground (earth)-fault protection.
6
9
Fig. 7/23 Typical connection to current transformers with optional
voltage inputs
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/24 Connection for transformer with restricted ground- Fig. 7/25 Alternative connection of current transformers for
fault protection (REF) measuring neutral current of a grounded (earthed)
power transformer
15
Technical data
General unit data Unit design
1 Analog inputs
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions refer to dimension
drawings, part 14
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (selectable) Degree of protection

acc. to EN 60529
Rated voltage VN 80 to 125 V (selectable) Surface-mounting housing IP 51
2 Power consumption
in CT circuits with IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
front IP 51
with IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA rear IP 50
in VT circuits Approx. 0.1 VA for the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
Thermal overload capacity IN Weight
3 in CT circuits (for IN = 5 A) 100 A for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s
1/3 x 19" 4 kg
4 IN continuous Surface-mounting housing
Dynamic (peak value) 250 IN (half sine) 1/3 x 19" 6 kg
In VT circuits for highly sensitive
4 ground-fault protection 300 A for 1 s
100 A for 10 s
Electrical tests
Specification
15 A continuous Standards EC 60255 (product standards)
in VT circuits 230 V per phase continuous ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
5 Auxiliary voltage
Rated voltages DC 24 to 48 V
UL 508
For further standards see
“Individual functions”
Ranges are settable by DC 60 to 125 V 1)
means of jumpers DC 110 to 250 V 1) Insulation tests
and AC 115 V (50/60 Hz)1) Standards IEC 60255-5
6 Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 % Voltage test (100 % test)
All circuits except for auxiliary 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 / 60 Hz
Superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 %
(peak-to-peak) supply, binary inputs and
communication interfaces
Power consumption
7 Under normal operating conditions Approx. 8 W
During pickup with all Approx. 18 W
Auxiliary voltage and binary
inputs (100 % test)
DC 3.5 kV
inputs and outputs activated RS485/RS232 rear side commu- 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 / 60 Hz
Bridging time during failure of the nication interfaces and time
auxiliary voltage synchronization interface
8 Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms (100 % test)
Impulse voltage test (type test)
Binary inputs
All circuits except for communi- 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 ms; 0.5 J
Number 7 (marshallable) cation interfaces and time 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar synchronization interface, at intervals of 5 s
9 Pickup threshold 17 or 73 V (selectable) class III
Functions are freely assignable EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
Minimum pickup threshold Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
Ranges are settable by means of DC 17 or 73 V, bipolar (product standards) (type tests)
10 jumpers for each binary input
EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
DIN 57435 part 303
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
IEC 60255-22-1, class III and 400 surges per s;
Output relay
VDE 0435 part 303, class III test duration 2 s
11 Command / indication relay
Number 5 (marshallable) IEC 60255-22-2, class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
1 alarm contact (not marshallable) EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
12 Switching capacity
Make
1000 W/VA
30 VA
non-modulated
IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III
Break 40 W
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
Break (with resistive load) 25 W
amplitude-modulated 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Break (with L/R ≤ 50 ms) 250 V IEC 61000-4-3, class III
13 Switching voltage
Permissible total current
30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
LEDs
Number
14 RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
LED (red), function can be 7 1) For flush-mounting housing.
assigned
15 3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module OMA1
will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Technical data
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition Mechanical dynamic tests
pulse-modulated IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients, bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
During operation 1
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms; Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; Vibration Sinusoidal
test duration 1 min
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
2
High-energy surge voltages Impulse: 1.2/50 μs
(SURGE), 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class Shock Half-sinusoidal
III
Auxiliary supply
Common (longitudinal) mode:
2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 μF
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in 3
Differential (transversal) mode: both directions
1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 μF Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
Measurement inputs, binary
inputs,
2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 μF
Differential (transversal) mode:
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis),
4
binary output relays 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 μF (vertical axis),
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis),
Line-conducted HF, amplitude-
modulated
1 kHz
(vertical axis),
5
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for frequency sweep 1 octave/min
IEC 61000-4-6, class III 3 s; 50 Hz 0.5 mT; 50 Hz 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Magnetic field with power
During transport
frequency
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 6
IEC 60255-6 damped wave; Vibration Sinusoidal
Oscillatory surge withstand 50 surges per second, duration 2 s, Ri IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
capability = 150 to 200 Ω IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns;
50 impulses per second;
7
Fast transient surge withstand both polarities; duration 2 s; Shock Half-sinusoidal
capability Ri = 80 Ω IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
both directions 8
Radiated electromagnetic Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
interference 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna- IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz; IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
Damped oscillation
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12
Ri = 200 Ω
Climatic stress test
in both directions
9
Temperatures
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 –25 °C to +85 °C / –13 °F to +185 °F
Standard EN 50081-1 (generic standard)
Temporarily permissible operating –20 °C to +70 °C / –4 °F to +158 °F
10
Conducted interference voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz
on lines, only auxiliary voltage
IEC-CISPR 22 Recommended permanent –5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
Radio interference field strength
IEC-CISPR 22
Limit class B
30 to 1000 MHz
IEC 60255-6
11
Limit class B
impaired above +55 °C / +131 °C)
– Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +55 °C / –13 °F to +131 °F
permanent storage
– Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +70 °C / –13 °F to +158 °F 12
transport
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress; It
is recommended to arrange the
units in such a way that they are
Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
humidity; on 56 days in the year up
to 93 % relative humidity; moisture
13
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation during operation is not
pronounced temperature changes permitted
14

15
Description Order No. Short code
1 7SD61 numerical line differential protection 87L SIPROTEC 4 for two-line ends,
allows transformers in the protection zone
7SD610 - - -
Current transformer
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) 1 see next page
2 Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 5 A1) 5
Auxiliary voltage
(Power supply, BI operating voltage) DC 24 to 48 V, trigger level binary input 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), trigger level binary input 19 V3)
3 DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, trigger level binary input 88 V3)
4
5
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, trigger level binary input 176 V3) 6
Housing, number of binary inputs/outputs

4 Flush-mounting housing with screw-type terminals ⅓ 19", 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live-status contact
Surface-mounting housing with screw-type terminals ⅓ 19", 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live-status contact
B
F
Flush-mounting housing with plug-in terminals, ⅓ 19", 7 BI, 5 BO , 1 live-status contact K
5 Region-specific default settings / function versions and language settings

Region DE, German language (language changeable) A
Region world, English language (language changeable) B
Region US, US-English language (language changeable) C
6 Region world, French language (language changeable)

Region world, Spanish language (language changeable)
D
E
Region world, Italian language (language changeable) F
System interfaces, functions and hardware

7 Without system interface 0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electric RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electric RS485 2
8 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector

Further protocols see supplement L
3
9 L 0
PROFIBUS DP slave, RS485 A

PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector4)
9 MODBUS, RS485
B
D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) E
DNP 3.0, RS485 G
10 DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100)
H
R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double, LC connector5) S
11
12
13
BI = Binary input
BO = Binary output
14 1) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by means of jumpers.

4) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F).
For the surface mounted version, please order a device with the
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected appropriate electrical RS485 interface and an external FO-converter
by means of jumpers. 5) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F)
15 3) Setting of the BI thresholds can be made for each binary input via
jumpers in 3 steps.
please order the relay with electrical interface and use a separate
fiber-optic switch


7SD61 numerical line differential protection 87L SIPROTEC 4
(continued)
7SD610 - - -
1
DIGSI/Modem interface (on rear of device) and protection interface 1 9 M
DIGSI/Modem interface (on rear of device)
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485
1
2
2
Protection data interface 1
FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, line length up to 1.5 km via multimode FO cable
for communication converter or direct FO connection 1)
A 3
for direct FO connection B
FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 24 km 2) via monomode FO cable
for direct FO connection 2)
FO18: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 60 km via monomode FO cable
G
4
for direct FO connection 2)3) H
FO19: Optical 1550 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 100 km via monomode FO cable
for direct FO connection 2)4) J
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 5)
5
S
Functions 1
Trip mode 3-pole only without auto reclosure
Trip mode 3-pole only with auto reclosure
0
1
6
Trip mode 1- and 3-pole without auto reclosure 2
Trip mode 1- and 3-pole with auto reclosure 3
Back-up functions 7
with emergency or back-up overcurrent protection B
with emergency or back-up overcurrent and breaker failure protection C
with directional – emergency or back-up overcurrent protection
with directional – emergency or back-up overcurrent and breaker failure protection
R
S 8
Additional functions 1
4 Remote commands/
24 Remote indications
Transformer
expansions
Voltage-/frequence
protection
Restricted earth fault
(low impedance) 9
A
B
E 10
F
J
K 11
N
P
S 12
T
without external GPS synchronisation of differential protection 0
with external GPS synchronisation of differential protection 1
13
1) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories.
2) Device for surface-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F) will be
4) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the 14
delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00. receiver element.
3) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators 5) Only available in flush-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = B, K).
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element. 15
Accessories
1 Opto-electric communication converter CC-XG (connection to

communication network)
Converter to interface to X21 or RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s synchronous
Connection via FO cable for 62.5 / 125 μm or 50 / 120 μm and
2 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,
max. distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via X21/RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s interface 7XV5662-0AA00
Opto-electric communication converter CC-2M to G703-E1/-T1

3 communication networks with 2,048 / 1,554 kbit/s
Converter to interface between optical 820 nm interface and
G703-E1/-T1 interface of a communication network
Connection via FO cable for 62.5/125 μm or 50/120 μm and
4 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,

max. distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via G703-E1/-T1 interface 7XV5662-0AD00
Opto-electric communication converter (connection to pilot wire)
5 Converter to interface to a pilot wire or twisted telephone pair

(typical 15 km length)
Connection via FO cable for 62.5/125 μmor 50/120 μm and
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector;
max. distance 1.5 km, screw-type terminals to pilot wire 7XV5662-0AC00
6 Additional interface modules

Protection interface module, optical 820 nm,
multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 1.5 km C53207-A351-D651-1
7 multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 3.5 km C53207-A351-D652-1
Further modules
mono-mode FO cable, LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A351-D655-1
8 Protection interface module, optical 1300 nm,
9 Protection interface module, optical 820 nm,

multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 1.5 km support of IEEE C37.94 C53207-A351-D658-1
Optical repeaters
Serial repeater (2-channel), optical 1300 nm,mono-mode FO cable,
10 LC-Duplex connector, 24 km
7XV5461-0BG00

11 LC-Duplex connector, 100 km
Time synchronizing unit with GPS output

7XV5461-0BJ00
GPS 1 sec pulse and time telegram IRIG B/DCF 77 7XV5664-0AA00
12 Isolation transformer (20 kV) for pilot wire communication 7XR9516
Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

13
14
15
Connecting cable (copper)

Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector)
1
and protection unit (9-pin connector)
(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4
Manual for 7SD61 V4.6 2

English C53000-G1176-C145-4
Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig. 9
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 7/28
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

10
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 1)
1)
11
0-163084-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps

For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)
12
Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
7/29
7/30 13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens

14
Fig. 7/29 Fig. 7/30
indications contacts 15
Connection diagram
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Line Differential Protection / 7SD52/53
SIPROTEC 7SD52/53 multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay
– Fault locator for one and two terminal measurement for high
accuracy on long lines with high load and high fault resistance.
– Capacitive charge current compensation increases the sensitivity
of the differential protection on cables and long lines.
1
Function overview
2
LSP2173f.eps
• Differential protection with phase-segregated measurement
LSP2314-afp.eps
(87L, 87T)
• Restricted ground-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is
within the protection zone
3
• Sensitive meas. stage f. high-resist. faults
• Non-switched distance protection with 7 measuring systems
(21/21N)
• High resistance ground (earth)-fault protection for single and
4
three-pole tripping (50N/51N/67N)
Fig. 7/33 SIPROTEC 7SD52/53 differential protection relay
• Phase-selective intertripping (85)
Description
• Ground-fault detection in isolated and resonant-grounded
networks
5
• Tele (pilot) protection (85/21, 85/67N)
The 7SD52/53 relay provides full scheme differential protection
• Weak-infeed protection (27WI)
and incorporates all functions usually required for the protection
of power lines. It is designed for all power and distribution • Fault locator (FL) 6
levels and protects lines with two up to six line ends. The relay is • Power swing detection/tripping (68/68T)
designed to provide high-speed and phase-selective fault clear- • 3-stage overcurrent protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)
ance. The relay uses fiber-optic cables or digital communication • STUB bus protection (50 STUB)
networks to exchange telegrams and includes special features
for the use in multiplexed communication networks. Also pilot
• Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS) 7
wires connections can be used with an external converter. This
• Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U)
contributes toward improved reliability and availability of the
• Auto-reclosure (79), Synchro-check (25)
electrical power system.
• Breaker failure protection (50BF) 8
The relay is suitable for single and three-phase tripping applica-
• Overload protection (49)
tions for two up to six line ends. Also, transformers and compen-
• Lockout function (86)
sation coils within the differential protection zone are protected
as are serial and parallel-compensated lines and cables. The
relays may be employed with any type of system grounding.
Control functions
• Commands for control of CB and isolators
9
The relay also provides a full-scheme and non-switched distance Monitoring functions
protection as an optional main 2 protection. Several teleprotec- • Self-supervision of relay and protection data (R2R)
tion schemes ensure maximum selectivity and high-speed
tripping time.
communication 10
• Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
The units measure the delay time in the communication net- • Measured-value supervision
works and adaptively match their measurements accordingly. • Oscillographic fault recording
A special GPS-option allows the use of the relays in communica- • Event logging/fault logging 11
tion networks, where the delay time in the transmit and receive • Switching statistics
path may be quite different.
Front design
The 7SD52/53 has the following features:
– 2 full-scheme main protections in one unit (differential and
• User-friendly local operation
• PC front port for relay setting
12
distance protection) • Function keys and 14 LEDs f. local alarm
– High-speed tripping 10 – 15 ms
– The serial protection interfaces (R2R interfaces) of the relays can
flexibly be adapted to the requirements of all communication • 2 serial protection data (R2R) interfaces for ring and chain 13
media available. topology
– If the communication method is changed, flexible retrofitting • Front interface for connecting a PC
of communication modules to the existing configuration is • System interface for connection to a control system via various
possible. protocols 14
– Tolerates loss of one data connection in a ring topology (routing – IEC 61850 Ethernet
in 120 ms). The differential protection scheme is fully available – IEC 60870-5-103
in a chain topology. – PROFIBUS DP and DNP 3
– Browser-based commissioning tool. • Rear-side service/modem interface 15
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B or DCF77 or system interface

Application
Application
1 ANSI Protection functions ANSI Protection functions
87L ΔI for lines / cables 85/67N Teleprotection for earth(ground)-fault protection
ΔI for lines / cables with transformers Overcurrent protection

2 87T
87N Low impedance restricted ground-fault protection for

50/50N/51/51N
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping (switch-onto-fault)

transformers
Phase-selective intertrip, remote trip 59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
85
3 86 Lockout function 81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
25 Synchro-check
21/21N Distance protection
79 Single or three-pole auto-reclosure with new adaptive

Fault locator
4 FL
Power swing detection/tripping 49
technology
Overload protection
68/68T
Teleprotection for distance protection 50BF Breaker-failure protection
85/21
5 27WI Weak-infeed protection 74TC Trip circuit supervision
Directional earth(ground)-fault protection 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage

50N/51N/67N
10
11
12
*) Option
13 Fig. 7/34
14
15
Application
Fig. 7/35 Application for three line ends (Ring topology) 6

Typical applications Depending on the bandwidth available in the communication
SIPROTEC 7SD52/53 is a full-scheme differential protection
relay for two up to six line ends, incorporating all the additional
system, 64, 128 or 512 kbits/s can be selected for the X21
(RS422) interface; the G703 interface with 64 kbit/s, and 7
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s). Furthermore
functions for protection of overhead lines and cables at all
the 7SD610 supports the IEEE C37.94 interface with 1/ 2 / 4 and
voltage levels. Also transformers and compensation coils within
8 timeslots.
the protection zone are protected. The 7SD52/53 is suitable
for single-pole and three-pole tripping. The power system The connection to the communication device is effected via
8
star point can be solid or impedance-grounded (earthed), cost-effective 820 nm interface with multi-mode FO cables.
resonant-grounded via Peterson coil or isolated. On the TAP-line, A communication converter converts the optical to electrical
the 7SD52/53 differential relay is connected to current (CT)
and optionally voltage (VT) transformers. For the differential
signals. This offers an interference-free and isolated connection
between the relay and the communication device. 9
functions, only CTs are necessary. By connecting the relay to
VTs, the integrated "main 2" distance protection can be applied Cost-effective power system management
(full-scheme, nonswitched). Therefore, no separate distance
protection relay is required.
The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide
control and monitoring functions and therefore support the 10
The link to the other relays is made by multi-mode or user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
mono-mode FO cables. There are 5 options available, which security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of
minimizing the use of hardware.
correspondingly cover:
• 820 nm, up to 1.5 km, multi-mode The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
11
• 820 nm, up to 3.5 km, multi-mode criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
• 1300 nm, up to 24 km, mono-mode The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree
• 820 nm support of the IEEE C37.94 interface of functionality which represents a benchmark-level of
performance in protection and control. If the requirements
12
• 1300 nm, up to 60 km, mono-mode
for protection, control or interlocking change, it is possible in
• 1550 nm, up to 100 km, mono-mode the majority of cases to implement such changes by means of
Direct fiber-optic connection offers high-speed data exchange
with 512 kbit/s and improves the speed for remote signaling.
parameterization using DIGSI 4 without having to change the
hardware.
13
At the main line two differential relays are connected to CTs. The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of
The communication is made via a multiplexed communication digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
network. presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components.
14
The 7SD52/53 offers many features to reliably and safely handle
data exchange via communication networks.
15
Construction
Construction
1 Connection techniques and housing

⅓, ½, ²⁄₃, and -rack sizes:
2 These are the available housing widths of

the 7SD52/53 relays, referred to a
19" module frame system. This means
LSP2174-afp.tif
3 for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm
LSP2166-afp.tif
nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in
4 terminals are available as an option. It
is thus possible to employ prefabricated
cable harnesses. In the case of surface
mounting on a panel, the connection Fig. 7/36 Flush-mounting housing with Fig. 7/37 Rear view with screw-type terminals
screw-type terminals and serial interfaces
5 terminals are located above and below
communication interfaces are located in a
housing.
6
7
LSP2219-afp.eps
LSP2237-afp.tif
9
screw-type terminals sloped case in a surfacemounting
10 housing
11
12
13
14
15
Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T, 87N) 1

The differential protection function has the following features:
• It is possible to select the operating mode as "main" or as
"main 1", if the back-up distance protection is activated as
"main 2".
2
• Measurements are performed separately for each phase; thus
the trip sensitivity is independent of the fault type.
• An adaptive, sensitive measurement method with high sen-
sitivity for differential fault currents below the rated current
3
offers the detection of highly resistive faults. This trip element
uses special filters, which offers high security even with high
level DC-components in the short-circuit current. The trip time
of this stage is about 30 ms.
4
• A high-set differential trip stage which clears differential fault
currents higher than the rated current within 10 – 15 ms
offers fast tripping time and high-speed fault clearence time.
• When a long line or cable is switched on, transient charge
Fig. 7/40 Tripping characteristic
5
currents load the line. To avoid a higher setting of the sensitive
differential trip stage, this setpoint may be increased for a • A more sensitive protection for transformers within the protec-
settable time. This offers greater sensitivity under normal load
conditions.
tion zone is given by measurement of the star-point current
on an grounded winding. Therefore the IE current measuring
6
• With the setting of the CT-errors the relay automatically input has to be used.
calculates the restraint/stabilization current and adapts its If the sum of the phase currents of winding is compared with
the measured star-point current, a sensitive ground-current
permissible sensitivity according to the CT’s data in the dif-
ferential configuration, optimizing sensitivity. differential protection (REF) can be implemented. 7
This function is substantially more sensitive than the dif-
• Different CT ratios at the line ends are handled inside the relay.
ferential protection during faults to ground in a winding,
The mismatch of 1 to 6 is allowed.
detecting fault currents as small as 10 % of the transformer
• The differential protection trip can be guarded with an overcur-
rent pickup. Thus differential current and overcurrent lead to a
rated current. 8
final trip decision. Enhanced communication features for communication networks
• Easy to set tripping characteristic. Because the relay works The data required for the differential calculations are cyclically
adaptively, only the setpoint IDiff> (sensitive stage) and IDiff>>
(high-set current differential stage) must be set according to
exchanged in full-duplex mode in form of synchronous, serial
telegrams between the protection units. The telegrams are
9
the charge current of the line/cable. secured with CRC check sums, so that transmission errors in a
• With an optional capacitive charge current compensation, the communication network are immediately detected.
sensitivity can be increased to 40 % of the normal setting of
IDiff>. This function is recommended for long cables and long
• Data communication is immune to electromagnetic interfer-
ence because fiber-optic cables are employed in the critical
10
lines. region
• Differential and restraint currents are monitored continuously • Supervision of each individual incoming telegram and of
during normal operation and are displayed as operational
measurements.
the entire communication path between the units without
additional equipment.
11
• High stability during external faults even with different current • Unambiguous identification of each unit is ensured by assign-
transformers saturation level. For an external fault, only 5 ms ment of a settable communication address within a differential
saturation-free time are necessary to guarantee the stability of
the differential configuration.
protection topology. Only those units mutually known to each
other can cooperate. Incorrect interconnection of the com- 12
• With transformers or compensation coils in the protection munication links results in blocking of the protection system.
zone, the sensitive trip stage can be blocked by an inrush • Detection of reflected telegrams in the communication system.
detection function. It works with the second harmonic of the
measured current which is compared with the fundamental
• Detection of delay time changes in communication networks.
• Measurement of the delay time to the remote line ends
13
component.
with dynamic compensation of the delay in the differential
• With transformers in the protection zone, vector group adapta- measurement. Supervision of the maximum permissible delay
tion and matching of different CT ratios are carried out in the
relay. Additionally, the zero-sequence current flowing through
time is included.
• Generation of alarms on heavily disturbed communication
14
an grounded neutral is eliminated from the differential mea-
links. Faulty telegram counters are available as operational
surement. The 7SD52/53 therefore works like a transformer
measurement.
differential relay, whereas the line ends may be far away.
(continued on next page)
15
• With a GPS high-precision 1-s pulse

from a GPS receiver the relays can be
1 synchronized with an absolute, exact
time at each line end. In this way, the
delay in the receive and transmit path
can be measured exactly. With this
2 optional feature the relay can be used
in communication networks where this
delay times are quite different.
Phase-selective intertrip and remote trip/
3 indications
Normally the differential fault current is
calculated for each line end nearly at the
same time. This leads to fast and uniform
4 tripping times. Under weak infeed condi-
tions, especially when the differential
function is combined with an overcurrent
pickup a phase-selective intertrip offers a
5 tripping of all line ends.
• 7SD52/53 has 4 intertrip signals which Fig. 7/41 Differential protection in ring or chain topology
are transmitted in high-speed (< 20 ms)
to the other line ends. These intertrip
6 signals can also be initiated by an external relay via binary
inputs and therefore be used to indicate, for example, a
• The two-end line is a special case, because when the main
connection is interrupted, the communication switches over
directional decision of the backup distance relay. from a main path to a secondary path. This hot standby trans-
• In addition, 4 high-speed remote trip signals are available, mission function ensures a high availability of the system and
protects differential protection against communication route
7 which may be initiated by an external or internal event.
• 24 remote signals can be freely assigned to inputs and outputs
failure on important lines.
at each line end and are circulating between the different • In a ring topology, one line end can be logged out from the
devices. differential protection topology for service or maintenance
reasons by a signal via binary input. Checks for the breaker
8 Communication topologies / modes of operation position and load current are made before this logout is initi-
The differential relays may work in a ring or daisy chain line ated. In a chain topology, the relays at the end of the line can
topology. Use of a test mode offer advantages under commis- be logged out from the differential protection topology.
sioning and service conditions. • The whole configuration can be set up into a test mode. All
9 • The system tolerates the loss of one data connection in a ring functions and indications are available except the breakers
topology. The ring topology is rerouted within 20 ms forming are not tripped. The local relay can be tested and no trip or
then a chain topology, while the differential protection func- intertrip reaction is effected by the other relays.
tion is immediately reactivated.
10 • When the communication connections need to be reduced
or when these are not available, the whole system is able to
function without interruption as chain topology. At the line
ends, only cost-effective 7SD52/53 relays with one protection
11 interface are necessary for this application.
12
13
14
15
Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

7SD52/53 provides a non-switched distance protection featuring
all well-proven algogrithms of 7SA522 and 7SA6. It is possible 1
to select the operating mode "main" or "main 2", if the back-up
differential is activated as "main 1". By parallel calculation
and monitoring of all six impedance loops, a high degree of
sensitivity and selectivity is achieved for all types of faults. The
shortest tripping time is less than one cycle. All methods of
2
neutral-point connection (resonant grounding, isolated, solid
or low-resistance grounding) are reliably dealt with. Single and
three-pole tripping is possible. Overhead lines can be equipped
with or without series capacitor compensation.
3
Quadrilateral and mho characteristics
The 7SD52/53 relay provides quadrilateral as well as mho zone
characteristics. Both characteristics can be used separately for 4
phase and ground (earth) faults. Resistance ground (earth)
faults can, for instance, be covered with the quadrilateral
characteristic and phase faults with the mho characteristic.
Alternatively, the quadrilateral characteristic is available with Fig. 7/42 Distance protection: quadrilateral characteristic
5
4 different pickup methods:
• Overcurrent pickup I>>
• Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup V/I 6
• Voltage-dependent and phase angle-dependent overcurrent
pickup V/I/φ
• Impedance pickup Z<
Load zone
7
In order to guarantee a reliable discrimination between load
operation and short-circuit – especially on long high loaded
lines – the relay is equipped with a selectable load encroach-
ment characteristic. Impedances within this load encroachment
8
characteristic prevent the distance zones from unwanted
tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity 9
The distance protection incorporates a well-proven highly
sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of unfaulted
loops is reliably eliminated to prevent the adverse influence of
currents and voltages in the fault-free loops. This phase selec- 10
tion algorithm achieves single-pole tripping and correct distance
measurement in a wide application range. Fig. 7/43 Distance protection: mho characteristic

in case of faults with fault resistance. The distance zones can be 11
The influence of wrong distance measurement due to parallel set forward, reverse or non-directional. Sound phase polariza-
lines can be compensated by feeding the neutral current of the tion and voltage memory provides a dynamically unlimited
parallel line to the relay. Parallel line compensation can be used directional sensitivity.
for distance protection as well as for fault locating.
Mho 12
7 distance zones
The mho tripping characteristic provides sound phase respec-
6 independent distance zones and one separate overreach zone tively memory polarization for all distance zones. The diagram
are available. Each distance zone has dedicated time stages,
partly separate for single-phase or multi-phase faults. Ground
shows characteristic without the expansion due to polarizing.
During a forward fault the polarizing expands the mho circle
13
(earth) faults are detected by monitoring the neutral current 3I0 towards the source so that the origin is included. This mho circle
and the zero-sequence voltage 3V0. expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types
of faults, even for close-in faults.
The quadrilateral tripping characteristic permits separate setting
of the reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance section R
14
can be set separately for faults with and without ground involve-
ment. This characteristic has therefore an optimal performance
15
Elimination of interference signals
1 Digital filters render the unit immune to

interference signals contained in the mea-
sured values. In particular, the influence
of DC components, capacitive voltage
transformers and frequency changes is
2 considerably reduced. A special measur-
ing method is employed in order to assure
protection selectivity during saturation of
the current transformers.
3 Measuring voltage monitoring
Tripping of the distance protection is
blocked automatically in the event of
4
LSP2311-afp.tif
failure of the measuring voltage, thus
preventing spurious tripping.
The measuring voltage is monitored
by the integrated fuse failure monitor.
5 Distance protection is blocked if either
the fuse failure monitor or the auxiliary
Fig. 7/44 Power swing current and voltage wave forms
contact of the voltage transformer protec-

tion switch operates and, in this case, the
6 EMERGENCY definite-time overcurrent

protection can be activated.
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T)
7 Dynamic transient reactions, for instance

short-circuits, load fluctuations, auto-
reclosures or switching operations can
cause power swings in the transmission
network. During power swings, large
8 currents along with small voltages can
cause unwanted tripping of distance
protection relays. To avoid uncontrolled
tripping of the distance protection and to
LSP2312-afp.tif
9 achieve controlled tripping in the event
of loss of synchronism, the 7SD52/53
relay is equipped with an efficient power
swing detection function. Power swings
10 can be detected under symmetrical load

conditions as well as during single-pole
Fig. 7/45 Power swing circle diagram
auto-reclosures.
Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21) Common transmission channels are power-line carrier, micro-
11 A teleprotection function is available for fast clearance of faults
wave radio and fiber-optic links. The serial protection interface
can be used for direct connection to a digital communication
up to 100 % of the line length. The following operating modes network, fiber-optic or pilot-wire link as well.
may be selected:
7SD52/53 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals.
12 • PUTT, permissive underreaching zone transfer trip
• POTT, permissive overreaching zone transfer trip
This feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable
single-pole tripping, if two single-pole faults occur on different
• UNBLOCKING lines. The transmission methods are suitable also for lines with
• BLOCKING three ends (three-terminal lines).
13 • Directional comparison pickup Phase-selective transmission is also possible with multi-end
• Pilot-wire comparison applications, if some user-specific linkages are implemented
by way of the integrated CFC logic. During disturbances in the
• Reverse interlocking
transmission receiver or on the transmission circuit, the tele-
14 • DUTT, direct underreaching zone transfer trip (together with
Direct Transfer Trip function)
protection function can be blocked by a binary input signal with-
out losing the zone selectivity. The control of the overreach zone
The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary Z1B (zone extension) can be switched over to the auto-reclosure
inputs and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical function. A transient blocking function (Current reversal guard)
15 relay input or output. At least one channel is required for each
direction.
is provided in order to suppress interference signals during trip-
ping of parallel lines.


Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary
to execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SD52/53 1
relay is equipped with phase-selective “external trip inputs” that
can be assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
Weak-infeed protection: echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI) 2

To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak
the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated 3
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible
to initiate tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase-selective
1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a permissive trip signal (POTT or
Unblocking) is received and if the phase-ground voltage drops
correspondingly. As an option, the weak-infeed logic can be
4
equipped according to a French specification.
Directional ground(earth)-fault protection for high-

resistance faults (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N) 0,14
5
t= 0,02 Tp
In grounded (earthed) networks, it may happen that the (I / I )
p −1
distance protection sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-
resistance ground (earth) faults. The 7SD52/53 protection relay
has therefore protection functions for faults of this nature.
Fig. 7/46 Normal inverse 6
The ground (earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be used with Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault
3 definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT). A 4th protection (ANSI 85-67N)
definite-time stage can be applied instead of the 1st inverse-time
stage.
The directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can 7
be combined with one of the following teleprotection schemes:
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/ • Directional comparison
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). An additional logarith-
mic inverse-time characteristic is also available.
• BLOCKING
• UNBLOCKING 8
The direction decision can be determined by the neutral current
The transient blocking function (current reversal guard) is also
and the zero-sequence voltage or by the negative-sequence
provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative to the
directional determination with zero-sequence voltage, the star-
of parallel lines.
9
point current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer may The pilot functions for distance protection and for
also be used for polarization. Dual polarization applications can ground(earth)-fault protection can use the same signaling
therefore be fulfilled. channel or two separate and redundant channels.
Alternatively, the direction can be determined by evaluation of Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
10
zero-sequence power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in for-
ward or reverse direction or for both directions (non-directional). The 7SD52/53 provides a backup over-current protection. Two
As an option the 7SD52/53 relay can be provided with a sensitive definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
neutral (residual) current transformer. This feature provides a
measuring range for the neutral (residual) current from 5 mA
available, separately for phase currents and for the neutral
(residual) current. Two operating modes are selectable. The
11
to 100 A with a nominal relay current of 1 A and from 5 mA function can run in parallel to the differential protection and the
to 500 A with a nominal relay current of 5 A. Thus the ground distance protection or only during interruption of the protection
(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme
sensitivity.
communication and/or failure of the voltage in the VT secondary
circuit (emergency operation). The secondary voltage failure can 12
be detected by the integrated fuse failure monitor or via a binary
The function is equipped with special digital filter algorithms, input from a VT miniature circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature
is particularly important for low zero-sequence fault currents
which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
The following inverse-time characteristics according to
IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/IEEE are provided:
13
Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault trip can • Inverse
be activated separately for each stage as well. • Short inverse
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground(earth)- •
•
Long inverse
Moderately inverse
14
fault protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for
single-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector. • Very inverse
It may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto- • Extremely inverse
reclose cycles or during pickup of the distance protection. • Definite inverse 15
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB) Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
1 The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate definite-time

overcurrent stage. It can be activated from a binary input signal-
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in
ing the line isolator (disconnector) is open. Settings are available the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a
for phase and ground (earth)-faults. specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
2 Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS)
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency)
and each element can be delayed separately.
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty line.
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-
3 fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast 3-pole tripping. The 7SD52/53 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect the failure of tripping command execution,
With lower fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
for example due to a defective ciruit-breaker. The current detec-
onto-fault is also possible
tion logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used
4 – if the breaker positions at the line ends are monitored and
connected to the relays. This breaker position monitor offers a
in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is not inter-
high-speed trip during switch-onto-fault conditions. or a busbar trip command is generated. The breaker failure
–with the overreach distance zone Z1B or just with pickup in any protection can be initiated by all integrated protection functions
5 zone. as well as by external devices via binary input signals.
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
input "manual close" or automatically via measurement.
The 7SD52/53 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
6 Fault locator (AR). The function includes several operating modes:

• 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
the distance-to-fault. The result is displayed in ohms, miles, times are available depending the type of fault
kilometers or in percent of the line length. Parallel line and load • 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for multi-
7 current compensation is also available. phase faults
As an option for a line with two ends, a fault locator function
with measurement at both ends of the line is available.Thanks without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
to this feature, accuracy of measurement on long lines under • 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
8 high load conditions and high fault resistances is considerably
increased.
multi-phase faults
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
9 (ANSI 59, 27)
binary inputs and outputs
load or are only lightly loaded. The 7SD52/53 contains a number
of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element • Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
10 is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are

available:
• Adaptive auto-reclosure. Only one line end is closed after the
dead time. If the fault persists this line end is switched off.
• Phase-to-ground overvoltage Otherwise the other line ends are closed via a command over
the communication links. This avoids stress when heavy fault
11 • Zero-sequence overvoltage
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage
currents are fed from all line ends again.
• Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check
input or be derived from the phase voltages. • Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
12 for the remote end of the line (compounding). other operating principles can be employed by means of the
• Negative-sequence overvoltage integrated programmable logic (CFC).
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows
evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage-
13 either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by
means of a transmitted signal. dependent supplementary functions are thus available:
The 7SD52/53 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage under- • DLC

voltage measuring elements: By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker
14 • Phase-to-ground undervoltage
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage
closure).
• Positive-sequence undervoltage
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means
15 of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.

• ADT Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)

at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on
equipment).
One or two binary inputs for each circuit- breaker pole can be
used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the 1
connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
• RDT is interrupted.
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto-
reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension, but external to the
Lockout (ANSI 86) 2
protected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs and reset using the
the RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only be issued after the
return voltage from the remote station which has not tripped
whether or not to reduce the dead time. lockout state is reset. 3
Synchronism check (ANSI 25) Local measured values
The measured values are calculated from the measured current
Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured and voltage signals along with the power factor (cos φ), the 4
that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For frequency, the active and reactive power. Measured values are
this purpose, a synchronism-check function is provided. After displayed as primary or secondary values or in percent of the
verification of the network synchronism the function releases specific line rated current and voltage. The relay uses a 20 bit
the CLOSE command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled high-resolution AD converter and the analog inputs are factory-
calibrated, so a high accuracy is reached.
5
for different criteria, e.g., checking that the busbar or line is not
carrying a voltage (dead line or dead bus). The following values are available for measured-value
processing:
• Currents 3 x IPhase, 3I0, IE, IE sensitive 6
A built-in overload protection with a current and thermal alarm • Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground, 3 x VPhase-Phase, 3V0, Ven, VSYNC,
stage is provided for the thermal protection of cables and trans- VCOMP
formers. The trip time characteristics are exponential functions
according to IEC 60255-8. The preload is thus considered in the
trip times for overloads. An adjustable alarm stage can initiate
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, V1, V2
• Real power P (Watt), reactive power Q (Var),
7
an alarm before tripping is initiated. apparent power S (VA)
• Power factor PF (= cos φ)
Monitoring and supervision functions
The 7SD52/53 relay provides comprehensive monitoring
• Frequency f 8
• Differential and restraint current per phase
functions covering both hardware and software. Furthermore,
the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility. • Load impedances with directional indication
3 x RPhase-Ground, XPhase-Ground
Therefore the current and voltage transformers are also included
in this monitoring system. 3 x RPhase-Phase, XPhase-Phase 9
• Long term mean values
Current transformer / Monitoring functions 3 x IPhase; I1; P; P+; P-; Q; Q+; Q-; S
A broken wire between the CTs and relay inputs under load may
lead to maloperation of a differential relay if the load current
• Minimum/maximum memory
3 x IPhase; I1; 3 x VPhase-Ground 10
exceeds the differential setpoint. The 7SD52/53 provides fast 3 x VPhase-Phase, 3V0; V1; P+; P-; Q+; Q-; S; f;
broken wire supervision which immediatelly blocks all line ends power factor (+); power factor (-);
from mean values 3 x IPhase; I1; P; Q; S
if a broken wire condition is measured by a local relay. This
avoids mal-operation due to broken wire condition. Only the • Energy meters Wp+; Wp-; WQ+; WQ- 11
phase where the broken wire is detected is blocked. The other • Availability of the data connection to the remote line ends per
phases remain under differential operation. minute and per hour Regarding delay time measuring with the
Fuse failure monitoring
GPS-version the absolute time for transmit and receive path is
displayed separately. 12
Limit value monitoring: Limit values are monitored by means
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit the
of the CFC. Commands can be derived from these limit value
distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due
to this loss of voltage. This secondary voltage interruption can
be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.
indications.
13
Immediate blocking of distance protection is provided for all
types of secondary voltage failures.
Additional measurement supervision functions are 14
15
Measured values at remote line ends
1 Every two seconds the currents and volt-

ages are freezed at the same time at all
line ends and transmitted via the commu-
nication link. At a local line end, currents
and voltages are thus available with their
2 amount and phases (angle) locally and
remotely. This allows checking the whole
configuration under load conditions. In
addition, the differential and restraint
3 currents are also displayed. Important
communication measurements, such as
delay time or faulty telegrams per minute/
hour are also available as measurements.
4 These measured values can be processed

with the help of the CFC logic editor.
Commissioning
5 Special attention has been paid to

commissioning. All binary inputs and
outputs can be displayed and activated
directly. This can simplify the wiring check
LSP2845.tif
significantly for the user. The operational
6 and fault events and the fault records are
clearly arranged.
Furthermore, all currents and optional Fig. 7/47 Browser-aided commissioning: Phasor diagram
7 voltages and phases are available via

communication link at the local relay and
are displayed in the relay, with DIGSI 4 or
with the Web Monitor.
8 The operational and fault events and

fault records from all line ends share a
common time tagging which allows to
compare events registered in the different
line ends on a common time base.
9 WEB Monitor – Internet technology
simplifies visualization
10 operating program, the relay contains
11 this solution is to operate the unit with
infrastructure. This program shows the
12 protection topology and comprehensive
measurements from local and remote line
LSP2846.tif
ends. Local and remote measurements

are shown as phasors and the breaker
13 positions of each line end are depicted. It

is possible to check the correct connection Fig. 7/48 Browser-aided commissioning: Differential protection tripping characteristic
of the current transformers or the correct
vector group of a transformer.
14 Stability can be checked by using the operating characteristic

as well as the calculated differential and restraint values in the
If the distance protection is active, then the valid zone character-
istic (quadrilateral/mho) is displayed.
browser windows.
Event log and trip log messages are also available. Remote
control can be used, if the local front panel cannot be accessed.
15
Control and automation functions Assignment of feedback to command
Control The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication 1
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
support all control and monitoring functions that are required outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
The main application is reliable control of switching and other it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position). 2
processes.
Chatter disable
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input 3
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is
OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit-
breaker or auxiliary contact position.
– integrated operator panel Filter time
4
– binary inputs All binary indications can be subjected to a filter time (indication
– substation control and protection system suppression).
– DIGSI 4
Indication filtering and delay
5
Command processing
Indications can be filtered or delayed.
indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica- 6
hardware and software, checking of the external process, tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
automatic command termination after output. Here are some information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
typical applications: present after this time. 7
• Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or Indication derivation
2 trip contacts
• User-definable bay interlocks
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The 8
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
ing switches
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by
combination with existing information
9
A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
Automation/user-defined logic transfer of information to the control center during work on a
circuit bay.
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or Test operation
10
Switching authority 11
communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
12
down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”
Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
in the status indication memory. The switch command source, 13
and result of a switching operation are retained.
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization of
standards common in energy automation. The design of the com-
munication modules permits interchangeability on the one hand,
2 and on the other hand provides openness for future standards
(for example, Industrial Ethernet).
Local PC interface
3 The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits

quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
commissioning.
4 Rear-mounted interfaces
Two communication modules located on the rear of the unit Fig. 7/49 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
incorporate optional equipment complements and readily permit connection or fiber-optic connection
5 retrofitting. They assure the ability to comply with the require-

ments of different communication interfaces.
The interfaces make provision for the following applications:
• Service /modem interface
6 By means of the RS232/RS485 or optical interface, it is possible
to efficiently operate a number of protection units centrally
via DIGSI 4 or standard browser. Remote operation is possible
on connection of a modem. This offers the advantage of rapid
7 fault clarification, especially in the case of unmanned power
plants.
With the optical version, centralized operation can be imple-
mented by means of a star coupler.
8 • System interface
This interface is used to carry out communication with a
control or protection and control system and supports a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs, depending
9 on the module connected.
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser

In the case of the 7SD52/53, a PC with a standard browser can Fig. 7/50 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 be connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface

(refer to “Commissioning program”). The relays include a small
Web server that sends its HTML pages to the browser via an Safe bus architecture
established dial-up network connection. • RS485 bus
11 Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication

With this data transmission via copper conductors electro-
magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different system continues to operate without any disturbances.
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols • Fiber-optic double ring circuit
12 (IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP, The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag-
DNP 3, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
units, the communication system continues to operate without
disturbance.
13 It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2163-afpen.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol
is the worldwide standard for protection 1
LSP2164-afp.tif
and control systems used by power supply
corporations. Siemens was the first
manufacturer to support this standard. By
means of this protocol, information can
also be exchanged directly between bay
2
units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay and system interlocking.
Access to the units via the Ethernet bus is
also possible with DIGSI.
3
IEC 60870-5-103 Fig. 7/51 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 7/52 PROFIBUS communication module,
communication module optical double-ring
standardized protocol for the efficient
4
communication in the protected area. IEC
60870-5-103 is supported by a number
LSP2162-afpen.tif
of protection device manufacturers and is
used worldwide. 5
PROFIBUS DP
LSP3.01-0021.tif
PROFIBUS DP is an industry-recognized
standard for communications and is sup- 6
ported by a number of PLC and protection
device manufacturers.
DNP 3.0 7
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3) is a messaging-based commu- Fig. 7/53 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 7/54 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
nication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units
are fully Level 1 and Level 2 compliant
integrated Ethernet switch 8
with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is supported by a
ers.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control • FO61), OMA22) module:
820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connec-
1 Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical
tion up to 3.5 km with multi-mode FO cable.
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the New fiber-optic interfaces, series FO1x
units exchange information with the control system. • FO171): For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
2 Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to

SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.
mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
• FO181): For direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 7/49). • FO191): For direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for
3 Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also
mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
• FO30: 820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum connection up to 1.5 km and for connections to a IEEE C37.94
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto- multiplexer interface.
4 electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
a fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with the protection relay. The link to the communication network
5 SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
is optionally an electrical X21 or a G703/-E1/-T1 interface.
Furthermore the IEEE C37.94 interface is supported by the FO30
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units module.
For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires or
6 however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
systems (see Fig. 7/50).
twisted telephone pair), a modern communication converter for
copper cables is available. This operates with both the two-wire
Via modem and service interface, the protection engineer and three-wire copper connections which were used by conven-
has access to the protection devices at all times. This permits tional differential protection systems before. The communication
7 remote maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing). converter for copper cables is designed for 5 kV insulation
voltage. An additional 20 kV isolation transformer can extend
Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example,
the field of applications of this technique into ranges with
during a major inspection.
higher insulation voltage requirements. The connection via FO
8 Serial protection interface (R2R interface) cable to the relay is interference-free. With SIPROTEC 4 and the
communication converter for copper cables a digital follow-up
As an option, the 7SD52/53 provides one or two protection technique is available for two-wire protection systems (typical 8
interfaces to cover two up to six line end applications in ring or km) and all three-wire protection systems using existing copper
chain topology and hot standby communication between two communication links.
9 line ends.
Different communication converters are listed under
In addition to the differential protection function, other protec- "Accessories".
tion functions can use this interface to increase selectivity and
sensitivity as well as covering advanced applications. Communication data:
10 • Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
• Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented • Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if they
11 without additional logic
• Signaling for directional ground(earth)- fault protection – occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per minute
directional comparison for high-resistance faults in solidly and hour, of the serial protection interface can be displayed.
grounded systems • Supported network interfaces X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or
512 kbit/s; or G703-64 kbit/s and G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or
12 • Echo function
• Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure “Adaptive
G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s).
dead time” (ADT) mode • Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
or IEEE C37.94.
• 28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals
13 Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means of
• Protocol HDLC
the programmable CFC logic

The protection interfaces have different options to cover new
14 and existing communication infrastructures.
820 nm fiber-optic interface with clock recovery/ST connectors
1) For flush-mounting housing.
for direct connection with multi-mode FO cable up to 1.5 km
15 for the connection to a communication converter.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal fiber-optic module
(OMA1) will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
Communication possibilities between relays
3
Fig. 7/56 Direct optical link up to 1.5 km/3.5 km, 820nm Fig. 7/57 Direct optical link up to 25/60 km with 1300 nm
or up to 100 km with 1550 nm
4
7
Fig. 7/58 Connection to a communication network CC-XG Fig. 7/60 Connection to a communication network CC-2M
9
max. 1.5 km with
62.5 μm/125 μm
7SD52/53 multi-mode fiber
Communication
7SD610
FO30 IEEE C37.94
MUX
network 10
SIPV6.011en.eps
FO30 with ST connectors
Fig. 7/59 Connection to a communication network via IEEE C37.94 Fig. 7/61 Connection to a pilot wire 11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
1 Typical connection for current and volt-

age transformers
2 point in the line direction, I4 connected as

summation current transformer (= 3I0):
Holmgreen circuit
3 of the broken (open) delta winding on
internally.
Note:
4 Voltage inputs are always available in the
relay. But there is no need to connect it to
voltage transformers for the differential
protection function.
5 Fig. 7/62 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers

6 The 3 phase current transformers are
7 permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
Note:
Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer must
8 be connected to the terminal of the core-
balance CT pointing in the same direction
as the neutral point of the phase current
transformers (in this case in line direction).
9 The voltage connection is effected in
10 Fig. 7/63 Alternative connection of current transformers for sensitive

ground(earth)-current measuring with core-balance current transformers
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

point in the line direction, I4 connected to 1
of a grounded (earthed) transformer for
directional ground(earth)-fault protection.
The voltage connection is effected in
2
4
Fig. 7/64 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring
neutral current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer 5
6
the summation current of the parallel line
for parallel line compensation on overhead
lines. The voltage connection is effected in
7
9
Fig. 7/65 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring
the ground (earth) current of a parallel line 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/66 Connection of current transformer with restricted ground-fault
protection (REF)
15
Typical connection
1 3 phase voltage transformers, V4 con-

nected to broken (open) delta winding
monitoring and ground(earth)-fault direc-
tional protection. The current connection is
2 effected in accordance with Fig. 7/62, 7/63,
7/64 and 7/65.
5 Fig. 6/67 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

the displacement voltage (e-n voltage)
6 Alternative voltage connection

synchrocheck.
7 Note:
Any phase-to-phase or phase-toground
(earth) voltage may be employed as the
busbar voltage. Parameterization is carried
8 out on the unit. The current connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 7/62, 7/63,
7/64 and 7/65.
10 Fig. 6/68 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

Analog inputs
Housing 7XP20
1/2 x 19" or 1/1 x 19"
See dimension drawings, part 14
1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (selectable, controlled by Degree of protection acc. to
firmware) EN 60529
Rated voltage
Power consumption
80 to 125 V (selectable) Flush-mounting housing
Rear IP 50 2
In CT circuits with IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA Front IP 51
In CT circuits with IN = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA For the terminals IP 2x with cover cap
In VT circuits Approx. 0.10 VA
Weight
Thermal overload capacity
In CT circuits 500 A for 1 s
1/2 x 19" 6 kg
3
150 A for 10 s 1/1 x 19" 10 kg
4 x IN continuous
Surface-mounting housing
In VT circuits 230 V, continuous per phase
Dynamic overload capacity
1/2 x 19"
1/1 x 19"
11 kg
19 kg 4
In CT circuits 1250 A (half cycle) Electrical tests
In the CT circuit for high sensitive
ground-fault protection Specifications
(refer to ordering code)
Auxiliary voltage
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2 5
UL 508
Rated voltage DC 24 to 48 V For further standards see
DC 60 to 125 V 1) “Individual functions”
DC 110 to 250 V 1)
and AC 115 V with 50/60 Hz1) Insulation tests
Standards IEC 60255-5
6
Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 %
Max. superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 % Voltage test (100 % test)
(peak-to-peak) All circuits except for auxiliary 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
During normal operation Approx. 8 W
supply, binary inputs and
communication interfaces 7
During pickup with all inputs Approx. 18 W Auxiliary voltage and binary DC 3.5 kV
and outputs activated inputs (100 % test)
RS485/RS232 rear side commu- 500 V (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
voltage failure Vaux AC/DC 110 V
≥ 50 ms
nication interfaces and time
synchronization interface
8
Binary inputs
(100 % test)
Quantity 8 or 16 or 24 Impulse voltage test (type test)
Minimum permissible voltage DC 19 or 88 or 176 V, bipolar
All circuits except for commu-
nication interfaces and time
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J
3 positive and 3 negative impulses 9
Range is selectable with jumpers (3 operating ranges) synchronization interface, at intervals of 5 s
for each binary input class III
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
(product standards) (type tests)
10
Output relays
Quantity 16 or 24 or 32
DIN 57435 part 303
Switching capacity
Make 1000 W /VA
High frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1, class III and
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
400 surges per s; 11
VDE 0435 part 303, class III test duration 2 s
Break 30 VA
Break (for resistive load) 40 W Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
Break (for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA IEC 60255-22-2, class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
EN 61000-4-2, class IV
Irradiation with RF field, non-
Ri = 330 Ω
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
12
Permissible current 30 A for 0.5 s
modulated
5 A continuous
LEDs
Quantity
Irradiation with RF field,
amplitude-modulated
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHz 13
RUN (green) 1 IEC 61000-4-3, class III
ERROR (red) 1
Indication (red), function can be
assigned
14
14
1) For flush-mounting housing.
1) Ranges are settable by means of jumpers.

3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module OMA1
will be delivered together with an external repeater.
15
Technical data
Irradiation with RF field, pulse- 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition During transport
modulated IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
1 ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients, bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms; IEC 60255-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; frequency sweep 1 octave/min
2 test duration 1 min
Shock
Half-sinusoidal
High-energy surge voltages IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
(SURGE) IEC 61000-4-5, installati- IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
on class III Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV, 12 Ω, 9 µF of the 3 axes
3 Measurements inputs, binary
Differential mode: 1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 µF
Common mode: 2 kV, 42 Ω, 0.5 µF
Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
inputs, binary outputs Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 µF IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks each in both directions
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; of the 3 axes
4 Magnetic field with power
frequency
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
50 Hz; 0.5 mT; 50 MHz
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; Temperatures
IEC 60255-6 Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
5 Oscillatory surge withstand
capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
Damped wave; 50 surges per second;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Duration 2 s; Ri = 150 Ω to 200 Ω temperature, tested for 96 h
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 per second; both polarities;
6 duration 2 s; Ri = 80 Ω
Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
IEC 60255-6
rence, IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
Damped oscillations IEC 60894, 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity – Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to 131 °F
7 IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz

1, 10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω
permanent storage
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests transport
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard) Humidity
8 Conducted interference voltage

on lines, only auxiliary supply,
150 kHz to 30 MHz
Limit class B
Permissible humidity stress
It is recommended to arrange the
Yearly average ≤ 75 % relative humi-
dity; on 56 days in the year up to
IEC-CISPR 22 units in such a way, that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensation
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz not exposed to direct sunlight or is not permitted
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B pronounced temperature changes
9 that could cause condensation.
Mechanical dynamic tests

10 During operation
11 frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 othogonal axes
Shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
12 IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions

of the 3 axes
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis),
13 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude

(vertical axis),
(horizontal axis),
14 (vertical axis),
15 1) Ordering option with high-speed contacts required.



7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Device type1)
7SD5 - - -
1
Two-terminal differential relay with 4-line display 2 2
Two-terminal differential relay with grapical display 3 2
Multi-terminal differential relay with 4-line display
Multi-terminal differential relay with graphical display
2 3
see next page
2
3 3
Measurement input
Iph = 1 A2), Ie = 1 A2)
Iph = 1 A2), Ie = high (min. = 0.005 A)
1
2
3
Iph = 5 A2), Ie = 5 A2) 5
Auxiliary voltage (Power supply, BI trigger level) 4

24 to 48 V DC, trigger level binary input 19 V4) 2
60 to 125 V DC3), trigger level binary input 19 V4) 4
110 to 250 V DC3), 115 V AC, trigger level binary input 88 V4)
220 to 250 V DC3), 115 V AC, trigger level binary input 176 V4)
5
6
5
Binary/ Signal/ Fast High- Housing Flush- Flush- Surface-
indication command relay5) speed width mounting mounting mounting
inputs outputs incl.
live status
trip
output6)
referred
to 19”
housing/
screw-type
housing/
plug-in
housing/
screw-type 6
contact terminals terminals terminals
8 4 12 – ½ A
8
8
4
4
12
12
–
–
½
½
E
J
7
16 12 12 – C
16 12 12 – G
16 12 12 – L 8
16 4 15 5 N
16 4 15 5 Q
16 4 15 5 S
24 20 12 – D 9
24 20 12 – H
24 20 12 – M

24
24
12
12
15
15
5
5
P
R 10
24 12 15 5 T
24 4 18 10 W
Region-specific default / language settings and function versions 11

Region GE, German language (can be changed) A
Region world, English language (can be changed) B
Region US, US-English language (can be changed) C
Region world, French language (can be changed) D 12
Region world, Spanish language (can be changed) E
Region world, Italian language (can be changed) F
13
1) Redundant prot. data interface for Hot-Standby-service is possible 4) The binary input thresholds are selectable in three steps by means
with a two terminal differential relay (second prot. data interface is
needed)
of jumpers.
5) Fast relays are indentified in the terminal diagram. The time
14
2) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by the means of jumpers. advantage compared to signal/command outputs is approx. 3 ms,
3) Transition between three auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected mainly for protection commands
by means of jumpers. 6) High-speed trip outputs are identified in the in the terminal dia-
gram. The time advantage compared to fast relays is approx. 5 ms 15
1 7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
System interfaces
7SD52 - - -
IEC protocol, electrical RS232 1
2 IEC protocol, electrical RS485
IEC protocol, optical 820 nm, ST-plug
2
see next
page
3
Further protocols see supplement L 9 L 0
3 PROFIBUS DP slave, RS485 A

PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 1) B
DNP 3.0, RS485 G
4 DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector 1)

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Etherrnet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN100)
H
R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch, optical, double, LC-connector (EN100) 2) S
DIGSI / Modem interface (on rear of device) and protection interface 1

5 See additional indication M 9 M
DIGSI / Modem interface (on rear of device)

Without DIGSI-interface on rear 0
6 DIGSI 4, electric RS232
DIGSI 4, electric RS485
1
2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST plug 3
7 Protection data interface 1

FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, line length up to 1.5 km
via multimode FO cable for communication converter or direct FO connection 3) A
via multimode FO cable for direct FO connection
8 FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 24 km
B
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) G

FO18: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 60 km
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) 5) H
9 FO19: Optical 1550 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 100 km
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) 6) J
via multimode FO cable for communication networks with
IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 7)
10 S
11
12
13 1) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 5) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators
9 = E/G/H/Q/R). For the surface mounted version, please order 7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
a device with the appropriate electrical RS485 interface and an receiver element
external FO-converter 6) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
14 2) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos.
9 = E/G/H/Q/R) please order the relay with electrical interface and
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element
use a separate fiber-optic switch. 7) Only available in flush-mounting housing (Order No. pos.
3) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories. 9 ≠ E/G/H/Q/R).
15 4) Device for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = E/G/H/Q/R)

will be delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00.


7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Functions 1 / Protection interface 2

7SD52 - - -
1
Trip mode Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
3-pole without without
3-pole with without
0 see next
1 page 2
1-/3-pole without without 2
1-/3-pole with without 3
3-pole
3-pole
without
with
with
with
4
5
3
1-/3-pole without with 6
1-/3-pole with with 7
Functions 1 and Protection interface 2 6) 9 N 4

Functions 1
Trip mode Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
3-pole
3-pole
without
with
without
without
0
1
5
1-/3-pole without without 2
1-/3-pole with without 3
3-pole without with 4 6
3-pole with with 5
1-/3-pole without with 6
1-/3-pole with with 7
Protection interface 2
7
via multimode FO cable for communication converter or direct FO connection 1) A
via multimode FO cable for direct FO connection B 8
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) G
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) 3) H 9
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) 4) J
via multimode FO cable for communication networks with
IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 5) S
10
11
12
13
1) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories. 4) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
2) Device for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = E/G/H/Q/R) 7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element.
14
will be delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00.
3) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators 5) Only available in flush-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 ≠
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the E/G/H/Q/R).
receiver element. 6) In a two terminal differential relay the protection interface 2 can
be used as redundant protection interface (Hot Standby). 15
1 7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Functions
7SD52 - - -
Time overcurrent pro- Ground fault Distance protection Distance protection (Ipick- Ground fault
tection/ Breaker failure protection (Pickup Z<, polygon, up I>,-VI/φ, -Z<), polygon, detection
2 protection (ANSI 50,
50N, 51, 51N, 50BF)
(ANSI 67N) MHO, parallel line
comp.) Power swing
parallel line comp. 2),
power swing det. (ANSI
for isolated/
compensated
detection (ANSI 21, 21, 21N, 68, 68T) networks 1)
21N, 68, 68T)
with without without without without
3 with without without with without
C
D
with without with without without E
with with without without without F
4 with
with
with
with
without
with
with
without
without
without
G
H
with without without without with J
with without without with with K
5 with
with
with
with
without
without
without
with
with
with
L
M
Additional functions 1
6 4 Remote commands/
24 Remote indications
Transformer
expansions
Fault locator Voltage protection,
frequence protection
Restricted ground
fault low impedance
(ANSI 27, 50) (ANSI 87N) 2)
with without 1-side measuring without without J
7 with
with
without
without
1-side measuring
2-side measuring
with
without
without
without
K
L
with without 2-side measuring with without M
with with 1-side measuring without without N
8 with with 1-side measuring with without P
with with 2-side measuring without without Q
with with 2-side measuring with without R
with with 1-side measuring without with S
9 with with 1-side measuring with with T
with with 2-side measuring without with U
with with 2-side measuring with with V
10 Additional functions 2
Measured values, External GPS Capacitive current
extended, synchronization load compensation
11 Min/Max values
without without without 0
without with without 1
with without without 2
12 with
without
with
without
without
with
3
4
without with with 5
with without with 6
13 with with with 7
14
15 1) Only available with Order No. Pos. 7 = 2 or 6

2) Only available with Order No. Pos. 7 = 1 or 5

Opto-electric communication converter CC-XG (connection to

communication network)
1
Converter to interface to X21 or RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s synchronous
Connection via FO cable for 62.5 /125 μm or 50 /120 μm and
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector, max.
distance 1.5 km
2
Electrical connection via X21/RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s interface 7XV5662-0AA00
Opto-electric communication converter CC-2M to G703-E1 / -T1

communication networks with 2,048 /1,554 kbit/s
Converter to interface between optical 820 nm interface and
3
G703-E1 /-T1 interface of a communication network
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,max.
distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via G703-E1/-T1 interface 7XV5662-0AD00
4
Opto-electric communication converter (connection to pilot wire)
Converter to interface to a pilot wire or twisted telephone pair
(typical 15 km length) 5
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector;
max. distance 1.5 km, screw-type terminals to pilot wire 7XV5662-0AC00
Additional interface modules 6

Protection interface mod. opt. 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
Protection interface mod. opt. 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
7
Further modules
Protection interface mod. opt. 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
8
Optical repeaters 9
7XV5461-0BH00 10
Time synchronizing unit with GPS output

GPS 1 sec pulse and time telegram IRIG B / DCF 77 7XV5664-0AA00 11
Isolation transformer (20 kV) for pilot wire communication 7XR9516

Rated current 1.6 A; thermal overload release 1.6 A; 12
13
14
15
1 Connecting cable
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin connector)
2 Manual for 7SD522/523 V4.6

English C53000-G1176-C169
9 Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig.

LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 7/71

10 Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
Fig. 7/69 Mounting rail
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
11 0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 1)
1)
0-163084-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
12 For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)

13 Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
7/72
7/73
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

Fig. 7/72 Fig. 7/73



Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/76
5
X80, X81, X82. Switching of
BO14, BO15 as NO contact
or NC contact with jumpers
X41, X42, X43.
6
9
1) Configuration of binary outputs
until Hardware-version /EE.
For advanced flexibility see 10
Fig. 7/76.
Fig. 7/74 Basic version in housing

½ x 19” with 8 binary inputs
11
and 16 binary outputs
12
13
14

15
Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/78
5 Additional setting by jumpers:
BO14, BO15 as NO contact or
6 NC contact with jumpers X41,
X42, X43.
10
11
12
13
14 *) For unit version 7SD52xx-xN/S/Q high-speed contacts

1) Configuration of binary outputs until Hardware-version /EE.
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 7/78.
15 Fig. 7/77 Medium version in housing x 19”

Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/80
5
BO14, BO15 as NO contact or
NC contact with jumpers X41,
X42, X43.
6
10
11
12
13
*) For unit version 7SD52xx-xR/P/T high-speed contacts
1) Configuration of binary outputs until Hardware-version /EE.
14
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 7/80.
Fig. 7/79 Medium version in housing x 19”

15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transformer Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7UT6 differential protection relay

for transformers, generators, motors and busbars 8/3
8
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transformer Differential Protection / 7UT6
SIPROTEC 4 7UT6 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Function overview
• Differential protection for 2- up to 5-winding transformers

(3-/1-phase)
1
• Differential protection for motors and generators
• Differential protection for short 2 up to 5 terminal lines
• Differential protection for busbars up to 12 feeders 2
(phase-segregated or with summation CT)
LSP2456-afpen.tif
• Differential protection with phase-segregated measurement 3
• Sensitive measuring for low-fault currents
• Fast tripping for high-fault currents
• Restraint against inrush of transformer
• Phase /ground overcurrent protection
4
Fig. 8/1 SIPROTEC 7UT6 differential protection relay for ransformers,
• Overload protection with or without temperature
generators, motors and busbar
measurement
• Negative-sequence protection 5
Description • Breaker failure protection
• Low/high-impedance restricted ground fault (REF)
The SIPROTEC 7UT6 differential protection relays are used for
fast and selective fault clearing of short-circuits in transformers
• Voltage protection functions (7UT613/633)
6
of all voltage levels and also in rotating electric machines like Control functions
motors and generators, for short lines and busbars. • Commands for control of circuit-breakers and isolators
The protection relay can be parameterized for use with three-
phase and single-phase transformers.
• 7UT63x: Graphic display shows position of switching elements,
local/remote switching by key-operated switch
7
The specific application can be chosen by parameterization. • Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
In this way an optimal adaptation of the relay to the protected • User-defined logic with CFC
object can be achieved.
8
In addition to the differential function, a backup overcurrent pro-
tection for 1 winding/star point is integrated in the relay. Option-
ally, a low or high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection, • Trip circuit supervision
a negative-sequence protection and a breaker failure protection • Oscillographic fault recording 9
can be used. 7UT613 and 7UT633 feature 4 voltage inputs. With • Permanent differential and restraint current measurement,
this option an overvoltage and undervoltage protection is avail- extensive scope of operational values
able as well as frequency protection, reverse / forward power
protection, fuse failure monitor and overexcitation protection.
With external temperature monitoring boxes (thermo-boxes)
Communication interfaces 10
• PC front port for setting with DIGSI 4
temperatures can be measured and monitored in the relay.
Therefore, complete thermal monitoring of a transformer is • System interface
IEC 61850 Ethernet
possible, e.g. hot-spot calculation of the oil temperature.
7UT613 and 7UT63x only feature full coverage of applications
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 11
PROFIBUS DP,
without external relays by the option of multiple protection MODBUS or DNP 3
functions e.g. overcurrent protection is available for each wind-
• Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)/ temperature
ing or measurement location of a transformer. Other functions
are available twice: ground-fault differential protection, breaker
monitoring (thermo-box) 12
failure protection and overload protection. Furthermore, up to • Time synchronization via IRIG-B/DCF 77
12 user-defined (flexible) protection functions may be activated
by the customer with the choice of measured voltages, currents,
power and frequency as input variables. 13
The relays provide easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The integrated programmable logic (CFC) allows the
users to implement their own functions, e.g. for the automation
of switchgear (interlocking). User-defined messages can be gen-
14
erated as well. The flexible communication interfaces are open
for modem communication architectures with control system.
15
Application
Application
1 The numerical protection relays 7UT6 are

primarily applied as differential protection
on
2 – transformers
7UT612: 2 windings
7UT613/633: 2 up to 3 windings
7UT635: 2 up to 5 windings,
– generators
3 – motors
– short line sections
– small busbars
– parallel and series reactors.
4 The user selects the type of object that
is to be protected by setting during
configuration of the relay. Subsequently,
only those parameters that are relevant
5 for this particular protected object need
to be set. This concept, whereby only
those parameters relevant to a particular
protected object need to be set, substan-
6 tially contributed to a simplification of the
setting procedure. Only a few parameters
must be set. Therefore the new 7UT6
relays also make use of and extend this
7 concept. Apart from the protected plant

objects defined in the 7UT6, a further
differential protection function allows the
protection of
8 – single busbars with up to 12 feeders.

The well-proven differential measuring
algorithm of the 7UT51 relay is also
used in the new relays, so that a similar
9 response with regard to short-circuit
detection, tripping time saturation detec-
tion and inrush restraint is achieved.
10
11
12 Fig. 8/2 Function diagram
13
14
15
Application
Protection functions ANSI No. Three-phase Single-phase Auto- Generator/ Busbar, Busbar,
1
7UT613/33
transformer transformer trans- Motor 3-phase 1-phase
7UT612
7UT635
former
Differential protection
Ground-fault differential protection
87T/G/M/L
87 N
1
1
1
2
1
2

*)

–

–
2
Overcurrent-time protection, phases 50/51 1 3 3 –
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 50/51N 1 3 3 – –
Overcurrent-time protection, ground 50/51G 1 2 2 3
Overcurrent-time protection, 1 1 1
single-phase
Negative-sequence protection 46 1 1 1 – –
Overload protection IEC 60255-8 49 1 2 2 – 4
Overload protection IEC 60354 49 1 2 2 –
Overexcitation protection *) V/Hz 24 – 1 –
Overvoltage protection *) V> 59 – 1 – – –
Undervoltage protection *) V< 27 – 1 – – – 5
Frequency protection *) f>, f< 81 – 1 – – –
Reverse power protection *) -P 32R – 1 – – –
Forward power protection*) P>, P< 32F – 1 – – –
Fuse failure protection 60FL – 1 – – – 6
Breaker failure protection 50 BF 1 2 2 –
External temperature monitoring 38
(thermo-box)
Lockout 86 7
Measured-value supervision
Trip circuit supervision 74 TC

Direct coupling 1
Direct coupling 2 8
Operational measured values
Flexible protection functions 27, 32, 47, – 12 12
Function applicable
50, 55, 59, 81
9
– Function not applicable in this application
*) Only 7UT613/63x
10
Construction
The 7UT6 is available in three housing widths referred to a

11
19" module frame system. The height is 243 mm.
– ⅓ (7UT612),
– ½ (7UT613), 12
– (7UT633/635) of 19”
All cables can be connected with or without cable ring lugs.
Plug-in terminals are available as an option, it is thus possible
to employ prefabricated cable harnesses. In the case of surface 13
mounting on a panel, the connection terminals are located
LSP2236F.tif
above and below in the form of screw-type terminals. The

communication interfaces are located on the same sides of the
housing. For dimensions please refer to the dimension drawings
(part 14).
14
Fig. 8/3 Rear view flush-mountig housing 15

1 Differential protection for transformers

(ANSI 87T)
When the 7UT6 is employed as fast and
2 selective short-circuit protection for trans-

formers the following properties apply:
• Tripping characteristic according to
Fig. 8/4 with normal sensitive IDIFF> and
3 high-set trip stage IDIFF>>

• Vector group and ratio adaptation
• Depending on the treatment of the
transformer neutral point, zero-
4 sequence current conditioning can be
set with or without consideration of
the neutral current. With the 7UT6, the
star-point current at the star-point CT
5 can be measured and considered in the

vector group treatment, which increases
sensitivity by one third for single-phase
faults.
Fig. 8/4 Tripping characteristic with preset transformer parameters for three-phase faults
• Fast clearance of heavy internal trans-
6 former faults with high-set differential
element IDIFF>>.
• Restrain of inrush current with 2nd
harmonic. Cross-block function that can
7 be limited in time or switched off.
• Restrain against overfluxing with a
choice of 3rd or 5th harmonic stabiliza-
tion is only active up to a settable value
8 for the fundamental component of the
differential current.
• Additional restrain for an external fault
with current transformer saturation
9 (patented CT-saturation detector from
Fig. 8/5 3-winding transformers (1 or 3-phase)
7UT51).
• Insensitivity to DC current and current
transformer errors due to the freely
10 programmable tripping characteristic
and fundamental filtering.
• The differential protection function can
be blocked externally by means of a
11 binary input.
12
13
14
15
Sensitive protection by measurement of star-point current

(see Fig. 8/6) (ANSI 87N/87GD)
Apart from the current inputs for detection of the phase 1
currents on the sides of the protected object, the 7UT6 also
contains normal sensitivity IE and high sensitivity IEE current
measuring inputs. Measurement of the star-point current of an
grounded winding via the normal sensitivity measuring input,
and consideration of this current by the differential protection,
2
increases the sensitivity during internal single-phase faults by
33 %. If the sum of the phase currents of a winding is compared
with the star-point current measured with the normal sensitivity
input IE, a sensitive ground current differential protection can be
3
implemented (REF).
This function is substantially more sensitive than the differential
protection during faults to ground in a winding, detecting fault
currents as small as 10 % of the transformer rated current.
4
Furthermore, this relay contains a high-impedance differential Fig. 8/6 High-impedance differential protection
protection input. The sum of the phase currents is compared
with the star-point current. A voltage-dependent resistor (varis- 5
tor) is applied in shunt (see Fig. 8/6). Via the sensitive current
measuring input IEE, the voltage across the varistor is measured;
in the milli-amp range via the external resistor. The varistor and
the resistor are mounted externally. An ground fault results in a
voltage across the varistor that is larger than the voltage result-
6
ing from normal current transformer errors. A prerequisite is the
application of accurate current transformers of the class 5P (TPY)
which exhibit a small measuring error in the operational and
overcurrent range. These current transformers may not be the
7
same as used for the differential protection, as the varistor may
cause rapid saturation of this current transformers.
Both high-impedance and low-impedance REF are each available
twice (option) for transformers with two grounded windings.
8
Thus separate REF relays are not required.
Differential protection for single-phase busbars (see Fig. 8/7)

(ANSI 87L) 9
The short-circuit protection is characterized by the large number Fig. 8/7 Simple busbar protection with phase-selective configuration
of current measuring inputs. The scope of busbar protection 7UT612: 7 feeders; 7UT613/633: 9 feeders;
ranges from a few bays e.g. in conjunction with one and a half
circuit-breaker applications, to large stations having up to more
7UT635: 12 feeders
10
than 50 feeders. In particular in smaller stations, the busbar
protection arrangements are too expensive. With the 7UT6 relays
the current inputs may also be used to achieve a cost-effective
busbar protection system for up to 12 feeders (Fig. 8/7). This 11
busbar protection functions as a phase-selective protection with
1 or 5 A current transformers, whereby the protected phase
is connected. All three phases can therefore be protected by
applying three relays. Furthermore a single-phase protection can
be implemented by connecting the three-phase currents via a
12
Fig. 8/8 Generator/motor differential protection
summation transformer. The summation transformer connection
has a rated current of 100 mA.
The selectivity of the protection can be improved by monitoring
the current magnitude in all feeders, and only releasing the
After expiry of the time delay the circuit-breakers of the infeeds
to the busbar may be tripped.
13
differential protection trip command when the overcurrent Differential protection for generators and motors
condition is also met. The security measures to prevent (see Fig. 8/8) (ANSI 87G/M)
maloperation resulting from failures in the current transformer
secondary circuits can be improved in this manner. This overcur- Equal conditions apply for generators, motors and series
14
rent release may also be used to implement a breaker failure reactors. The protected zone is limited by the sets of current
protection. Should the release signal not reset within a settable transfomers at each side of the protected object.
time, this indicates that a breaker failure condition is present, as
the short-circuit was not switched off by the bay circuit-breaker. 15
Backup protection functions Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
1 Overcurrent-time protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N) One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit-
breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal
Backup protection on the transformer is achieved with a two- occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted.
stage overcurrent protection for the phase currents and 3I0 for
the calculated neutral current. This function may be configured Lockout (ANSI 86)
2 for one of the sides or measurement locations of the protected
object. The high-set stage is implemented as a definite-time
All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
stage, whereas the normal stage may have a definite-time or
in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
inverse-time characteristic. Optionally, IEC or ANSI character-
after the lockout state is reset.
3 istics may be selected for the inverse stage. The overcurrent
protection 3I0 uses the calculated zero-sequence current of the External trip coupling
configured side or measurement location.
Multiple availability: 3 times (option) For recording and processing of external trip information via
binary inputs. They are provided for information from the
4 Overcurrent-time protection for ground (ANSI 50 / 51G) Buchholz relay or specific commands and act like a protective
function. Each input initiates a fault event and can be individu-
The 7UT6 feature a separate 2-stage overcurrent-time protection
ally delayed by a timer.
for the ground. As an option, an inverse-time characteristic
according to IEC or ANSI is available. In this way, it is possible
5 to protect e.g. a resistor in the transformer star point against
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) (7UT613/633 only)
thermal overload, in the event of a single-phase short-circuit not The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
being cleared within the time permitted by the thermal rating. components of the voltages and compares them with the
Multiple availability: 3 times (option) threshold values. There are two stages available.
6 Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors
(Negative-sequence protection) and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related
instability of such machines.
Furthermore a negative-sequence protection may be defined for The function can also be used for monitoring purposes.
7 one of the sides or measurement locations. This provides sensi-
tive overcurrent protection in the event of asymmetrical faults in Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) (7UT613/633 only)
the transformer. The set pickup threshold may be smaller than
This protection prevents insulation faults that result when the
the rated current.
voltage is too high.
8 Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The
upon issuing of a trip command, another command can be measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent of
the neutral point displacement caused by ground faults.
9 initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates the
circuit-breaker, e.g., of an upstream (higher-level) protection This function is implemented in two stages.
relay.
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) (7UT613 / 633 only)
Multiple availability: 2 times (option)
10 Overexcitation protection Volt / Hertz

The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the
equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency.
(ANSI 24) (7UT613 / 633 only) It also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an unper- The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
11 missible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators or
transformers, which leads to a thermal overloading. This may
either as underfrequency or overfrequency protection. Each
stage can be delayed separately.
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with
weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character- Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
istic can be set via seven points derived from the manufacturer ing algorithm reliably identifies the fundamental waves and
12 data. determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
measurement can be blocked by using an undervoltage stage.
In addition, a definite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous
stage can be used.
13
14
15
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)

(7UT613/633 only)
The reverse-power protection monitors 1
the direction of active power flow and
picks up when the mechanical energy
fails. This function can be used for opera-
tional shutdown (sequential tripping) of
the generator but also prevents damage
2
to the steam turbines. The reverse power
Serial communication via RS485 bus or
is calculated from the positive-sequence
fiber-optic connection (possible with external converter
systems of current and voltage. Asym-
metrical power system faults therefore do
3
not cause reduced measuring accuracy.
The position of the emergency trip
LSP2376-afp.tif
valve is injected as binary information
and is used to switch between two trip 4
command delays. When applied for motor
protection, the sign (±) of the active
power can be reversed via parameters.
Forward-power protection (ANSI 32F)

max. 6 temperatures max. 6 temperatures
5
(7UT613/633 only)
Fig. 8/9 Temperature measurement and monitoring with external thermo-boxes
Monitoring of the active power produced
by a generator can be useful for starting 6
up and shutting down generators. One stage monitors exceed- The ability of the 7UT6 to monitor the thermal condition can be
ing of a limit value, while another stage monitors falling below improved by serial connection of a temperature monitoring box
another limit value. The power is calculated using the positive- (also called thermo-box or RTD-box) (Fig. 8/9). The temperature
sequence component of current and voltage. The function can
be used to shut down idling motors.
of up to 12 measuring points (connection of 2 boxes) can be
registered. The type of sensor (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120) can be
7
selected individually for each measuring point. Two alarm stages
Flexible protection functions (7UT613/63x only) are derived for each measuring point when the corresponding
For customer-specific solutions up to 12 flexible protection
functions are available and can be parameterized. Voltages,
set threshold is exceeded.
Alternatively to the conventional overload protection, the relay
8
currents, power and frequency from all measurement locations can also provide a hot-spot calculation according to IEC 60345.
can be chosen as inputs. Each protection function has a settable The hot-spot calculation is carried out separately for each leg
threshold, delay time, blocking input and can be configured as a
1-phase or 3-phase unit.
of the transformer and takes the different cooling modes of the
transformer into consideration.
9
Monitoring functions The oil temperature must be registered via the thermo-box for
the implementation of this function. An alarm warning stage
The relay comprises high-performance monitoring for the
hardware and software.
and final alarm stage is issued when the maximum hot-spot
temperature of the three legs exceeds the threshold value.
10
The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply For each transformer leg a relative rate of ageing, based on the
voltages, battery, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) ageing at 98 °C is indicated as a measured value. This value can
are all monitored. be used to determine the thermal condition and the current 11
The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage thermal reserve of each transformer leg. Based on this rate of
due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids ageing, a remaining thermal reserve is indicated in % for the
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection hottest spot before the alarm warning and final alarm stage is
functions. (7UT613/633 only) reached. 12
Thermal monitoring of transformers
The importance of reducing the costs of transmitting and
distributing energy by optimizing the system load has resulted in
the increased importance of monitoring the thermal condition of
13
transformers. This monitoring is one of the tasks of the monitor-
ing systems, designed for medium and large transformers.
Overload protection based on a simple thermal model, and using
only the measured current for evaluation, has been integrated in
14
differential protection systems for a number of years.
15
Measured values
1 The operational measured values and sta-

tistic value registering in the 7UT6, apart
from the registration of phase currents and
voltages (7UT613/633 only) as primary and
secondary values, comprises the following:
2 • Currents 3-phase IL1, IL2, IL3, I1, I2, 3I0
for each side and measurement location
• Currents 1-phase I1 to I12 for each feeder
and further inputs Ix1 to Ix4
3 • Voltages 3-phase VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3,
VL3L1, V1, V2, V0 and 1-phase VEN, V4
• Phase angles of all 3-phase / 1-phase
4 currents and voltages
• Power Watts, Vars, VA/P, Q, S (P, Q: total
and phase selective)
• Power factor (cos φ),
5 • Frequency
LSP2821.tif
• Energy + kWh, + kVarh, forward and
reverse power flow
• Min./max. and mean values of VPH-PH,
6 VPHE, VE, V0, V1, V2, IPH, I1, I2, 3I0, IDIFF, Fig. 8/10 Commissioning via a standard Web browser: Phasor diagram
IRESTRAINT, S, P, Q, cos φ, f
7 • Registration of the interrupted currents

and counter for protection trip com-
mands
• Mean operating temperature of over-
8 load function
• Measured temperatures of external
thermo-boxes
• Differential and restraint currents of
9 differential protection and REF
Metered values
For internal metering, the unit can
10 calculate an energy metered value from
the measured current and voltage values.
The 7UT6 relays may be integrated into
monitoring systems by means of the
11 diverse communication options available
in the relays. An example for this is the
LSP2821.tif
connection to the SITRAM transformer

monitoring system with PROFIBUS DP
12 interface.
Fig. 8/11 Commissioning via a standard Web browser:Operating characteristic
Commissioning and operating aids
Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by All measured currents and voltages (7UT613/633 only) of the
13 DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The
transformer can be indicated as primary or secondary values.
The differential protection bases its pickup thresholds on the
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect rated currents of the transformer. The referred differential and
devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay stabilising (restraint) currents are available as measured values
controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide- per phase.
14 ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
If a thermo-box is connected, registered temperature values
information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
may also be displayed. To check the connection of the relay to
the primary current and voltage transformers, a commissioning
15 indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
to a control and protection system.
measurement is provided.

This measurement function works with only 5 to 10 % of the Automation / user-defined logic
transformer rated current and indicates the current and the
angle between the currents and voltages (if voltages applied).
Termination errors between the primary current transfomers
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or 1
and input transformers of the relay are easily detected in this
manner.
The operating state of the protection may therefore be checked
online at any time. The fault records of the relay contain the
Switching authority 2
phase and ground currents as well as the calculated differential communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
and restraint currents. The fault records of the 7UT613/633
relays also contain voltages. If a source is set to “LOCAL”, only local switching operations are
3
Browser-based commissioning aid down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”
The 7UT6 provides a commissioning and test program which Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
runs under a standard internet browser and is therefore
independent of the configuration software provided by the
in the status indication memory. The switch command source,
4
manufacturer. and result of a switching operation are retained.
For example, the correct vector group of the transformer may
be checked. These values may be displayed graphically as vector
diagrams.
Assignment of feedback to command
5
The stability check in the operating characteristic is available as inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
well as event log and trip log messages. Remote control can be
used if the local front panel cannot be accessed.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
6
it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position).
Control and automation functions
Chatter disable
Control
7
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
support all control and monitoring functions that are required exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
excessive operations. 8
processes. Filter time
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be All binary indications can be subjected to a filter time (indication
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the
suppression). 9
OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit- Indication filtering and delay
breaker or auxiliary contact position.
Indications can be filtered or delayed.
10
– binary inputs indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
– substation control and protection system tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
– DIGSI 4 event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
11
Command processing present after this time.
All the functionality of command processing is offered. This Indication derivation

or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an
12
hardware and software, checking of the external process, existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and volume of information to the system interface can thus be
13
trip contacts A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
transfer of information to the control center during work on a
• User-definable bay interlocks
circuit bay. 14
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- Test operation
ing switches
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by
automatic control system for test purposes. 15
combination with existing information

Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization
of standards common in energy automation. The design of
the communication modules permits interchangeability on the
2 one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
standards (for example, Industrial Ethernet).
Local PC interface
3 The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits

quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
commissioning.
4 Rear-mounted interfaces
Two communication modules located on the rear of the unit Fig. 8/12 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
incorporate optional equipment complements and readily permit connection or fiber-optic connection
5 retrofitting. They assure the ability to comply with the require-

ments of different communication interfaces.
• Service interface (Port C/Port D)
6 In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
operated with DIGSI 4. On connection of a modem, remote
control is possible. Via this interface communication with
thermo-boxes is executed.
7 • System interface (Port B)
This interface is used to carry out communication with a
control or protection and control system and supports a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs, depending
8 on the module connected.
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser

In the case of the 7UT6, a PC with a standard browser can be
9 connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface
(refer to “Commissioning program”). The relays include a small
Web server and send their HTML-pages to the browser via an
established dial-up network connection. Fig. 8/13 Bus structure for station buswith Ethernet
10 Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication

und IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the Safe bus architecture
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different • RS485 bus
11 communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols
(IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS
With this data transmission via copper conductors electro-
RTU, DNP 3, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
system continues to operate without any disturbances.
12 • Fiber-optic double ring circuit

The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag-
netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
units, the communication system continues to operate without
13 disturbance.
It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2163-afpen.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide stan-
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply 1
corporations. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support
this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
the units via the Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI.
2
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for 3
the efficient communication in the protected area.
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection device
manufacturers and is used worldwide. Fig. 8/14 RS232 / RS485 electrical communication module
PROFIBUS DP
4
PROFIBUS DP is an industry-recognized standard for communica-
LSP2162-afpen.tif
tions and is supported by a number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers. 5
MODBUS RTU
MODBUS RTU is an industry-recognized standard for communica-
tions and is supported by a number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
6
DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol Version 3) is a messaging-
based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully
7
Level 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. Fig. 8/15 820 nm fiber-optic communication module
DNP 3.0 is supported by a number of protection device manu-
facturers.
8
9
LSP2164-afp.tif
10
Fig. 8/16 PROFIBUS communication module, optical double-ring
11
12
LSP3.01-0021.tif
13
14
Fig. 8/17 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850 with
integrated Ethernet switch
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and

station control
1 Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used
with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost
electrical RS485 bus, or interference-free
2 via the optical double ring, the units
exchange information with the control
system.
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103
3 interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by
fiber-optic link. Through this interface,
the system is open for the connection
4 of units of other manufacturers
(see Fig. 8/12).
Because of the standardized interfaces,
SIPROTEC units can also be integrated
5 into systems of other manufacturers or
in SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical
interfaces are available. The optimum
physical data transfer medium can be
6 chosen thanks to opto-electrical con-
verters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows
low-cost wiring in the cubicles and an
interference-free optical connection to
7 the master can be established.
8 is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
systems (see Fig. 8/13).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
Fig. 8/19 Standard connection to a transformer without neutral current measurement 5
10
Fig. 8/20 Connection to a transformer with neutral current measurement
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
7 Fig. 8/21 Connection of transformer differential protection with high impedance REF (I8)
and neutral current measurement at I7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
5
Fig. 8/22 Connection example to a single-phase power transformer with current
transformer between starpoint and grounding point
10
Fig. 8/23 Connection example to a single-phase power transformer with only one
current transformer (right side)
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
5
Fig. 8/24 Connection to a three-phase auto-transformer with current transformer
between starpoint and grounding point
6
10
11 Fig. 8/25 Generator or motor protection
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
6
Fig. 8/26 Connection 7UT612 as single-phase busbar protection for 7 feeders, illustrated for phase L1
7
10
11
12
13
Fig. 8/27 Connection 7UT612 as busbar protection for feeders, connected via external summation current transformers (SCT) – 14
partial illustration for feeders 1, 2 and 7
15
Typical connections
8
Fig. 8/28 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-winding power transformer
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
10
11
12
Fig. 8/29 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-winding power transformer with current transformers between starpoint
and grounding point, additional connection for high-impedance protection; IX3 connected as high-sensitivity input
13
14
15
Typical connections
9 Fig. 8/30 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-phase auto-transformer

with three-winding and current transformer between starpoint and grounding point
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
10
Fig. 8/31 Connection example 7UT635 for a three-winding power transformer
with 5 measurement locations (3-phase) and neutral current measurement
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
3
Fig. 8/32 Voltage transformer connection to 3 star-connected voltage transformers (7UT613 and 7UT633 only)
7
Fig. 8/33 Voltage transformer connection to 3 star-connected voltage transformers with additional delta winding
8 (e-n-winding) (7UT613 and 7UT633 only)
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Switching capacity

Make 1000 W / VA
Analog inputs
Break
Break (with resistive load)
30 VA
40 W
1
Rated current 0.1 or 1 or 5 A Break (with L/R w 50 ms) 25 W
(selectable by jumper, 0.1 A) Switching voltage 250 V
Power consumption
In CT circuits
7UT
612 613 633 635
Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous 2
with IN = 1 A; in VA approx. 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.05 Operating time, approx.
with IN = 5 A; in VA approx. 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 NO contact 8 ms
with IN = 0.1 A; in VA approx. 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 NO/NC contact (selectable) 8 ms
sensitive input; in VA approx.
Overload capacity
0.05
IN
0.05 0.05 0.05 Fast NO contact
High-speed*) NO trip outputs
5 ms
< 1 ms
3
In CT circuits LEDs
Thermal (r.m.s.) 100 IN for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s Quantity 7UT
Dynamic (peak value)

4 IN continuous
250 IN (half cycle) RUN (green)
612
1
613
1
633
1
635
1
4
In CT circuits for ERROR (red) 1 1 1 1
highly sensitive input IEE LED (red), function can 7 14 14 14
Thermal 300 A for 1 s be assigned
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
Unit design 5
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions please refer
Dynamic 750 A (half cycle)
to dimension drawings part 14
Rated voltage (7UT613/633 only) 80 to 125 V
Degree of protection
Power consumption per phase ≤ 0.1 VA
at 100 V
acc. to IEC 60529
For the device
6
Overload capacity in surface-mounting housing IP 51
Thermal (r.m.s.) 230 V continuous in flush-mounting housing
Auxiliary voltage front IP 51
Rated voltage DC 24 to 48 V
DC 60 to 125 V
rear
For personal safety
IP 50
IP 2x with closed protection cover
7
DC 110 to 250 V and Housing 7UT
AC 115 V (50/60 Hz), AC 230 V 612 613 633 635
Permissible tolerance
Superimposed AC voltage
-20 to +20 %
≤ 15 %
Size, referred to 19” frame
Weight, in kg
1/3 1/2 1/1 1/1
8
(peak-to-peak) Flush-mounting housing 5.1 8.7 13.8 14.5
Surface-mounting housing 9.6 13.5 22.0 22.7
Power consumption (DC/AC) 7UT
612 613 633 635
Quiescent; in W approx. 5 6/12 6/12 6/12 Electrical tests 9
Energized; in W approx. 7 12/19 20/28 20/28 Specifications
depending on design
Standards IEC 60255 (Product standards)
Bridging time during ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
failure of the auxiliary voltage
Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms
UL 508 10
Insulation tests
Binary inputs
Standards EC 60255-5 and 60870-2-1
Functions are freely assignable
Voltage test (100 % test)
Quantity marshallable 7UT
612 613 633 635
All circuits except for auxiliary
supply, binary inputs and
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz / 60 Hz 11
3 5 21 29 communication interfaces
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar Auxiliary voltage and binary DC 3.5 kV
Minimum pickup threshold
Ranges are settable by means of
DC 19 or 88 V (bipolar) inputs (100 % test)
RS485/RS232 rear side 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
12
jumpers for each binary input communication interfaces
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V and time synchronization
interface (100 % test)
Output relay
Impulse voltage test (type test)
All circuits except for 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 ms; 0.5 J
13
Command / indication / communication interfaces 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
alarm relay and time synchronization at intervals of 5 s
interface, class III
Quantity
each with 1 NO contact
7UT
612 613 633 635 14
(marshallable) 4 8 24 24
1 alarm contact, with 1 NO or
NC contact (not marshallable)
*) With high-speed contacts all operating times are reduced by 4.5 ms.
15
Technical data
Electrical tests (cont’d) Mechanical stress tests
1 EMC tests for interference immunity

Standards IEC 60255-6, 60255-22
During operation
(product standards) Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
EN 6100-6-2 (generic standard)
DIN 57435 / Part 303 Vibration Sinusoidal
2 High frequency test

2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s;
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm amplitu-
de; 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep 1 octave/min.
DIN 57435 / Part 303, class III Ri = 200 Ω 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air Shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities;
3 EN 61000-4-2, class IV 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
3 shocks each in both directions of
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; the 3 axes
frequency sweep, 80 % AM; 1 kHZ Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-3, Seismic vibration
4 IEC 61000-4-3 class III
Irradiation with RF field, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz,
modulated, single frequencies, 80 % AM; (vertical axis)
IEC 60255-22-3, duration > 10 s 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-3, class III (horizontal axis)
5 Irradiation with RF field, pulse-
modulated, single frequencies, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
(vertical axis)
IEC 60255-22-3, IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; frequency sweep 1 octave/min
ENV 50204, class III duty cycle 50 % PM 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
During transport
6 Fast transients interference, bursts
IEC 60255-22-4 and
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
burst length = 15 ms;
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
repetition rate 300 ms; both
High-energy surge voltages polarities;
7 (SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5,
installation class III
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
Impulse: 1.2/50 ms
Auxiliary supply Shock Half-sinusoidal
Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
8 Analog inputs, binary inputs,
2kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
the 3 axes
Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
binary outputs 1kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF
Common (longitude) mode: IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
2kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
9 Line-conducted HF, amplitude- Differential (transversal) mode:
1kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
in both directions
modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III

10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; Climatic stress tests
1 kHz Temperatures
10 EMC tests for interference immunity (cont’d)
Magnetic field with power 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1
-25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
frequency 3 s; 50 Hz, 0.5 mT; 50 Hz Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C / -4 °F to +158 °F
IEC 61000-4-8, IEC 60255-6 class IV temperature, tested for 96 h

capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 μs;
Damped wave; 400 surges per
Recommended permanent
-5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
second; duration 2 s; Ri = 200 Ω IEC 60255-6

Fast transient surge withstand 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst 15 ms; (Legibility of display may be
capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 repetition rate 300 ms; impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
12 both polarities; duration 1 min.;

Ri = 80 Ω
permanent storage
-25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to +131 °F
– Limiting temperature during- -25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F

Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
transport
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10
MHz and Humidity
13 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω Permissible humidity stress
It is recommended to arrange the
Yearly average ≤ 75 % relative
humidity; on 56 days in the year
EMC tests for interference emission (type test)
units in such a way that they are up to 93 % relative humidity;
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard)
not exposed to direct sunlight or ondensation not permitted
Conducted interference, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
14 only auxiliary supply
IEC-CISPR 22
Limit class B
Radio interference field strenght 30 to 1000 MHz

IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B



7UT612 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Housing ⅓ x 19"; 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 live status contact, 7 I, IEE
7UT612 - - A0-
1
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 see next
page 2
DC 60 to 125 V1), binary input threshold 19 V2)
DC 110 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5 3
DC 220 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V1,2,3) 6
Unit design
For panel surface mounting, two-tier terminals on top and bottom
For panel flush mounting, plug-in terminals (2/3-pole AMP connector)
B 4
D
For panel flush mounting, screw-type terminals, (direct wiring/ring lugs) E
Region-specific default settings/function and language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language German; selectable A
5
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC, language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language Spanish; selectable E 6
System interface (Port B ) on rear
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232
1
2
7
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
PROFIBUS DP Slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0A
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double loop, ST connector4)
MODBUS, electrical RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0D
8
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0G
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100)
9
9
L 0H
L 0 R
9
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100)5) 9 L 0 S
10
11
12
13
1) With plug-in jumper one of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected 4) Not possible with surface mounting housing (position 9 = B). For the 14
2) For each binary input one of 2 pick-up threshold ranges can be surface mounted version, please order a device with the appropriate
selected with plug-in jumper electrical RS485 interface and accessories as stated in A.1under
„External converters“
3) Ordering option 6 only for V4.6 and higher
5) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = B.
15
1 7UT612 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
DIGSI 4 / browser / modem interface (Port C) on rear/temperature monitoring box connection

7UT612 - - A0
No DIGSI 4 port 0
DIGSI 4 / browser, electrical RS232 1
2 DIGSI 4 / browser or temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485
DIGSI 4 / browser or temperature monitoring box, 820 nm fiber optic, ST connector
2
3
Functions
3 Measured values/monitoring functions

Basic measured values 1
Basic measured values, transformer monitoring functions
(connection to thermo-box/hot spot acc. to IEC, overload factor)1) 4
4 Differential protection + basic functions

Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
Overload protection for one winding (49), Lockout (86)
Overcurrent-time protection (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
5 Overcurrent-time protection (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)

Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional functions

Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance (87N)
6 Restricted ground fault protection, high impedance (87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Trip circuit supervision (74TC), breaker failure protection (50BF), unbalanced load protection (46) B
10
11
12
13
14
15 1) Only in connection with position 12 = 2 or 3


7UT613 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Housing ½ x19"; 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact, 11 I, IEE1)
7UT613 - - -
1
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 see next page
2
DC 60 to 125 V1), binary input threshold 19 V2)
DC 110 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5 3
DC 220 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V1,2) 6
Unit design
Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, ½ x 19”, 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact
Flush mounting housing, ½ x 19”, with plug-in terminals, 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact
B 4
D
Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, ½ x 19”, 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact E
Region-specific default settings/language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language German; selectable A
5
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC, language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language French; selectable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language Spanish; selectable
D
E
6
No system interface
0
1 7
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485 2
PROFIBUS DP Slave, electrical RS485
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector3)
9
9
L 0A
L 0 B
8
MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0D
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)
9
9
L 0G
L 0H
9
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Etherent, optical, ST-connector4) 9 L 0 S
10
11
12
13
1) One of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper 3) Not possible with surface mounting housing (position 9 = B). For the
14
2) For each binary input one of 2 pick-up threshold ranges can be surface mounted version, please order a device with the appropriate
selected with plug-in jumper. electrical RS485 interface and accessories in accordance with A.1
under „External Converters“
4) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = B. 15
1 7UT613 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Port C and Port D

7UT613 - - -
Port C: DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty 1

Port C: DIGSI 4 / modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485; Port D: empty 2
2 Port C and Port D installed 9 M

3 DIGSI 4 / modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485 2
Port D (additional interface)

Thermo-box, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) A
Thermo-box, electrical RS485 F
4 Measured values /monitoring functions
Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values 2
5 Extended measured values, min./max., mean values, transformer monitoring functions
(connection to thermo-box/hot spot, overload factor)2) 4
Differential protection + basic functions

Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
6 Overload protection according to IEC for one side (49)
Lock out (86)
Overcurrent-time protection phases (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)
7 Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional current functions

Restricted ground-fault protection, low impedance (87N)
8 Restricted ground-fault protection, high impedance
(87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
Unbalanced load protection (46)
9 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
High-sensitivity overcurrent-time protection/tank leakage protection (64), O/C 1-phase B
Additional voltage functions
10 Without voltage functions

With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy/measurement
A
B
With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy measurement
+ Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
11 + Frequency protection (81)
+ Directional power protection (32R/F)
+ Fuse failure monitor (60FL) C
12 Additional functions (general)

Without 0
Multiple protection functions (50, 51, 50N/G, 87N, 50BF, 49)1) 1
Flexible protection functions 2
13 Multiple + flexible protection functions 3
14
15 1) In case of a connection to a RTD box 7XV5662-xAD10, a RS485-LWL

converter 7XV5650-0xA00 is required.
2) Only in connection with position 12 = 2 or 9 and Mxx
(supplementary)


7UT63 differential protection relay
for transformers, generators,motors and busbars, graphic display
7UT63 - - -
1
Housing, inputs and outputs
Housing x 19”, 21 BI, 24 BO, 1 live status contact, 12 current inputs (11 I, IEE);
4 voltage inputs (1 x 3-phase + 1 x 1-phase)
Housing x 19”, 29 BI, 24 BO, 1 live status contact, 16 current inputs (14 I, 2 IEE)
3
5
see next page
2
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 3
DC 60 to 125 V 1), binary input threshold 19 V2)
DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5
4
DC 220 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V2) 6
Unit design
Surface-mounting with two-tier terminals B 5
Flush-mounting with plug-in terminals D
Flush-mounting with screw-type terminals E
Surface-mounting with two-tier terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts
Flush-mounting with plug-in terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts
N
P
6
Flush-mounting with screw-type terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts Q
Region-specific default settings/language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language German; selectable A 7
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language French; selectable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language Spanish; selectable
D
E 8
1 9
2
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820, double ring, ST connector3) 9 L 0 B 10
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) 9
L 0G
L 0H 11
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, LC-connector4) 9 L 0 S
12
13
1) One of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper 3) Not possible with surface mounting housing (position 9 = B).
For the surface mounted version, please order a device with the
14
2) For each binary input one of 2 pick-up threshold ranges can be
selected with plug-in jumper appropriate electrical RS485 interface and accessories in accordance
with A. under „External Converters“
4) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = B.
15
1 7UT63 differential protection relay

for transformers, generators,motors and busbars, graphic display
7UT63 - - -
Port C and Port D

Port C: DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty 1
2 Port C: DIGSI 4/modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485; Port D: empty

Port C and Port D installed
2
9 M

DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232
3 DIGSI 4/modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485
1
2

Thermo-box, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) A
4 Thermo-box, electrical RS485 F
Measured values/monitoring functions

5 Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values

Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values,
2
transformer monitoring functions (connection to thermo-box/hot spot, overload factor)2) 4
Differential protection + basic functions

6 Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
Overload protection according to IEC for one side (49)
Lock out (86)
Overcurrent-time protection phases (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)
7 Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional current functions
Restricted ground-fault protection, low impedance (87N)
Restricted ground-fault protection, high impedance
8 (87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
Unbalanced load protection (46)
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
High-sensitivity overcurrent-time protection/tank leakage protection (64), O/C 1-phase
9 Additional voltage functions (only with 7UT633)
B
Without voltage functions A

With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy/measurement B
10 With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy measurement
+ Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
+ Frequency protection (81)
+ Directional power protection (32R/F)
+ Fuse failure monitor (6FL) C
11 Additional functions (general)
Without 0
Multiple protection functions (50, 51, 50N/G, 87N, 50BF, 49)3) 1
12 Flexible protection functions

Multiple + flexible protection functions
2
3
13
14
1) In case of a connection to a RTD box 7XV5662-xAD10, a RS485-LWL 3) Available if selected on position 14.
converter 7XV5650-0xA00 is required.
15 2) Only in connection with position 12 = 2 or 9 and Mxx

(supplementary)

Connecting cable
1
and protection relay (9-pin connector)
Cable between thermo-box and relay
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05 2
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50

Rated current 1.6 A; 3
thermal overload release 1.6 A;
Temperature monitoring box with 6 thermal inputs

For SIPROTEC units
4
With 6 temperature sensors and AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
RS485 interface AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Manual for 7UT6x

English V4.6 C53000-G1176-C230-2
5
German V4.6 C53000-G1100-C230-3
Turkey V4.6 C53000-G115A-C230-1
Manual for 7UT612 6

English C53000-G1176-C148-1
Manual for 7UT6

English V4.0
English V4.6
C53000-G1176-C160-1
C53000-G1176-C160-2
7
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier Fig.

8
package

9
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 8/36
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1
0-827397-1
4000
1
1)
1) 10
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 1)
0-163084-2 1 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
1)
Crimping
tool
For type III+
and matching female
For CI2
0-539635-1
0-539668-2
0-734372-1
1
1
1)
1)
11
Fig. 8/35 Fig. 8/36

19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 8/34
12
links For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 8/38
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens 13
Fig. 8/37 Fig. 8/38
Short-circuit link
for current contacts
Short-circuit link
for voltage contacts/
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
Fig. 8/40a
7
Separation of common circuit of fast BO1 to BO5
with jumpers X80, X81, X82. Switching
of fast BO7, BO8 as NO contact or NC contact
with jumpers X41, X42, X43. 8
10
11
12
13
14
1) Configuration of binary outputs up to hardware-version .../CC
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 8/40a.
Fig. 8/40 Connection diagram 7UT613 15

Connection diagram
7 Fig. 8/41a
Separation of common circuit of
fast BO1 to BO5 with jumpers X80,
X81, X82. Switching of fast BO7,
8 BO8 as NO contact or NC contact
with jumpers X41, X42, X43
10
11
12
13
1) Configuration of binary outputs up to
14 hardware-version .../CC
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 8/41a.
2) High-speed contacts (option), NO only
3) High-speed contacts (option)
15 Fig. 8/41 Connection diagram 7UT63

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
1) High-speed contacts (option), NO only
2) High-speed contacts (option)
Fig. 8/42 Connection diagram 7UT635 part 1; continued on following page 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 8/43 Connection diagram 7UT635 part 2

Busbar Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar

and breaker failure protection 9/3
9
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Busbar Differential Protection / 7SS52
SIPROTEC 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar and breaker failure protection
Function overview
Busbar protection functions 1

• Busbar differential protection
• Selective zone tripping
• Very short tripping time (<15 ms)
• Extreme stability against external fault,
2
short saturation-free time (≥ 2 ms)
• Phase-segregated measuring systems
• Integrated check zone 3
• 48 bays can be configured
• 12 busbar sections can be protected
LSP2392-afpen.tif
• Bay-selective intertripping 4
Breaker failure protection functions
• Breaker failure protection (single-phase
with/without current)
• 5 operation modes, selectable per bay
5
• Separate parameterization possible for
busbar and line faults
Fig. 9/1 SIPROTEC 7SS52 busbar protection system
• Independently settable delay times for
all operation modes
6
• 2-stage operation bay trip repeat/trip busbar
Description
• Intertrip facility (via teleprotection interface)
The SIPROTEC 7SS52 numerical protection is a selective, reliable • “Low-current” mode using the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts 7
and fast protection for busbar faults and breaker failure in
medium, high and extra-high voltage substations with various Additional protection functions
possible busbar configurations. • End-fault protection with intertrip or bus zone trip
The protection is suitable for all switchgear types with iron-core • Backup overcurrent protection per bay unit (definite-time or 8
or linearized current transformers. The short tripping time is inverse-time)
especially advantageous for applications with high fault levels or • Independent breaker failure protection per bay unit
where fast fault clearance is required for power system stability.
The modular hardware allows the protection to be optimally
Features 9
matched to the busbar configuration. The decentralized arrange- • Distributed or centralized installation
ment allows the cabling costs in the substation to be drastically • Easy expansion capability
reduced. The 7SS52 busbar protection caters for single, double
or triple busbar systems with or without and quadruple busbar
• Integrated commissioning aids
• Centralized user-friendly configuration / parameterization
10
systems without transfer bus with up to: 48 bays,
with DIGSI
16 bus couplers, and 24 sectionalizing disconnectors and 12 • Universal hardware
busbar sections.
11
• FO interface
• Electrical interface
– IEC 61850 protocol with EN 100 module (firmware V4.6)
12
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar

and breaker failure protection system is
a selective, reliable and fast protection
for busbar faults and breaker failure in
2 medium, high and extra-high voltage
substations with various possible busbar
configurations. The protection is suitable
for all switchgear types with iron-core or
3 linearized current transformers. The short
tripping time is especially advantageous
for applications with high fault levels or
where fast fault clearance is required for
LSA2180-bgpen.eps
power system stability.
4 The modular hardware design allows
the protection system to be optimally
matched to the busbar configuration.
5 The distributed arrangement allows the
cabling costs between bay and substation
to be drastically reduced. The 7SS52 bus-
bar protection caters for single, double,
6 triple and quadruple busbar systems with
or without transfer bus with up to:
– 48 bays
– 16 bus couplers
7 – 24 sectionalizing disconnectors
– 12 busbar sections
1) Feeder currents, disconnector status trip commands
2) Disconnector status
8 Fig. 9/2 Distributed system structure
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/3 Protection functions of the central unit and the bay units
15
Construction
Construction
The distributed bay units measure the 1

3 phase currents in each bay. The rated
input current is 1 or 5 A and therefore
eliminates the need for interposing
current transformers. The disconnector
status, breaker failure protection trig-
2
LSP2377-afpen.tif
gering, bay out-of- service and other
bay status information is derived via
marshallable binary inputs in the bay
units. The complete information exchange
3
is conveyed to the central unit via a fiber-
optic interface. The bay unit also has an
interface on the front side for connection
to a PC for operation and diagnosis. The 4
trip and intertrip commands are issued via Fig. 9/4 7SS522 central unit – front view of SIPAC subrack version
trip contacts in the bay units. The 7XP20
standard housing is available in a flush or
surface mounting version (7SS523). 5
The central unit is connected to the bay
units via fiber-optic communication links.
The connection is built up in a star con-
figuration. The central unit also contains 6
serial ports for system configuration via
PC or communication with a substation
control system, an integrated LC Display
7
LSP2803.tif
with keypad and marshallable binary
inputs, LEDs and alarm relays. The central
unit is available in a 19" SIPAC module
rack version for either cubicle or wall
mounting.
8
Because of its modular hardware design,
it is easy to adapt the central unit to the
substation or to expand it with further Fig. 9/5 7SS522 central unit – rear view
modules each being connected with up to
8 bay units.
9
Each bay unit and the central unit has its
own internal power supply.
10
11
LSP2076-afp.tif
LSP2516.tif
12
Fig. 9/6 7SS523 bay unit – front view of

panel / flush / cubicle mounting unit
Fig. 9/7 7SS525 bay unit – front view of
panel/flush/cubicle mounting unit
13
14
15
1 Busbar protection
The main function of the 7SS52 is busbar protection, and has
the following characteristics:
2 • Evaluation of differential currents, with stabilization by

through-currents based on the proven performance of the
Siemens busbar protection 7SS1 and 7SS50/51, currently in
service worldwide
3 • Selective busbar protection for busbars with up to 12 busbar

sections and 48 bays
The pickup characteristic can be set independently for selective busbar
• Integrated “check zone” (evaluation of all busbar section cur- protection, for the “check zone” and for the breaker failure protection.
rents without use of the disconnector replica)
4 • Very short tripping time (15 ms typical)
• Selective detection of short-circuits, also for faults on the
Fig. 9/8 Standard characteristic
transfer bus, with transfer trip to the remote end.

• Detection and clearance of faults between the current trans-
5 former and the circuit-breaker via current measurement and
selective unbalancing.
• Tripping only when all three fault detection modules recognize
a busbar fault (2 measurement processors and check zone
6 processor)
• No special CT requirements (stability is guaranteed, even when
the CTs saturate after 2 ms)
• Selective output tripping relays per feeder in bay units.
7 Mode of operation
The 7SS52 protection relay offers complete numerical measured- Fig. 9/9 Ground-fault characteristic
value processing from sampling to digital conversion of the
8 measured variables through to the circuit-breaker tripping
decision. The bay units dispose of sufficient powerful contacts to Breaker failure protection
directly trip the circuit-breaker. The 7SS52 protection includes an integrated breaker failure
For each busbar section and for all three phases, two indepen- protection with the following features:
9 dent processors execute the protection algorithm on alternate • Five breaker failure protection modes that are selectable:
data samples. Based on the proven performance of the 7SS1 and
1. Following the issue of a trip signal from a feeder protection,
7SS50/51, this method of measurement ensures highest stability
the busbar protection monitors the drop-off of the trip signal.
even in case of high short-circuit currents and CT saturation.
10 In addition, an disconnector status independent check-zone
If the feeder current is not interrupted before a set time delay
the polarity of the feeder current is reversed, which results in
measurement is executed on a further processor thus increasing a differential current in the corresponding section of the bus
the protection against unwanted operation. All three processors protection. For this function, a separate parameter set is used.
must reach a trip decision independently before the trip com-
11 mand is released.
2. Following a trip signal from a feeder protection, a trip signal
will be output after a settable time delay from the 7SS52
The disconnector status is monitored using normally open and protection to the corresponding feeder circuit-breaker. If this
normally closed contacts to enable plausibility checks for both second trip signal is also unsuccessful, the unbalancing proce-
12 status and transition time. The contact monitoring voltage is

also supervised.
dure according to mode 1) as described above will take place.
3. With external stand-alone breaker failure protection, the
In case of an auxiliary voltage failure in the bay, the latest disconnector replica of the 7SS52 may be used to selectively
disconnector status is stored and a bay-selective indication of trip the busbar section with the faulty circuit-breaker.
13 the failure is issued.
4. Following a trip signal from the feeder protection, the 7SS52
The assignment of the feeder currents to the corresponding monitors the drop-off of the trip signal. If, after a settable
busbar systems is controlled by software via the disconnector time, the current does not fall below a settable limiting value,
replica. The disconnector replica is applied for both busbar busbar-selective feeder trip commands are issued with the help
14 protection and breaker failure protection. of the disconnector replica within the 7SS52.
The integrated breaker failure protection function provides 5. Following a trip signal from a feeder protection, a trip
phase-segregated two-stage operation (bay-specific trip repeat, signal will be output after a settable time delay from the
trip bus section). Alternatively, an external breaker failure 7SS52 protection to the corresponding feeder circuit-breaker.
15 protection relay can issue its trip commands via the disconnector
replica in the 7SS52.
If this second trip signal is also unsuccessful, the tripping as
described under 4) will take place.

• For single-pole or multi-pole starting,

delay times are available.
• Breaker failure detection following 1
a busbar fault by comparison of the
measured current with a set value.
• For all modes of breaker failure protec-
tion, a transfer trip command output 2
contact is provided for each feeder to
initiate remote tripping.
Sensitive tripping characteristic

3
In some applications, e.g. within resistive
grounded networks, single-phase short-
circuit currents are limited to rated
current values. In order to provide a
busbar protection for these cases, an
4
independent characteristic is available.
This characteristic presents separate
parameters for the pickup threshold, as
well as for a limitation of efficiency. The 5
activation of the characteristic takes place
LSP2516.tif
by means of a binary input in the central
unit, e.g. by recognizing a displacement
voltage. 6
End-fault protection Fig. 9/10 Fault record
The location of the current transformer
normally limits the measuring range of 7
the busbar protection. When the circuit-
breaker is open, the area located between
the current transformer and the circuit-
breaker can be optimally protected by
means of the end-fault protection. In the
8
event of a fault, depending on the mount-
ing position of the current transformer,
instantaneous and selective tripping of
the busbar section or intertripping of the
9
circuit-breaker at the opposite end occurs.
Backup protection
As an option, a two-stage backup
10
protection, independent of the busbar
protection is included in every bay unit.
This backup protection is completed by
LSP2516.tif
means of a breaker failure protection. The 11

parametrization and operation can be
carried out in the central unit or locally
in each bay unit with the DIGSI operating
program.
Fig. 9/11 DIGSI plant monitoring
12
Disconnector replica • By the assignment “NOT open = closed”, the disconnector is
taken to be CLOSED during the transition time.
The disconnector replica is used for both the busbar protection
and the breaker failure protection.
Accurate matching of the disconnector auxiliary contacts with
the main contact is not required. 13
The following features characterize the disconnector replica • Menu-guided graphic configuration with DIGSI operating
function: program.
• Includes up to 48 bays and 12 busbar sections
• Integrated bi-stable disconnector status characteristic (status
• LEDs in the bay modules indicate the actual status of the
busbar disconnector.
14
stored on loss of auxiliary power). • Dynamic visualization of the substation with DIGSI on the
• Disconnector transition time monitoring. central unit.
15
Tripping command / reset • Phase-segregated trip test including control of feeder circuit-
breaker (by central or bay unit)
1 The tripping output processing for the 7SS52 protection has the
following features: • Removal of a bay from the busbar measurement processing
during feeder service and maintenance via central or bay units
• Bay-selective tripping by bay units (bay out of service)
• Settings provided for overcurrent release of the tripping com- • Blocking of breaker failure protection or tripping command for
2 mand (to enable selective tripping of infeeding circuits only)
• Settable minimum time for the trip command.
testing purposes.
• Disconnector replica freezing (maintenance) with alarm
• Current-dependent reset of the tripping command. indication (”Disconnector switching prohibition”).
• Cyclic tests of measured-value acquisition and processing and
3 Disturbance recording
trip circuit tests including coils of the command relays.
The digitized measured values from the phase currents and the
differential and stabilizing currents of the busbar sections and Event recording
check zone are stored following a trip decision by the 7SS52 or
4 following an external initiation via a binary input. Pre-trigger
and post-fault times with regard of the trip command can be
The 7SS52 protection provides complete data for analysis of
protection performance following a trip or any other abnormal
condition and for monitoring the state of the relay during
set. Up to 8 fault recordings are stored in the 7SS52. The fault normal service.
records may be input to a PC connected to the central unit, using
5 the menu-guided DIGSI operating program. Then, the SIGRA
graphics program makes it possible to easily analyze the fault
Up to 200 operational events and 80 fault annunciations with a
resolution of one millisecond may be stored in two independent
recordings. buffers:
• Operational indications
Marshallable tripping relays, binary inputs, alarm relays and
6 LEDs
This group includes plant/substation operation events, for
example disconnector switching, disconnector status discrep-
The bay units are equipped with marshallable command relays ancies (transition time limit exceeded, loss of auxiliary voltage,
for direct circuit-breaker tripping. For each bay there are 9 etc.) or event/alarm indications
7 (7SS523) or 8 (7SS525) duty contacts available.

For user-specific output and indication of events, 16 alarm relays
• Tripping following a busbar short-circuit fault or circuit-breaker
failure.
and 32 LEDs in the central unit are freely marshallable. Settings
Several individual alarms may be grouped together.
8 The central unit has marshallable binary inputs with:
A PC can be connected to the operator interface located at the
front panel or the rear of the central unit. An operating program
is available for convenient and clear setting, fault recording
• Reset of LED display
and evaluation as well as for commissioning. All settings of
• Time synchronization the busbar or breaker failure protection, as well as settings of
9 • Blocking of protection functions additional functions such as backup protection, need only be
parameterized at the central unit. Settings at the bay units are
The bay units have marshallable binary inputs:
not necessary.
• Disconnector status closed/open With the help of the integrated keypad and display on the central
10 • Phase-segregated start of circuit-breaker failure protection unit, all setting parameters may be read out.
Keypad, display (7SS523) and the front side interface of the bay
• Release of circuit-breaker failure protection
units serve for commissioning, display of operational values and
• Release of TRIP command
diagnosis.
11 • Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Bay out of service
All parameters are written into nonvolatile memories to ensure
that they are retained even during loss of auxiliary voltage.
• Test of circuit-breaker tripping
Configuration, visualization
12 Measurement and monitoring functions

In the 7SS52 protection relay, a variety of measurement and
The configuration of the 7SS52 is effected by means of a
graphics-orientated editor included in the DIGSI operation
monitoring functions is provided for commissioning and mainte- program. For frequently used bay types, a symbol library is
nance. These functions include: available. Enhancements can be easily effected anytime.
13 • Measurement and display of the phase currents of the feeders

in the central unit and bay units.
A graphical configuration visualizes the states of the disconnec-
tor position, the circuit-breaker and measuring values.
• Measurement and display (on the integrated LCD or PC) of the
Self-monitoring
differential and stabilizing currents of all measuring systems in
14 the central unit and the bay units. Hardware and software are continuously monitored and any
irregularity is immediately detected and alarmed. The self-
• Monitoring of busbar-selective and phase-segregated differen-
tial currents with busbar-selective blocking / alarming monitoring feature improves both the reliability and the avail-
ability of the 7SS52. The following quantities are monitored:
• Monitoring of the differential currents of the check zone with
15 alarming / blocking • The current transformer circuits
• The analog-to-digital conversion

Protection functions, communication
• All internal supply voltages Communication

• The program memory
• The program running times by a watch dog function Serial communication 1
• The disconnector status With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed on
• The three channel tripping circuit the customer requirements in energy automation:
Maximum lifetime and reliability

originates.
2
The hardware of the 7SS52 units is guaranteed by more than • Already during the process of communication, information
20 years of experience in numerical protection design at is assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
Siemens. The number of components employed is reduced
through use of a powerful microprocessor in conjunction with
tion "circuit-breaker TRIP" to the corresponding command).
• The communication system automatically handles the transfer
3
highly-integrated components, thus enhancing the reliability. of large data blocks (e.g. fault recordings or parameter data
The experience gained by Siemens in production of over 1 files). The user has access to these features without any
million numerical protection units has been incorporated in the
software design. The most modern manufacturing methods
4
together with effective quality control ensure high reliability and Local and remote communication
a long service life.
The 7SS52 central unit provides several serial communication
Battery monitoring interfaces for various tasks:
5
The internal battery is used to back-up the clock and memory
for storage of switching statistics, status and fault indications • Rear-side service interface (always provided) for connection to
and fault recording, in the event of a power supply failure. The a PC, either directly or via a modern
processor checks its capacity at regular intervals. If the capacity
of the battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated.
• System interface for connecting to a control system via 6
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Routine replacement is therefore not necessary. All setting • System interface (EN 100 module) for connecting to a control
parameters are stored in the Flash-EPROM, and therefore not lost system via IEC 61850 protocol
if the power supply or the battery fails.
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B / DCF / system interface 7
Functions for testing and commissioning
Serial front interface (central unit and bay units)
The 7SS52 offers auxiliary functions for commissioning. The
physical status of all binary inputs and output relays of the
central unit can be displayed and directly altered to facilitate
There is a serial RS232 interface on the front of all the units.
All of the unit's functions can be set on a PC by means of the 8
testing. DIGSI 4 protection operation program. Commissioning tools and
fault analysis are also built into the program and are available
All measured values can be clearly depicted by means of DIGSI through this interface.
and simultaneously displayed in different windows as primary or
percentage values. Rear-mounted interfaces (central unit only)
9
The 7SS52 units are provided with a circuit-breaker test A number of communication modules suitable for various appli-
function. Single-pole and three-pole TRIP commands can be cations can be fitted in the rear of the flush-mounting housing.
issued. The interface modules support the following applications: 10
Data transmission lockout The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
Data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent number of protection units via DIGSI. It can be an electrical
transfer of information to the control center during work on a RS232/RS85 or an optical interface. 11
circuit bay. • RS485 bus
Test mode magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of
During commissioning, a test mode can be selected; all twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
12
indications then have a test mode suffix for transmission to the
control system.
System interface
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
13
gies can be configured depending on the chosen interface.
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this interface
via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be operated by
DIGSI.
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 protocol (retrofittable)
1 The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol

is the worldwide standard for protection
and control systems used by power supply
corporations. By means of this protocol,
information can also be exchanged
2 directly between protection units so as
to set up simple masterless systems for
bay and system interlocking. Access to
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be
3 possible with DIGSI.

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an inter-
4 national standard for the transmission of
protective data and fault recordings. All
messages from the unit and also control
commands can be transferred by means
5 of published, Siemens-specific extensions

to the protocol.
6 The battery-backed clock of the 7SS52

central unit can be synchronized via: Fig. 9/12 Communication structure with DIGSI and IEC 60870-5-103
• DCF 77 signal via time synchronization
receiver
7 • IRIG-B satellite signal via time synchroni-

zation receiver
• Minute-pulse via binary input
• System interface by the substation
8 control, e.g. SICAM
Date and time with milliseconds resolu-
tion is assigned to every indication. The
synchronization of the 7SS52 bay units
9 is automatically effected with the central
unit.
10
11
Fig. 9/13 Communication structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850, FO ring
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data LEDs

Input circuits
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A
Central unit
Operation
indication
Green 1 1
Rated frequency fN 50/60 Hz Device failure Red 1
Thermal overload Continuous 4 x IN Marshallable Red 32
capability in current 10 s
path 1s
10 x IN
100 x IN
Bay unit
Operation Green 1 2
Dynamic overload 250 x IN indication
capability Device failure Red 1
Burden of At IN = 1 A < 0.1 VA Indications Green 5 (7SS523)/– (7SS525)
current inputs
Auxiliary voltage
At IN = 5 A < 0.2 VA
Control, displays
Red 11 (7SS523)/1 (7SS525)
3
Rated auxiliary Central unit DC 48 V to 250 V Central unit
voltage Vaux LC Display 4 lines x 20 characters
Rated auxiliary
voltage Vaux
Bay unit DC 48 V to 250 V
Membrane keyboard
Bay unit (7SS523)
24 keys
4
LC Display 4 lines x 16 characters
Permissible tolerance Vaux –20 to +20 % Membrane keyboard 12 keys
Maximum ripple ≤ 15 %
Unit design (degree of protection according to EN 60529)
Power consumption
Central unit Quiescent
Configuration dependent
35 to 55 W
Central unit
Cubicle IP 54
5
Energized < 70 W Housing for wall mounting IP 55
Bay unit 7SS523 7SS525 SIPAC subrack IP 20
Quiescent
Energized
12 W
16 W
10 W
14 W
Bay unit
Housing
7SS523
IP 51
7SS525
IP 20
6
Max. bridging time during > 50 ms at Vaux ≥ 60 V Terminals IP 21
loss of voltage supply Weight at max. configuration
Central unit
Binary inputs
7SS523 7SS525
SIPAC subrack
14.3 kg
43.0 kg
7
Number of Bay unit 20 10
Bay unit 7SS523 7SS525
binary inputs Central unit 12
Flush mounting 8.1 kg 5.5 kg
Voltage range
Current consumption
DC 24 to 250 V
Approx. 1.5 mA/input
Surface mounting 11.8 kg
8
Alarm/event contacts
Central unit
Number of
relays
Marshallable
Fixed
16 (each 1 NO contact)
1 (2 NC contacts)
9
Switching capacity Make/Break 20 W/VA
Switching voltage AC/DC 250 V
Permissible current
Bay unit
1A
7SS523 7SS525
10
Number of Marshallable 1 (1 NO contact) 1 (1 NO contact)
relays Fixed 1 (2 NC contacts) 1 (1 NC contacts)
Switching capacity Make/Break
20 W/VA
AC/DC 250 V
11
Permissible current 1 A 1A
Command contacts
Number of relays (bay unit) 7SS523
4 (each 2 NO
7SS525
3 (each 2 NO
12
contacts) contacts)
1 (1 NO contact) 2 (1 NO contact)
Switching capacity Make
Break
1000 W/VA
30 W/VA 13
Permissible Continuous 5A
current 0.5 s 30 A
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Mechanical stress tests
1 Specification
Standards IEC 60255-5, DIN 57435 part 303
Specification
Standards IEC 60255-21-1, IEC 6068-2
High-voltage test (routine test), 2 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz Permissible mechanical stress
except DC voltage supply input During service 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm amplitude
60 to 500 Hz, 0.5 g acceleration
2 High-voltage test (routine test),
only DC voltage supply input
DC 2.8 kV
During transport 5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm amplitude
8 to 500 Hz, 2 g acceleration
Impulse voltage test (type test), 5 kV (peak), 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J,
all circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
at intervals of 5 s Climatic stress tests
3 EMC tests for interference immunity; type test
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
Temperatures
Standard IEC 60255-6
(international product standard),
Permissible ambient temperature
EN 50082-2 (European generic
– In service –10 °C to +55 °C (bay unit)
4 standard for industrial environ-
ment),
VDE 0435 part 303
– For storage
– 5 °C to +55 °C (central unit)
–25 °C to +70 °C
– During transport –25 °C to +70 °C
(German product standard)
– During start-up –10 °C to +55 °C (bay unit)
High-frequency test with 1 MHz 2.5 kV (peak), 1 MHz, τ = 15 µs, 0 °C to +55 °C (central unit)
5 interference
400 surges/s, duration 2 s
Humidity
VDE 0435 part 303, class III Standards IEC 60068-2-3
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge, It is recommended to arrange the Annual average 75 % relative
IEC 60255-22-2, class IV and 15 kV air discharge, both polarities, units in such a way that they are humidity; on 56 days a year up to
6 IEC 61000-4-2, class IV
Irradiation with radio-frequency
150 pF, Ri = 330 Ω
10 V/m, 27 to 500 MHz
not exposed to direct sunlight or
93 % relative humidity;
condensation not permissible!
field, non-modulated that could cause condensation.
7 Irradiation with radio-frequency

field, amplitude-modulated
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz,
AM 80 %, 1 kHz
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz, repetition
field, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, duty cycle 50 %
8 ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients interference/bursts 4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz,
IEC 60255-22-4, class IV; burst length = 15 ms,
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV; repetition rate 300 ms, both polari-
IEC 60801-4 ties, Ri = 50 Ω, duration 1 min
9 Line-conducted disturbances
induced by radio-frequency fields,
10 V, 150 kHz to 80 MHz,
AM 80 %, 1 kHz
amplitude-modulated
10 Power frequency magnetic field

IEC 61000-4-8, class IV;
30 A/m continuous,
300 A/m for 3 s, 50 Hz
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
EMC tests for interference emission; type test
11 Standard EN 50081-2
(European generic standard for
industrial environment)
Conducted interference voltage, 150 kHz to 30 MHz, limit class B
auxiliary voltage
12 CISPR 11, EN 55011
and VDE 0875 part 11
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz, limit class B
CISPR 11, EN 55011
and VDE 0875 part 11
13
14



7SS522 distributed busbar/breaker failure protection
Central unit
7SS52 0- - A0-
1
Central unit 50/60 Hz 2
Rated auxiliary voltage
DC 48 to 250 V 6 2
Unit design
In subrack ES902C A
Regional presettings/regional functions and languages 3
Region DE, language German (language can be selected) A
Region World, language English (UK) (language can be selected) B
Region US, language English (US) (language can be selected)
Region FR, language French (language can be selected)
C
D
4
Region World, language Spanish (language can be selected) E
Region World, language Italian (language can be selected) F
Region World, language Russian (language can be selected)
System interface
G
5
Without 0
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double
9 L 0 R
L 0 S
6
9
Service interface (on rear of relay)
DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232
1
2
7
DIGSI 4 / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
Additional functions
without 1
with cross stabilisation
1 8
2
Equipped for
8 bays
16 bays
A
B
9
24 bays C
32 bays D
40 bays
48 bays
E
F
10
7SS523 distributed busbar / breaker failure protection 7SS52 - A01- AA1
Bay unit, frequency, housing, binary inputs and outputs
Bay unit, 50/60 Hz, housing ½ x 19", 20 BI, 6 BO, 2 live status contacts 3 11
Rated current
1A 1
5A
Rated auxiliary voltage

5
12
DC 48 to 250 V 5
Unit design
7XP2040-2 for flush mounting or cubicle mounting C
13
7XP2040-1 for surface mounting D
7XP2040-2 for flush mounting without glass cover E
Without additional functions
14
0
With overcurrent-time protection 1
15
1 7SS523 distributed busbar/breaker failure protection

Bay unit, frequency 50/60 Hz;
Housing 1/3 x 19"; 10 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact
7SS525 - A 01- AA1
Rated current
2 1A
5A
1
5
Rated auxiliary voltage at converter
DC 48 to 250 V 5
3 Unit design
7XP2040-2 for panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting without glass cover F
4 Without additional functions

With overcurrent-time protection
0
1
5
6 Connection cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection relay
(9-pin connector)
7 Manual 7SS52 V4.7/V3.3

English C53000-G1176-C182-5
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/14 Connection diagram 7SS522

15
Connection diagram
5 Live
contact
10
LSA2949-bgpen.eps
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 9/15 Connection diagram 7SS523

Connection diagram
4
Live
contact
5
8
LSA4164-ben.eps
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/16 Connection diagram 7SS525

15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Relays for Various
Protection Applications Page
SIPROTEC 7VK61 breaker management relay 10/3
10
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Relays for Various Protection Applications / 7VK61
SIPROTEC 7VK61 breaker management relay
Function overview
25
79
50BF
• Single and/or three-pole auto-reclosure
59 • Synchro-check with live/dead line/bus measurement
27 • Closing under asynchronous conditions
(consideration of CB operating time)
2
86 74TC • Circuit-breaker failure protection with two stages
(single and three-pole with/without current)
• End-fault protection 3
• Pole-discrepancy protection
LSP2458-afp.tif
• Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
Control function 4
• Commands for control of CB and isolators
• Operational measured values 5
Fig. 10/1 SIPROTEC 7VK61 breaker management relay
• Event buffer and fault protocols
• Monitoring of CB auxiliary contacts
6
Description • Switching statistics
The SIPROTEC 4 breaker management relay 7VK61 is a highly

flexible auto-reclosure, synchro-check and circuit-breaker failure
Features
• All functions can be used separately
7
protection unit. • Initiation/start by phase-segregated or 3-pole trip commands
This unit is used for the single and three-pole auto-reclosure of • Auto-reclosure for max. 8 reclose cycles
a circuit-breaker, after this circuit-breaker has tripped due to a
fault. The synchro-check function ensures that the two circuits
• Evolving/sequential trip recognition 8
• Auto-reclosure with ADT, DLC, RDT
being reconnected by closing the circuit-breaker are within
a defined safe operating state before the CLOSE command is • Synchro-check with ∆V, ∆φ, ∆f measurement
issued. • Breaker failure protection with highly secure 2-out-of-4 current
check detectors
9
The 7VK61 is also applicable as circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion. A breaker failure occurs when the circuit-breaker fails to • Breaker failure protection with short reset time and negligible
correctly open and clear the fault after single or three-pole overshoot time
trip commands have been issued by the protection. It is then
necessary to trip the relevant busbar zone (section) to ensure
CommunicatIon interfaces 10
fault clearance. Together with the above-mentioned protection • Front interface for connecting a PC
functions, the following additional functions of the 7VK61 can • System interface for connecting to a control system via various
be applied: end-fault protection, pole-discrepancy protection,
overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection. As a mem-
protocols
11
ber of the numerical SIPROTEC 4 relay family, it also provides – IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
control and monitoring functions and therefore supports the – PROFIBUS DP
user with regard to a cost-effective power system management. – DNP 3
12
• Time synchronization via
– IRIG-B or DCF77 or system interface
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The 7VK61 provides highly flexible

breaker management. It applies to single-
breaker, ring-bus, and 1½ breaker instal-
lations. The auto-reclosure, synchronism-
2 check, breaker failure protection and
voltage protection functions can be used
separately or combined. Therefore the
current and voltage transformer con-
3 nection can be selected according to the
required application.
The auto-reclosure function closes the
circuit-breaker after this circuit-breaker
4 has tripped due to a fault. The check-
synchronism function ensures that the
two circuits being reconnected by closing
the circuit-breaker are within a defined
5 safe operating state before the CLOSE
command is issued.
The numerical 7VK61 relay provides
rapid backup fault clearance in case the
6 circuit-breaker nearest to the fault fails to
respond to a TRIP command. It is suitable
for power systems of all voltage levels Fig. 10/2 Application and function diagram
with single and/or three-pole circuit-
7 breaker operation. The initiation signal

can be issued from any protection or supervision equipment. If the requirements for protection, control and interlocking
change, it is possible in the majority of cases to implement such
Information from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is only
required for the breaker failure protection during faults which changes by means of parameterization using DIGSI 4 without
produce little or no fault current flow, for instance due to a trip having to change the hardware.
8 from the power transformer Buchholz protection. The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of
Cost-effective power system management presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components.
The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide
9 control and monitoring functions and therefore support the
ANSI Protection functions
user with regard to a cost-effective power system management.
The security and reliability of the power supply is increased as a 50BF Breaker-failure protection
result of minimizing the use of hardware.
10 The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
Synchro-check
criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided. 25
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of 79 Auto-reclosure
11 functionality which represents a benchmark-level of perfor-

mance in protection and control. 74TC Trip circuit supervision
86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
12
13
14
15
Construction
Construction
Connection technique and housing 1

⅓ and ½-rack sizes are available as hous-
ing widths of the SIPROTEC 7VK61 relays,
referred to a 19" modular frame system. 2
This means that previous models can
always be replaced. The height is a uni-
form 255 mm for flush-mounting hous-
LSP2174-afp.tif
3
LSP2166-afp.tif
ings and 266 mm for surface-mounting
housings for all housing widths. All cables
can be connected with or without ring
lugs.
In the case of surface mounting on a 4
panel, the connection terminals are
located above and below the housing in Fig. 10/3 Flush-mounting housing with Fig. 10/4 Rear view of flush-mounting
the form of screw-type terminals. The screw-type terminals housing with covered connection
communication interfaces are located in a
terminals andwirings 5
housing.
7
LSP2219-afp.eps
LSP2237-afp.tif
9
screw-type terminals, example
7SA63
sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing 10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)

The 7VK61 relay is equipped with an
auto-reclose function (AR). Usually the
2 auto-reclosure interacts with the feeder

protection via binary inputs and outputs.
The function includes several operating
modes:
3 • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of
faults; different dead times are available
depending on the type of fault
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults,
4 no reclosing for multi-phase faults
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and
3-pole auto-reclosing for multi-phase
faults
5 • Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
• Interaction with the internal or an Fig. 10/7 Auto-reclosure and synchro-check with voltage measurement
external synchro-check across a power transformer
6 • Monitoring of the circuit-breaker

auxiliary contacts. Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
other operating principles can be employed by means of the mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured
7 integrated programmable logic (CFC). that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For
this purpose, a synchronism-check function is provided. After
The 7VK61 allows the line-side voltages to be evaluated.
A number of voltage-dependent supplementary functions are verification of the network synchronism, the function releases
thus available: the CLOSE command. Consideration of the duration of the CB
8 • ADT
operating time before issuing the CLOSE command (especially
important under asynchronous conditions and when several
circuit-breakers with different operating times are to be oper-
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on ated by one single relay).
equipment).
9 • DLC
By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
In addition, reclosing can be enabled for different criteria, e.g.,
when the busbar or line are not carrying a voltage (dead line or
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker dead bus).
closure in case that the synchronism check can not be used).
10 • RDT
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto- The 7VK61 relay incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
reclosure where no teleprotection method is employed: protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, for
when faults within the zone extension of a distance feeder example due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current detection
11 protection but external to the protected line, are switched off

for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the
logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used in
single-pole tripping schemes.
basis of measurement of the return voltage from the remote If the fault current is not interrupted after a settable time delay
station which has not tripped, that the fault has been cleared has expired, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will
12 by the protection on the faulted downstream feeder and that
reclosure with reduced dead time may take place.
be generated. The breaker failure protection will usually be initi-
ated by external feeder protection relays via binary input signals.
Trip signals from the internal auto-reclosure logic or from the
voltage protection can start the breaker failure protection as
well.
13
14
15

(ANSI 59, 27)
The 7VK61 contains a number of overvoltage measuring 1
elements. Each measuring element is of two-stage design.
The following measuring elements are available:
2
• Zero-sequence overvoltage
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage
input (not in conjunction with syncho-check) or be derived
from the phase voltages.
3
Fig. 10/8 End-fault between circuit-breaker and current transformer
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by
means of a transmitted signal. Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
4
The 7VK61 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage undervolt- One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
age measuring elements: used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
• Phase-to-ground undervoltage connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit 5
is interrupted. The trip circuit supervision function requires one
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage
or two independent potential-free binary inputs per trip circuit.
• Positive-sequence undervoltage To make existing (non potential-free) binary inputs potential-
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means free, external optocoupler modules can be applied. 6
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.
Lockout (ANSI 86)
End-fault protection Under certain operating conditions, it is advisable to block
When the circuit-breaker is open, the area located between the CLOSE commands after a final TRIP command of the relay has
been issued. Only a manual ‘Reset’ command unblocks the
7
current transformer and the circuit-breaker can be optimally
protected by means of the end-fault protection. In the event CLOSE command. The 7VK61 is equipped with such an interlock-
of a fault, an independently settable time delay is started after ing logic.
a valid initiation has been received and the circuit-breaker
auxiliary contacts indicate an open circuit-breaker position, with
Monitoring functions 8
current still flowing (see Fig. 10/8). Depending on the mounting The 7VK61 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions
position of the current transformer, instantaneous tripping of covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
the busbar section or intertripping of the circuit-breaker at the
opposite end occurs.
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore
9
monitoring system.
Pole-discrepancy protection
If all voltages are connected, the relay will detect secondary
This function ensures that any one or two poles of a circuit-
breaker do not remain open for longer than an independently
voltage interruptions by means of the integrated fuse failure
monitor. Immediate alarm and blocking of the synchronism
10
settable time (i.e. unsymmetrical conditions). This time stage check and dead line check is provided for all types of secondary
is initiated when current (above the set value) is flowing in any voltage failures. Additional measurement supervision functions
1 or 2 phases, but not in all 3 phases. Additionally, the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contacts (if connected) are interrogated and
are
• Symmetry of voltages and currents (in case of appropriate
11
must show the same condition as the current measurement.
transformer connection)
Should this time delay expire, then a three-pole trip command
is issued. This function is normally used when single-pole auto- • Broken-conductor supervision (if current transformers are
reclosing is applied. connected)
• Summation of currents and voltages (in case of appropriate
12
transformer connection)
• Phase-sequence supervision (if three voltage transformers are
connected) 13
14
15
Communication
Communication

originates.
2 • Already during the process of communication, information is
assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
tion “circuit-breaker TRIP” to the corresponding command).
3 • The communication system automatically handles the transfer

files). The user has access to these features without any
4 • For the safe execution of a control command the correspond-

ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the unit which
will execute the command. After the release and execution of Fig. 10/9 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
the command a feedback signal is generated. At every stage connection or fiber-optic connection
of the control command execution particular conditions are
5 checked. If these are not satisfied, command execution may be
terminated in a controlled manner.
The units offer a high degree of flexibility by supporting differ-
ent standards for connection to industrial and power automation
6 systems. By means of the communication modules, on which
the protocols run, exchange and retrofit is possible. Therefore,
the units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to
changing communication infrastructure such as the application
7 of Ethernet networks (which will also be used increasingly in the
power supply sector in the years to come).
Local PC interface
8 The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the

9 Service/modem interface
Fig. 10/10 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
7VK61 units are always fitted with a rear-side hardwired service with fiber-optic ring
interface, optionally as RS232 or RS485. In addition to the
10 front-side operator interface, a PC can be connected here either
directly or via a modem.
Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the
Time synchronization interface entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS,
11 The time synchronization interface is a standard feature in all
units. The supported formats are IRIG-B and DCF77.
DNP, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. For fiber-optic
communication, no external converter is required for SIPROTEC 4.
Reliable bus architecture IEC 61850 protocol
12 • RS485 bus
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply
corporations. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support
this Standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- the units via the Ethernet bus is also be possible with DIGSI.
netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
units, the communication system continues to operate without IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
14 disturbance. It is usually impossible to communicate with a
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for
unit that has failed. Should a unit fail, there is no effect on the
communication with the rest of the system. efficient communication with protection relays. IEC 60870-5-103
is supported by a number of protection device manufacturers
15 and is used worldwide. Supplements for the control function are

defined in the manufacturer-specific part of this standard.

Communication
PROFIBUS DP
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
PROFIBUS DP is an industrial communica-
tions standard and is supported by a 1
number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
DNP 3.0 2
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and 3
Level 2 compatible.
System solutions for protection and Fig. 10/11 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 10/12 RS232/RS485 electrical
module communication module
station control
4
Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with
PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the
optical double ring, the units exchange
5
LSP3.01-0021.tif
information with the control system.
Units equipped with IEC 60870-5-103
interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or connected 6
in star by fiber- optic link. Through this
interface, the system is open for the con-
nection of units of other manufacturers
(see Fig. 10/14). 7
Because of the standardized interfaces,
SIPROTEC units can also be integrated
into systems of other manufacturers or in
SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical inter-
Fig. 10/13 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
with integrated Ethernet switch 8
faces are available. The optimum physical
data transfer medium can be chosen
thanks to opto-electrical converters. Thus,
the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
in the cubicles and an interference-free
9
optical connection to the master can be
established.
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system 10
solution is offered with SICAM PAS.
Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the
units are linked with PAS electrically or
optically to the station PC. The interface
is standardized, thus also enabling direct
11
connection of units of other manufactur-
ers to the Ethernet bus.
With IEC 61850, however, the units can 12
also be used in other manufacturers’
systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103
interface are connected with PAS via the
Ethernet station bus by means of serial/
Ethernet converters. DIGSI can also be
13
used via the same station bus.
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
1 Connection for current and voltage

transformers
With the transformer connection as shown
2 in Fig. 10/15, it is possible to use the

complete scope of functions of 7VK61, i.e.
breaker failure protection, synchronism-
check with 3-phase dead line check (with
or without auto-reclosure), complete mea-
3 sured value monitoring, voltage protection,
and the complete range of operational
measured values.
5
Fig. 10/15 Complete connection of all current and voltage transformers
6
Alternative: Connection for current
7 transformers only
The connection for current transformers
only provides breaker failure protection and
current operational measured values.
8
10
11 Fig. 10/16 Typical current transformer connection for breaker failure protection
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative: Connection for two voltage

transformers
In case of a connection for two voltage 1
transformers, synchro-check and two
operational measured voltages, and addi-
tionally synchro-check measured values are
applicable. Dead line check is performed
for the connected line voltage only.
2
Note: Please connect the two voltages
always to the terminals R15/R16 and R13/
R14 with the appropriate polarity. The 3
setting address 106 “Voltage transformer”
must then be set to “single-phase”. The
terminals R17 and R18 must not be con-
nected. 4
The connection of the voltage VL1-L2 as Fig. 10/17 Typical voltage transformer connection for synchro-check
shown in Fig. 10/17 is just an example: with single voltage dead line check
any other of the shown combinations is
possible for synchronization. 5
The two voltage transformer connection
can also be combined with the current
transformer connection according to
Fig. 10/16. 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

1 NC/NO contact1)
1 Analog inputs
“Unit ready” contact
(live status contact)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Command/indication relay
Rated voltage Vnom 80 to 125 V (selectable) Quantity

7VK610 5 NO contacts,
2 Power consumption
With Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
7VK611
NO/NC contact
14 NO contacts, 4 NC/NO contacts1)
With Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA

Voltage inputs ≤ 0.10 VA Switching capacity
Overload capacity of current circuit Make 1000 W/VA
3 Thermal (r.m.s.) 500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s
Break, contacts
Break, contacts
30 VA
40 W
20 A continuous (for resistive load)
Dynamic (peak value) 1250 A (half cycle) Break, contacts
(for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA
Thermal overload capacity of 230 V continuous
4 voltage circuit Switching voltage
Permissible total current
250 V
30 A for 0.5 seconds
Auxiliary voltage
5 A continuous
Rated voltages DC 24, 48 V
DC 60, 125 V Operating time, approx.
5 DC 110, 250 V
and AC 115, 230 V (50/60 Hz)
NO contact
NO/NC contact (selectable)
8 ms
8 ms
Fast NO contact 5 ms
Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 %
LEDs
Superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 %
6 (peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
Quantity
RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
Quiescent Approx. 5 W
LED (red),
Energized Approx. 8 W to 14 W, depending
function can be assigned
on design
7VK610 7
7 Bridging time during failure of the
auxiliary voltage
7VK611 14
Unit design
For Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms
For Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms Housing 7XP20
8 Binary inputs
Quantity
Dimensions Refer to part 14 for dimension
drawings
7VK610 7 Degree of protection acc. to
7VK611 20 EN 60529
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar
9 Pickup threshold DC 19 or 88 V or 176 V, bipolar
Front IP 51
Functions are freely assignable Rear IP 50
Minimum pickup voltage DC 19 or 88 V or 176 V, bipolar For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
Ranges are settable by means of (3 operating ranges) Weight
10 jumpers for each binary input
⅓ x 19" 5 kg
½ x 19" 6 kg
Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance at
⅓ x 19"
11 220 V with a recovery time >60 ms
½ x 19"
9.5 kg
11 kg
12
13
14
15 1) Can be set via jumpers.

Technical data
Electrical tests EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests

Specifications
(SURGE),
Impulse: 1.2/50 µs
1
IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
VDE 0435 Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
For further standards see 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Insulation tests
“Individual tests”
1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF 2
Measurement inputs, binary inputs, Common (longitudinal) mode:
Standards IEC 60255-5 and 60870-2-1 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Voltage test (100 % test) binary output relays Differential (transversal) mode:
All circuits except for auxiliary
supply, binary inputs,
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Line-conducted HF, amplitude-
1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
3
communication and time modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz
synchronization interfaces Magnetic field with power frequen- 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for
cy IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 3 s; 50 Hz
inputs (100 % test)
DC 3.5 kV
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz 4
RS485/RS232 rear side 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 50 µs;
communication interfaces capability, IEEE C37.90.1 400 surges per second,
and time synchronization duration 2 s, Ri = 200 Ω
interface (100 % test)
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J,
Fast transient surge withstand
capability, IEEE C37.90.1
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz
burst length = 15 ms; repetition 5
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in rate 300 ms; both polarities;
cation interfaces and time intervals of 5 s Ri = 50 Ω; duration 1 min
synchronization interface, Radiated electromagnetic inter- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz,
class III
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
ference IEEE C37.90.2
Damped oscillation 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity
6
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22 IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and
(product standard) 50 MHz; Ri = 200 Ω
VDE 0435 Part 301,
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
Standard EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard)
7
DIN VDE 0435-110
Conducted interference voltage on 150 kHz to 30 MHz
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 µs;
lines, only auxiliary voltage Limit class B
IEC 60255-22-1 class III and 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s;
VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Electrostatic discharge
Ri = 200 Ω
8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
IEC-CISPR 22
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz 8
and EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω Harmonic currents on the network Class A limits are observed
lead at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-2
Irradiation with HF field,
IEC 60255-22-3 class III
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
1 kHz Voltage fluctuations and flicker
on the network incoming feeder at
Limits are observed 9
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3
Irradiation with HF field, Class III, 10 V/m
IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3
Amplitude-modulated 80; 160; 450; 900 MHz; 80 % AM
1kHz; duration >10 s
Mechanical stress test 10
Pulse-modulated 900 MHz, 50 % PM, Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
repetition frequency 200 Hz During operation
Fast transient disturbance/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
IEC 60255-22-4 and
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV
burst length = 15 ms;
repetition rate 300 ms; both polari-
Vibration Sinusoidal 11
ties; Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration,
Shock
Half-sinusoidal
12
both directions
13
14
1) Conversion with external OLM
Fiber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th position
with 9 and Order Code L0A (DP RS485) or 9 and
Order Code L0G (DNP 3.0) and additionally a suitable external repeater. 15
Technical data
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration (continued)
1 Seismic vibration
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
Sinusoidal
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
2 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
3 During transport

4 IEC 60255-21-1, class 2

IEC 60068-2-6
8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration,
5 IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions
6 IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
in both directions

7 Standard IEC 60255-6
Temperatures
8 Temporarily permissible operating
-20 °C to +70 °C / -4 °F to +158 °F

9 Recommended permanent opera-

ting temperature acc. to
-5 °C to +55 °C / +23 °F to +131 °F
IEC 60255-6
– Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to 131 °F
permanent storage
10 – Limiting temperature during
transport
-25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on ≤ 75 % relative
11 It is recommended to arrange the

units in such a way that they are
humidity; on 56 days per year up t
o 93 % relative humidity;
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation is not permitted.
proounced temperature changes
12
13
14



7VK61 breaker management relay 7VK61 - - 4Y 0- 1
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO)
Housing ⅓ 19”, 7 BI, 6 BO incl. 1 live-status contact, 0
Housing ½ 19”, 20 BI, 19 BO incl. 1 live-status contact
Measuring inputs (4 x V, 4 x I)
1
2
Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A)1) 1
Iph = 5 A, Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)1) 5
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, threshold of binary inputs)
DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 19 V3)
3
2
DC 220 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 176 V3) 6 4
Unit version
For panel flush mounting A
For panel surface mounting
Region-specific default settings / language settings and functions versions
E
5
Region DE, language: German, selectable A
Region World, language: English, selectable B
Region US, language:US-English, selectable
Region FR, language: French, selectable
C 6
D
Region World, language: Spanish, selectable E
Region World, language: Italian, selectable F
Port B system interface 7
Empty 0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
2
3
8
PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 9 L 0A
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 4) 9 L 0 B
DNP 3.0, RS485
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector 4)
9
9
L 0G
L 0H
9
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector 5) 9 L 0 S
Port C service interface
10
1
Functions
Breaker failure protection Auto-reclosure Over/Undervoltage 11
1-/3-pole or 3-pole only 1-/3-pole or 3-pole only protection
and synchro-check
C
D 12
N
P
Q
R 13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Optical interfaces are not available with surface mounting housings
14
2) Transition between the 3 auxiliary ranges can be selected by means (position 9 = E). Please order the version with RS485 interface and a
of jumpers. separate electrical/optical converter.
5) For surface-mounting housing applications please order the relay
3) The binary input thresholds are selectable in 3 steps by means of
jumpers. with electrical Ethernet interface and use a separate fiber-optic
switch.
15
1 Connecting cable (copper)

2 Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

3 Manual for 7VK61

For the latest version please visit www.siemens.com/siprotec

package
Supplier Fig.

LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 10/20

10 Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
Fig. 10/18 Mounting rail 1)
connector 0-827396-1 1
for 19" rack
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
11 0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163084-7
1
4000 1)
1)
0-163083-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps

LSP2091-afp.eps
12 for CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)

13 Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
10/21
10/22
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens 10/4

14
Fig. 10/21 Fig. 10/22


Connection diagrams
9
Fig. 10/23 Connection diagram 7VK610, ⅓ x 19” housing
10
11
12
13
14
15

Connection diagrams
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 10/25 Connection diagram 7VK611, ½ x 19” housing

Generator Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7UM62 multifunction generator,

motor and transformer protection relay 11/3
SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device 11/33
SIPROTEC 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer 11/53
11
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7UM62
SIPROTEC 7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay
Function overview
Standard version 1
Scope of basic version plus:
• Inadvertent energization protection
• 100 %-stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
• Impedance protection
2
Full version
LSP2171-afpen.eps
Scope of standard version plus:
• DC voltage protection
3
• Overcurrent protection during start-ups
• Ground-current differential protection
• Out-of-step protection
4
Additional version
Fig. 11/1 SIPROTEC 7UM62 multifunction protection relay for
generators, motors and transformers
Available for each version:
• Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection (1–3 Hz method)
5
• Stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage
Description
6
The SIPROTEC 7UM62 protection relays can do more than just pro- • Vector jump supervision
tect. They also offer numerous additional functions. Be it ground
Monitoring function
faults, short-circuits, overloads, overvoltage, overfrequency or
7
underfrequency asynchronous conditions, protection relays assure • Trip circuit supervision
continued operation of power stations. The SIPROTEC 7UM62 pro- • Fuse failure monitor
tection relay is a compact unit which has been specially developed • Operational measured values V, I, f, …
and designed for the protection of small, medium-sized and large
generators. They integrate all the necessary protection functions • Energy metering values Wp, Wq
and are particularly suited for the protection of:
– Hydro and pumped-storage generators
• Time metering of operating hours
• Self-supervision of relay
8
– Co-generation stations
– Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
as wind or biogases
– Diesel generator stations
9
– Gas-turbine power stations
– IEC 61850 protocol
– Industrial power stations
10
– Conventional steam power stations.
– PROFIBUS DP
The SIPROTEC 7UM62 includes all necessary protection func- – Modbus RTU
tions for large synchronous and asynchronous motors and for – DNP 3
transformers. – PROFINET
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous func-
tion chart CFC) offer the user high flexibility so that adjustments
11
can easily be made to the varying power station requirements Hardware
on the basis of special system conditions.
12
• Analog inputs
communication architectures with the control system. • 8 current transformers
• 4 voltage transformers
The following basic functions are available for all versions:
• 7/15 binary inputs
Current differential protection for generators, motors and
transformers, stator ground-fault protection, sensitive ground-
• 12/20 output relays
13
fault protection, stator overload protection, overcurrent-time Front design
protection (either definite time or inverse time), definite-time
• User-friendly local operation
14
overcurrent protection with directionality, undervoltage and
overvoltage protection, underfrequency and overfrequency • 7/14 LEDs for local alarm
protection, overexcitation and underexcitation protection, • Function keys
external trip coupling, forward-power and reverse-power • Graphic display with 7UM623
protection, negative-sequence protection, breaker failure
protection, rotor ground-faults protection (fn, R-measuring),
motor starting time supervision and restart inhibit for motors.
15
Application generator as well as backup protection for the block transformer
1
including the power system. Additional functions such as protec-
tion during start-up for generators with starting converters
The 7UM6 protection relays of the SIPROTEC 4 family are com-
are also included.The scope of functions can be used for the
pact multifunction units which have been developed for small to
second protection group, and functions that are not used, can be
medium-sized power generation plants. They incorporate all the
masked out.
2
necessary protective functions and are especially suitable for the
protection of: Asynchronous motor
– Hydro and pumped-storage generators
Besides differential protection, this function package includes
– Co-generation stations all protection functions needed to protect large asynchronous
3 – Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
as wind or biogases
motors (more than 1 MVA). Stator and bearing temperatures are
measured by a separate thermo-box and are transmitted serially
– Power generation with diesel generators to the protection unit for evaluation.
– Gas turbine power stations
4
Transformer
– Industrial power stations
This scope of functions not only includes differential and
– Conventional steam power stations. overcurrent protection, but also a number of protection func-
They can also be employed for protection of motors and tions that permit monitoring of voltage and frequency stress, for
5 transformers.
The numerous other additional functions assist the user in
instance. The reverse-power protection can be used for energy
recovery monitoring of parallel-connected transformers.
ensuring cost-effective system management and reliable power

supply. Measured values display current operating conditions.
6 Stored status indications and fault recording provide assistance
in fault diagnosis not only in the event of a disturbance in
Construction
generator operation. The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of
functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection
7
Combination of the units makes it possible to implement effec- and control.
tive redundancy concepts.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic cri-
Protection functions teria. Large, easy-to-read displays were a major design aim. The
7UM623 is equipped with a graphic display thus providing and
8
Numerous protection functions are necessary for reliable protec- depicting more information especially in industrial applications.
tion of electrical machines. Their extent and combination are The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably simplifies planning
determined by a variety of factors, such as machine size, mode and engineering and reduces commissioning times.
of operation, plant configuration, availability requirements,
experience and design philosophy. The 7UM621 and 7UM623 are configured in 1/2 19 inches
9 This results in multifunctionality, which is implemented in

width. This means that the units of previous models can be
replaced. The height throughout all housing width increments
outstanding fashion by numerical technology. is 243 mm.
In order to satisfy differing requirements, the combination of All wires are connected directly or by means of ring-type cable
10 functions is scalable (see Table 11/3). Selection is facilitated by
division into five groups.
lugs. Alternatively, versions with plug-in terminals are also avail-
able. These permit the use of prefabricated cable harnesses.
Generator Basic In the case of panel surface mounting, the connecting terminals
11
are in the form of screw-type terminals at top and bottom. The
One application concentrates on small and medium generators
communication interfaces are also arranged on the same sides.
for which differential protection is required. The function mix
is also suitable as backup protection. Protection of synchronous
motors is a further application.
12 Generator Standard
In the case of medium-size generators (10 to 100 MVA) in a unit
connection, this scope of functions offers all necessary protec-
13
tion functions. Besides inadvertent energization protection, it
also includes powerful backup protection for the transformer or
the power system. The scope of protection is also suitable for
units in the second protection group.
LSP2166-afp.tif
14 Generator Full
Here, all protection functions are available and the main applica-
tion focuses on large block units (more than 100 MVA). The
Fig. 11/2
15
function mix includes all necessary protection functions for the Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and serial
interface

Protection functions Abbreviation ANSI No. Gene- Gene- Gene- Motor Trans-
1
rator rator rator Asyn- former
Basic Standard Full chronous
Current differential protection
Stator ground-fault protection non-directional,
∆I
V0>, 3I0>
87G/87T/87M
59N, 64G










2
directional \(V0, 3I0) 67G
Sensitive ground-fault protection IEE> 50/51GN     
(also rotor ground-fault protection)
Sensitive ground-fault prot. B (e.g. shaft current prot.) IEE-B> IEE-B<
(64R)
51GN     
3
Stator overload protection I 2t 49     
4
Definite-time overcurrent prot. with undervolt. seal-in I> +V< 51     
Definite-time overcurrent protection, directional I>>, Direc. 50/51/67     
Inverse-time overcurrent protection t = f(I)+V< 51V     
Overvoltage protection V> 59     
Undervoltage protection
V<, t = f(V)
f<, f>
27
81










5
Reverse-power protection -P 32R     
Overexcitation protection (Volt/Hertz)
Fuse failure monitor
V/f
V2/V1, I2/I1
24
60FL










6
External trip coupling Incoup. 4 4 4 4 4
7
Trip circuit supervision T.C.S. 74TC     
Forward-power protection P>, P< 32F     
Underexcitation protection (loss-of-field protection) 1/xd 40   
Negative-sequence protection I2>, t = f(I2) 46    
Breaker failure protection Imin> 50BF      8
Motor starting time supervision Istart2t 48    
Restart inhibit for motors I 2t 66, 49 Rotor    
Rotor ground-fault protection (fn, R-measuring)
Inadvertent energization protection
R, V<
64R (fn)
50/27
 



9
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd V0 (3rd harm.) 59TN, 27TN 3rd  
harmonics h
Impedance protection with (I>+V<) pickup Z< 21   10
Interturn protection UInterturn> 59N(IT)  
DC voltage / DC current time protection Vdc > 59N (DC) 
11
Idc > 51N (DC)
Overcurrent protection during startup I> 51 
(for gas turbines)
Ground-current differential protection ∆Ie 87GN/TN 1) 1)  1) 1)
Out-of-step protection
Rotor ground-fault protection
∆Z/∆t
RREF<
78
64R (1 – 3 Hz) 1) 1)

1)
12
(1 – 3 Hz square wave voltage)
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage RSEF< 64G (100 %) 1) 1) 1)
Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt > 81R 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 13
Vector jump supervision (voltage) ∆φ > 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
Threshold supervision     
Supervision of phase rotation
Undercurrent via CFC
A, B, C
I<
47
37










14
External temperature monitoring via serial interface ϑ (Thermo-box) 38     
15
1) Optional for all function groups.
Table 11/3 Scope of functions of the 7UM62

Current differential protection

(ANSI 87G, 87M, 87T)
1 This function provides undelayed short-
circuit protection for generators, motors
and transformers, and is based on the
2
current differential protection principle
(Kirchhoff’s current law).
The differential and restraint (stabiliza-
tion) current are calculated on the basis
3 of the phase currents. Optimized digital

filters reliably attenuate disturbances such
as aperiodic component and harmonics.
The high resolution of measured quanti-
4
ties permits recording of low differential
currents (10 % of IN) and thus a very high
sensitivity.
An adjustable restraint characteristic
5 permits optimum adaptation to the condi-

tions of the protected object. Software is
Fig. 11/3 Restraint characteristic of current differential protection
used to correct the possible mismatch of
the current transformers and the phase
6
angle rotation through the transformer
(vector group). Thanks to harmonic
analysis of the differential current, inrush
(second harmonic) and overexcitation
(fifth harmonic) are reliably detected, and
7 unwanted operation of the differential
protection is prevented. The current of
internal short-circuits is reliably measured
by a fast measuring stage (IDiff>>), which
8 operates with two mutually complemen-

tary measuring processes. An external
short-circuit with transformer saturation
is picked up by a saturation detector with
9
time and status monitoring. It becomes
active when the differential current (IDiff)
moves out of the add-on restraint area.
If a motor is connected, this is detected by
10
monitoring the restraint current and the
restraint characteristic is briefly raised.
Fig. 11/4 Restraint characteristic of ground-current differential protection
This prevents false tripping in the event
of unequal current transmission by the
11
current transformers.
Figure 11/36 shows the restraint characteristic and various DC components in particular are suppressed by means of
areas. specially dimensioned filters. A number of monitoring processes
avoid unwanted operation in the event of external short-circuits.
Ground-current differential protection (ANSI 87GN, 87TN)
12
In the case of a sensitive setting, multiple measurement ensures
The ground-current differential protection permits high sensitiv- the necessary reliability.
ity to single-pole faults. The zero currents are compared. On the However, attention must be drawn to the fact that the sensitivity
one hand, the zero-sequence current is calculated on the basis limits are determined by the current transformers.
13
of the phase currents and on the other hand, the ground current
is measured directly at the star-point current transformer. The protection function is only used on generators when the
neutral point is grounded with a low impedance. In the case of
The differential and restraint quantity is generated and fitted transformers, it is connected on the neutral side. Low imped-
into the restraint characteristic (see Fig. 11/37). ance or solid grounding is also required.
14
15
Definite-time overcurrent protection I>, I>> (ANSI 50, 51, 67)

This protection function comprises the short-circuit protection
for the generator and also the backup protection for upstream 1
devices such as transformers or power system protection.
An undervoltage stage at I> maintains the pickup when, during
the fault, the current drops below the threshold. In the event of
a voltage drop on the generator terminals, the static excitation
2
system can no longer be sufficiently supplied. This is one reason
for the decrease of the short-circuit current.
The I>> stage can be implemented as high-set instantaneous
trip stage. With the integrated directional function it can be used
3
as backup protection on the transformer high-voltage side. With
the information of the directional element, impedance protec-
4
Fig. 11/5 Characteristic of negative-sequence protection
tion can be controlled via the CFC.
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)

Available inverse-time characteristics
This function also comprises short-circuit and backup protection
5
Characteristics ANSI IEC 60255-3
and is used for power system protection with current-dependent
Inverse • •
protection devices.
IEC and ANSI characteristics can be selected (Table 11/4).
The current function can be controlled by evaluating the genera-
tor terminal voltage.
Extremely inverse
Definite inverse
•
•
•
6
The “controlled” version releases the sensitive set current stage.
Table 11/4
7
With the “restraint” version, the pickup value of the current is
lowered linearly with decreasing voltage.
The fuse failure monitor prevents unwanted operation. Underexcitation protection (Loss-of-field protection)
(ANSI 40)
8
Stator overload protection (ANSI 49)
Derived from the generator terminal voltage and current,
The task of the overload protection is to protect the stator the complex admittance is calculated and corresponds to the
windings of generators and motors from high, continuous generator diagram scaled in per unit. This protection prevents
overload currents. All load variations are evaluated by a damage due to loss of synchronism resulting from underexcita-
mathematical model. The thermal effect of the r.m.s. current
value forms the basis of the calculation. This conforms to
tion. The protection function provides three characteristics for
monitoring static and dynamic stability. Via a transducer, the 9
IEC 60255-8. excitation voltage (see Figure 11/52) can be injected and, in the
In dependency of the current, the cooling time constant is event of failure, a swift reaction of the protection function can
10
automatically extended. If the ambient temperature or the be achieved by timer changeover.
temperature of the coolant are injected via a transducer (TD2)
or PROFIBUS DP, the model automatically adapts to the The straight-line characteristics allow the protection to be opti-
ambient conditions; otherwise a constant ambient temperature mally adapted to the generator diagram (see Figure 11/39). The
is assumed. per-unit-presentation of the diagram allows the setting values to
Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46)

be directly read out.
The positive-sequence systems of current and voltage are used
11
Asymmetrical current loads in the three phases of a generator to calculate the admittance. This ensures that the protection
cause a temperature rise in the rotor because of the negative- always operates correctly even with asymmetrical network
sequence field produced. conditions.
12
This protection detects an asymmetrical load in three-phase If the voltage deviates from the rated voltage, the admittance
generators. It functions on the basis of symmetrical components calculation has the advantage that the characteristics move in
13
and evaluates the negative sequence of the phase currents. the same direction as the generator diagram.
The thermal processes are taken into account in the algorithm
and form the inverse characteristic. In addition, the negative
sequence is evaluated by an independent stage (alarm and trip)
which is supplemented by a time-delay element (see Fig. 11/38).
In the case of motors, the protection function is also used to
monitor a phase failure.
14
15
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)
1 The reverse-power protection monitors the direction of active

power flow and picks up when the mechanical energy fails. This
function can be used for operational shut-down (sequential
tripping) of the generator but also prevents damage to the
2
steam turbines. The reverse power is calculated from the
positive-sequence systems of current and voltage. Asymmetrical
power system faults therefore do not cause reduced measuring
accuracy. The position of the emergency trip valve is injected as
3
binary information and is used to switch between two trip
command delays. When applied for motor protection, the sign
(±) of the active power can be reversed via parameters.
Fig. 11/6 Characteristic of underexcitation protection
Forward-power protection (ANSI 32F)
4 Monitoring of the active power produced by a generator can be

useful for starting up and shutting down generators. One stage
monitors exceeding of a limit value, while another stage moni-
tors falling below another limit value. The power is calculated
5 using the positive-sequence component of current and voltage.

The function can be used to shut down idling motors.
Impedance protection (ANSI 21)
6 This fast short-circuit protection protects the generator and

the unit transformer and is a backup protection for the power
system. This protection has two settable impedance stages; in
addition, the first stage can be switched over via binary input.
7
With the circuit-breaker in the “open” position the impedance Fig. 11/7 Grading of impedance protection
measuring range can be extended (see Figure 11/40).
The overcurrent pickup element with undervoltage seal-in Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
ensures a reliable pickup and the loop selection logic ensures a
8 reliable detection of the faulty loop. With this logic it is possible

to perform correct measurement via the unit transformer.
The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the
equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency. It
also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
9 The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
components of the voltages and compares them with the
either as underfrequency or overfrequency protection. Each
stage can be delayed separately.
threshold values. There are two stages available.
Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors
10
ing algorithm reliably identifies the fundamental waves and
and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
instability of such machines. measurement can be blocked by using an undervoltage stage.
The function can also be used for monitoring purposes. Overexcitation protection Volt/Hertz (ANSI 24)
11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an
unpermissible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators
This protection prevents insulation faults that result when the
or transformers, which leads to thermal overloading. This may
voltage is too high.
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with
12 Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground

voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The
weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character-
istic can be set via eight points derived from the manufacturer
measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent data.
of the neutral point displacement caused by ground faults. This
In addition, a definite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous
13
function is implemented in two stages.
stage can be used. For calculation of the V/f ratio, frequency and
also the highest of the three line-to-line voltages are used. The
frequency range that can be monitored comprises 11 to 69 Hz.
14
15
90 % stator ground-fault protection, non-directional,

directional (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
Ground faults manifest themselves in generators that are oper- 1
ated in isolation by the occurence of a displacement voltage.
In case of unit connections, the displacement voltage is an
2
adequate, selective criterion for protection.
For the selective ground-fault detection, the direction of the
flowing ground current has to be evaluated too, if there is a
direct connection between generator and busbar.
The protection relay measures the displacement voltage at a
VT located at the transformer star point or at the broken delta
Fig. 11/8 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection
3
winding of a VT. As an option, it is also possible to calculate the
zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages. Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
Depending on the load resistor selection, 90 to 95 % of the
stator winding of a generator can be protected.
In the event of scheduled downtimes or a fault in the generator,
the generator can remain on line if the circuit-breaker is defec-
4
tive and could suffer substantial damage.
A sensitive current input is available for ground-current measure-
ment. This input should be connected to a core-balance current
transformer. The fault direction is deduced from the displace-
Breaker failure protection evaluates a minimum current and the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. It can be started by internal 5
ment voltage and ground current. The directional characteristic protective tripping or externally via binary input. Two-channel
(straight line) can be easily adapted to the system conditions. activation avoids overfunction (see Figure 11/41).
6
Effective protection for direct connection of a generator to a
busbar can therefore be established. During startup, it is possible Inadvertent energization protection (ANSI 50, 27)
to switch over from the directional to the displacement voltage This protection has the function of limiting the damage of the
measurement via an externally injected signal. generator in the event of an unintentional switch-on of the
7
Depending on the protection setting, various ground-fault circuit-breaker, whether the generator is standing still or rotating
protection concepts can be implemented with this function without being excited or synchronized. If the power system
(see Figures 11/51 to 11/54). voltage is connected, the generator starts as an asynchronous
machine with a large slip and this leads to excessively high
Sensitive ground-fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R) currents in the rotor.
The sensitive ground-current input can also be used as separate A logic circuit consisting of sensitive current measurement for 8
ground-fault protection. It is of two-stage form. Secondary each phase, measured value detector, time control and block-
ground currents of 2 mA or higher can be reliably handled. ing as of a minimum voltage, leads to an instantaneous trip
9
command. If the fuse failure monitor responds, this function is
Alternatively, this input is also suitable as rotor ground-fault
ineffective.
protection. A voltage with rated frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is
connected in the rotor circuit via the interface unit 7XR61. If Rotor ground-fault protection (ANSI 64R)
a higher ground current is flowing, a rotor ground fault has
10
occurred. Measuring circuit monitoring is provided for this This protection function can be realized in three ways with
application (see Figure 11/56). the 7UM62. The simplest form is the method of rotor-current
measurement (see sensitive ground-current measurement).
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
Resistance measurement at system-frequency voltage
(ANSI 59TN, 27TN (3rd H.))
Owing to the creative design, the generator produces a 3rd har-
The second form is rotor ground resistance measurement with
voltage at system frequency (see Fig. 11/56). This protection
11
monic that forms a zero phase-sequence system. It is verifiable
measures the voltage injected and the flowing rotor ground
by the protection on a broken delta winding or on the neutral
current. Taking into account the complex impedance from the
12
transformer. The magnitude of the voltage amplitude depends
coupling device (7XR61), the rotor ground resistance is calcu-
on the generator and its operation.
lated by way of a mathematical model. By means of this method,
In the event of an ground fault in the vicinity of the neutral the disturbing influence of the rotor ground capacitance is
point, there is a change in the amplitude of the 3rd harmonic eliminated, and sensitivity is increased. Fault resistance values
13
voltage (dropping in the neutral point and rising at the termi- up to 30 kΩ can be measured if the excitation voltage is without
nals). disturbances. Thus, a two-stage protection function, which
features a warning and a tripping stage, can be realized. An
Depending on the connection the protection must be set
additionally implemented undercurrent stage monitors the rotor
either as undervoltage or overvoltage protection. It can also be
circuit for open circuit and issues an alarm.
delayed. So as to avoid overfunction, the active power and the
positive-sequence voltage act as enabling criteria. 14
The picked-up threshold of the voltage stage is restrained by the
active power. This increases sensitivity at low load.
The final protection setting can be made only by way of a
primary test with the generator.
15
Resistance measurement with a square wave voltage of 1 to 3 Hz  I 2

tTrip =  start  ⋅ t start max
 I rms 
1 A higher sensitivity is required for larger generators. On the one
hand, the disturbing influence of the rotor ground capacitance tTrip Tripping time
must be eliminated more effectively and, on the other hand, the Istart Permissible start-up current
noise ratio with respect to the harmonics (e.g. sixth harmonic)
tstart max Permissible start-up time
2
of the excitation equipment must be increased. Injecting a low-
frequency square wave voltage into the rotor circuit has proven Irms Measured r.m.s. current value
itself excellently here (see Figure 11/57). Calculation is not started until the current Irms is higher than an
The square wave voltage injected through the controlling unit adjustable response value (e.g. 2 IN, MOTOR).
3 7XT71 leads to permanent recharging of the rotor ground capac-

itance. By way of a shunt in the controlling unit, the flowing
If the permissible locked-rotor time is less than the permissible
start-up time (motors with a thermally critical rotor), a binary
ground current is measured and is injected into the protection signal is set to detect a locked rotor by means of a tachometer
unit (measurement input). In the absence of a fault (RE ≈ ∞), the generator. This binary signal releases the set locked-rotor time,
4
rotor ground current after charging of the ground capacitance is and tripping occurs after it has elapsed.
close to zero. In the event of an ground fault, the fault resistance
including the coupling resistance (7XR6004), and also the DC voltage time protection/DC current time protection
injecting voltage, defines the stationary current. The current (ANSI 59N (DC) 51N (DC))
square wave voltage and the frequency are measured via the
5 second input (control input). Fault resistance values up to 80
kΩ can be measured by this measurement principle. The rotor
Hydroelectric generators or gas turbines are started by way of
frequency starting converters. An ground fault in the intermedi-
ground circuit is monitored for discontinuities by evaluation of ate circuit of the frequency starting converter causes DC voltage
the current during the polarity reversals. displacement and thus a direct current. As the neutral or
6
grounding transformers have a lower ohmic resistance than the
100% stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz injection voltage transformers, the largest part of the direct current flows
(ANSI 64 G (100%)) through them, thus posing a risk of destruction from thermal
overloading.
Injecting a 20 Hz voltage to detect ground faults even at the
7 neutral point of generators has proven to be a safe and reliable

method. Contrary to the third harmonic criterion (see page 11/8),
As shown in Fig. 11/55, the direct current is measured by means
of a shunt transformer (measuring transducer) connected
it is independent of the generator’s characteristics and the mode directly to the shunt. Voltages or currents are fed to the 7UM62
of operation. Measurement is also possible during system standstill depending on the version of the measuring transducer. The
8
(Fig. 11/56). measurement algorithm filters out the DC component and takes
the threshold value decision. The protection function is active as
This protection function is designed so as to detect both ground from 0 Hz.
faults in the entire generator (genuine 100 %) and all electrically
connected system components. If the measuring transducer transmits a voltage for protection,
9
the connection must be interference-free and must be kept short.
The protection unit measures the injected 20 Hz voltage and the
flowing 20 Hz current. The disturbing variables, for example sta- The implemented function can also be used for special applica-
tor ground capacitance, are eliminated by way of a mathematical tions. Thus, the r.m.s. value can be evaluated for the quantity
model, and the ohmic fault resistance is determined. applied at the input over a wide frequency range.
10 On the one hand, this ensures high sensitivity and, on the other
hand, it permits use of generators with large ground capacitance
Overcurrent protection during start-up (ANSI 51)
values, e.g. large hydroelectric generators. Phase-angle errors Gas turbines are started by means of frequency starting
through the grounding or neutral transformer are measured converters. Overcurrent protection during start-up measures
11 during commissioning and are corrected in the algorithm. short-circuits in the lower frequency level (as from about 5 Hz)
and is designed as independent overcurrent-time protection.
The protection function has a warning and tripping stage. The The pickup value is set below the rated current. The function
measurement circuit is also monitored and failure of the 20 Hz is only active during start-up. If frequencies are higher than
12
generator is measured. 10 Hz, sampling frequency correction takes effect and the
Independent of ground resistance calculation, the protection further short-circuit protection functions are active.
function additionally evaluates the amount of the r.m.s. current
Out-of-step protection (ANSI 78)
value.
13
This protection function serves to measure power swings in
Starting time supervision (motor protection only) (ANSI 48) the system. If generators feed to a system short-circuit for too
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long long, low frequency transient phenomena (active power swings)
unwanted start-ups, which might occur as a result of excessive between the system and the generator may occur after fault
14
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the clearing. If the center of power swing is in the area of the block
rotor is locked. unit, the “active power surges” lead to unpermissible mechanical
stressing of the generator and the turbine.
The tripping time is dependent on the square of the start-up cur-
rent and the set start-up time (Inverse Characteristic). It adapts As the currents and voltages are symmetrical, the positive-
15 itself to the start-up with reduced voltage. The tripping time is sequence impedance is calculated on the basis of their
determined in accordance with the following formula: positive-sequence components and the impedance trajectory
is evaluated. Symmetry is also monitored by evaluation of the

between the system owner and the in-plant generator. If the
1
incoming line fails as the result of auto-reclosure, for instance,
a voltage or frequency deviation may occur depending on the
power balance at the feeding generator. Asynchronous condi-
tions may arise in the event of connection, which may lead to
damage on the generator or the gearing between the generator
and the turbine. Besides the classic criteria such as voltage and
frequency, the following two criteria are also applied: vector
2
jump, rate-of-frequency-change protection.
3
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81)
The frequency difference is determined on the basis of the
calculated frequency over a time interval. It corresponds to the
momentary rate-of-frequency change. The function is designed
so that it reacts to both positive and negative rate-of-frequency
changes. Exceeding of the permissible rate-of-frequency change 4
is monitored constantly. Release of the relevant direction
depends on whether the actual frequency is above or below the
5
rated frequency. In total, four stages are available, and can be
used optionally.
Vector jump
6
Monitoring the phase angle in the voltage is a criterion for
Fig. 11/9 Ranges of the characteristic and possible oscillation profiles
identifying an interrupted infeed. If the incoming line should
fail, the abrupt current discontinuity leads to a phase angle jump
negative-phase-sequence current. Two characteristics in the R/X in the voltage. This is measured by means of a delta process. The
diagram describe the active range (generator, unit transformer command for opening the generator or coupler circuit-breaker is
or power system) of the out-of-step protection. The associated
counters are incremented depending on the range of the
issued if the set threshold is exceeded.
7
characteristic in which the impedance vector enters or departs. Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
Tripping occurs when the set counter value is reached.
When cold or at operating temperature, motors may only be
The counters are automatically reset if power swing no longer
occurs after a set time. By means of an adjustable pulse, every
connected a certain number of times in succession. The start-up
current causes heat development in the rotor which is monitored
8
power swing can be signaled. Expansion of the characteristic by the restart inhibit function.
in the R direction defines the power swing angle that can be
9
Contrary to classical counting methods, in the restart inhibit
measured. An angle of 120 ° is practicable. The characteristic
function the heat and cooling phenomena in the rotor are simu-
can be tilted over an adjustable angle to adapt to the conditions
lated by a thermal replica. The rotor temperature is determined
prevailing when several parallel generators feed into the system.
on the basis of the stator currents. Restart inhibit permits restart
Inverse undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) of the motor only if the rotor has enough thermal reserve for a
Motors tend to fall out of step when their torque is less than
completely new start. Fig. 11/43 illustrates the thermal profile
for a permissible triple start out of the cold state. If the thermal
10
the breakdown torque. This, in turn, depends on the voltage. reserve is too low, the restart inhibit function issues a blocking
On the one hand, it is desirable to keep the motors connected signal with which the motor starting circuit can be blocked. The
11
to the system for as long as possible while, on the other hand, blockage is canceled again after cooling down and the thermal
the torque should not fall below the breakdown level. This value has dropped below the pickup threshold.
protection task is realized by inverse undervoltage protection.
The inverse characteristic is started if the voltage is less than the As the fan provides no forced cooling when the motor is off, it
pickup threshold Vp<. The tripping time is inversely proportional cools down more slowly. Depending on the operating state, the
to the voltage dip (see equation). The protection function uses
the positive-sequence voltage, for the protection decision.
protection function controls the cooling time constant. A value
below a minimum current is an effective changeover criterion. 12
I Sensitive ground-fault protection B (ANSI 51 GN)
tTRIP = ⋅ TM
V
I−
VP
The IEE-B sensitive ground-fault protection feature of 7UM62
provides greater flexibility and can be used for the following 13
tTRIP Tripping time applications:
V Voltage • Any kind of ground-fault current supervision to detect ground
Vp
TM
Pickup value
Time multiplier
faults (fundamental and 3rd harmonics)
• Protection against load resistances
14
• Shaft current protection in order to detect shaft currents of
System disconnection the generator shaft and prevent that bearings take damage.
Take the case of in-plant generators feeding directly into a
system. The incoming line is generally the legal entity boundary
The sensitive ground-current protection IEE-B uses either the hard- 15
ware input IEE1 or IEE2. These inputs are designed in a way that

allows them to cut off currents greater than
1
1.6 A (thermal limit, see technical data). This
has to be considered for the applications or
for the selection of the current transformers.
The shaft current protection function is of
2
particular interest in conjunction with hydro-
electric generators. Due to their construction,
the hydroelectric generators have relatively
long shafts. A number of factors such as
3
friction, magnetic fields of the generators and
others can build up a voltage across the shaft
which then acts as voltage source (electro-
motive force-emf). This inducted voltage of
approx. 10 to 30 V is dependent on the load,
4 the system and the machine.

If the oil film covering a bearing is too
thin, breakdown can occur. Due to the low
resistance (shaft, bearing and grounding),
5 high currents may flow that destroy the bear-
ing. Past experience has shown that currents
greater than 1 A are critical for the bearings. Fig. 11/10 Temperature characteristic at rotor and thermal replica of the rotor
As different bearings can be affected, the cur- (multiple start-ups)
6 rent entering the shaft is detected by means

of a special transformer (folding transformer).
Phase rotation reversal
Interturn protection (ANSI 59N (IT))
If the relay is used in a pumped-storage power plant, matching
7 The interturn fault protection detects faults between turns

within a generator winding (phase). This situation may involve
to the prevailing rotary field is possible via a binary input (gen-
erator/motor operation via phase rotation reversal).
relatively high circulating currents that flow in the short-
circuited turns and damage the winding and the stator. The 2 pre-definable parameter groups
8
protection function is characterized by a high sensitivity. In the protection, the setting values can be stored in two data
The displacement voltage is measured at the open delta winding sets. In addition to the standard parameter group, the second
by means of 3 two-phase isolated voltage transformers. So as to group is provided for certain operating conditions (pumped-
be insensitive towards ground faults, the isolated voltage trans- storage power stations). It can be activated via binary input,
9 former star point has to be connected to the generator star point local control or DIGSI 4.
by means of a high-voltage cable. The voltage transformer star
point must not be grounded since this implies that the generator Lockout (ANSI 86)
star point, too, would be grounded with the consequence that All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
10
each fault would lead to a single-pole ground fault. and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
In the event of an interturn fault, the voltage in the affected in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
phase will be reduced causing a displacement voltage that is after the lockout state is reset.
detected at the broken delta winding. The sensitivity is limited
Fuse failure and other monitoring
11 rather by the winding asymmetries than by the protection unit.
An FIR filter determines the fundamental component of the
The relay comprises high-performance monitoring for the
hardware and software.
voltage based an the scanned displacement voltage. Selecting
an appropriate window function has the effect that the sensitiv- The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply
12 ity towards higher-frequency oscillations is improved and the

disturbing influence of the third harmonic is eliminated while
voltages, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) are all
monitored.
achieving the required measurement sensitivity.
The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage
due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids
13
External trip coupling
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection
For recording and processing of external trip information, there functions.
are 4 binary inputs. They are provided for information from the
Buchholz relay or generator-specific commands and act like a The positive and negative-sequence system (voltage and cur-
14
protection function. Each input initiates a fault event and can be rent) are evaluated.
individually delayed by a timer.
Filter time
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC) All binary inputs can be subjected to a filter time (indication
15
One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit- suppression).
breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal
occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted.

Communication
Communication
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been 1

placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization
of standards common in energy automation. The design of
2
the communication modules permits interchangeability on the
one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
standards (for example, Industrial Ethernet).
Local PC interface
The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
quick access to all parameters and fault event data. The use
3
of the DIGSI 4 operating program during commissioning is
particularly advantageous.
Rear-mounted interfaces 4
Two communication modules on the rear of the unit incorporate Fig. 11/11 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
optional equipment complements and permit retrofitting. They
5
connection or fiber-optic connection
assure the ability to comply with the requirements of different
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols
(IEC 60870, PROFIBUS, DIGSI).
6
Service interface (fixed)

In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
7
operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote control is pos-
sible. This provides advantages in fault clearance, in particular in
unmanned substations.
System interface
This is used to communicate with a control or protection
and control system and supports, depending on the module
8
connected, a variety of communication protocols and interface
designs. Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this
operated by DIGSI.
9
IEC 61850 protocol
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply
Fig. 11/12 B
us structure for station bus with Ethernet
and IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring 10
corporations. Siemens is of the first manufacturer to support
this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
11
dancy procedures which are available for the ethernet modules,
such as RSTP, PRP or HSR, are also available for PROFINET.
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI. The time synchronization is made via SNTP. The network
monitoring is possible via SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist
IEC 60870-5-103
12
for PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the device also supports the
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for monitoring of the network topology. Single-point indications,
communication in the protected area. double-point indications, measured and metered values can be
transmitted cyclically in the monitoring direction via the protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection unit
13
and can be selected by the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
manufacturers and is used worldwide. are also transmitted spontaneously via confi gurable process
The generator protection functions are stored in the manufac- alarms. Switching commands can be executed by the system
turer-specific, published part of the protocol. control via the device in the controlling direction.
14
The PROFINET implementation is certified. The device also sup-
PROFINET ports the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on the same ethernet
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor of Profi bus DP and module in addition to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
is supported in the variant PROFINET IO. The protocol which connections are possible for the intercommunication between
devices, e.g. for transmitting fault records and GOOSE messages.
15
is used in industry together with the SIMATIC systems control
is realized on the optical and electrical Plus ethernet modules
which are delivered since November 2012. All network redun-

Communication
PROFIBUS DP
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized
communication protocol (EN 50170). PRO-
FIBUS is supported internationally by several
hundred manufacturers and has to date been
2
used in more than 1,000,000 applications all
over the world.
With the PROFIBUS DP, the protection can be
directly connected to a SIMATIC S5/S7. The
3 transferred data are fault data, measured

values and information from or to the logic
(CFC).
Fig. 11/13 RS232/RS485 Fig. 11/14 820 nm fiber-optic communication
MODBUS RTU
4
Electrical communication module module
MODBUS is also a widely utilized com-

munication standard and is used in numerous
automation solutions.
5 DNP 3.0
LSP2164-afpen.tif
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol ver-
LSP3.01-0021.eps
sion 3) is a messaging-based communication
6
protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully Level
1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. DNP
3.0 is supported by a number of protection
device manufacturers. Fig. 11/15 PROFIBUS communication Fig. 11/16 Optical Ethernet communication
7
module optical, double-ring module for IEC 61850 with
Safe bus architecture integrated Ethernet switch
• RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper
conductors, electromagnetic interference
8 influences are largely eliminated by the use

of twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of
a unit, the remaining system continues to
operate without any faults.

The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune
to electromagnetic interference. Upon
failure of a section between two units, the
10
communication system continues to operate
without disturbance.
System solution
11
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in SIMATIC-
based automation systems.
Via the PROFIBUS DP, indications (pickup
and tripping) and all relevant operational
12 measured values are transmitted from the

protection unit.
Via modem and service interface, the protec-
tion engineer has access to the
13 protection devices at all times. This
permits remote maintenance and
enabling direct connection of units of other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus.
With IEC 61850, however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
diagnosis (cyclic testing). systems (see Fig. 11/45).
14
Parallel to this, local communication is pos-
sible, for example, during a major inspection. Analog output 0 to 20 mA
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system Alternatively to the serial interfaces up to two analog output modules (4 channels)
solution is offered with SICAM PAS. Via the can be installed in the 7UM62.
15
100 Mbit/s Ethernet bus, the unit are linked Several operational measured values
with PAS electrically or optically to the station (I1, I2, V, P, Q, f, PF (cos φ), Θstator, Θrotor) can be selected and transmitted via the
PC. The interface is standardized, thus also 0 to 20 mA interfaces.

Typical connections
Typical connections
Direct generator – busbar connection 1

Figure 11/51 illustrates the recommended
standard connection when several genera-
tors supply one busbar. Phase-to-ground
faults are disconnected by employing the 2
directional ground-fault criterion. The
ground-fault current is driven through the
3
cables of the system.
If this is not sufficient, an grounding trans-
former connected to the busbar supplies
the necessary current (maximum approxi-
4
mately 10 A) and permits a protection
range of up to 90 %. The ground-fault
current should be detected by means
of core-balance current transformers in
order to achieve the necessary sensitivity.
The displacement voltage can be used
as ground-fault criterion during starting 5
operations until synchronization is
achieved.
Differential protection embraces protection
of the generator and of the outgoing cable.
6
The permissible cable length and the cur-
rent transformer design (permissible load)
are mutually dependent. Recalculation is
advisable for lengths of more than 100 m. 7
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/18
15
Typical connections
Direct generator – busbar connection

with low-resistance grounding
1 If the generator neutral point has low-
resistance grounding, the connection illus-
trated in Fig. 11/52 is recommended. In the
2
case of several generators, the resistance
must be connected to only one generator,
in order to prevent circulating currents
(3rd harmonic).
3 For selective ground-fault detection, the

ground-current input should be looped
into the common return conductor of the
two current transformer sets (differential
4
connection). The current transformers
must be grounded at only one point. The
displacement voltage VE is utilized as an
additional enabling criterion.
5 Balanced current transformers (calibration

of windings) are desirable with this form of
connection. In the case of higher generator
power (for example, IN approximately
6
2000 A), current transformers with a
secondary rated current of 5 A are recom-
mended.
Ground-current differential protection can
7
be used as an alternative (not illustrated).
10
Fig. 11/19
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Unit connection with isolated star point

This configuration of unit connection is
a variant to be recommended (see Fig. 1
11/53). Ground-fault detection is effected
by means of the displacement voltage. In
2
order to prevent unwanted operation in the
event of ground faults in the system, a load
resistor must be provided at the broken
delta winding. Depending on the plant (or
3
substation), a voltage transformer with a
high power (VA) may in fact be sufficient.
If not, an grounding transformer should be
employed. The available measuring wind-
ing can be used for the purpose of voltage
measurement.
In the application example, differential
4
protection is intended for the generator.
The unit transformer is protected by its own
differential relay (e.g. 7UT612).
5
As indicated in the figure, additional pro-
tection functions are available for the other
6
inputs. They are used on larger generator/
transformer units (see also Figures 11/56
and 11/58).
10
11
12
Fig. 11/20
13
14
15
Typical connections
Unit connection with neutral

transformer
1 With this system configuration, disturbance
voltage reduction and damping in the
event of ground faults in the generator
2
area are effected by a load resistor con-
nected to the generator neutral point.
The maximum ground-fault current is lim-
ited to approximately 10 A. Configuration
3 can take the form of a primary or second-

ary resistor with neutral transformer. In
order to avoid low secondary resistance,
the transformation ratio of the neutral
4
transformer should be below
 VGen 
 500 V 
 3 
5 The higher secondary voltage can be

reduced by means of a voltage divider.
Electrically, the circuit is identical to the
configuration in Fig. 11/53.
6 In the application opposite, the differential

protection is designed as an overall func-
tion and embraces the generator and unit
transformer. The protection function carries
7 out vector group adaptation as well as
other adaptations.
10
11
12
13 Fig. 11/21
14
15
Typical connections
Voltage transformer in open delta

connection (V-connection)
Protection can also be implemented 1
on voltage transformers in open delta
connection (Fig. 11/55). If necessary,
2
the operational measured values for the
phase-to-ground voltages can be slightly
asymmetrical. If this is disturbing, the
neutral point (R16) can be connected to Fig. 11/22
3
ground via a capacitor.
In the case of open delta connection, it is
not possible to calculate the displacement
voltage from the secondary voltages. It
4
must be passed to the protection relay
along a different path (for example, voltage
transformer at the generator neutral point
or from the grounding transformer).
100 % stator ground-fault protection,

ground-fault protection during start-up 5
Fig. 11/56 illustrates the interfacing of
100 % stator ground-fault protection with
voltage injection of 20 Hz, as meant for the
example of the neutral transformer. The
6
same interfacing connection also applies to
the broken delta winding of the grounding
transformer.
The 20 Hz generator can be connected
7
both to the DC voltage and also to a power-
ful voltage transformer (>100 VA). The load
of the current transformer 4NC1225 should
not exceed 0.5 Ω.
8
The 7XT33, 7XT34 and load resistance
9
connection must be established with a
low resistance (RConnection < RL). If large
distances are covered, the devices are
accommodated in the grounding cubicle.
10
Connection of the DC voltage protection
function (TD 1) is shown for systems with
a starting converter. Depending on the
device selection, the 7KG6 boosts the
measured signal at the shunt to 10 V or
20 mA.
11
The TD 1 input can be jumpered to the
relevant signal.
Fig. 11/23 12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Rotor ground-fault protection with volt-

age injection at rated frequency
1 Fig. 11/57 shows the connection of rotor
ground-fault protection to a generator with
static excitation. If only the rotor current
2
is evaluated, there is no need for voltage
connection to the relay.
Ground must be connected to the ground-
ing brush. The external resistors 3PP1336
3 must be added to the coupling device

7XR61 if the circulating current can exceed
0.2 A as the result of excitation (sixth
harmonic). This is the case as from a rated
4
excitation voltage of >150 V, under worst-
case conditions.
Fig. 11/24
5 Rotor ground-fault protection with a

square wave voltage of 1 to 3 Hz
6
The measuring transducers TD1 and TD2
are used for this application. The control-
ling unit 7XT71 generates a square wave
voltage of about ± 50 V at the output. The
frequency can be jumpered and depends
7 on the rotor ground capacitance. Voltage

polarity reversal is measured via the control
input and the flowing circular current is
measured via the measurement input.
8
Ground must be connected to the ground-
ing brush.
9 Fig. 11/25
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Protection of an asynchronous motor

Fig. 11/59 shows a typical connection
of the protection function to a large 1
asynchronous motor. Differential protection
embraces the motor including the cable.
2
Recalculation of the permissible current
transformer burden is advisable for lengths
of more than 100 m.
The voltage for voltage and displacement
voltage monitoring is generally tapped
off the busbar. If several motors are con- 3
nected to the busbar, ground faults can be
detected with the directional ground-fault
4
protection and selective tripping is possible.
A core balance current transformer is used
to detect the ground current. The chosen
pickup value must be slightly higher if
there are several cables in parallel.
The necessary shut-down of the motor in 5
the event of idling can be realized with
active power monitoring.
10
11
12
13
Fig. 11/26
14
15
Typical connections
Use of selected analog inputs IEE1 IEE2 VE
1 Several protection functions take recourse

to the same analog inputs, thus ruling
Sensitive ground-fault protection
Directional stator ground-fault protection
1) 1)
 
out certain functions depending on the
Rotor ground-fault protection (fn, R-measuring)  
application. One input may only be used by
2
one protection function. A different combi- 100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage  
nation can be used by the unit belonging to Ground-current differential protection 1) 1)
Protection Group 2, for example.
1) optional (either IEE1 or IEE2)
Multiple use refers to the sensitive ground-
3 current inputs and the displacement

voltage input (see Table 11/5).
Table 11/5 Multiple use of analog inputs
The same applies to the measuring trans- TD1 TD2 TD3

ducers (Table 11/6).
4
Injection of excitation voltage 
Current transformer requirements DC voltage time/DC current time protection 

Injection of a temperature 
The requirements imposed on the current
Rotor ground-fault protection (1 to 3 Hz)  
transformer are determined by the differen-
5 tial protection function. The instantaneous
trip stage (IDiff>>) reliably masters (via the
Processing of analog values via CFC   
instantaneous algorithm) any high-current Table 11/6 Multiple use of measuring transducers
internal short-circuits.
6 The external short-circuit determines

the requirements imposed on the cur-
Symmetrical short-circuit limiting factor
Required actual accuracy limiting factor Resulting rated accuracy limiting factor
rent transformer as a result of the DC IpSC R′ + RCT
K´SSC = Ktd· K SSC = b ⋅ K′
component. The non-saturated period of Ipn RBN + RCT SSC
7 a flowing short-circuit current should be

at least 5 ms. Table 11/7 shows the design
recommendations. Current transformer requirements
IEC 60044-1 and 60044-6 were taken into Transformer Generator
8 account. The necessary equations are

shown for converting the requirements into
Transient dimensioning
factor Ktd
≥4
τN ≤ 100 ms
> (4 to 5)
τN > 100 ms
the knee- point voltages. The customary Symmetrical short-circuit 1 1
≈ ⋅I ≈ ⋅I
practice which presently applies should current Ipssc v sc pn, Tr x" d pn, G
9 also be used to determine the rated

primary current of the current transformer
Example vsc = 0.1
K'ssc > 40
x”d = 0.12
K'ssc > (34 to 42)
rated current. It should be greater than or
Note: Rated power ≥ 10 or 15 VA Note:
equal to the rated current of the protected
Identical transformers have Secondary winding resistance
10
object. Example:
to be employed Network transformer Example:
10P10: (10 or 15) VA IN, G approx. 1000 to 2000 A
(Isn = 1 or 5 A) 5P15: 15 VA
(Isn = 1 or 5 A)
11
IN, G > 5 000 A
5P20: 30 VA
(Isn = 1 or 5 A)
12
Knee-point voltage
IEC British Standard ANSI
V = K SSC ( Rct + Rb ) I SN V=
(Rct + Rb )I SN ⋅ K K SSC
V = 20 ⋅ I SN ⋅ ( Rct + Rb )⋅
13
1.3 SSC
20
Isn = 5A (typical value)
Ktd Rated transient dimensioning factor Rct Secondary winding resistance
Ipssc Primary symmetrical short-circuit current vsc Short-circuit voltage (impedance voltage)
Ipn Rated primary current (transformer) x”d Subtransient reactance
14 R'b
Rb
Connected burden
Rated resistive burden
Isn
tN
Rated secondary current (transformer)
Network time constant
Table 11/7 Multiple use of measuring transducers
15
Technical data
General unit data Output relays

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Number
7UM621 12 (1 NO, 4 optional as NC,
via jumper)
1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A 7UM622 21 (1 NO, 5 optional as NC,
Ground current, sensitive IEmax 1.6 A via jumper)
Rated voltage VN
Measuring transducer
100 to 125 V
- 10 to + 10 V (Ri=1 MΩ) or
Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA 2
- 20 to + 20 mA (Ri = 10 Ω) Break 30 VA
Break (for resistive load) 40 W
Power consumption Break (for L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA
3
With IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
With IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA Switching voltage 250 V
For sensitive ground current Approx. 0.05 VA Permissible current 5 A continuous
Voltage inputs (with 100 V) Approx. 0.3 VA 30 A for 0.5 seconds
Capability in CT circuits LEDs
Thermal (r.m.s. values) 100 IN for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s
Number
RUN (green) 1
4
4 IN continuous
ERROR (red) 1
Dynamic (peak) 250 IN (one half cycle)
Assignable LED (red) 14
5
Ground current, sensitive 300 A for 1 s
Unit design
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous 7XP20 housing For dimensions see dimension
Dynamic (peak) 750 A (one half cycle) drawings, part 14
Capability in voltage paths 230 V continuous Degree of protection acc. to
Capability of measuring transducer
As voltage input 60 V continuous
EN 60529
For surface-mounting housing
For flush-mounting housing
IP 51 6
As current input 100 mA continuous
Front IP 51
Auxiliary voltage Rear IP 50
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V
DC 60 to 125 V
DC 110 to 250 V
For the terminals
Weight
IP 2x with terminal cover put on
7
Flush mounting housing
and AC 115 V/230 V with 50/60 Hz 7UM621 (½ x 19") Approx. 7 kg
7UM622 (1 x 19") Approx. 9.5 kg
8
Permitted tolerance –20 to +20 %
Superimposed (peak-to-peak) ≤ 15 % Surface mounting housing
7UM621 (½ x 19") Approx. 12 kg
Power consumption
7UM622 (1 19") Approx. 15 kg
During normal operation
7UM621 Approx. 5.3 W
7UM622
7UM623
During pickup with all inputs
Approx. 5.5 W
Approx. 8.1 W
Electrical tests
Specifications
9
and outputs activated Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
7UM611 Approx. 12 W ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
7UM612
7UM623
Approx. 15 W
Approx. 14.5 W
UL 508
DIN 57435, part 303
For further standards see below
10
voltage failure Insulation tests
at Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms
11
Standards IEC 60255-5
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms
Voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Binary inputs
All circuits except for auxiliary sup-
Number ply, binary inputs communication
7UM621, 7UM623 7 and time synchronization interfaces
7UM622
3 pickup thresholds
15
DC 10 to 19 V or DC 44 to 88 V
Voltage test (routine test)
Auxiliary voltage and binary inputs
3.5 kV
12
Range is selectable with jumpers DC 88 to 176 V1) Voltage test (routine test) 500 V (r.m.s. value), 50 Hz
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V only isolated communication
13
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA interfaces and time synchronization
interface
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
All circuits except for communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
interfaces and time synchronization at intervals of 1 s
interface, class III
14
15
Technical data
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test Mechanical stress tests
1 Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22

(product standards)
During operation
DIN 57435 part 303 Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
2
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz;
IEC 60255-22-1, class III τ = 15 ms IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm ampli-
and DIN 57435 part 303, class III 400 pulses per s; duration 2 s IEC 60068-2-6 tude;
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV 15 kV air discharge;
3
EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
non-modulated
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
the 3 axes
Irradiation with RF field, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
4
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
pulse-modulated frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 % 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III (vertical axis)
5
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
IEC 60255-22-4, burst length = 15 ms; repetition (horizontal axis)
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV rate 300 ms; both polarities; 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min (vertical axis)
6
(SURGE),
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III During transport
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode: Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
2 kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
Differential (transversal) mode: Vibration Sinusoidal
7 1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;

Measurement inputs, binary inputs Common (longitudinal) mode: Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
and relay outputs 2 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF Shock Half-sinusoidal
8 Line-conducted HF,
amplitude-modulated
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
1 kHz
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
3 shocks each in both directions
3 axes
Magnetic field with power 30 A/m continuous; IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
9
frequency 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; IEC 0.5 mT; 50 Hz the 3 axes
60255-6
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
capability damped wave; 50 surges per Climatic stress test
10 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 second; duration 2 s;

Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 –25 °C to +85 °C / –13 °F to +185 °F
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
capability per second; both polarities;
Temporarily permissible operating –20 °C to +70 °C / –4 °F to +158 °F
11
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s;
Ri = 80 Ω temperature, tested for 96 h
Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz Recommended permanent opera- –5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
rence ting temperature acc. to
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 IEC 60255-6
12
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and
50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω – Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +55 °C / –13 °F to +131 °F
permanent storage
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests – Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +70 °C / –13 °F to +158 °F
13
Standard EN 50081-x (generic standard) transport
Conducted interference voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz Humidity
on lines Limit class B Permissible humidity stress Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
only auxiliary supply IEC-CISPR 22 It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
14
Interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensa-
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B not exposed to direct sunlight or tion is
1) Conversion with external OLM that could cause condensation
For fiber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th
position with 4 (FMS RS485) or 9 and Order code L0A (DP RS485)
15 and additionally order:

For single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-3AB10 Futher information can be found in the current manual at:
For double ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-4AB10 www.siemens.com/siprotec


7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay
Housing, binary inputs and outputs

7UM62 - - 0-
1
Housing ½ 19", 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 live status contact 1 Continued
on next
2
Housing � 19", 15 BI, 20 BO, 1 live status contact 2
page
Graphic display, ½ 19'', 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 live status contact 3
Current transformer IN
1 A1), IEE (sensitive) 1
5 A1), IEE (sensitive)

5
3
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input 19 V3) 2
4
DC 60 to 125 V2), threshold binary input 19 V3) 4
DC 110 to 220 V2), AC 115 V/230 V, threshold binary input 88 V3) 5
DC 220 to 250 V, AC 115 V/230 V, threshold binary input 176 V 6
Unit version
For panel surface-mounting, 2 tier screw-type terminals top/bottom
For panel flush-mounting, plug-in terminals (2-/3- pin connector)
B
D
5
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminal (direct connection, ring-type cable lugs) E
6
Region-specific default setting / function and language settings
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC characteristics, language: German, (language can be selected) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI characteristics, language: English (UK), (language can be selected) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI characteristics, language: English (US), (language can be selected) C
Port B (System interface)
7
8
Analog output 2 x 0 to 20 mA 7
PROFIBUS DP slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0A
9
PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector* 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector* 9 L 0 E
10
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector* 9 L 0H
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connectors 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector4) 9 L 0 S
PROFINET I/O, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-plug 9 L 3 R
11
PROFINET I/O, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch, optical, double, LC connectors3) 9 L 3 S
Only Port C (Service interface)
DIGSI 4 /modem, electrical RS232 1
12
DIGSI 4 /modem, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485 2
Port C (Service interface) and Port D (Additional interface) 9 M
Port C (Service interface)

DIGSI 4 /modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4 /modem, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485
Port D (Additional interface)

2
13
Temperature monitoring box, optical 820 nm, ST connector A
14
Temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485 F
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA K
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Not available with position 9 = “B”
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected ot with position 9 = B; if 9 = “B”, please order 7UM62 unit with
* N
15
by means of jumpers. RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters.
3) The binary input thresholds can be selected in stages by means of
jumpers.

1 7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay
Measuring functions
7UM62 - - 0
Without extended measuring functions 0
2
Min./max. values, energy metering 3
Function
Generator Basic A
Generator Standard B
3 Generator Full
Asynchronous Motor
C
F
Transformer H
4
Functions (additional functions)
Without A
Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection and 100 % stator ground-fault protection B
Restricted ground-fault protection C
5 Network decoupling (df/dt and vector jump)

All additional functions
E
G
6 1) For more detailed information on the functions see Table 11/3.
7 Accessories Description Order No.
Connecting cable
8 and protection unit (9-pin connector)

Cable between thermo-box and relay
– length 5 m / 5.5 yd 7XV5103-7AA05
9
– length 25 m / 27.3 yd 7XV5103-7AA25
– length 50 m / 54.7 yd 7XV5103-7AA50
Coupling device for rotor ground-fault protection 7XR6100-0CA00
10
Short code
Series resistor for rotor ground-fault protection
(group: 013002) 3PP1336-0DZ K2Y
Resistor for underexcitation protection
11
(voltage divider, 20:1) (group: 012009) 3PP1326-0BZ K2Y
Resistor for stator ground-fault protection

(voltage divider, 5:1) (group 013001) 3PP1336-1CZ K2Y
12
20 Hz generator 7XT3300-0CA00
20 Hz band pass filter 7XT3400-0CA00
Current transformer (400 A / 5 A, 5 VA) 4NC5225-2CE20
13 Controlling unit f. rotor ground-fault protection (0.5 to 4Hz) 7XT7100-0EA00
Resistor for 1 to 3 Hz rotor ground-fault protection 7XR6004-0CA00
Temperature monitoring box (thermo-box)
14 AC/DC 24 to 60 V
AC/DC 90 to 240 V
7XV5662-2AD10
7XV5662-5AD10
15
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier Fig.
1
package
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 11/62
2
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
Fig. 11/27 Mounting rail
connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
for 19" rack
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
0-827397-1 1 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 1)
3
4000
0-163084-2 1 1)
LSP2091-afp.eps

For CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)
4

C73334-A1-C34-1
5
links For other terminals 1 Siemens 11/64
LSP2093-afp.eps
C73334-A1-C31-1
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large 1 Siemens 11/35

Fig. 11/30 Fig. 11/31

6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/32 7UM621 and 7UM623 connection diagram (IEC standard)

10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/33 7UM622 connection diagram (IEC standard) 15

10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/34 7UM621 and 7UM623 connection diagram (ANSI standard)

10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/35 7UM622 connection diagram (ANSI standard) 15

10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7VE6
SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device
Voltage and frequency functions (V>, V<, f>, f< df/dt) including
1
voltage vector jump (∆φ) are optionally available for protection
or network decoupling applications.
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous
function chart CFC) offer the user a high flexibility so that
2
adjustments can easily be made to the varying requirements on
the basis of special system conditions.
The flexible communication interfaces are open to modern com-
munication architectures with control systems.
3
Function overview
LSP2483-afpen.tif
Basic functions
• High reliability with a two-out-of-two design (1½ channels in
4
7VE61 and 2 channels in 7VE63)
• Paralleling of asynchronous voltage sources
• Balancing commands for voltage and speed (frequency) 5
• Paralleling of synchronous voltage sources
• Synchro-check function for manual synchronization
Fig. 11/36 SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device • Parameter blocks for use on several synchronizing points
(7VE61 max. 4 and 7VE63 max. 8) 6
Description Additional functions
7
• Consideration of transformer vector group and tap changer
The 7VE61 and 7VE63 paralleling devices of the SIPROTEC 4 fam-
ily are multifunctional compact units used for paralleling power • Synchronization record (instantaneous or r.m.s. record)
systems and generators. • Commissioning support (CB-time measurement, test
synchronization)
8
Their technical design ensures highly reliable paralleling due to
their 1½-channel or 2-channel measurement method and their • Browser operation
hardware design. This is supported by numerous monitoring • Full control functionality of SIPROTEC 4
functions. The units automatically detect the operating condi- • Analog outputs of operational measured values
tions. The response to these conditions depends on settings.
9
• Functions for protection or network decoupling tasks
In “synchronous network switching” mode, the frequency
difference is measured with great accuracy. If the frequency dif- Protection functions (option)
ference is almost zero for a long enough time, the networks are
• Undervoltage protection(27)
already synchronous and a larger making angle is permissible.
10
• Overvoltage protection (59)
If the conditions are asynchronous, as is the case when synchro-
• Frequency protection (81)
nizing generators, the generator speed is automatically matched
to the system frequency and the generator voltage to the system • Rate-of-frequency-change protection ( 81R)
voltage. The connection is then made at the synchronous point, • Jump of voltage vector monitoring
allowing for circuit-breaker make-time.
The 7VE61 paralleling device is a 1½-channel unit (paralleling
Monitoring functions 11
function + synchro-check) for use with small to medium-size • Self-supervision of paralleling function
• Operational measured values
12
generators and power systems. It is more reliable than 1-channel
paralleling devices. It can also be used for synchro-check, with • 8 oscillographic fault records
parallel operation of three synchronization points.
For larger generators and power systems with high reliability
13
requirements, the 2-channel 7VE63 is recommended. Two
independent methods decide on the connection conditions. The – IEC 60870-5-103
unit also has the full control functions of the SIPROTEC 4 family. – IEC 61850 protocol
– PROFIBUS DP
– Modbus RTU and DNP 3
• Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
14
• Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
15
Application
Application Programmable logic
1 The 7VE61 and 7VE63 paralleling devices of the SIPROTEC 4

The integrated programmable logic function allows the user
to implement his own functions for automation of switchgear
family are multifunctional compact units used for paralleling (interlocking) via a graphic user interface. The user can also
power systems and generators. generate user-defined messages.
2 Their technical design ensures highly reliable paralleling due to

their 1½-channel or 2-channel measurement method and their
Adjustments can easily be made to the varying power station
requirements.
hardware design. This is supported by numerous monitoring
functions. Measurement method
3 The units automatically detect the operating conditions.

The response to these conditions depends on settings.
Powerful and successful algorithms based on years of experience
have been incorporated. They ensure both a high level of mea-
surement accuracy and effective noise signal suppression. That
In “synchronous network switching” mode, the frequency makes for reliable paralleling even in networks with harmonics.
4
difference is measured with great accuracy. If the frequency Complementary measurement methods avoid unwanted opera-
difference is almost zero for a long enough time, the tion.
networks are already synchronous and a larger making angle
is permissible. Design
5
If the conditions are asynchronous, as is the case when synchro- The units are available in two designs: the ½ 19" wide 7VE61 and
nizing generators, the generator speed is automatically matched the ½ 19" wide 7VE63. The 7VE61 features a four-line display.
to the system frequency and the generator voltage to the system The 7VE63 is equipped with a graphic display for visualization of
voltage. The connection is then made at the synchronous point, switching states. It also has a larger number of binary inputs and
6
allowing for circuit-breaker make-time. outputs than the 7VE61.
The 7VE61 paralleling device is a 1½-channel unit (paralleling
Communication
function + synchro-check) for use with small to medium-size
generators and power systems. It is more reliable than 1-channel Flexible and powerful communication is paramount. That is
7
paralleling devices. It can also be used for synchro-check, with why the paralleling devices have up to five serial interfaces (for
parallel operation of three synchronization points. details see chapter 4 "Communication"):
For larger generators and power systems with high reliability – Front interface for connecting a PC
requirements, the 2-channel 7VE63 is recommended. Two – Service interface for connecting a PC (e.g. via a modem)
8 independent methods decide on the connection conditions. The

unit also has the full control functions of the SIPROTEC 4 family.
– System interface for connecting to a control system via
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS RTU or
Voltage and frequency functions (V>, V<, f>, f< df/dt) including DNP 3.0
voltage vector jump (∆φ) are optionally available for protection – Interface for an analog output module (2 – 20 mA) and an
9 or network decoupling applications. input

– For time synchronization via DCF77 or IRIG B.
Uniform design
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of Operational measured values
10 functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection

and control and automation.
In order to assist system management and for commissioning
purposes, relevant measured values are displayed as primary and
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic crite- secondary values with unit and values relating to the object to
be protected.
11
ria. Large, easy-to-read displays (graphic display for 7VE63) were
a major design aim. The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably The measured values can also be transferred via the serial
simplifies planning and engineering and reduces commissioning interfaces.
times.
In addition, the programmable logic permits limit value scans
12 Highly reliable
The 7VE6 hardware is based on 20 years of Siemens experience
and status indications derived therefrom.
Metered values are available in the form of energy metered
with numerical protection equipment. State-of-the-art technol- values for the active and reactive energy supplied and are also
ogy and a high-efficiency, 32-bit microprocessor are employed. provided by an elapsed-hour meter.
13 Production is subject to exacting quality standards.

Special attention has been paid to electromagnetic compatibility,
and the number of electronic modules has been drastically
reduced by the use of highly integrated circuits.
14 The software design incorporates accumulated experience and
the latest technical knowledge. Object orientation and high-level
language programming, combined with the continuous quality
15
assurance system, ensure maximized software reliability.

Application, functions
Indications Continuous self-monitoring

The SIPROTEC 4 units provide detailed data for analysis of syn-
chronization (fault events from activated protection functions)
The hardware and software are continuously monitored. If
abnormal conditions are detected, the unit signals immediately. 1
and for checking states during operation. All indications are In this way, a great degree of safety, reliability and availability is
protected against power supply failure. achieved.
• Synchronization indications
(Fault indications)
Reliable battery monitoring 2
The last eight synchronizations (faults) are stored in the unit at The battery buffers the indications and fault recordings in the
all times. A fresh synchronization (fault) will erase the oldest event of power supply voltage failure. Its function is checked at
3
one. The fault indications have a time resolution of 1 ms. They regular intervals by the processor. If the capacity of the battery is
provide detailed information on history. The buffer memory is found to be declining, an alarm indication is generated.
designed for a total of 600 indications.
All setting parameters are stored in the Flash-EPROM which are
• Operational indications not lost if the power supply or battery fails. The SIPROTEC 4 unit
4
All indications that are not directly associated with the remains fully functional.
synchronization (fault) (e.g. operating or switching actions)
are stored in the status indication buffer. The time resolution is
1 ms, buffer size: 200 indications.
Functions
Fault recording at up to 10 or 100 seconds
An instantaneous value or r.m.s. value recorder is provided. The Functional scope of the paralleling function
5
firmware permits storage of 8 fault recordings. Triggering can The units contain numerous individually settable functions
be effected by the synchronization function (starting or closing
6
for different applications. They cover the following operating
command), protection function (pickup or tripping), binary modes:
input, the DIGSI 4 operating program or by the control system.
Synchro-check
The instantaneous value recording stores the voltage input
7
values (va, vb, vc, vd, ve, vf), voltage differences (va-vd, vb-ve, In this mode, the variables ∆V, ∆f, ∆α are checked. If they reach
vc-vf), and calculated r.m.s. values ∆V, ∆f, ∆α at 1-ms intervals set values, a release command is issued for as long as all three
(or 0.83-ms intervals for 60 Hz). The r.m.s. values are calculated conditions are met, but at least for a settable time.
every half cycle. The total duration of the fault recording is
10 seconds. If the time is exceeded, the oldest recording is Switching synchronous networks
overwritten. The characteristic of synchronous networks is their identical
frequency (∆f≈0). This state is detected, and fulfillment of the
8
If you want to record for a longer period for commissioning
purposes (for example, to show the effect of balancing ∆V and ∆α conditions is checked. If the conditions remain met
for a set time, the CLOSE command is issued.
9
commands), r.m.s. value recording is advisable. The relevant
calculated values (V1,V2, f1, f2, ∆V, ∆f, ∆α ) are recorded at
half-cycle intervals. The total duration is 100 seconds. Switching asynchronous networks
This state occurs in the power system and generator (open
Time synchronization generator circuit-breaker). A check is made for fulfillment of ∆V
A battery-backed clock is a standard component and can be
synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF77; IRIG B via
and ∆f conditions and the connection time is calculated, taking
account of ∆α, and the circuit-breaker making time. By means of
10
satellite receiver), binary input, system interface or SCADA balancing commands (for voltage and frequency), the generator
(e.g. SICAM). A date and time are assigned to every indication. can automatically be put into a synchronous condition.
Freely assignable binary inputs and outputs Switching onto dead busbars 11
Binary inputs, output relays, and LEDs can each be given The voltage inputs are checked here. The CLOSE command is
separate user-specific assignments. Assignment is effected using issued depending on the set program and the result of measure-
a software matrix, which greatly simplifies the allocation of
individual signals.
ment. A three-phase connection increases reliability because
several voltages must fulfill the conditions (see Fig. 11/84). 12
To ensure dual-channel redundancy, control of the CLOSE relay The following operating states are possible:
13
(relay R1 and R2) is prioritized and should not be altered. These – V1< V2 >
two relays have a special, highly reliable control and monitoring (connection to dead busbar (side 1))
logic (see Fig. 11/89). – V1> V2 <
(connection to dead line (side 2))
14
– V1< V2 <
(forced closing)
15
Functions
Voltage and frequency band query
1 Synchronization is not activated until the

set limits are reached. Then the remaining
parameters (see above) are checked.
Vector group adaptation

2 If synchronization is effected using a
transformer, the unit will take account of
the phase-angle rotation of the voltage
3
phasor in accordance with the vector
group entry for the transformer. On
transformers with a tap changer, the tap
setting can be communicated to the unit,
4
for example, as BCD code (implemented
in the 7VE63). When using the IEC 61850
communication standard, it is possible
to detect tap position indications with
LSP2480fen.tif
a bay control unit (e.g. 6MD66) and to
5 transmit these indications via GOOSE to

the 7VE6 paralleling device. Deviations
from the rated transformation ratio result
in the appropriate voltage amplitude
6
adaptation. Fig. 11/37 SIGRA 4, synchronization record with balancing commands
Voltage and frequency balancing

If the synchronization conditions are not fulfilled, the unit will Commissioning aids
7
automatically issue balancing signals. These are the appropriate
The paralleling device is designed to be commissioned without
up or down commands to the voltage or speed controller (fre-
an external tester/recorder (see Fig. 11/84). For that purpose,
quency controller). The balancing signals are proportional to the
it contains a codeword-protected commissioning section. This
voltage or frequency difference, which means that if the voltage
can be used to measure the make time automatically with the
8
or frequency difference is substantial, longer balancing com-
unit (internal command issue until the CB poles are closed). This
mands will be output. A set pause is allowed to elapse between
process is logged by the fault recording function.
balancing commands to allow the state change to settle. This
method ensures rapid balancing of the generator voltage or The operational measured values also include all measured
frequency to the target conditions. values required for commissioning. The behavior of the paral-
9 If identical frequency is detected during generator-network
synchronization (“motionless synchronization phasor”), a kick
leling function or the unit is also documented in detail in the
operational annunciation and synchronization annunciation
buffer. The connection conditions are documented in the
pulse will put the generator out of this state.
synchronization record. Test synchronization is also permitted.
10 For example, if the voltage is to be adjusted using the trans-

former tap changer, a defined control pulse will be issued.
All actions inside the synchronizer are taken but the two CLOSE
relays are not operated (R1 and R2). This state can also be initi-
ated via a binary input.
Several synchronizing points
11 Depending on the ordered scope, several synchronization

points can be operated. The data for synchronization of each
circuit-breaker (synchronization function group) are stored
individually. In the maximum version, the 7VE63 operates up to
12
8 synchronization points. Selection is made either via the binary
input or the serial interface. With the CFC, it is also possible to
control the connection of the measured variables or commands
via a master relay.
13
14
15
Functions
Fig. 11/38 Two-channel redundancy

5
6
Great safety and reliability due to multi-channel redundancy
Generator synchronization especially requires units in which
unwanted operation can be ruled out. The paralleling device
achieves this multi-channel redundancy with a two-out-of-two
decision. That means that two conditions for the CLOSE com-
mand must be fulfilled. Fig. 11/85 shows the structure of the
1 ½-channel version (7VE61)
7
two designs.
In the 1½-channel version (7VE61), the paralleling function is
the function that gives the CLOSE command. The synchro-check
function acts as a release criterion with rougher monitoring limit 8
settings. Other monitoring functions are also active at the same
time (see below).
In the two-channel version (7VE63), two independent methods
work in parallel. The CLOSE command is given when the two
2-channel version (7VE63) 9
methods simultaneously decide on CLOSE. Fig. 11/86 shows the
consistent implementation of dual-channel redundancy. Fig. 11/39 Design of multi-channel redundancy
The measured quantities are fed to two ADCs. The second

ADC processes the values rotated through 180° (e.g. V1). The Moreover, coil operation is monitored in the background. For
10
monitoring methods test all the transformer circuits including this purpose, transistors are activated individually and the
internal data acquisition for plausibility and they block measure- response is fed back. Both interruptions and transistor break-
ment if deviations are found. The phase-sequence test detects
connection errors. The measuring methods 1 and 2 include the
down are detected. When faults are found, the unit is blocked
immediately. 11
measurement algorithms and logic functions.
The plausibility monitoring of set values (valid limits) and
selection of the synchronization function groups (only one can
12
In keeping with the two-channel redundancy principle, differing
measurement methods are used to prevent unwanted operation be selected) are also supported. In the event of any deviations,
due to systematic errors. messages are output and the paralleling function is blocked.
In addition, numerous methods are also active, such as closure
13
monitoring (synchronism monitoring of both methods).
Unwanted relay operation is avoided by two-channel operation
of both CLOSE relays. The two measurement methods operate
the transistors crossed over.
14
15
Functions
Internet technology simplifies

commissioning
1 In addition to the universal DIGSI 4 oper-
ating program, the synchronizer contains
a Web server that can be accessed via a
2
telecommunications link using a browser
this solution is that it is both possible to
operate the unit with standard software
3
tools and to make use of the Intranet/
Internet infrastructure. Moreover, infor-
mation can be stored in the unit without
any problems. In addition to numeric
values, visualizations facilitate work with
4 the unit. In particular, graphical displays
LSP2481fen.tif
provide clear information and a high
degree of operating reliability. Fig. 11/88
shows an example of an overview that is
5
familiar from conventional synchronizers.
The current status of synchronization Fig. 11/40 Browser-based operation
conditions is clearly visible. Of course, it
is possible to call up further measured
6
value displays and annunciation buffers.
By emulation of integrated unit opera-
tion, it is also possible to adjust selected
settings for commissioning purposes,
(see Fig. 11/87).
LSP2482fen.tif
10 Fig. 11/41 Overview display of the synchronization function
11
12
13
14
15
Functions
Protection and automation functions Jump of voltage vector monitoring
Basic concept Smaller generating plants frequently require the vector jump
function. With this criterion it is possible to detect a discon- 1
The paralleling function is not performed constantly. Therefore nected supply (e.g. due to the dead time during an automatic
the measured quantities provided at the analog inputs are reclosure) and initiate generator disconnection. This avoids
2
available for other functions. Voltage and frequency protection impermissible loads on the generating plant, especially the drive
or limit value monitoring of these quantities are typical applica- gearing, if reconnection to the network is asynchronous.
tions. Another possible application is network decoupling. After
network disconnection, automatic resynchronization using the The vector jump function monitors the phase angle change in
CFC is possible on request. To allow for great flexibility, these the voltage.
functions can be assigned to the analog inputs. This is defined
for the specific application.
If the incoming line should fail, the abrupt current discontinuity
leads to a phase angle jump in the voltage. This is measured
3
by means of a delta process. The command for opening the
generator or coupler circuit- breaker is issued if the set threshold
The protection function is implemented on two stages and
evaluates the voltage at an input assigned to it. Analysis of a
is exceeded.
Vector jump monitoring is performed again for the assigned
4
phase-to-phase voltage is beneficial as it avoids starting in the
voltage input. This function is blocked during synchronization.
event of ground faults. The protection function can be used
for monitoring and decoupling purposes or to prevent voltage-
induced instability of generators by disconnection.
Threshold monitoring
5
The threshold function is provided for fast monitoring and
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) further processing in the CFC. Optional monitoring of the
6
calculated voltage (for violation of an upper or lower threshold)
The protection function is implemented on two stages and
at the six voltage inputs is possible. A total of three greater-than
evaluates the voltage at an input assigned to it.
and three less-than thresholds are available. The check is made
The overvoltage protection prevents impermissible stress on
once per cycle, resulting in a minimum operating time of about
equipment due to excessive voltages.
30 ms for the voltage. The times can be extended by the internal
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) check time, if necessary (about 1 cycle).
7
The protection function is implemented on four stages and
evaluates the frequency of an input assigned to it. Depending on
8
the frequency threshold setting, the function can provide over-
frequency protection (setting > fn) or underfrequency protection
(setting < fn). Each stage can be delayed separately. Stage 4 can
be configured either as an overfrequency or underfrequency
stage.
The application consists of frequency monitoring usually causing 9
network disconnection in the event of any deviations. The func-
tion is suitable as a load shedding criterion.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) 10

This function can also be assigned to an input. The frequency
difference is determined on the basis of the calculated frequency
11
over a time interval. It corresponds to the momentary rate-of-
frequency change. The function is designed to react to both
positive and negative rate-of-frequency changes. Exceeding
of the permissible rate-of-frequency change is monitored con-
stantly. Release of the relevant direction depends on whether
the actual frequency is above or below the rated frequency.
In total, four stages are available, and can be used optionally.
12
This function is used for fast load shedding or for network
13
decoupling.
14
15
1 Connection to three-phase voltage

transformer
If three-phase voltage transformers are
2 available, connection as shown in

Fig. 11/89 is recommended. This is the
standard circuit because it provides a
high level of reliability for the paralleling
3
function. The phase-sequence test is
additionally active, and several voltages are
checked on connection to a dead busbar.
Interruption in the voltage connection does
4
not lead to unwanted operation. Please
note that side 1 (that is, V1) is always the
feed side. That is important for thedirection
of balancing commands.
6
Fig. 11/42
7
Connection to open delta connection
(V-connection) voltage transformer
8 Fig. 11/90 shows an alternative to

Fig. 11/89 for substations in which the volt-
age transformers have to be V-connected.
For the paralleling device, this connection
9 is the electrical equivalent of the connec-
tion described above. It is also possible to
combine the two: three one-pole isolated
voltage transformers on one side and the
10 V-connection on the other. If, additionally,

a synchroscope is connected, it must
be electrically isolated by means of an
interposing transformer.
11
12
13 Fig. 11/43
14
15
Connection to floating voltage

transformer
To save costs for the voltage transformer, 1
two-phase isolated voltage transformers
are used that are connected to the phase-
2
to-phase voltage (see Fig. 11/91). In that
case, the phase-rotation supervision is
inactive and reliability restrictions when
connecting to the dead busbarmust be
3
accepted.
Full two-channel redundancy is ensured.
6
Fig. 11/44
7
Connection to single-phase isolated
voltage transformer
As an alternative to Fig. 11/91, some
substations use single-phase isolated
8
voltage transformers (see Fig. 11/92). In
this case, only a phase-to-ground voltage
is available. This connection should be
avoided if possible. Especially in isolated
9
or resonant-(star point) neutral-grounded
networks, an ground fault would lead to a
voltage value of zero. That does not permit
synchronization and the busbar is detected 10
as dead.
If V1< and V2 > connection is permitted,
there is a high risk of incorrect synchroniza-
tion. Furthermore, an ground fault in phase
11
L2 leads to an angle rotation of – for
instance – 30° in phase L1. This means that
the device switches at a large fault angle.
12
Fig. 11/45 13
14
15
Switching in 16.7 Hz networks for

application in traction systems
1 The unit can also be used for synchronizing
railway networks or generators. The
connection has to be executed according
2
to Fig. 11/93. No phase sequence test is
available here. Two-channel redundancy is
ensured.
The voltage inputs permit the application
3 of the 16.7 Hz frequency without any

difficulties.
On connection to a dead busbar, a broken
wire in the external voltage transformer
4 circuit is not detected. It is recommended
to make another interrogation of a second
voltage transformer.
6
Fig. 11/46
10
11
12
13
14
15
Synchro-check for several synchroniz-

ing points
To avoid unwanted operation during 1
manual synchronization or during con-
nection of circuit-breakers in the network,
2
the synchro-check function is used as an
enabling criterion. It is fully compatible
with all of the connections described
above (see Figs. 11/89 to 11/93). With
3
the “synchro-check” ordering option, the
paralleling device also allows up to three
circuit-breakers to bemonitored in parallel.
That saves wiring, switching and testing.
In particular, that is an application for the
1½ circuit-breaker method. Moreover, on
smaller generating plants one unit can 4
be used for up to three generators, which
helps reduce costs.
The connection shown in Fig. 11/94 is a
single-pole version, which is acceptable for
5
the synchro-check function.
6
An alternative is the connection for two
switching devices (see Fig. 11/95).
The two free voltage inputs can be used for
monitoring purposes.
7
Fig. 11/47
10
11
12
13
Fig. 11/48
14
15
8
DIGSI: BI "L" active
9 Fig. 11/49
10 Synchronization of a generator
Fig. 11/96 shows an example of the 7VE61 paralleling device
connected to a medium-power generator.Where three-phase volt-
age transformers are available, direct connection is recommended.
11 The synchronization point and start of synchronization is selected

via the binary inputs. If cancellation is necessary, the stop input
must be used.
If synchronization onto a dead busbar is permitted, the alarm
12 contact of the voltage transformer miniature circuit-breakers
(m.c.b.) must be connected to the unit.
Relays R1 and R2 are used for a CLOSE command. The other relays
13
are used for selected indications and for the balancing commands.
The live status contact operated by the unit self-supervision
function must also be wired.
14
15
Technical data

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50, 60 or 16.7 Hz
7XP20 housing For dimensions see dimension
drawings part 14 1
Rated voltage VN 100 to 125 V Degree of protection acc. to
EN 60529
Power consumption
2
For surface-mounting housing IP 51
Voltage inputs (at 100 V) Approx. 0.3 VA For flush-mounting housing
Capability in voltage paths 230 V continuous Front IP 51
Auxiliary voltage Rear IP 50
For the terminals IP 2x with terminal cover put on
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V
3
Weight
DC 60 to 125 V
DC 110 to 250 V
7VE61 (½ x 19“) Approx. 5.2 kg
DC 220 to 250 V
7VE63 (½ x 19“) Approx. 7 kg
AC 115 and 230 V (50/60 Hz)
4
Permitted tolerance -20 to +20 %
7VE61 (½ x 19”) Approx. 9.2 kg
Superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 % 7VE63 (½ x 19”) Approx. 12
(peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
Quiescent Electrical tests
7VE61
7VE63
Approx. 4 W
Approx. 5.5 W
Specifications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) 5
Energized ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
7VE61 Approx. 9.5 W UL 508
7VE63 Approx. 12 W
6
DIN 57435, part 303
Bridging time during auxiliary For further standards see below
voltage failure Insulating tests
at Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms Standards IEC 60255-5
7
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
Binary inputs
All circuits except for auxiliary sup-
Quantity ply, binary inputs, communication
7VE61 6 and time synchronization interfaces
7VE63 14
Voltage test (100 % test) DC 3.5 kV
8
3 pickup thresholds DC 14 to 19 V, DC 66 to 88 V; Auxiliary voltage and binary inputs
Range is settable with jumpers DC 117 to 176 V
Voltage test (100 % test) only 500 V (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V isolated communication interfaces
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA and time synchronization interface
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
9
Output relays
All circuits except for communica- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Quantity tion interfaces and time synchroni- at intervals of 5 s
7VE61 9 (each with 1 NO; 1 optional as zation interface, class III
NC, via jumper)
7VE62 17 (each with 1 NO; 2 optional as EMC tests for noise immunity (type test)
10
NC, via jumper) Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
7VE61+7VE63 1 live status contact (product standards)
(NC, NO via jumper) EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
Switching capacity DIN 57435 part 303
Make 1000 W / VA
11
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz;
Break 30 VA IEC 60255-22-1, class III τ = 15 ms
Break (for resistive load) 40 W and DIN 57435 part 303, class III 400 pulses per s; duration 2 s
Break (for L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 W
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
Switching voltage 250 V IEC 60255-22-2, class IV 15 kV air discharge;
12
Permissible current 5 A continuous EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
30 A for 0.5 seconds Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
LEDs non-modulated
Quantity
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
13
RUN (green) 1
ERROR (red) 1 amplitude-modulated, 1 kHz
Assignable LED (red) IEC 61000-4-3, class III
7VE61 7
7VE63 14
14
15
Technical data
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
1
pulse-modulated frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 % IEC 60255-21-2, class I 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60255-22-4, burst length = 15 ms; repetition (vertical axis)
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV rate 300 ms; both polarities; 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
2
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min (horizontal axis)
High-energy surge voltages Impulse: 1.2/50 μs (vertical axis)
(SURGE), Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
3 2 kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
During transport
1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF
Measurement inputs, binary inputs IEC 60255-21-1, class II 5 to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
4
and relay outputs Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
2 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Differential (transversal) mode: 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
5
amplitude-modulated 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
IEC 61000-4-6, class III 3 axes
Magnetic field with power frequency 30 A/m continuous; Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; IEC 60255-6 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
0.5 mT; 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of

capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
damped wave; 50 surges
the 3 axes
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 per second;

Duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Ω Climatic stress test
Temperatures
7
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 second; both polarities; Standards IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2
duration 2 s ; Ri = 80 Ω
Recommended operating limiting –5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz temperature
interference
8
Temporarily permissible operating -20 to +70 °C
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
temperature (Legibility of display may be
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz,
Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +55 °C / –13 °F to +131 °F
10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω
permanent storage (with supplied
9
EMC tests for interference emission (type test) packing)
Standard EN 50081-x (generic standard) Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +70 °C / –13 °F to +158 °F
Conducted interference voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz transport (with supplied packing)
on lines only auxiliary supply Limit class B Humidity
IEC-CISPR 22
10
Standards IEC 60068-2-3
Interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz
Permissible humidity stress Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; conden-
Mechanical stress tests not exposed to direct sunlight or sation is not permit

During operation
that could cause condensation
Standards EC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
12
IEC 60255-21-1, class II 10 to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
13 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
IEC 60068-2-27
Half-sinusoidal
3 shocks each in both directions of
the 3 axes
14



7VE61multifunction paralleling unit
Housing ⅓ 19”, 6 BI, 9 BO, 1 live status contact
7VE6110 - -0 -
1
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)
24 to 48 V DC , threshold binary input 19 V 2
60 to 125 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V
110 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 88 V DC
4
5
2
220 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 176 V DC 6
3
Unit design
Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier screw-type terminals at top/bottom B
Region-specific default setting/function and language settings
4
Region DE, 50 Hz, language German (language selectable) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language English (GB) (language selectable) B
Region US, 60 Hz, language English (US) (language selectable) C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language Spanish (language selectable) E
Port B (system interface)
5
IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
3
7
6
7
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS RTU, electrical RS485 9 L 0D
MODBUS RTU, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0 E
8
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0H
1
2
9
Port C (service interface) and Port D (additional interface)
9
9
M 1
M 2
10
11
K
Scope of functions of the unit
Synchro-check for up to 3 synchronizing points (with dead bus / line monitoring) A
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points without balancing commands, 1½-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel
12
B
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1½-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel C
Paralleling function for 4 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1½-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel D
Without A A
13
Protection and network decoupling function
(voltage, frequency and rate-of-frequency-change protection, vector jump) B
Additional applications
Without 0
14
Application for traction systems (fn = 16.7Hz) 1
1) With position 9 = B (surface-mounting housing) the unit must be

ordered with RS485 interface and a separate FO converter.
2) Not available with position 9 = "B"
15
1 7VE63multifunction paralleling unit

7VE61multifunction
Housing
Housing½⅓ 19”,
19”,614
BI,BI,
9 BO, 1 livelive
17 BO,1 status
status
contact
contact
7VE6320
7VE6110 - -0 -
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold
hreshold binary
binaryinput
input19
19VV 2
2 DC 60 to 125 V, threshold binary input 19 V

DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC
88 V
88 V
4
5
220220
DC to 250
to 250
V DC,
V, AC
115115
to 230
to 230
V AC,
V, threshold
threshold binary
binary input
input DC
176176
V DC
V 6
3
Unit design
Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier screw-type terminals at top/bottom B
Region-specific default setting
setting/function
/ functionand
andlanguage
languagesettings
settings
4
Region DE, 50
50Hz,
Hz,language
languageGerman
German(language
(languageselectable)
selectable) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language English (GB) (language selectable) B
Region US, 60
60Hz,
Hz,language
languageEnglish
English(US)
(US)(language
(languageselectable)
selectable) C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language Spanish (language selectable) E
5 Port B (system
(systeminterface)
interface)
6 IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
3
7
7
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS RTU, electrical RS485 9 L 0D
MODBUS RTU, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0 E
8
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0H
9 DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232

1
2
Port C (service interface) and Port D
D((additional
additional interface)
10 DIGSI 4
4/modem,
DIGSI 4
/ modem,electrical
4/modem,
electricalRS232
/ modem,electrical
RS232
electricalRS485
RS485
9
9
M 1
M 2
11
K
Scope of functions of the unit
Synchro-check for up to 3 synchronizing points (with dead bus
bus/linemonitoring)
/ line monitoring) A
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points without balancing commands, 2-channel,
1½-channel,
in 2nd channel
12
synchro-checkmeasuring
independent procedures B
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 2-channel,
1½-channel,
independent in 2nd channel
synchro-checkmeasuring procedures C
Paralleling function for 8
4 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 2-channel,
1½-channel,
independent in 2nd channel
synchro-checkmeasuring procedures D
13 Additional functions
Without A A
Protection and network decoupling function
(voltage, frequency and rate-of-frequency-change protection, vector jump) B
14 Additional applications
Without 0
Application for traction systems (fn = 16.7Hz) 1
15 1) With position 9 = B (surface-mounting housing) the unit must be

ordered with RS485 interface and a separate FO converter.
2) Not available with position 9 = "B"

Copper connecting cable

1
Manual 2
7VE61 and 7VE63 Multifunction Paralleling Device C53000-G1176-C163-1
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier

3
package
CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1

4
Crimp 4000 1)
LSP2092-afp.eps
connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)

0-827397-1 1 1)
5
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 0-163083-7 4000 1)
mm2 0-163084-2 1 1)
Fig. 11/50 Short-circuit link
for voltage contacts 0-539635-1 1 1)
Crimping For type III+ 0-539668-2 1)
tool and matching female 0-734372-1 1 1)
6
LSP2289-afp.eps
For CI2 1-734387-1 1)

and matching female
19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
7
Fig. 11/51 Mounting rail for 19" rack Short-circuit links For voltage terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens

8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/53 Connection diagram 15

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7VU683
High Speed Busbar Transfer - Description and Function overview
Function overview
High speed busbar transfer function
• Starting conditions
- NORMAL condition
- FAULT condition
- Inadmissible under-voltage
- Inadmissible under-frequency
- Inadmissible df/dt
- Reverse power
- Inadvertent CB open
• Switching sequences
- PARALLEL Auto switching sequence
- PARALLEL Half-Auto switching sequence
- SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
LSP2187-afp.tif
- SEQUENTIAL sequence
• Transfer modes
- FAST transfer mode
Fig. 1 SIPROTEC 4 7VU683 multifunction high speed busbar transfer device - REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode
- IN-PHASE transfer mode
Description - RES-VOLT transfer mode
- LONG-TIME transfer mode
Permanent availability of electricity is essential for reliable pro- • Single busbar w. 2-CB, sectionalized single busbar
duction of a great number of processes in power stations and w. 3-CB and single busbar w. 3-CB supported
industrial plants where lots of inductive motor are installed. • High speed contact with approx.1ms for closing
To achieve this, a busbar is normally equipped with two or
• Permission of bi-direction switching settable
more independent in-coming power sources to provide the
possibility to switch to standby source in case of main source • Low voltage load-shedding settable
interruption or failure. • CB de-coupling when OPEN failed
• NORMAL start locally or remotely
The power supply interruption with tens of millisecond has
• Manual CB closing to block HSBT
small impact to rotating loads. Thus, the high speed busbar
transfer (HSBT) device helps to control and monitor the • ON/OFF set locally or remotely
progress to ensure the fast but reliable switching-over. It can • HSBT test mode supported
be initiated manually or automatically.
Protection functions for tie-CB
Based on the existing world-wide used SIPROTEC 4 platform, • Overcurrent protection
the reliability, stability and efficiency of HSBT 7VU683 are
• Ground overcurrent protection
guaranteed. Thanks to its powerful and flexible performance,
multi functions are integrated into one system, e.g, power • Overcurrent protection against switch-onto-fault
supply transfer, relay protection and supervision. • Ground overcurrent protection against switch-onto-fault
11
The compact solution HSBT 7VU683 is designed to fit for the Monitoring functions
primary diagrams of single busbar with 2-CB, sectionalized • Self-supervision of the device
single busbar with 3-CB and single busbar with 3-CB. It has
incorporated the traditional HSBT philosophy. Additionally,
the unique Real Time Fast Transfer mode helps to improve • Phase sequence of busbar voltage
the efficiency. • Voltage circuit of busbar and line
The integrated protective functions are to protect the tie-CB Communication interfaces
in sectionalized single busbar diagram against short-circuit • PC front port for setting with DIGSI 4
and earth fault. The integrated supervision functions are to
monitor the voltage phase sequence and voltage secondary
- IEC 60870-5-103, redundant optional
circuit , then gives out alarm in case of failure.
- IEC 61850, Ethernet
- DNP 3.0
The integrated programmable logic (CFC) allows the users to
- PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RTU
implement their own functions. The flexible communication
interfaces are open for modern communication architectures • Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
with control system. • Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF 77
Siemens SIP · Edition 8 updated march 2014 11/53
High Speed Busbar Transfer - Application
Application HSBT function
The 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer device of In station service system of thermal power station and
SIPROTEC 4 family is compact multifunction unit which some industrial plants, a lot of asynchronous motor are
has been developed for very fast power supply transfer of connected. The restarting motors after some seconds pow-
busbar which is installed with big rotating loads. It accom- er loss will cause heavy starting current and system voltage
modates the primary diagram of single busbar w. 2-CB, drop. On the other hand, the incorrect reconnecting to
sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB and single busbar w. alternative power source will even damage the winding of
3-CB. It incorporates all the necessary HSBT conditions and rotor.
even some protection functions. It is specially suitable for the
fast motor busbar transfer of: The version HSBT 7VU683 is designed for this case. It will
evaluate the necessary switching conditions to ensure the
• Coal-fired power station fast but secure transfer. Some improvements like as REAL-
• Gas-fired power station TIME FAST transfer mode, additional line current criteria
• Combined cycle power station will significantly help to the efficiency and safety.
• Integrated gasification combined cycle (IGCC) power
Protection functions for tie-CB
station
• Nuclear power station The integrated protections are intend to protect the tie-CB
• Chemical plant in sectionalized single busbar diagram against short-circuit
• Petrochemical plant or earth fault.
• Refinery plant
Some special concerning is done to the busbar switch-onto-
• Iron and steel plant fault. Protection functions will only be active for a settable
• Cement plant time.
The numerous other additional functions assist the user in Programmable logic
ensuring the cost effective system management and reliable
power supply. Local operation has been designed according The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to
to economic criteria. A large, easy-to-use graphic display is a •implement their own functions and generate user-defined
major design aim. messages.
Measuring values
The measuring values like as U, I, f, dU, df, dj, Udiff/f and CB

closing time can be recorded and displayed.
Source1 Source2
7VU683
50 50N
50 50N
SOF SOF
11 High Speed
Busbar Transfer
Line 1 Line 2
Open/Close
Open/Close
Open/Close
Trip
LEGEND
CB1 CB2
3-ph
CB3 1-ph
Busbar 1 Busbar 2
M M
Fig. 2 Function diagram
11/54 Siemens SIP · Edition 8 updated march 2014

High Speed Busbar Transfer- Construction
Function Abbreviation ANSI 2 Line-CBs 2 Line-CBs 3 Line-CBs

Code +1 Tie-CB
HSBT
Line1->Line2 X X X
Line2->Line1 X X X
Line1->Line3 X
Line3->Line1 X
Line2->Line3 X
Line3->Line2 X
Busbar1->Busbar2 X
Busbar2->Busbar1 X
Busbar1->Line1 X
Busbar2->Line2 X
Protection
Time overcurrent protection I>+V< 50 X
Earth time overcurrent protection 3I0>+3U0> 50N X
Time overcurrent protection I>+V< 50.SOF X

for busbar energization
Earth time overcurrent protection 3I0>+3U0> 50N.SOF X
for busbar energization
Supervision
Phase sequence 47 X X X
Voltage circuit 60FL X X X
Table1 Functional scope of HSBT 7VU683
Construction
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree

of functionality which represents a whole new quality.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
criteria. Large, easy-to read displays were a major design
aim. The device HSBT 7VU683 is equipped with a graphic
display thus providing and depicting more information
especially in industrial applications. The DIGSI 4 operating
11
program considerably simplifies planning and engineering
and reduces commissioning times.
1/1-rack size is the available housing width of the device

HSBT 7VU683, referred to a 19" module frame system. The
height is a uniform 245 mm. Only flush-mounting housing
with screw type terminals is available. All cables can be Fig.3 Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and serial interface
connected with or without ring lugs.

High Speed Busbar Transfer - HSBT functions
motor start recognition. To secure the starting reliability,

HSBT functions
line current is used as the additional criterion to the above
conditions.
Starting conditions
In case the operating CB is manually tripped, transfer must
The device HSBT 7VU683 is designed to support the
not be started. This can be recognized via indication 17864
following staring conditions,
“>NonManu.Op.CB1” and 17865 “>NonManu.Op.CB2” in
–– NORMAL condition configuration matrix. Or, the manual open signal can be
–– FAULT condition directly routed via indication 17620 “>Block HSBT”.
–– Inadmissible Under-voltage condition
Switching sequences
–– Inadmissible Under-frequency condition
–– Inadmissible df/dt The category HSBT 7VU683 is designed to serve for the
–– Reverse power following switching sequences according to CBs’ operating
behavior,
–– Inadvertent CB Open condition
–– PARALLEL switching sequence
The above conditions can be freely combined together, i.e,
–– SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
one of them can be individually switched “OFF”.
–– SEQUENTIAL switching sequence
• NORMAL condition
PARALLEL switching sequences can exclusively support
Under the NORMAL condition, the power system is fault free the starting condition NORMAL while SIMULTANEOUS and
and the starting command must be manually issued. This SEQUENTIAL can support all starting conditions.
command can come from remote control center and/or local
controller via wiring connection or communication over • PARALLEL switching sequence
protocol, e.g,
If the two sources are allowed to work on busbar in parallel
–– DCS of power station for a short time, the PARALLEL sequence can be used for
–– Turbine control system power supply transfer.
–– Local panel
Under PARALLEL sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will firstly issue a
The switching of remote and local starting authority is done CLOSE command to the running source CB after the device
by internal CFC logic and controlled by device switching key get the starting command. When the closure is successful,
“Remote/Local”. The starting command can only be remotely the device will trip the alternative source CB. The tripping
executed over communication when the switching key is at command can be automatically generated by device or deri-
position “Remote”, vice versa. ved from manual operation which are dependent on setting,
• FAULT condition –– PARALLEL Auto sequence

–– PARALLEL Half-Auto sequence
Under the FAULT condition, power system fault must be
there on the in-feeder line and the starting command must Under PARALLEL Auto sequence, the device will automatically
be externally issued by other device, e.g, protection device. issue an OPEN command after a settable time delay when
The faults are classified into two types: type A, e.g, for the closure is successful. Under PARALLE Half-Auto sequence,
11 electric fault; type B, e.g, for non-electric fault. the device will not issue the OPEN command until the
Manual Open command arrived. The sync-check criterions for
• Abnormal condition
PARALLEL switching sequece are as below,
Under the abnormal condition, voltage disturbance must –– df < 8851 “PARAL. Delta f”
be there on the busbar due to any causes. The starting
–– dU < 8852 “PARAL. Delta U”
command can be internally issued by device HSBT 7VU683
according to the following abnormal conditions –– dj < 8853 “PARAL. Delta Phi”
–– Inadmissible Under-voltage If the trunning source CB failed to open, the device will
–– Inadmissible Under-frequency automatically de-couple the closed alternative source CB.
–– Inadmissible df/dt
The time sequence under PARALLE can be understandable
–– Reverse power via the below figure (assumed switching of closing CB2 and
–– Inadvertent CB Open opening CB1),
During the electric fault or motor starting, the starting

will be blocked by integrated logic of fault detection and

Due to CB operating time of the difference (CB normally

START request cmd. opens faster than it closes), the power supply of busbar will
>Local Op. CB1 be interrupted for a few milliseconds. The length of this dead
action time, appox. 4ms interval depends on the difference of CB operating time. The
CloseCommandCB2
PARALLEL-Cl.CB2 busbar dead interval can be shortened via the settable CB
open time delay. Or, the dead interval can be prolonged via
E.g, 61ms(=60+1)
CB2_52a the settable CB close time delay to avoid any over-lapping.
open time delay, • SEQUENTIAL switching sequence

OpenCommandCB1 E.g, 60ms
PARALLEL-Op.CB1 Under SEQUENTIAL sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will firstly issue
E.g, 55ms a OPEN command to the running source CB after the device
(50+5) get the starting request command. SEQUENTIAL sequence
CB1_52b can only issue CLOSE command after the running source CB
115ms is opened.
Over-lapping time
The time sequence under SEQUENTIAL can be understanda-

ble via the below figure (assumed switching of closing CB2
and opening CB1),
Fig. 4 Switching sequence illustration of PARALLEL
The advantage of PARALLEL sequence is to avoid any inter-

ruption of busbar power supply. PARALLEL Auto sequence START request cmd.
>Local Op. CB1
should be always preferred to reduce the overlapping risk of
Action time, approx. 4ms
two sources.
OpenCommandCB1
SEQUENTIAL-Op.CB1
• SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
E.g, 55ms(=50+5)
If the two sources are not allowed to work on busbar in CB1_52b

parallel, the SIMULTANEOUS sequence can be used for power
Action time, approx. 20ms
supply transfer. Under SIMULTANEOUS sequence, HSBT
CloseCommandCB2
7VU683 will firstly issue a OPEN command to the runnning SEQUENTIAL-Cl.CB2
source CB after the device gets the starting command. E.g, 61ms(=60+1)
Meanwhile, the device will issue a CLOSE command to the CB2_52a
alternative source CB if criterions are met.
Dead time, 81ms
If the running source CB failed to open, the device will Busbar live voltage
automatically de-couple the closed alternative source CB.
The time sequence under SIMULTANEOUS can be understan- Fig. 6 Switching sequence illustration of SEQUENTIAL
dable via the below figure (assumed switching of closing CB2
and opening CB1),
Starting
START request cmd.Command
>Local Op. CB1
11
tAction tBB-dead
action time, approx. 4ms w/o. OPEN time delay
OpenCommandCB1
“1 ”
SIMULTANEOUS-Op.CB1
OPEN
“0 ” tCB1-openingE.g, 55ms(=50+5)
Command
CB1_52b
“1 ”
CB1
Action Status
time, approx. 6ms
“0 ” w/o. CLOSE time delay
CloseCommandCB2 tCB2 Close Delay
“1 ”
SIMULTANEOUS-Cl.CB2
CLOSE
E.g, 61ms(=60+1)
“0 ” Command
CB2_52a
“1 ” CB2 Status tCB2-closing
“0 ” Dead time, 6ms
Busbar live voltage
Fig. 5 Switching sequence illustration of SIMULTANEOUS

Transfer modes Fig.9 illustrates the differential voltage Udiff resulted from
reference voltage Uref and motor busbar residual voltage
In the station service system of power station and indust- Ures.
rial plants, lots of asynchronous motors are connected. In
case of the main source interruption, the residual voltage
of busbar will be induced by connected asynchronous Udiff
motors. Fig.7 shows the well-known typical diagram of
vector trajectory of residual voltage. xs CB xm
Un-safe
Area
Safe Area
I
90°
RE
AL
-T
IM
12
EF
~ Uref Ures M
60
0°
AS
T
B
15
0° °
30
0.4s
IV
0.6s
Fig. 9 Equivalent transient circuit during transfer
III
IN-PHASE
Uref
180° V
General conclusion can be made based on Fig.9 that tran-
0.3s
0.7s
sient impact must be there due to the differential voltage

8s
0.
U diff
s
re
during fast transfer. ANSI C50.41-2012 describes the transfer

U
I
.u
0.5s 3p
A
@
1.3 impact to motors as below,
1s
0° ax - 30
0.
-15 II er
.m °
/f p
if f –– Induction motors are inherently capable of developing
ST
Ud
FA
0.2s
transient current and torque considerably in excess of ra-
ted current and torque when exposed to out-of phase bus
0°
- 60
- 12
ST
transfer or momentary voltage interruptions and reclosing
-90° E FA
REA
L -TIM on the same bus. The magnitude of this transient current
and torque may range from 2 to20 times rated and is a
Fig. 7 Vector trajectory of residual voltage Ures function of the motor’s electrical characteristics, operating
Some notes are there regarding curve A according to Fig.7 conditions, switching time, rotating system inertia and
The amplitude and frequency of residual voltage will de- torsional spring constants, number of motors on the bus,
crease regarding time, while the delta phase angle against etc.
referred voltage will increase. Fig.8 gives more messages –– Studies to determine the magnitude of the transient cur-
to differential voltage Udiff. rent and torque are recognized to be complex and require
detailed knowledge of the motor, the driven equipment,
and the power supply.
It’s known from the above description that to calculate the

transient impact for each case is not practical. Then, one
simplified guideline was made in ANSI C50.41-2012 to motor
11 busbar fast transfer as below,
• Based on limited studies and experience, a fast transfer or
reclosing is defined as one which:
–– Occurs within a time period of 10 cycles or less, and
–– The max. phase angle between the motor residual volts
per hertz vector and the system equivalent volts per
hertz doesn’t exceed 90 degrees, and
• The resultant volts per hertz between the motor residual
volts per hertz phasor and the incoming source volts
Fig. 8 Characteristic of vector Udiff per hertz phasor at the instant of transfer or reclosing is
completed doesn’t exceed 1.33 per unit volts per hertz on
the motor rated voltage and frequency basis.
Refer to fig. 10

• REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode
M1=(Uref/Un)/(fref/fn) If FAST transfer area is impossible, the device can automati-

cally, if activated, turn to next transfer area REAL-TIME FAST.
predict
M2= This mode is to extend the dj at closing instant to 90oac-
(Ures.predict/Un)/(fres.predict/fn)
cording to C50.41-2012. Meanwhile the Udiff/f at closing
instant regarding C50.41-2012 must not exceed1.33p.u.
M= Udiff/f)predict
The intelligent device 7VU683 then estimates the values of
dj and Udiff/f at the instant of CB closing based on real-time
slipping rate and the settable “CBx Closing Time” by exclusive
predictive algorithm. If all the quantity of predicted dj and
Udiff/f , the real-time df and Ures meet the pre-set criterions,
the device will immediately issue the CLOSE command to the
Fig.10 Fast transfer definition in ANSI C50.41-2012
alternative source CB. The criterions are as below,
Accordingly, the plane is divided into two parts by Curve B.
–– df < 8861 ” FT Delta f”
The left is defined as un-safe transfer area because Udiff/f at
alternative CB closing instant is bigger than the permitted –– dU < 8862 “RTFT Udiff/f“
maximum 1.33 p.u. Vice versa, the right is safe area. –– dj < 8863 “FT Delta Phi“
–– Ures > 8864 “RTFT U/V Blk“
Based on the above principles, the device HSBT 7VU683
is designed to have the following transfer modes (refer to
• IN-PHASE transfer mode
Fig.7) to fit for the safe transfer,
–– FAST transfer mode (area I) When the residual voltage comes close to the referred
voltage, it comes to transfer mode IN-PHASE. It’s good for
–– REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode (area II and IV)
safe transfer if the CB closes at the instant the value dj is
–– IN-PHASE transfer mode (area V) close to zero.
–– RES-VOLT transfer mode
–– LONG-TIME transfer mode The intelligent device 7VU683 estimates the delta phase
angle dj at the instant of CB closing based on real-time
Transfer mode combination of FAST and REAL-TIME FAST slipping rate and the settable “CBx Closing Time”. If all the
seamlessly meets the fast transfer definition in C50.41-2012. quantity of predicted dj, the real-time df and Ures meet the
Meanwhile the transfer modes of IN-PHASE, RES-VOLT and defined criterions, the device will immediately issue the
LONG-TIME are served as the backup. All of above modes can CLOSE command to the alternative source CB. The criterions
be freely combined together, i.e, one of them can be indivi- are as below,
dually switched “ON” or “OFF” remotely via communication or
–– df < 8868 ”IN-PHA Delta f”
locally at device panel.
–– dj < 8869 “IN-PHA Delta Phi“
To be noted that the original dj and dU between busbar –– Ures > 8870 “IN-PHA U/V Blk“
voltage and alternative voltage due to wiring and installation
can be automatically compensated by device during configu- • RES-VOLT transfer mode
11
ration.
If the above mentioned transfer modes failed, the transfer
• FAST transfer mode
can still go on with mode RES-VOLT.
The study and testing results show, in most cases the typical
values of df, dj and dU are smaller enough within the first When the residual voltage Ures under-shots the settable
tens of millisecond from the instant the CB opens. It’s good parameter 8871 “RES-VOLT Threshold”, the RES-VOLT transfer
to safe and fast transfer due to the slight shock to motors. mode will perform and the device will immediately issue the
FAST transfer mode is aimed to restrict the dj at closing ins- CLOSE command to the alternative source CB. The typical
tant within a small value, e.g, 60o. If the real-time measured setting could be 30%Un.
values of df, dj and Ures meet the set criterions, the device
will immediately issue the CLOSE command to the alternative To avoid the alternative source overloading in case of motors’
source CB. The criterions are as below, low voltage restarting it is helpful to implement low voltage
load-shedding (LVLSH) function before the RES-VOLT trans-
–– df < 8858 ”FT Delta f” fer. LVLSH is setting free which pickup value is taken from
–– dj < 8859 “FT Delta Phi“ “8870 IN-PHASE mode: under-voltage block” , and one stage
–– Ures > 8860 “FT U/V Blk“ no time delay. This function can be activated or de-activated
manually on site.
The typical operating time of 7VU683 in this case is
approx.20ms under fn@50Hz.

• LONG-TIME transfer mode In some cases, the switching is limited to mono-direction, i.e,
from main source to alternative, under starting conditions
The last criterion to start the transfer is LONG-TIME mode if of FAULT and ABNORMAL. The requirement can be imple-
all above mentioned modes failed. mented by set the parameter 8831 “Mono-direction against
NORMAL condition” = “YES”. The default setting “NO” means
When the transfer time is more than the settable parameter bi-direction switching is always supported under any starting
8872 “LONG-TIME Threshold”, the LONG-TIME transfer mode condition.
will perform and the device will immediately issue the CLOSE
command to the alternative source CB. The typical setting To be noted that the device has default agreement that
could be 3s. source1 is exclusively defined as main while others as alter-
native. Then, if mono-direction against NORMAL condition is
Switching directions required, main source must be always connected to Ux_L1.
HSBT supports bi-direction busbar transfer under NORMAL The transfer permission under various starting conditions
condition, i.e from main source alternative source, vice and switching directions can be referred to below three
versa. tables.
CB1 CB2 Switching- Voltage Busbar Transfer Permitted?

Status Status over Comparison
From To NORMAL FAULT Inadmissible Inadmissible Inadmissible Reverse Inadvertent
Under-volt. Under-Freq. Neg.df/dt Power CB Open
ON OFF L1 L2 U_B U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OFF ON L2 L1 U_B U_L1 Yes Yes1) Yes1) Yes1) Yes1) Yes1) Yes1)
1) If parameter 8831 "Mono-direction against NORMAL" = "NO", this cell says Yes. Otherwise, this cell says No.
Table 2 Transfer permission under default setting, single busbar w. 2-CB
CB1 CB3 CB2 Switching- Voltage Busbar Transfer Permitted?

Status Status Status over Comparison
From To NOR- FAULT Inadmissible Inadmissible Inadmissible Reverse Inadvertent
MAL Under-volt. Under-Freq. Neg. df/dt Power CB Open
ON OFF ON L1 L2 U_B2 U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B2 L2 U_B2 U_L2 Yes -- 2) -- 2) -- 2) -- 2) -- 2) -- 2)
ON ON OFF B1 B2 U_B1 U_B2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
B2 B1 U_B2 U_B1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1)
OFF ON ON L2 L1 U_B1 U_L1 Yes Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1)
2) 2) 2) 2) 2)
B1 L1 U_B1 U_L1 Yes -- -- -- -- -- -- 2)
11
2) Not applicable for this cell
Table 3 Transfer permission under default setting, sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB
CB1 CB2 CB3 Switching- Voltage Busbar Transfer Permitted?

Status Status Status over Comparison
From To NOR- FAULT Inadmissible Inadmissible Inadmissible Reverse Inadvertent
MAL Under-volt. Under-Freq. Neg. df/dt Power CB Open
ON OFF OFF L1 L2 U_B U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
L1 L3 U_B U_L3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OFF ON OFF L2 L3 U_B U_L3 Yes Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1)
L2 L1 U_B U_L1 Yes Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1)
OFF OFF ON L3 L1 U_B U_L1 Yes Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1)
1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
L3 L2 U_B U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1)
Table 4 Transfer permission under default setting, single busbar w. 3-CB

HSBT on-line test mode Sample of oscillographic FAST transfer
To facilitate the functional testing and site commissioning,

the on-line test mode is specially designed for this purpose.
This function can be activated on site by parameter setting
8820 “HSBT Test Mode” = “Yes” or by indication 18020
“>HSBT Test Mode” via binary input.
If the function HSBT goes into test mode, the transfer

process is the same except that the CLOSE command will
be blocked. Instead, CLOSE command with test mark will be
issued for indicating.
HSBT Test Mode could be helpful before the device is put into
service. Under on-line test mode, transfer process can be
monitored. Under the assistance of integrated Fault Recorder
and Event Log, the operating progress and settings can be
assessed. Optimization to parameter settings can be done
based on the assessment. Fig.12 Oscillographic FAST transfer
8819 HSBT Test Mode

17767
ON OR AND CommandCloseCB1
“1”
17768
OFF
CommandCloseCB2
18020 17769
CommandCloseCB3
>HSBT Test Mode
18021
AND cmd.Cl.CB1.Test
CLOSE
18022
cmd.Cl.CB2.Test
18023
CB1 cmd.Cl.CB3.Test
CB2
CB3
Fig.11 Logic diagram of on-line test mode

Fig.13 Transfer log of FAST mode
Reset of transfer Some notes to the two figures,

HSBT will be in “un-ready” status and has to be manually –– Sectionalized single busbar with 3-CB
reset after every transfer failure. –– CB1 and CB3 in closing status while CB2 in open status
–– Manually open CB1, SEQUENTIAL switching sequence,
In some cases, it is required to block the device even after L1->L2
the successful transfer and can only conduct the next trans-
–– At instant -4ms, get transfer request “>NORMAL Op. CB1”
fer request after manual reset. This can be actualized by set-
–– At instant 0ms, HSBT picked up and issued “CommandO-
11
ting the parameter 8817 ”Manual Reset HSBT” = “YES”. The
reset command can be recognized via BI indication 17863 penCB1” 1ms later
“>Manually reset” or LED reset button on device panel. –– At instant 53ms, CB1 is opened
–– At instant 76ms, FAST transfer mode picked up and issued
Default setting is “NO”. “CommandCloseCB2” 1ms later
–– At instant 139ms, CB2 is closed
–– HSBT succeeded. Busbar dead time is approx. 86ms.

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Protection functions
Protection functions Phase-overcurrent protection

The function is designed to detect short-circuit faults in MV
Protection functions for tie-CB in primary connection of
system. The device will evaluate all current inputs at channel
sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB are integrated in high
I_B and will pickup immediately if one of phase current over-
speed busbar transfer device 7VU683. This function can be
shots the settable threshold.
set “Enabled” or “Disabled” during configuration.
The function has two stages, one time delay for each stage.
Below protection functions are included,
The voltage element can be activated or de-activated under
–– Phase over-current protection
parameter 9001 “Compound Voltage Control”.
–– Ground over-current protection
–– Phase over-current SOF protection
–– Ground over-current SOF protection Ground-overcurrent protection
To secure the reliability and sensitivity, the voltage element This function is designed to detect ground fault in MV sys-
is additionally introduced to current criterion to release trip tem. The device will evaluate zero sequence current and will
command. pickup immediately if it over-shots the settable threshold.
For functions of phase over-current protection and phase The quantity of zero sequence current be derived from
over-current protection against switch-onto-fault, compound calculated 3I0 or measured earth current Ie. This can be set
voltage elements are used. The criterion of compound under parameter 9018 “3I0/Ie Assignment”.
voltage elements is illustrated in Fig.14, The function has two stages, one time delay for each stage.
The voltage element can be activated or de-activated under
parameter 9011 “3U0 Control”.
9003 U2 over-voltage
Busbar1 U2
9002 Ph-ph under-voltage Phase-overcurrent protection against switch-onto-fault

OR Compound Voltage
Busbar1 Uab To fast clear the short-circuit fault in case of switch-onto-
Busbar1 Ubc OR fault, the function phase over-current protection can trip wit-
Busbar1 Uca hout time delay. But this special consideration should only be
applied for short time. A special function “phase over-current
Fig.14 Logic of compound voltage element SOF protection” is specially designed for this utilization.
The function has the same criterion and stages to phase
For functions of ground over-current protection and ground
over-current protection. It will only be activated for a settable
over-current protection against switch-onto-fault, the
active time after tie-CB is closed.
element of zero sequence over-voltage is used. The quantity
is derived from calculated 3U0 based on measured busbar1 Ground-overcurrent protection against switch-onto-fault
voltage.
To fast clear the ground fault in case of switch-onto-fault,
The validity of protections against switch-onto-fault can be
the function ground over-current protection can trip without
set under parameter 9019A “Active time for Switch-onto-
time delay. But this special consideration should only be ap-
fault”.
plied for short time. A special function “ground over-current
Each of above functions can be separately switched “ON” or SOF protection” is specially designed for this utilization.
11
“OFF” remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
The function has the same criterion and stages to ground
over-current protection. It will only be activated for a settable
active time after tie-CB is closed.

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Communication
Communication IEC 60870-5-103
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol
been placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and for communication in the protected area. IEC 60870-5-103
utilization of standards common in energy automation. The is supported by a number of manufacturers and is used
design of the communication modules permits interchan- worldwide.
geability on the one hand, and on the other hand provides
PROFIBUS DP
openness for future standards (for example, Industrial
Ethernet). PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized communication
system (EN 50170). PROFIBUS is supported internationally
Local PC interface by several hundred manufacturers and has to date been
The PC interface from the front of the unit permits quick used in more than 1,000,000 applications all over the world.
access to all parameters and fault event data. The use of With the PROFIBUS-DP, the device can be directly connected
the DIGSI 4 operating program during commissioning is to a SIMATIC S5/S7. The transferred data are fault data,
particularly advantageous. measured values and information from or to the logic (CFC).
Rear mounted interface Modus RTU
At the rear of the unit there is one fixed interface and MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard
two communication modules which incorporate optional and is used in numerous automation solutions.
equipment complements and permit retrofitting. They assure
DNP 3.0
the ability to comply with the requirements of different com-
munication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol version 3) is a
(IEC 60870, PROFIBUS, DIGSI). The interfaces make provision messaging-based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4
for the following applications: units are fully Level 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0.
DNP 3.0 is supported by a number of protection device
Service interface (fixed) manufacturers.
In the RS485 version, several protection units can be
Safe bus architecture
centrally operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote
control is possible. This provides advantages in fault clea- • RS485 bus
rance, in particular in unmanned substations. With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
magnetic interference influences are largely eliminated by
System interface
the use of twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the
This is used to communicate with a control or protection and remaining system continues to operate without any faults.
control system and supports, depending on the module con- • Fiber-optic double ring circuit
nected, a variety of communication protocols and interface
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electro-
designs. Furthermore, the units can exchange data through
magnetic interference. Upon failure of a section between
this interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can
two units, the communication system continues to operate
also be operated by DIGSI.
without disturbance.
IEC 61850 protocol
As of mid-2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is
11
Option: Control
SICAM center
DIGSI
the worldwide standard for protection and control systems PAS
used by power supply corporations. Siemens is the first

manufacturer to support this standard. By means of this pro- Switch
tocol, information can also be exchanged directly between
bay units so as to set up simple masterless systems for bay
and system interlocking. Access to the units via the Ethernet
bus will also be possible with DIGSI. S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC
Fig. 15 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial electrical or fiber-optic connection

Option: Control
SICAM center
DIGSI PAS
Switch
S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC
Fig.16 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850, fiber- Fig.19 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850 with
optic ring integrated Ethernet-switch
Fig.17 PROFIBUS: Optical double ring cirucuit
Fig.20 Fiber-optic communication module
11
Fig.18 RS232/RS485 electrical communication module

System solution Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example,

during a major inspection.
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in SIMATIC-based automa-
tion systems.
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered
Via the PROFIBUS-DP, indications (pickup and tripping) and with SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet bus, the unit
all relevant operational measured values are transmitted are linked with PAS electrically or optically to the station
from the protection unit. PC. The interface is standardized, thus also enabling direct
Via modem and service interface, the protection engineer connection of units of other manufacturers to the Ethernet
has access to the protection devices at all times. This permits bus. With IEC 61850, however, the units can also be used in
remote maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing). other manufacturers' systems.
Operation and
monitoring
Automation systems
(e.g. SIMATIC)
PROFIBUS-DP
RS485/
optical converter
SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC
RS232/
optical converter
Comm.
network
Modem Modem
7VU68 7VU68 7VU68 7VU68
DIGSI 4
(Remote control
DIGSI 4 via modem)
(Local for commissioning)
Fig.21 System solution: communication
11

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Typical applications
Primary connection of single busbar w. 2-CB actual CBs’ status and the source of starting request command.
Under normal operation only one CB is in closing status and Each switching-over can be individually switched “ON” or “OFF”
only one switching direction is possible. HSBT 7VU683 will remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
automatically determine the switching direction based on the
Line1 Line2
Single busbar w. 2-CB Single busbar w. 2-CB
CBS’status Switching NORMAL CB1 CB2
CB1 CB2 directions start
ON OFF LINE1 → LINE2 Open CB1 MV Busbar
OFF ON LINE2 → LINE1 Open CB2
M M M M
Fig.22 Switching direction and primary diagram
Primary connection of sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB
Under normal operation only one CB is in opening status and Each switching direction can be individually switched “ON” or
two switching directions are possible. HSBT 7VU683 will “OFF” remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
actual CBs’ status and the source of starting request command.
Line1 Line2
Sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB Sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB
CBS’status Switching NORMAL CB1 CB2
CB1 CB2 CB3 directions start
BUS1 → BUS2 Open CB1 MV Busbar1 CB3 MV Busbar2
ON ON OFF
11
BUS2 → BUS1 Open CB2
LINE1 → LINE2 Open CB1

ON OFF ON
BUS2 → LINE2 Open CB3

OFF ON ON
BUS1 → LINE1 Open CB3 M M M M

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Typical applications
Primary connection of single busbar w. 3-CB
Under normal operation only one CB is in closing status and Each switching direction can be individually switched “ON” or
two switching directions are possible. HSBT 7VU683 will “OFF” remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
actual CBs’ status, switching priority and the source of starting
request command.
Line1 Line2 Line3

Single busbar w. 3-CB
CBS’status Switching NORMAL CB1 CB2 CB3
CB1 CB2 CB3 directions start
LINE1 → LINE2 Open CB1 MV Busbar
ON OFF OFF

OFF ON OFF
LINE3 → LINE1 Open CB3 Single busbar w. 3-CB

OFF OFF ON
LINE3 → LINE2 Open CB3 M M M M
11

High Speed Busbar Transfer – Selection and ordering data
Multifunctional High Speed Busbar Transfer 7VU683 V4.7 7VU683 - E -1 A 0–
Case, binary inputs and outputs

Case 1/1 19'', 17 BI, 18 BO (incl.5 High Speed), 1 life-status contact
Current transformer: In
IN=1A1) 1
IN=5A1) 5
Auxiliary Voltage
DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold DC 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V2), binary input threshold DC 19 V3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V2), 115/230 V AC, binary input threshold DC 88 V3) 5
DC 220 to 250 V2), 115/230 V AC, binary input threshold DC 176 V3) 6
Construction
Flush-mounting case, screw-type terminals (direct connecting/ ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specific default settings/ language Settings

Region World,English4), 50/60Hz B
Region China,Chinese4), 50/60Hz W
Port B: (System port on rear of device)

No system port 0
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, electric RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, electric RS485 2
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, 820 nm fibre, ST-connector 3 L 0
Profibus DP Slave, RS485 9 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm fibre, double ring, ST-connector 9 B
Modbus, RS485 9 D
Modbus, 820 nm fibre, ST-connector 9 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm fibre, ST-connector 9 H
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, redundant RS485 9 P
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electric, double, RJ45-connector 9 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double, LC-connector 9 S
Only Port C
11 DIGSI 4/Modem, electric RS232;

DIGSI 4/Modem/ RTD-box, electric RS485;
1
2
Measuring/ fault recording

Functions
HSBT function (single busbar w. 2-CB), ANSI C50.41-2012 B
Supervision functions
HSBT function (sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB), ANSI C50.41-2012 C
Protection functions (Phase/earth O/C prot., Phase/earth O/C prot. against switch-onto-fault)
HSBT function (single busbar w. 3-CB), ANSI C50.41-2012
D
1) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by means of jumpers 3) The threshold of each binary input can be set via jumpers
2) Transition between the three auxiliary voltage can be selected by mean of jumpers 4) Device language can be selected via DIGSI.

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Accessories
DIGSI 4
Software for configuration and operation of Siemens protection units

running underMSWindows 2000/XP Professional Edition
device templates, Comtrade Viewer, electronic manual included
as well as “Getting started” manual on paper, connecting cables (copper)
Basis
Full version with license for 10 computers, on CD-ROM
(authorization by serial number) 7XS5400-0AA00
Professional
Professional
DIGSI 4 Basis and additionally SIGRA (fault record analysis),
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default
and control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation) 7XS5402-0AA00
Professional + IEC 61850

Complete version
DIGSI 4 Basis and additionally SIGRA (fault record analysis),
CFC Editor (logic editor), Display Editor (editor for default
and control displays) and DIGSI 4 Remote (remote operation)
+ IEC 61850 system configurator 7XS5403-0AA00
IEC 61850 Systemconfigurator

Software for configuration of stations with IEC 61850 communication under
DIGSI, running underMSWindows 2000 or XP Professional Edition
Optional package for DIGSI 4 Basis or Professional
License for 10 PCs. Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM 7XS5460-0AA00
SIGRA 4
(generally contained in DIGSI Professional, but can be ordered additionally)
Software for graphic visualization, analysis and evaluation of fault records.
Can also be used for fault records of devices of other manufacturers
(Comtrade format). Running underMSWindows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP Professional.
Incl. templates, electronic manual with license for 10 PCs.
11
Authorization by serial number. On CD-ROM 7XS5410-0AA00
Connecting cable
able between PC/notebook (9-pin connector)

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Accessories
Description Order No. Size of Supplier Fig.

package
Mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 29
Short-circuit link For current terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 30

For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 31
Safety cover for Large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens

terminals Small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens
Fig.25 Mounting rail for 19" rack Fig.26 Short-circuit link for Fig.27 Short-circuit link for
current terminals voltage terminals/indications
terminals
11

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Connection diagram
HSBT 7VU683 typical connection diagram for single busbar w. 2-CB

Source1
7VU683x-xExxx-1BA0
-
R13 BI1 F5 BUs fault or
Line1
Ux_L1 17620 >Block HSBT

R14 man. OPEN cmd
BI2 F6
17863 >Manual reset Button
VT_L1
J1 BI3 F7 FAULT start
Ix_L1 17627 >L1 FAULT A st. Line1(Type A)
J2
BI4 F8 FAULT start
17667 >L2 FAULT A st.
CT_L1 J3 Line2(Type A)
N/A.
J4 BI5 F9
Spare
F10
Q1
N/A.
Q2
Q3
N/A.
Q4
CB1 Q5
N/A.
Q6 BO1 R1
17948 HSBT succeeded
Q7
N/A.
Q8 BO2 R2
17949 HSBT failed
BO3 R3
18012 HSBT is ready
R4
R15 BO4 R5
Ua_B Spare
R17 R6
Ub_B
R18
Uc_B
R16 BO5 R7
Spare
VT_B R8
BO62) P3 +
17760 CommandOpenCB1
P4 - CB1 trip coil
Busbar
BO71) P6
Spare
BO81) P7
Spare
K15
N/A.
K17 BO91) P8
N/A. Spare
K18 P5
N/A.
K16
BO102) P9 +
17767 CommandCloseCB1
CB2 P10 - CB1 close coil
e.g, 6.3kV
2)
J7 BO11 P11 +
. N/A. 17768 CommandCloseCB2
J8 P12 - CB2 close coil
BO122) P13
Spare
CT_L2 P14
J5
Ix_L2
J6 BO132) P15 +
P16 - CB2 trip coil
K13
Ux_L2
K14 BO14 K1
Spare
Line2
BO15 K2
Spare
VT_L2
+
BO16 K3
- Spare
K4
R9 BI6
52b_CB1 17622 >CB1 52b
R10
Busbar LVLSH cmd
BO17 K5
30410 Busbar LVLSH trip
R11 BI7 K6
Source2
52a_CB1 17621 >CB1 52a

R12
BO18 K7
Spare
52b_CB2 P17 BI8 K8
17624 >CB2 52b
P18
N1 BI9 1 2 F3
11
52a_CB2 17623 >CB2 52a Life Contact
N2
3 2 F4
N3 BI10
Spare
N4 BI11 = F1
Spare (~)
Auxiliary Power Supply F2
N6 BI12 =
>Local Open CB1
N5
Switch C.3
N7 BI13 Service_Port C C C.8 Remote DIGSI
>Local Open CB2
N8 B.3
System_Port B B B.8 Control center
N9 BI14
Spare A.2
N10
Time Sync_Port A A A.3 IRIG-B/DCF77
FAULT start Line1 N11 BI15
30453 >L1 FAULT B st.
(Type B) N12 Front PC Port_RS232 Local PC DIGSI
FAULT start Line2 K9 BI16

30454 >L2 FAULT B st.
(Type B) K10
K11 BI17 LED1 Open CB1 LED8 HSBT is ready

Spare LED2 Open CB2 LED9 HSBT succeeded
K12
LED3 Close CB1 LED10 HSBT failed
LED4 Close CB2 LED11 NORMAL start
1) fast speed relay w. approx. 5ms action time LED5 PARALLEL LED12 ABNORMAL start
2) high speed relay w. approx. 1ms action time Earthing LED6 SIMULTANEOUS LED13 FAULT start
LED7 SEQUENTIAL LED14 LV load-shedding
Fig.28 7VU683*-*E***-1BA0 typical connection and default configuration

High Speed Busbar Transfer - Connection diagram
HSBT 7VU683 typical connection diagram for sectionalized single busbar w. 3-CB
Source1
7VU683x-xExxx-1CA0
-
R13 BI1 F5 Bus fault or
Line1
Ux_L1 17620 >Block HSBT

R14 man. OPEN cmd
BI2 F6
17863 >Manual reset Button
VT_L1
J1 BI3 F7 FAULT start
Ix_L1 17627 >L1 FAULT A st. Line1(Type A)
J2
BI4 F8 FAULT start
17667 >L2 FAULT A st.
CT_L1 J3 Line2(Type A)
N/A.
J4 BI5 F9
Spare
F10
CB1
BO1 R1
Busbar1
17948 HSBT succeeded

R15
Ua_B1
R17 BO2 R2
Ub_B1 17949 HSBT failed
R18
Uc_B1
R16 BO3 R3
18012 HSBT is ready
VT_B1 R4
CB3 BO4 R5
Spare
Q1 R6
Ia_B
Q2
Q3 BO5 R7
Ib_B Spare
Q4 R8
Q5
Ic_B
CT_B Q6 BO62) P3 +
Q7 P4 - CB1 trip coil
Ie_B
Q8
1)
BO7 P6
K15 BO81) P7
Busbar2
Ua_B2 Protection trip Protection trip cmd

K17
Ub_B2
K18 BO91) P8 +
Uc_B2 17762 CommandOpenCB3
K16 P5 - CB3 trip coil
VT_B2
BO102) P9 +
CB2 P10 - CB1 close coil
e.g, 6.3kV
BO112) P11 +
. 17768 CommandCloseCB2
P12 - CB2 close coil
J7
N/A.
J8 BO122) P13 +
CT_L2 P14 - CB3 close coil
J5
Ix_L2
J6 BO132) P15 +
P16 - CB2 trip coil
K13
Ux_L2
K14
Busbar1 LVLSH cmd
BO14 K1
Line2
30412 B1 LVLSH trip

Busbar2 LVLSH cmd
VT_L2 BO15 K2
+ 30414 B2 LVLSH trip
- Protection trip signal
BO16 K3
Protection trip
R9 BI6 K4
52b_CB1 17622 >CB1 52b
R10
BO17 K5
Spare
R11 BI7 K6
Source2
52a_CB1 17621 >CB1 52a

R12
BO18 K7
Spare
52b_CB2 P17 BI8 K8
17624 >CB2 52b
P18
Life Contact
52a_CB2 N1 BI9 1 2 F3
17623 >CB2 52a
N2
3 2 F4
11
N3 BI10
52b_CB3 17626 >CB3 52b = + F1
N4 BI11 Auxiliary Power Supply (~) - F2
52a_CB3 17625 >CB3 52a
=
N6 BI12
Switch1 >Local Open CB1
N5 C.3
Service_Port C C C.8 Remote DIGSI
N7 BI13 B.3
Switch2 >Local Open CB2
N8
System_Port B B B.8 Control center
N9 BI14 A.2
Switch3 >Local Open CB3 Time Sync_Port A A IRIG-B/DCF77
N10 A.3
FAULT start Line1 N11 BI15 Front PC Port_RS232 Local PC DIGSI

(Type B) N12 30453 >L1 FAULT B st.
FAULT start Line2 K9 BI16

(Type B) K10 30454 >L2 FAULT B st.
K11 BI17 LED1 Open CB1 LED8 HSBT is ready

Spare LED2 Open CB2 LED9 HSBT succeeded
K12
LED3 Open CB3 LED10 HSBT failed
LED4 Close CB1 LED11 NORMAL start
1) fast speed relay w. approx. 5ms action time LED5 Close CB2 LED12 ABNORMAL start
2) high speed relay w. approx. 1ms action time Earthing LED6 Close CB3 LED13 FAULT start
LED7 Relay trip LED14 LV load-shedding
Fig.29 7VU683*-*E***-1BC0 typical connection and default configuration

Substation Automation
Page
SIPROTEC 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit 12/3
12
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Substation Automation / 6MD66
SIPROTEC 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Function overview
Application 1
• Integrated synchro-check for synchro-
nized closing of the circuit-breaker
• Breaker-related protection functions
(Breaker Failure 50BF, Auto-reclosure 2
79)
• Automation can be configured easily by
• F
graphic means with CFC
lexible, powerful measured-value
3
LSP2187-afp.eps
LSP2187-afp.eps
processing
• Connection for 4 voltage transformers,
3 current transformers, two 20 mA
transducers
4
• Volume of signals for high voltage
5
• Up to 14 1 ½-pole circuit-breakers can
be operated
• U
p to 11 2-pole switching devices can
Fig. 12/1 SIPROTEC 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
be operated
6
• Up to 65 indication inputs,
Description up to 45 command relays
• Can be supplied with 3 volumes of signals as 6MD662
The 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit is the control unit for (35 indications, 25 commands), 6MD663 (50 indications,
7
high voltage bays from the SIPROTEC 4 relay series. Because of 35 commands) or 6MD664 (65 indications, 45 commands);
its integrated functions, it is an optimum, low-cost solution for number of measured values is the same
high-voltage switchbays. • Switchgear interlocking
The 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit also has the same • Inter-relay communication with other devices of the 6MD66
design (look and feel) as the other protection and combined
units of the SIPROTEC 4 relay series. Configuration is performed
series, even without a master station interface with higher
level control and protection 8
in a standardized way with the easy-to-use DIGSI 4 configuration • Suitable for redundant master station
tool.
• Display of operational measured values V, I, P, Q, S, f, cos φ
For operation, a large graphic display with a keyboard is avail-
able. The important operating actions are performed in a simple
(power factor) (single and three-phase measurement)
• Limit values for measured values
9
and intuitive way, e.g. alarm list display or switchgear control.
• Can be supplied in a standard housing for cubicle mounting
The operator panel can be mounted separately from the unit, if
or with a separate display for free location of the operator
required. Thus, flexibility with regard to the mounting position
of the unit is ensured. Integrated key-operated switches control
elements
• 4 freely assignable function keys to speed up frequently
10
the switching authority and authorization for switching without
interlocking. High-accuracy measurement (± 0.5 %) for voltage, recurring operator actions
11
current and calculated values P and Q are another feature of the
unit.
– PROFIBUS DP
– Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem) 12
– Front interface for DIGSI 4
– Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF 77
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 Communication
With regard to communication between
components, particular emphasis is
2 placed on the SIPROTEC 4 functions

required for energy automation.
• Every data item is time-stamped at its
source, i.e. where it originates.
3 • Information is marked according to

where it originates from (e.g. if a com-
mand originates “local” or “remote”)
• The feedback to switching processes is
4 allocated to the commands.
• Communication processes the transfer
of large data blocks, e.g. file transfers,
independently.
5 • For the reliable execution of a
command, the relevant signal is first
Fig. 12/2 Connection diagram of the switching devices (circuit-breaker 2 poles closed,
1 pole open; disconnector/grounding switch 1½ pole)
acknowledged in the unit executing
the command. A check-back indication
6 is issued after the command has been
enabled (i.e. interlocking check, target
= actual check) and executed.
7
In addition to the communication inter-
faces on the rear of the unit, which are
equipped to suit the customer’s require-
ments, the front includes an RS232 inter-
face for connection of DIGSI. This is used
8 for quick diagnostics as well as for the

loading of parameters. DIGSI 4 can read
out and represent the entire status of the
unit online, thus making diagnostics and
9
documentation more convenient.
Control
The bay control units of the 6MD66 series
10
have command outputs and indication
inputs that are particularly suited to the Fig. 12/3 2-pole connection diagram of circuit-breakers and disconnectors
requirements of high-voltage technology.
As an example, the 2-pole control of a
11
switching device is illustrated (see Fig. 12/11). In this example,
two poles of the circuit-breaker are closed and 1 pole is open. All
other switching devices (disconnectors, grounding switches) are
closed and open in 1½-pole control. A maximum of 14 switching
devices can be controlled in this manner.
12 A complete 2-pole control of all switching devices (see
Fig. 12/12) is likewise possible. However more contacts are
required for this. A maximum of 11 switching devices can be
13
controlled in this manner.
A possible method to connect the switching devices to the bay
control unit 6MD66 is shown in Fig. 12/13. There it is shown
how three switching devices Q0, Q1, and Q2 are connected
14
using 1½ pole control.
15
Functions
Functions
Switchgear interlockings 1
Using the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) available in all
SIPROTEC 4 units, the bay interlock conditions can, among other
things, be conveniently configured graphically in the 6MD66 bay
control unit. The inter-bay interlock conditions can be checked 2
via the “inter-relay communication” (see next section) to other
6MD66 devices. With the introduction of IEC 61850 communica-
3
tion, the exchange of information for interlocking purposes
is also possible via Ethernet. This is handled via the GOOSE
message method. Possible partners are all other bay devices or
protection devices which support
4
IEC 61850- GOOSE message.
In the tests prior to command output, the positions of both
key-operated switches are also taken into consideration. The
upper key-operated switch corresponds to the S5 function (local/
5
remote switch), which is already familiar from the 8TK switch-
gear interlock system. The lower key-operated switch effects the
changeover to non-interlocked command output (S1 function).
In the position ”Interlocking Off” the key cannot be withdrawn,
6
with the result that non-operation of the configured interlocks is
immediately evident.
The precise action of the key-operated switch can be set using
the parameter “switching authority”.
With the integrated function ”switchgear interlocking” there is
no need for an external switchgear interlock device. Fig. 12/4 Typical connection for 1½-pole control
7
Furthermore, the following tests are implemented (parameteriz-
able) before the output of a command:
• Target = Actual, i.e. is the switching device already in the
desired position?
8
• Double command lockout, i.e. is another command already
9
running?
• Individual commands, e.g. grounding control can additionally
be secured using a code.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Functions
Synchronization
1 The bay control unit can, upon closing

of the circuit-breaker, check whether the
synchronization conditions of both partial
networks are met (synchro-check). Thus
2
an additional, external synchronization
device is not required. The synchroniza-
tion conditions can be easily specified
using the configuration system DIGSI 4.
3
The unit differentiates between synchro-
nous and asynchronous networks and
reacts differently upon connection:
In synchronous networks there are
4
minor differences with regard to phase
angle and voltage moduli and so the
circuit-breaker response time does not
need to be taken into consideration. For
asynchronous networks however, the
5 differences are larger and the range of the
connection window is traversed at a faster
Fig. 12/5 Connection of the measured values for synchronization
rate. Therefore it is wise here to take the

circuit-breaker response time into consid-
6 eration. The command is automatically

dated in advance of this time so that the
circuit-breaker contacts close at precisely
the right time.
7 Fig. 12/14 illustrates the connection of

the voltages.
As is evident from Fig. 12/14, the syn-
8
chronization conditions are tested for one
phase. The important parameters for
synchronization are:
|Umin| < |U| < |Umax|
9
(Voltage modulus)
∆φ < ∆φmax
(Angle difference)
10
∆f < ∆fmax
(Frequency difference) Fig. 12/6 Voltage selection for synchronization with duplicate busbar system
Using the automation functions available

in the bay control unit, it is possible
11
to connect various reference voltages
depending on the setting of a disconnec-
tor. Thus in the case of a double busbar
system, the reference voltage of the
active busbar can be automatically used
12 for synchronization (see Fig. 12/15).
Alternatively the selection of the refer-
ence voltage can also take place via relay
13
switching, if the measurement inputs are
already being used for other purposes.
14
15
Fig. 12/7 Simultaneous connection of measured values according to a two-wattmeter circuit
and synchronization

Functions
Synchronization
The bay control unit offers the option
of storing various parameter sets (up 1
to eight) for the synchronization func-
tion and of selecting one of these for
2
operation. Thus the different properties
of several circuit- breakers can be taken
into consideration. These are then used
at the appropriate time. This is relevant if
3
several circuit-breakers with e.g. different
LSP2493en.tif
response times are to be served by one
bay control unit.
The measured values can be connected
4
to the bay control unit in accordance with
Fig. 12/8 “Power System Data”, sheet for parameters of the synchronization function
Fig. 12/14 (single-phase system) or
Fig. 12/16 (two-wattmeter circuit).
The synchronization function can be
parameterized via four tabs in DIGSI.
5
LSP2496en.tif
8
Fig. 12/9 General parameters of the synchronization function
10
LSP2494en.tif
11
Fig. 12/10 Parameter page for asynchronous networks
12
13
14
LSP2495en.tif
Fig. 12/11 Parameter page for asynchronous networks

15
Communication
Communication
1 The device is not only able to communicate

to the substation control level via standard
protocol like IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103
2
or others. It is also possible to communi-
cate with other bay devices or protection
devices. Two possibilities are available.
Inter-relay-communication
3 The function “inter-relay-communication”

enables the exchange of information
directly between 6MD66 bay controller
devices. The communication is realized
4 via Port “C” of the devices, so it is inde-

pendent from the substation communica-
tion port “B”. Port “C” is equipped with a
RS485 interface. For communication over
5
longer distances, an external converter to Fig. 12/12 Typical application: 1½ circuit-breaker method
fiber-optic cable can be used. (disconnector and grounding switch not shown)
An application example for inter-relay-
communication is shown in Fig. 12/22.
6 Three 6MD66 devices are used for control

of a 1½ circuit-breaker bay. One device
is assigned to each of the three circuit-
breakers. By this means, the redundancy
7
of the primary equipment is also available
on the secondary side. Even if one
LSP2227f.tif
circuit-breaker fails, both feeders can be
supplied. Control over the entire bay is
retained, even if one bay control unit fails.
8 The three bay control units use the inter-
relay-communication for interchange of
Fig. 12/13 Connection matrix of inter-relay communication in DIGSI 4
switchgear interlocking conditions. So
the interlocking is working completely
9 independent from the substation control

level.
IEC 61850-GOOSE
10
With the communication standard
IEC 61850, a similar function like inter-
relay-communication is provided with
the “GOOSE” communication to other
11
IEC 61850-devices. Since the standard
IEC 61850 is used by nearly all SIPROTEC
devices and many devices from other
suppliers, the number of possible
communication partners is large.
12 The applications for IEC 61850-GOOSE are

quite the same as for inter-relay-commu-
nication. The most used application is the
interchange of switchgear interlocking
13 information between bay devices. GOOSE
uses the IEC 61850 substation Ethernet,
Fig. 12/14 Connection for IEC 61850-GOOSE communication
so no separate communication port is needed.The configuration

Like inter-relay-communication, GOOSE also supplies a status
is shown in Fig. 12/23. The SIPROTEC devices are connected
14
information for supervision of the communication. In case of
via optical Ethernet and grouped by voltage levels (110 kV and
interruption, the respective information is marked as “invalid”.
20 kV). The devices in the same voltage level can interchange
the substation-wide interlocking information. GOOSE uses the Therefore, non-affected information still can be used for inter-
substation Ethernet. locking, and a maximum functional availability is guaranteed.
15
Functions
Measured-value processing
Measured-value processing is imple-
mented by predefined function modules, 1
which are likewise configured using
DIGSI 4.
The transducer modules are assigned in
the DIGSI 4 assignment matrix to current
2
and voltage channels of the bay control
unit. From these input variables, they
LSP2228f.tif
form various computation variables (see
Table 12/1).
4
Fig. 12/15 DIGSI 4 Parameter view – transducer packets
The individual transducer modules can be Name of the Max. availability of Required input Calculated variables
activated in the functional scope of the transducer module transducers on the channels (= output variables)
unit and will then appear in the DIGSI 4 unit (can be set via
5
assignment matrix with the input chan- the functional scope)
nels and output variables from Table 1.
Transducer V x1 V V, f
The output variables can then be assigned
to the system interface or represented Transducer I x1 I I, f
6
in the measured value window in the
display. Transducer packet x3 V, I V, I, P, Q, S, φ,
1 phase cos φ (PF), sin φ, f
Transducer packet x1 V1, V2, V3, I1, I2, I3 V0, V1, V2, V3, V12,
V23, V31, I0, I1, I2, I3,
7
3 phase
P, Q, S, φ, cos φ (PF),
sin φ, f
Transducer packet x1 V1, V2, I1, I2 V12, V13, I2, I3, P, Q, S,

two-wattmeter circuit φ, cos φ (PF), sin φ, f
Table 12/1 Properties of measured-value processing

8
9
Sample presentation of the measured
value display.
10
11
12
13
LSP2189f.tif
Fig. 12/16
14
15
Functions
The connection of the input channels can
1
be chosen without restriction. For the
two-wattmeter circuit, the interface con-
nection should be selected in accordance
with Fig. 12/26. The two-wattmeter circuit
enables the complete calculation of a
2 three-phase system with only two voltage
and two current transformers.
Metered values
3 For internal metering, the unit can

calculate an energy metered value from
the measured current and voltage values.
If an external meter with a metering pulse
4 output is available, the bay control unit

can obtain and process metering pulses
via an indication input.
The metered values can be displayed and
5 passed on to a master unit. A distinction

is made between forward, reverse, active
Fig. 12/17 Two-wattmeter circuit (connection to bay control unit)
and reactive power (± kWh, ± kvarh).
6
Automation Indication / measured value blocking
With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface To avoid the transmission of information to the master unit dur-
(CFC, Continuous Function Chart), specific functions for the ing works on the bay, a transmission blocking can be activated.
automation of switchgear or substation. Functions are activated
7
via function keys, binary input or via communication interface. Indication filtering
Processing of internal indications or measured values is also Indications can be filtered and delayed.
possible.
Switching authorization / key-operated switch
8
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time.
The switching authorization (control authorization) (interlocked/
The filter time can be set from 0 to 24 hours in 1 ms steps. It is
non-interlocked, corresponds to key-operated S1 in the 8TK
also possible to set the filter time so that it can, if desired, be
interlock system) and the switching authority (local/remote,
retriggered.
9
corresponds to key-operated S5 for 8TK) can be preset for the
SIPROTEC 4 bay control unit using key-operated switches. The Furthermore, the hardware filter time can be taken into consid-
position of both keys is automatically evaluated by command eration in the time stamp; i.e. the time stamp of a message that
processing. The key for operation without interlocks cannot be is detected as arriving will be predated by the known, constant
removed when in the position “non-interlocked”, such that this hardware filter time. This can be set individually for every binary
10 mode of operation is immediately recognizable (see also page
12/15, Section “Switchgear interlockings”).
input in a 6MD66 bay control unit.
Every change in the key-operated switch positions is logged.
11 Chatter blocking
Chatter blocking feature evaluates whether, in a configured
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
12
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is
blocked for a certain period, so that the communication line to
the master unit will not be overloaded by disturbed inputs.
For every binary input, it is possible to set separately whether
13
the chatter blocking should be active or not. The parameters
(number of status changes, test time, etc.) can be set once per
unit.
14
15
Functions

The 6MD66 is equipped with an auto-
reclosure function (AR). The function 1
includes several operating modes:
• Interaction with an external device
for auto-reclosure via binary inputs
and binary outputs; also possible with 2
interaction via IEC 61850-GOOSE
• Control of the internal AR function by
external protection
• 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of
3
faults; different dead times are available
depending on the type of the fault
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase
4
LSP2229f.tif
faults, no reclosing for multi-phase
faults
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults
and 2-phase faults, no reclosing for
multi-phase faults.
Fig. 12/18 Parameterization of time management 5
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and
3-pole auto-reclosure for multi-phase faults Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
and 3-phase auto-reclosure for multi-phase faults
The 6MD66 incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution,
6
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure for example, due to a defective circuit breaker. The current
7
• Interaction with the internal synchro-check detection logic is phase-selective and can therefore also be used
in single-pole tripping schemes. lf the fault current is not inter-
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several or a busbar trip command will be generated. The breaker failure
other operating principles can be employed by means of the protection can be initiated by external devices via binary input
integrated programmable logic (CFC). Integration of auto-
reclosure in the feeder protection allows the line-side voltages
signals or IEC 61850 GOOSE messages.
8
to be evaluated. A number of voltage-dependent supplementary Time management
functions are thus available: The 6MD66 bay control units can, like the other units in the
• DLC
By means of dead-line-check (DLC), reclosure is effected only
SIPROTEC 4 range, be provided with the current time by a
number of different methods: 9
when the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous • Via the interface to the higher-level system control
breaker closure) (PROFIBUS DP or IEC 61850)
• ADT
The adaptive dead time (ADT) is employed only if auto-
• Via the external time synchronization interface on the rear
of the unit (various protocols such as IRIG B and DCF77 are
10
reclosure at the remote station was successful (reduction of possible)
stress on equipment).
• Via external minute impulse, assigned to a binary input
• RDT
Reduced dead time (RDT) is employed in conjunction with • From another bay control unit by means of inter-relay
communication
11
auto-reclosure where no teleprotection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension but external to the pro- • Via the internal unit clock.
12
tected line of a distance protection are switched off for rapid
Fig. 12/27 illustrates the settings that are possible on the DIGSI
auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the basis of
interface.
measurement of the return voltage from the remote station
which has not tripped whether or not to reduce the dead time.
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Output relay
1 Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz (adjustable, depending
Live contact 1 NC/NO (can be set via jumper:
Factory setting is ”Break contact”,
i.e. the contact is normally open but
on the order number)
then closes in the event of an error)
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (can be changed via plug-
2
in jumper) Number of command relays,
single pole
Rated voltage VN 100 V, 110 V, 125 V, 100 V√3, 6MD662 25, grouping in 2 groups of 4,
110 V√3 can be adjusted using 1 group of 3, 6 groups of 2 and two
parameters ungrouped relays
Power consumption
3
6MD663 35, grouping in 3 groups of 4,
at IN = 1 A < 0.1 VA 1 group of 3, 9 groups of 2 and two
at IN = 5 A < 0.5 VA ungrouped relays
Voltage inputs < 0.3 VA with 100 V
6MD664 45, grouping 4 groups of 4,
Measurement range current I Up to 1.2 times the rated current 1 group of 3, 12 groups of 2 plus two
4
Thermal loading capacity 12 A continuous, 15 A for 10 s, ungrouped relays
200 A for 1 s Switching capacity, command
Measurement range voltage V Up to 170 V (rms value) relay
Max. permitted voltage 170 V (rms value) continuous Make max. 1000 W/ VA
Break max. 30 VA
5
Transducer inputs Break (at L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA
Measurement range ± DC 24 mA Max. switching voltage 250 V
Max. permitted continuous current ± DC 250 mA Max. contact continuous current 5A
Input resistance, 10 Ω ± 1 % Max. (short-duration) current 15 A
recorded power loss at 24 mA 5.76 mW for 4 s
6 Power supply
Rated auxiliary voltages DC 24 to 48 V, DC 60 to 125 V,
Switching capacity,
live contact ON and OFF 20 W/VA
Max. switching voltage 250 V
DC 110 to 250 V
Max. contact continuous current 1 A
Permitted tolerance -20 % to +20 %
7
Max. make-time 8 ms
Permitted ripple of the rated 15 %
Max. chatter time 2.5 ms
auxiliary voltage
Max. break time 2 ms
Power consumption
Max. at DC 60 to 250 V 20 W LED
8
Max. at DC 24 to 48 V 21.5 W Number
Typical at DC 60 to 250 V 17.5 W RUN (green) 1
Typical at DC 24 to 48 V 18.5 W ERROR (red) 1
(typical = 5 relays picked up + Display (red), function can be 14
live contact active + allocated
9
LCD display illuminated +
2 interface cards plugged in) Unit design
Bridging time Housing 7XP20 For dimensions drawings,
at DC 24 and 60 V ≥ 20 ms see part 14
at DC 48 and ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms Type of protection acc. to
10 Binary inputs
Number
EN60529
in the surface-mounting
housing
IP20
6MD662 35 in the flush-mounting housing
6MD663 50 front IP51
11
6MD664 65 rear IP20
Rated voltage range DC 24 to 250 V (selectable) Weight
Pick-up value (range can be set DC 17, 73 or 154 V Flush-mounting housing,
using jumpers for every binary integrated local control
input)
12
6MD663 approx. 10.5 kg
Function (allocation) Can be assigned freely 6MD664 approx. 11 kg
Minimum voltage threshold Surface-mounting housing,
(presetting) without local control,
for rated voltage 24, 48, 60 V DC 17 V with assembly angle
13
for rated voltage 110 V DC 73 V 6MD663 approx. 12.5 kg
for rated voltage 220, 250 V DC 154 V 6MD664 approx. 13 kg
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V Detached local control approx. 2.5 kg
Current consumption, excited approx. 1.5 mA
14
for 3 ms approx. 50 mA to increase pickup
time
Permitted capacitive coupling of 220 nF
the indication inputs
Minimum impulse duration for 4.3 ms
15 message

Technical data
Electrical tests Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
1
Specifications capability
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave; 50 surges per second;
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 impulses
DIN 57435 Part 303
capability per second;
2
For further standards see specific ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s ;
tests Ri = 80 Ω
Insulation tests Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
Standards IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1 rence ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
3
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), 100 kHz
All circuits except for auxiliary IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 polarity alternating, 1 MHz, 10 and
supply, binary inputs, 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω
communication and time synchro- EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
nization interfaces
Standard EN 50081-1 (Basic specification)
Voltage test (100 % test)
inputs
DC 3.5 kV
Radio interference voltage on lines 150 kHz to 30 MHz
only auxiliary supply class B
4
IEC-CISPR 22
Voltage test (100 % test) 500 V (rms value), 50 Hz
Interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz
5
only isolated communication
IEC-CISPR 22 class B
interfaces
Surge voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative surges
6
cation and time synchronization at intervals of 5 s
interfaces, class III
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22 (product
7
standards)
DIN 57 435 Part 303
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms
IEC 60255-22-1, class III 400 pulses per s; duration 2 s
8
and DIN 57435 part 303, class III
Discharge of static electricity 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
Exposure to RF field, non- 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
modulated IEC 60255-22-3
(report), class III 9
Exposure to RF field, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated IEC 61000-4-3, class III 1 kHz
10
Exposure to RF field, pulse- 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequen-
modulated cy 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
IEC 60255-22-4, IEC 61000-4-4, 15 ms; repetition frequency 300 ms;
class IV both polarities; Ri = 50 Ω;
test duration 1 min 11
12
(SURGE),
Auxiliary supply common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
differential mode:1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF
Measurement inputs, binary common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
13
inputs differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
and relay outputs 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
Conducted RF, amplitude- 1 kHz
modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for
Magnetic field with power 3 s; 50 Hz
frequency
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV;
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
14
IEC 60255-6
15
Technical data
Mechanical dynamic tests

During operation
2 IEC 60255-21-1, class 2

IEC 60068-2-6
3
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
the 3 axes
Vibration during earthquake Sinusoidal
4
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 4 mm amplitude
1 to 8 Hz: ± 2 mm amplitude
(vertical axis)
5
(horizontal axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 0,5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
6 During transport
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
7
8
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks
each in both directions 3 axes
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of the
9 3 axes

Temperatures
10 Standards
Recommended temperature
IEC 60255-6
-5 to +55 °C 25 to 131 °F
during operation
11
Temporary permissible tempera- -20 to +70 °C -4 to 158 °F
ture limit during operation
(The legibility of the display may
be impaired above 55 °C/131 °F)
Limit temperature during storage -25 to +55 °C -13 to 131 °F
12
Limit temperature during -25 to +70 °C -13 to 158 °F
transport
Storage and transport with
standard factory packaging
Humidity
13 Permissible humidity stress

We recommend arranging the
Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
humidity; on 56 days a year up to
not exposed to direct sunlight or during operation is not permitted
14
that could cause condensation



6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Processor module with power supply, input/output modules with a total of:
6MD662 - -0 -
1
Number of inputs and outputs see
next
2
35 single-point indications, 22 1-pole single commands, page
3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact, 3 x current
4 x voltage via direct CT inputs, 2 measuring transducer inputs
1A
1 A / 150 % IN
1
2
3
1 A / 200 % IN 3
5A 5
5 A / 150 % IN
5 A / 200 % IN
6
7
4
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input 19 V2)
DC 60 V, threshold binary input 19 V2)
2
3
5
DC 110 V, threshold binary input 88 V2) 4
Unit version
For panel flush mounting, with integr. local operation, HMI, plug-in terminal (2/3-pole AMP socket)
6
D
For panel flush mounting, with integr. local operation, graphic display,
7
keyboard, screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specific default settings / function and language settings
Region DE, 50Hz, language: German, changeable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable B
Region US, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: French, changeable
C
D
8
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: Spanish, changeable E
9
System interface (on rear of unit, port B)
9
10
PROFIBUS DP Slave, electrical RS485 L 0A
PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm fiber, double ring, ST plugs 9 L 0 B
PROFIBUS DP Slave, double electrical RS485 (second module on port D) 9 L 1A
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector
Function interface (on rear of unit, port C andD)

9 L 0 S
11
No function interface 0
12
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232, port C 1
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D 3
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4 4
13
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4,
with optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D 5
14
1) The binary input thresholds can be selected in two stages by means
of jumpers. 15
1 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
6MD662 - -0 -
Full measured-value processing and display A
2
No measured-value processing and no display F
Synchronization
With synchronization A
Without synchronization F
3 Protection function
Without protection functions 0
With auto-reclosure (AR) 1
4
With circuit-breaker failure protection 2
With auto-reclosure and circuit-breaker failure protection 3
With fault recording 4
10
11
12
13
14
15

6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Processor module with power supply, input/output modules with a total of:
6MD66 - -0 -
1
Number of inputs and outputs see next page
2
50 single-point indications, 32 1-pole single commands,
3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact,
3 x current, 4 x voltage via direct CT inputs
2 measuring transducer inputs 3 3
65 single-point indications, 42 1-pole single commands,
3
3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact,
3 x current, 4 x voltage via direct CT inputs
2 measuring transducer inputs 4
1A
1 A / 150 % IN
1
2 4
1 A / 200 % IN 3
5A 5
5 A / 150 % IN
5 A / 200 % IN (for 6MD664)
6
7
5
6
Unit version
For panel surface mounting, detached operator panel, for mounting in low-voltage case,
7
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) C
For panel flush mounting, with integr. local operation, graphic display, keyboard,
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs)
For panel surface mounting, w /o operator unit, for mounting in low-voltage case,
E
8
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) F
Region-specific default settings / function and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, language: German, changeable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable
A
B
9
Region US, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable C
10
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: French, changeable D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: Spanish, changeable E
System interface (on rear of unit, port B)
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
2
3
11
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 9 L 0 B
PROFIBUS DP Slave, double electrical RS485 (second module on port D)
PROFIBUS DP Slave, double optical double ring ST (second module on port D)
9
9
L 1A
L 1 B
12
9
13
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector L 0 S
14
1) The binary input thresholds can be selected in two stages by means
of jumpers. 15
1 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Function interface (on rear of unit, port C and D)

6MD66 - -0
No function interface 0
2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D1) 3
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4 4
3
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4,
with optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D1) 5
Full measured-value processing and display A
4 No measured-value processing and no display2)
Synchronization
F
With synchronization A
5
Without synchronization F
Protection function
Without protection functions 0
With auto-reclosure (AR) incl. fault recording 1
6 With circuit-breaker failure protection (BF) incl. fault recording

With auto-reclosure (AR) and circuit-breaker failure protection (BF) incl. fault recording
2
3
Fault recording 4
7 1) Not for double PROFIBUS DP (position 11 = 9-L1A or 9-L1B).

2) Only for position 16 = 0 (without protection functions).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD662
Fig. 12/19 Module 1, indications, commands Fig. 12/20 Module 2, indications, commands 6
10
11
12
Fig. 12/21 Module 4, measuring values commands
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD662
1 or or
6 Fig. 12/22 CPU, C-CPU 2

For unit 6MD662*-****1-0AA0 and
Fig. 12/23 CPU, C-CPU 2
For unit 6MD662*-****3-0AA0
6MD662*-****2-0AA0 (DIGSI interface, optical,
(DIGSI interface, electrical, system interface optical or electrical)
7 system interface optical or electrical)
or
10
11
12
Fig. 12/24 CPU, C-CPU 2 Fig. 12/25 PU, C-CPU 2
C
For unit 6MD662*-****4-0AA0 For unit 6MD662*-****5-0AA0
13 (Inter-relay communication interface electrical,

system interface optical or electrical)
(DIGSI interface, optical,
Inter-relay communication
interface electrical,
system interface optical or electrical)
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD664
Fig. 12/26 Module 1,

indications, commands
6
10
11
12
Fig. 12/28 Module 4, Fig. 12/29 Module 5,
indications, commands measuring values, commands
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD664
1 or or or
6 Fig. 12/31 CPU, C-CPU 2

Fig. 12/32 CPU, C-CPU 2
and 6MD664*-****2-0AA0 (DIGSI interface optical,
(DIGSI interface electric, system interface optical optical or electric)
7 system interface optical optical or electric)
or
10
11
12
Fig. 12/33 PU, C-CPU 2
C Fig. 12/34 PU, C-CPU 2
C
For unit 6MD664*-****4-0AA0 For unit 6MD664*-****5-0AA0
13 (Inter-relay communication
interface electric,
system interface optical or electric)
(DIGSI interface optical,
(Inter-relay communication electric,
system interface optical or electric)
14
15
Appendix
Page
Relay characteristics 13/2
Dimension drawings 13/7
Assignment for products 13/19
Order No. index 13/20
Training 13/21
13
Appendix
Relay characteristics
Inverse-time characteristics of TOC relays
1 IEC 60255-3
Normal Very Extremely Long
ANSI/IEEE
Inverse Short Long Definite Moderately Very Extremely
inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse
Fig. 13/1 13/2 13/3 13/4 13/5 13/6 13/7 13/8 13/9 13/11 13/13
2 Relay
7SD5           
7SD610           
3
7SJ61           
7SJ62           
7SJ64           
7UM62        
4 7UT612
7UT613






















7UT63           
10
11
12
13
15

Appendix
Inverse-time overcurrent protection

characteristics according to IEC 60255 and BS142.
0.14 1.35
t= ⋅ Tp t= ⋅ Tp
(I I ) (I I ) −1
0.02
p −1 p
Fig. 13/1 Inverse Fig. 13/2 Very inverse
80 120
t= ⋅ Tp t= ⋅ Tp
(I I ) (I I ) −1
2
p −1 p
13
Fig. 13/3 Extremely inverse Fig. 13/4 Long inverse
I = current
t = tripping time
Ip = pickup setting
Tp = time multiplier setting

Appendix
Inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics
1
according to ANSI (IEEE) C37.112
6
 8.9341   0.2663 
t =  2.0938 + 0.17966 ⋅ TD t =  1.2969 + 0.03393 ⋅ TD
M −1  M −1 
7
Fig. 13/5 Inverse Fig. 13/6 Short inverse
10
11
12
13
 5.6143   0.4797 
t = + 2.18592 ⋅ TD t =  1.5625 + 0.21359 ⋅ TD
 M −1  M −1 
15
Fig. 13/7 Long inverse Fig. 13/8 Definite inverse
t = tripping time in seconds

M = current in multiples of pickup setting (I/Ip) range 0.1 to 4
TD = time dial

Appendix

 0.0103 
t =  0.02 + 0.0228 ⋅ TD 0.97 ⋅ TD
M −1  treset =
M 2 −1
Fig. 13/9 Moderately inverse Fig. 13/10 Reset moderately inverse
 3.922 
13
t =  2 + 0.0982 ⋅ TD 4.32 ⋅ TD
 M -1  treset =
M 2 −1
Fig. 13/11 Very inverse Fig. 13/12 Reset very inverse
t = tripping time in seconds

TD = time dial

Appendix
Relay characteristics, pinout of communication port
1
6
 5.64  5.82 ⋅ TD
t = 2 + 0.0243 ⋅ TD treset =
 M −1  M 2 −1
7
Fig. 13/13 Extremely inverse Fig. 13/14 Reset extremely inverse
8 t = tripping time in seconds

TD = time dial
9 Pinout of communication port
10
Port A: Port B: Port C/D
Time synchro- System interface Rear service interface or
nization protection data interface
Pin no. PC interface RS232 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS232 RS485
at front IEC 60870- IEC 60870-5-10 PROFIBUS DP Slave Modbus,
11
5-103 DNP 3.0
12 1
2
–
RxD
P24 input 24 V
P5 input 5 V
Shield (with shield ends electrically connected)
RxD – – – RxD –
3 TxD common return TxD A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) A TxD A
4 – – – – CNTR-A (TTL) RTS (TTL level) – –
13 5
6
GND
–
Shield
–
GND
–
C/C' (GND)
–
C/C' (GND)
+ 5 V voltage supply
GND1
VCC1
GND
–
C (GND)
–
(max. Load < 100 mA)
7 RTS P12 input 12 V RTS –*) –*) – RTS (RTS RS232 used)
15 8
9
CTS
–
–
Shield
CTS
–
B/B' (RxD/TxD-P)
–
A/A' (RxD/TxD-N)
–
B
–
CTS
–
B
–
*) Pin 7 also can carry the RS232 RTS signal to an RS485 interface.
Pin 7 must therefore not be connected

Appendix
Dimension drawings, reference table
Relay Flush/cubicle-mounting version Surface-mounting version Detached HMI

Page Fig. Page Fig. Page Fig.
6MD66 13/12 13/22 13/13 13/23 13/14 13/24
7SA522 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/23 - -
7SA61 13/9, 13/10, 13/11, 13/18, 13/19, 13/20, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 - -
13/12
7SA63 13/9, 13/10, 13/12 13/18, 13/19, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 - -
7SA64 - - - 13/14 13/24
7SD5 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/23 - -
7SD600 13/8 13/15 13/8, 13/9 13/16, 13/17 - -
7SD610 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7SJ61 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7SJ62 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7SJ64 13/9, 13/10, 13/12 13/18, 13/19, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 13/14 13/24
7SJ66 13/15, 13/16 13/25, 13/26 - - - -
7SS522 central unit 13/18 13/29 13/18 13/29 - -
7SS523 bay unit 13/17 13/27 13/17 13/27 - -
7SS525 13/18 13/29 - - -
7UM62 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/23 - -
7UT6 13/9, 13/10, 13/12 13/18, 13/19, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/22 - -
7VE61 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7VE63 13/10 13/19 13/13 13/23 - -
7VK610/7VK611 13/9, 13/10 13/18, 13/19 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 - -
7VU683 13/12 13/22 - - - -
13
Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8_Update 2020 13/7

Appendix
Dimension drawings in mm / inch
Dimension drawings for ¹⁄₆ × 19" housing (7XP20)
5
Side view View from the rear Panel cutout
Fig. 13/15 Housing for panel flush mounting/cubicle mounting, terminals at rear (¹⁄₆ × 19")
10
11
12 Front view Side view
Fig. 13/16 Housing for surface mounting, terminals at top and bottom (¹⁄₆ × 19")
13
15

Appendix
Dimension drawings for ¹⁄₆ × 19" housing (7XP20)
Front view Side view
Fig. 13/17 Housing for panel surface mounting, terminals on the side (¹⁄₆ × 19")
Dimension drawings for SIPROTEC 4 ⅓ x 19" housing (7XP20)
Side view Rear view Rear view Panel cutout

7SA610, 7SD61, 7SJ64 7SJ61, 7SJ62, 7UT612, 7UM611
Fig. 13/18 Housing for panel flush mounting / cubicle mounting (⅓ × 19")
13

Appendix
Dimension drawings for SIPROTEC 4
1
½ × 19" flush-mounting housings (7XP20)
5
Side view 1 Side view 2 Panel cutout
10
Rear view 1 Rear view 2 Rear view 3 Rear view 4
7SA61/63, 7UM621, 7UM623, 7SJ63, 7UM612, 6MD63 7SA522, 7SD52/53 7UT613
7SJ64
Fig. 13/19
11
½ × 19" flush-mounting housing
12
13
15

Appendix

²⁄₃ × 19" flush-mounting housings (7XP20)
Sied view Rear view Panel cutout
Fig. 13/20 ²⁄₃ × 19" flush-mounting housing for 7SA613
Rear view Panel cutout
Front view Sied view

13
Fig. 13/21 ⅓ × 19" surface-mounting housing, terminals at top and bottom

Appendix
1
� × 19" flush-mounting housings (7XP20)
5
Side view 1 Side view 2 Panel cutout
9
* Terminals M and L additionally for 7UT635 and 7SJ647 only
Rear view 2 ** Terminals H and G not for 7SJ645 and 7SJ647
7SJ63, 6MD63 Rear view 1
7SA6, 7UM622, 7SJ64, 7UT633, 7UT635
10
11
12
13
15 Rear view 3 Rear view 4

7SA522, 7SD52/53 7VU683
Fig. 13/22 � × 19" flush-mounting housing

Appendix

½ and � × 19" surface-mounting housing (7XP20)
Front view Side view

½ × 19" surface-mounting,
terminals at top and bottom housing 7XP20
Front view
� x 19" surface-mounting housing 7XP20
(without sloped FO case)
13
Fig. 13/23 ½ and � × 19" surface-mounting housing

Appendix
1
½ and � × 19" housings with detached operator panel
5
Detached operator panel (side view) Rear view Panel cutout
10
11
12
13
15
Fig. 13/24 Housing with detached or no operator panel

Appendix
13
Fig. 13/25 Dimensional Drawing of a 7SJ66 for Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size ½)

Appendix
10
11
12
13
15
Fig. 13/26 Dimensional Drawing of a 7SJ66 for Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size ⅓)

Appendix
Front view Side view Panel cutout
Fig. 13/27 7SS523 bay unit in 7XP2040-2 housing for panel flush mounting/cubicle mounting
Front view Side view View from below
Fig. 13/28 7SS523 bay unit in 7XP2040-1 housing for panel surface mounting
13

Appendix
4
Front view Side view Rear view Panel cutout
5 Fig. 13/29 7SS525 busbar and breaker failure protection unit for panel flush mounting/cubicle mounting with housing for wall mounting
9 Front view Top view
Fig. 13/30 7SS522 central unit in SIPAC subrack
10
11
12
13
15

Appendix
Assignment for products
Products applied until now Function Recommended new products

7RP72 Frequency relay 7RW80 (SIPROTEC Compact)
7SD24 Line differential relay 7SD600

7SD510/511 Line differential relay via FO 7SD610
7SD512 Line differential relay via FO 7SD5
7SA500 Distance protection 7SA6, 7SA522

7SJ41 Overcurrent relay 7SR45 (Reyrolle)

7SJ50 Overcurrent relay 7SJ80
7SJ600, 7SJ601, 7SJ602 Overcurrent relay 7SJ80
7SK52 Motor protection 7SK80 (SIPROTEC Compact)
7UT512 Transformer differential relay 7UT612

7UT513 Transformer differential relay 7UT613/7UT63
7UM51 Machine protection 7UM61/62
7SS51 Busbar protection 7SS52

7RW600 Voltage and frequency protection 7RW80
7VH80/83, 7VH60 High-impedance diff. protection 7SR23 (Reyrolle)
7SN60 Transient ground-fault relay SIPROTEC 5

7SV512 Breaker failure relay 7VK61
7VK512 Auto-reclosure and 7VK61
synchronism check relay
7XV72 Test switch 7XV75
13
7XS50 DIGSI operating program 7XS54

Appendix
Order No. index
Order No. Page
1 3PP1326
3PP1336
11/50
11/21, 11/50
4NC5225 11/50
2 6MD66
7SA522
12/5
6/59
7SA61 6/23
3
7SA63 6/24
7SA64 6/25
7SD5 7/47
4
7SD610 7/20
7SJ61 5/17
7SJ62 5/43
7SJ64 5/58
5 7SJ66 5/73
7SS52 9/13
7UM62 11/3
6 7UT612
7UT613
8/35
8/37
7UT63 8/39
7 7VE6
7VK61
11/33
10/15
7VU683 11/53
8
7XS5401 3/4
7XS5402 3/4
7XS5403 3/4
9
7XS5407 3/4
7XS5408 3/4
7XS5410 3/8
7XS5411 3/8
10 7XS5416 3/8
7XS5460 3/4
7XS5461 3/6
11 7XS5490
7XT3300
3/4
11/50
7XT3400 11/50
12 7XT7100
7XV5100
11/50
5/20, 5/48, 5/77
13
15
13/20 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8_Update 2020

Appendix
Training
Equipment reliability and availability are essential for all owners

and users. At the same time, maintenance costs need to be kept
to a minimum. The liberalization of energy markets presents
new challenges to all; maintaining and enhancing competitive
strength are among today’s most important business goals.
Investment in technical plants and human resources enables
these goals to be realized. Innovations in the technical field
confront the users with the need of establishing, maintaining
and extending their qualification and know-how. Our training
programs are tailored to meet your specific needs. With our
know-how, we can help you to keep ahead.
Our training centers offer training programs comprising an
extensive range of courses covering all the important aspects of
numerical protective relaying. Choosing our courses will simplify
your planning and ensure you of high-quality professional
instruction at a reasonable cost. It is also possible to arrange
training on your own premises thereby reducing costs for group
participation. We will jointly plan a complete training program
that matches your business goals and your particular working
context.
Each course and the corresponding training documents
are available in many languages. On the Internet at
www.siemens.com/power-academy you will find our complete
training program with details of contents, dates, costs and
contacts.
13

Legal notice
Indication of conformity Copyright
1 This product complies with the directive of

the Council of the European Communities on
Copyright © Siemens AG 2017. All rights reserved.
The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
the approximation of the laws of the Member
document, or utilization and communication of the content are
States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights, including
2
(EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model
concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage
or a design, are reserved.
limits (Low-voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
This conformity has been established by means of tests con- Registered trademarks
3 ducted by Siemens AG in accordance of the Council Directive

in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and
SIPROTEC®, DIGSI®, SIGUARD®,SIMEAS®, and SICAM® are regis-
tered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthorized use is illegal.
EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC directives, and with the standard All other designations in this document can be trademarks
EN 60255-5 for the low-voltage directive. whose use by third parties for their own purposes can infringe
4 The product is conforming to the international standards of

the series IEC 60255 and the German regulation of DIN 57435
the rights of the owner.
part 303 (VDE 0435 part 303). Further standards are ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.
5 The device has been designed and produced for industrial use.
Disclaimer of liability
6
The content of this document has been compiled for information
purposes only. Although Siemens AG has made best efforts to
keep the document as precise and up-to-date as possible, Sie-
mens AG shall not assume any liability for defects and damage
which result through use of the information contained herein.
7 This content does not form part of a contract or of business

relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agreements.
8 Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document from time

to time.
Document version: 08 / 8.1
Release status: 09.2020
10
11
12
13
15

Published by
Siemens AG 2017
Energy Management Division
Digital Grid
Automation Products
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nuremberg, germany
For more information,

please contact our
Customer Support Center.
Tel.: +49 180 524 7000
Fax: +49 180 524 2471
(Charges depending on provider)
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
© 2016 Siemens. Subject to changes and errors. For all products using security features of OpenSSL, the
The information given in this document only contains following shall apply:
general descriptions and/or performance features which
may not always specifically reflect those described, or This product includes software developed by the
which may undergo modification in the course of further OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
development of the products. The requested performance (http://www.openssl.org/). This product includes
features are binding only when they are expressly agreed cryptographic software written by Eric Young
upon in the concluded contract. (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). This product
Article No. IC1000-K4400-A101-A8-7600 includes software developed by Bodo Moeller.
Not printed, only pdf
siemens.com/protection
KG 0317

Siprotec 4 Catalog en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siprotec 4 Catalog en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Protection, control, measurement, and automation functions

Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8 / 8.1

Selection guide SIPROTEC

Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals

Overview of the Documentation

SIPROTEC 4 Catalog: Accessories Catalog:

Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle: Reyrolle Catalogs:

SIPROTEC Compact Catalog: Manuals:

SIPROTEC 4 1. Product Selection

Invalid: Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8 and No. 7 4. Communication

Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8.1 1

Type Description Page

DIGSI 4 Operating software for SIPROTEC 4 und Compact 3/3

6MD66 High-voltage bay control unit 12/3

7SA522 Distance protection relay for transmission lines 6/39

7SA6 Distance protection relay for all voltage levels 6/3

7SD52/53 Multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay 7/25

7SD61 Differential protection relay for 2 line ends 7/3

7SJ61 Multifunction protection relay 5/3

7SJ62 Multifunction protection relay 5/25

7SJ64 Multifunction protection relay with synchronization 5/53

7SJ66 Multifunction protection relay with local control 5/87

7SS52 Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection 9/3

7UM62 Multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay 11/3

7VE6 Multifunction paralleling device 11/33

7VK61 Breaker management relay 10/3

7VU683 High Speed Busbar Transfer 11/53

2 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8.1

Device application Distance Line

27TN/59TN Stator ground fault 3rd harmonics V0<,>(3.Harm.) – – – – – –

59 Overvoltage protection V>

= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available

Table continued on next page

Device application Distance Line

9 External trip initiation

11 Circuit breaker test

= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available

SIPROTEC Device Series 2/3

Typical protection schemes 2/16

Solutions for today’s and future power supply systems –

Fig. 2/2 SIPROTEC – Pioneer over generations

SIPROTEC Compact – Maximum protection-minimum space

1 Perfect protection, smallest space reliable and ﬂexible protection

4 The SIPROTEC Compact series is based on millions of operational

6 and reliable recording of input signals)

9 electrical Ethernet rings

15 Fig. 2/5 Feeder protection relay SIPROTEC with HMI

2/4 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8

SIPROTEC 5 – the new benchmark for protection,

Fig. 2/8 Application in the high-voltage system

SIPROTEC 4 – the proven, reliable and future-proof

9 and integrated CFC.

15 Fig. 2/11 SIPROTEC 4 in power plant application

2/6 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8

To fulﬁll vital protection redundancy requirements, only those Measuring included

Serial link to station – or personal computer 11

. 3900 Breaker failure

7 may cause relay operation

8 SIPROTEC relays are available with a variety of protective

9 The question as to whether separate or combined relays should

for protection, monitoring and control is becoming more com-

11 Relays with protection functions only and relays with combined

12 and thus contribute to a considerable reduction in space and

I>>, I >, t > I2 >, t